View/Open - Digitised Collections

Transcription

Library Digitised Collections
Author/s:
University of Melbourne
Title:
University of Melbourne Calendar 1938
Date:
1938
Persistent Link:
http://hdl.handle.net/11343/23407
File Description:
08_Details and Announcements
Terms and Conditions:
Terms and Conditions: Copyright in works deposited in the University of Melbourne Calendar
Collection is retained by the copyright owner. The work may not be altered without
permission from the copyright owner. Readers may only, download, print, and save electronic
copies of whole works for their own personal non-commercial use. Any use that exceeds
these limits requires permission from the copyright owner. Attribution is essential when
quoting or paraphrasing from these works.
Terms and Conditions:
To request permission to adapt, modify or use the works outside of the limits of these terms
and conditions, please complete the permission request form at:
http://www.unimelb.edu.au/copyright/information/fastfind/externalrequest.html
DETAILS OF SUBJECTS F O E T H E
SCHOOL
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION. DECEMBER,
1938
AGRICULTURAL SCIENCE—
Introductory Note.—The focus of attention ot the
students sliould be directed towards the biology of
plants connected with agriculture, with special reference to Victoria. . On the botanical side morphology
must be taught as a groundwork, but the stress should
be laid firstly on tlio functions of plant organs, and secondly
on the influence which conditions of climate and soil
have on the development of the plants concerned.
In
thia respect teachers should bear in mind the importance of inculcating a broad basal knowledge, and of
using local conditions us illustrations of t h a t knowledge
and also as special cases where circumstances a r e exceptional. Agricultural experience in any district is
very prolific ot such instances; the trained teacher can
use them with considerable effect.
Similarly the soil should be looked a t as the medium
on which plants grow.
Cultivation methods and
manurial treatments are therefore to be regarded chiefly
as the means by which weeds are eliminated, and the
soil conditions suitable for each crop are produced. In
this way tho study of agricultural implements and their
use has a definite value, and local deviations from the
normal practice become interesting rather than harassing.
This syllabus is intended to indicate the scope of tho
work, but not the order in which the topics are to be
treated throughout tho course. The proper method
of teaching agriculture includes: —
(a) Instruction in tho fundamental principles of
agriculture.
(b) Indoor experiments illustrating the principles.
(c) Outdoor work in the school agricultural plots
or garden, and, where practicable, on t h e
school farm.
(d) Excursions to neighbouring farms, agricultural
shows and factories,
(o) Tho compilation ot records of the experimental
work and excursions.
gOg
DETAILS OF SUBJECTS,
I.
1038
T H E SOIL.
Note.—As far as possible the following details should
be worked out by the student himself, or as class
demonstrations, experiments being recorded in a practical book.
1. Rock Weathering and soil formation.
2. Composition of soils; mineral matter, organic
matter, water, gases, and micro-organisms.
Qualitative separation of solid constituents.
Classification of soils according to these (e.g.
sand, silt, clay, loam, peat and marl). Elementary knowledge of importance and function of these constituents in relation to fertility of the soils (including nitrification of
humus and nitrogen fixation in legumes).
3. Manurial requirements of soils. The sources of
supply and the use of artificial fertilisers.
The chief classes of these — nitrogenous,
phosphatic, and potassic. The influence of
each class on plant growth.
4. Farmyard manure. Composition; storage and
distribution; effects on the soil.
5. Green manures. Their effects on the soil, and
their use for certain classes ot crop. Considerations governing their use.
6. Lime in its various forms; its sources and its
action on soils. Gypsum; its sources and
its action on soils.
7. Temperature of the soil and factors affecting it.
II.
T H B PLANT.
1. Tho seed; structure of broad bean and of maize;
reserve of plant food in seeds; tests for
starch and fats. Germination of seeds; conditions necessary for germination; germinating capacity and speed of germination; res
piration.
Limiting temperatures for germination and plant growth—a general knowledge only as affecting seasons for the planting and growth of crops in various climates.
Effect of planting seeds at various depths.
8.
(a) Boot • systems; The structure and function of the root; Root h a i r s ; Osmosis.
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION.
3.
g27
(b) The external morphology of stems including such specialised types as rhizomes,
runners, bulbs, tubers and those of climbing plants. Buds; tillering. The functions of the stem in relation to the movement of materials in plants.
(c) The structure and functions of t h e leaf;
Photosynthesis, Beepdration and Transpiration.
(d) The organisation of flowers and the structure and functions of their parts. Pollination, fertilisation. The development
of seeds and fruits.
Lite histories, including an elementary knowledge of the morphology and biology of the
following plants: —
(a) Gnamineae; wheat, oafs, maize,
ryegrass.
(b) Leguminoscae; pea or bean, lucerne, a
perennial and an annual clover.
(c) The Potato.
(d) Six common weeds of the district, with
special reference to the factors regulating
their prevalence and control.
HI.
GENERAL.
1. Climate. Factors determining temperature and
rainfall. The climatic zones of Victoria.
The distribution of the chief primary industries of the State. The influence of climate,'
soil and geographic features thereon.
2. Objects and methods of cultivation, drainage,
and irrigation, with special reference to the
crops mentioned in Section I I (3).
3. Crop rotation. The principles on which it rests
and the benefits which follow it. Types of
rotation.
A practical note-book must be kept by each candidate. This should contain at least twenty records of
observations, experiments or field excursions.
Text Books:—
Agriculture (Oonnell and Hadfield).
Nature in Farming (Paterson).
For reference:
Tapp—Elementary Botany (Australian Edition).
P28
DETAILS OF SUBJEOTS, 193S.
ALGEBRA—
(The course iu Algebra presupposes a knowledge of
the course in Arithmetic. Questions involving incidental arithmetic, or entirely arithmetical, may be set, but
not on " commercial " topics, such as stocks and
shares or discount.)
The expression of an arithmetical generalisation in
a formula.
Easy questions on the simplification of
rational algebraic expressions. The factorisation of
ax2 + 6xy + ci/2 (by inspection when a h e have suitable
numerical values), x3±i/3, x * ± v * and of expressions
based simply upon these. The solution, of linear and
quadratic equations in one variable and of simultaneous equations, of which not more than one is quadratic, in two variables (numerical coefficients). Simple
cases of linear equations in one or two variables with
literal coefficients, and of the transformation of formulae (change of the subject of a formula). The manipulation of expressions involving simple surds.
Elementary treatment of positive and negative integral indices, so far as necessary for their intelligent use.
(Book-work will not be asked in the examination.)
An introduction to the study ot the functional dependence of two variables, and its representation by
means of tables of corresponding values (Statistics),
graphs, and formulae—based on examples from real
life (e.g. vital, economic, sporting statistics). Physios,
etc.; in particular examples leading to formulae of the
forms
y = a x , y = ax + b, y = a j x , y = ax%, v = o/*4Simple problems of the types: (1) finding the value of
a from a given pair of corresponding values of x and y
(or of a and b from two such pairs), and the nee of
the formula so determined in finding other pairs of
corresponding values; (2) finding a formula to fit a
given table of values; (3) graphical fitting of a formula of the form -i/ = n« +b to a table of values of x.
, (/ affected by small errors of observation. (The scope
of the work intended in this Section is t h a t of Godfrey
end Siddone, Elementary Algebra, Chap. 16, or Durell,
A New Algebra for Schools, P a r t ELI, pp. 21-33.)
g29
The solution of equations by the intersection of
graphs. The general shape ot the graphs of relations
of the form
nz + bl/ + c = 0, y = ax% + bx + c, y = a/x, cr.2.)-j/2 = a2
(numerical coefficients).
Notes.—(1) The formal work in Algebra should be
introduced and developed as far as possible in connection with practical applications.
The field to bo
covered in such applications is that of the ordinary
text-books, such aa is proper to a good general education. Oandidates will be expected to exercise commonsense in the degree of accuracy to which they give the
answers to problems.
(2) Kaye aud Laby's four-figure tables of logarithms,
etc., will be provided in tho examination.
(3) The intended standard of this Syllabus is about
that of the relevant portions' of Godfrey and Siddons,
Elementary Algebra, Vols. I, I I , or Durell, A New
Algebra for Schools, P a r t s I - I I I . Either of these books
would form a suitable and sufficient text-book, but their
use is not presci'ibed.*
ANIMAL BIOLOGY—
This syllabus presupposes a knowledge of Chemistry
and Physics sufficient for an understanding of the subject matter of the syllabus.
1. Frog.—External features; the alimentary canal,
the circulatory system (in main outline only),
the excretory, respiratory and nervous systems (not cranial nerves).
2. Fish.—The respiratory organs and associated
blood-vessels, including the heart.
3. Man.—General anatomy of the alimentary, circulatory, excretory, respiratory and nervous
systems, excluding the sense organs.
Eiementary anatomy of joints and muscles sufficient to explain the mechanical principles
of limb movements.
* Godfrey & Siddons will shortly be superseded by a completely rewritten work by one of the same Authors.
(J30
DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1938
4. The Cell in the Protozoan and Metazoan. Differentiation of cells and division of labour.
The organism as a whole.
5. The principles of metabolism
and
general
physiology, including growth, repair, sources
of energy, work performed, animal heat,
carbohydrates, fats
and
proteins.
The
nature of enzyme action.
Physical
and
chemical characters of food.
Principles of
dietetics and cooking. Digestion and absorption.
Circulation, excretion,
respiration.
Response to stimulus.
Outline of the function of tho nervous system.
6. The histology necessary for the preceding section.
7. Practical Exercises.
All candidates must submit for examination their
laboratory note-books (see general note in Handbook on
laboratory note-books).
The note-books must give evidence t h a t candidates
have learnt either by actual dissection or by demonstration:—
ial the main macroscopic features of the alimentary,
circulatory, excretory, respiratory and nervous systems of the Frog. If desired, the
circulatory system may be demonstrated on
the mammal instead;
(b) the respiratory organs and associated blood
vessels (including the heart) of a fish;
(c) the main organs bf the thorax (including the
dissection of the heart), and the abdominal
organs in situ, of a mammal;
(d) some form of Protozoan, preferably living;
(e) the microscopic structure of blood, frog's skin
(in surface view), mammalian ekin (in section), intestine (in transverse section) ;
(f) simple test-tube experiments with saliva.
Books recommended: —
Text Books.
Buchanan: Elements of Animal Morphology (2nd
Bdition).
Foster and Shore: Physiology for Beginners (in
part).
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION,
g3J
Books for Reference.
Haldane and Huxley: Animal Biology.
Bainbridge and Menzies: Essentials of Physiology.
Cullie and Bond: The Body and Its Health.
ARITHMETIC.
The ordinary scliool course in arithmetic, including:
Addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, factors, fractions, decimals, square root.
British and metric systems of measurement. Mensuration of areas and volumes of rectangular figures, of
the circumference and area of a circle, of the surfacearea and- volume of the circular cylinder and sphere.
Ratio (percentage). Proportion direct and inverse,
simple and compound. Simple applications: profit and
loss, simple interest, interest and amount a t compound
interest, rates and taxes, trade discounts and commissions, stocks and shares.
Easy graphical records, and their use.
The use of four-figure tables of logarithms, squares,
eto.
Notes-—(1) A knowledge of recurring decimals will
not be required.
(2) Questions asking specifically for contracted multiplication, etc., will not be set, b u t questions may be
set involving the ability to make a rough estimate or
check of an answer and to give answers correct t o a
stated number of significant figures.
(3) Questions on the theory ot logarithms will not
be set.
(4) Kaye and Laby'e four-figure tables of logarithms,
etc., will be supplied in the examination.
(6) The intended standard of this syllabus is about
t h e same as t h a t of the syllabus i t supersedes. Questions may, as in the past, be set demanding an accuracy not attainable by use of four-figure tables.
BOTANY—
The root, shoot and leaf of some of the commoner
trees, shrubs, grasses, garden herbs and)
weeds.
Types of leaf and their arrangement.
€32
DETAILS OP SUBJECTS,
193S.
Buds, scale leaves.
Types of inflorescence; bracts, bracteoles and floral
leaves:
The stamen and types of androecium.
The carpel and types of gynoecium.
Plaoentation and types of ovary.
Hypogyny,
. perigyny and cpigyny.
Types of flower.
How floral diagrams, floral formulae and vertical
sections are made.
Pollination and fertilization.
F r u i t and seed, formation of, types of, and dispersal of.
Germination and types of seedlings.
Formation,
importance, character and types of soil.
E a r t h worms and humus.
Types of root systems. Root hairs, root cap and
cork (in old roots). Osmosis and absorption.
Root pressure, conduction of water, wood
vessels.
Growth. Influence of moisture, temperature, soil
and light on growth. Etiolation.
Transpiration and conditions affecting it.
Stomata and lenticels.
The essential constituents of a plant's food.
Photosynthesis and chlorophyll.
Respiration (aerobic only).
Food storage materials and food storage organs.
Special forms of nutrition.
Parasites (Mistletoe and Dodder); insectivorous plants, (Drosera); saprophytes (Mucor, etc.). Spread of
Mucor by spores (otherwise the reproduction
of Mucor is not required).
Relation of plant to its environment.
Water,
swamp, sand, heath, woodland and pasture
plants,
forest trees.
P l a n t communities.
Competition for light, leaf movement, leaf
mosaics and climbing plants.
Study of deciduous trees to show seasonal rhythm,
periodic rhythm, and life rhythm.
Leaffall.
Pruning, grafting, and healing of wounds.
533
Types of Flower.—The following is a suggested list of
plants for study, and will vary according to t h e district. The plants grouped under each particular type
are interchangeable.
In the practical examination plants or parts of
plants may be given which are either on this list or
are closely nllied. A distinction sliould be made between
native and introduced plants. See Flora of Victoria,
.Ewart.
Lily type—Lily (Lili-um), Early Nancy (Anguillaria). Milkmaids (Burcliardia), Bulbine.
Iris type—Iris, Onion Grass (Romulea).
Grass type—Brome Grass (Bromus), Cocksfoot (paotylis), Buffalo Grass (Stenotaphrum), Wheat
(Triticnm), Barley (Hordeu.m), Oats (Avena).
Hakea type—Needle bush (Hakea), Grevillea, Bank,
sia.
Violet type—Violet or Pansy (Viola).
Buttercup tvpe—Buttercup (Ranunculus), Columbine
(Aquilcgia).
Poppy type—Poppy (Pa paver).
Wallflower type—Wadlrlower (Chiieranthus), Stock
(Matthiola).
Pea type—Broom (Cytisus), Clover (Trifolium), Burr
Clover (Medioago), Darling Pea (Swainsona),
Sweet Pea (Latnyrus), Vetch (Vicia), Kidney
Oean (Phascolus).
Wattle type—Wattle (Acacia).
Rosaceous type—Rose (Rosa), Blackberry (Rubus),
Plum or Cherry (Primus), Apple or Pear
(Pyrus).
" G u m " type—(Eucalyptus, Tea Tree (Leptospernni.m).
Heath type—Heath (Epacris).
Potato type—Potato or Kangaroo Apple (Solanum).
Petunia type—Petunia.
Bilabiate type - S n a p d r a g o n (Antirrhinum), Toad
ilax (Linaria), Salvia, Prostanthcra.
Daisv type—Cape Weed (Cryptostemma) Sunflower
(Hclianthiis).
Dandelion type—Dandelion (Taraxacum), Groundsel (Souccio), Flat Weed (Hypochoeris).
Thistle tvy-e-r-Carduus or Centaurca.
g;^4
DETAILS OP SUBJECTS, 1938
Books recommended for study a n d reference;
For Study :
Botany. A Junior Book for Schools. Yapp^.
Australian Edition.
For Reference :
Elementary 'Botany. Ewart.
Practical Plant Ecology.
Tansley.
Flora of Victoria. Ewart.
Introduction to P l a n t Physiology. W. 0-.
James.
PRACTICAL WORK.
Every candidate in this subject must have carried'
out a course of practical work in a laboratory which
has been approved after inspection by inspectors
appointed by the Schools Board. This course must include at least fifteen suitable experiments reasonably
distributed over the above syllabus, and some of the
experiments must be the independent work of the candidate.
A candidate whose practical work has been carried
out in a laboratory which has not been inspected may,.
on application being made, bo permitted by the Schools
Board to submit his practical notebook for examination
with his written paper.
This notebook must be certified
b y t h e candidate's Headmaster and by bis teacher as being
the record of the candidate's independent work.
The Practical Work must show that the candidate haa
(a) Obtained a practical acquaintance with the
general form of the plant and the structure
of the flower and the fruit of at least one
of each of the groups of plants numbered 1
to 21 above or of allied forms, including the
microscopic structure of stomata, two types
of pollen grains, and three types of wood
(b) Performed or seen performed at
least 15experiments in plant physiology (see below),
illustrating
the
following:—Elements
of
Plant
Nutrition (by water
culture
or
otherwise). Root absorption. Rise of sap.
Transpiration, Carbon-dioxide
assimilation.
Influence of Light on Photosynthesis, Respiration, Germination and effect of varying;
635
conditions on germination.
Growth
and
growth movements (geotropism, heliotropism,
nutation). Movements of adult parts (pulvini,
etc.), and non-vital movements (swelling of
seeds, etc.).
(e) Attended at, aud described, at least two field
excursions illustrating different native plant
communities in addition to garden and plot
work.
The Notes should distinguish between those which are
the result of observations of demonstrations and experiments by the teacher and those which are the record of
candidates' own dissections and experiments.
Experiments suggested in addition to those given for
Sub-Intermediate.
Growth of Plants in Water Cultures—Lowson,§ p .
163, Expts. 8, 9, 10.
Osmosis—Lowson, p. 170,
p. 174, Expt. 16.
„
Conduction in Plants—Lowson, p. 177, E x p t . 18.
(Examine transverse sections of stem and
root tested under microscope).
Capillarity—*Yapp, p. 45, Expt. 11.
Root Pressure—Darwin and Acton.f Expt. 88;
Lowson, p. 179, Expt. 20.
Transpiration—Darwin and Acton, Expts. 92 and
113: Lowson, p. 184, Expt. 29.
Carbon Assimilation—
\
Chlorophyll necessary, Darwin and Aoton,
Expt. 26; Lowson, p. 187, Expt. 32.
Light necessary, Darwin and Acton, Expt. 28;
Lowson, p. 188, Expt. 34; ' Y a p p , p. 58,
Expt. 16.
Carbon dioxide necessary— # Yopp, p. 59, E x p t .
20.
Tests for food, materials in seeds. Oil and Starch,
and microscopic examination of starch and
aleurone grains.
Respiration—Darwin and Acton, Expt. 2.
Germination of Seeds—*Yapp, chapters H I . , I V . ,
and V.
Movement, Geotropism, eto.—*Yapp, chapter X V .
Fertilization— # Yapp, p. 151, Expt. 31.
•Australian Edition. §1929 edition. fl816 edition.
636
DETAILS OF SUBJEOTS, 1938
Experiments suggested for Sub-Intermediate:):—
Preparation and properties of Oxygen.
Preparation and properties of Carbon dioxide.
Study of common salt, ammonium sulphate.
Acids and alkalies.
Soil—Yapp, Expt. 9, (a.) (b) and (c), p. 44.
Transpiration—Yapp, Expt. 13, p. 4S.
Conduction—Yapp, Expt. 12, p. 47.
Chlorophyll. Extraction—Darwin and Acton, p . 60..
Testing green leaf for starch—Yapp, p. 58.
Conditions necessary for the formation of Chlorophyll—Darwin and Acton, Expts. 65 and 66.
Respiration—Yapp, p. 33, Expt. 4, and p. 82, Expt.
22.
Heat given out by germinating seeds—Yapp, p . 83,.
Expt. 23.
B R I T I S H HISTORiY AND CIVICS—
1. Civics (sec the syllabus in the course of School
Study).
2. British History—
One of the following:
(a) British History from 1783 to 1914, together with some aspects of Australian
History.
(b) Development of the British Empire»
(especially w-ith regard to the Dominions and British India).
To obtain a pass a candidate must satisfy the examiners on both parts of the paper.
I t is suggested t h a t work in 2a (British History from
1783-1914) might deal with material outlined in t h e following paragraphs:
1. A view of England in the early part of t h e
period. General description.
The people:
their numbers, and their distribution between
country and town, North and South. The
{These experiments have been taken from Physiology ot Plants,
Darwin and Acton, 1916 edition; and Botany, Tapp. Experiments
for the Intermediate are tnken from the same sources, and alsofrom Text-book of Botany, Lowson, 1929.
2.
3.
4.
5.
(537
beginnings of the Enclosure Movement and
the Agrarian Revolution, and of the Industrial Revolution.
Social effects.
Efficient
farming, and the feeding of a growing town
population.
Industrial
and
commercial
growth. The drift to pauperism in town and
country. Labour problems.
The shift of
population. Conditions of life in factory
towns, and of work, in factories and mines.
The rapid growth of population in the
period of the industrial and agrarian changes.
Why? Nourishment, medicine and hospitals,
public and private hygiene.
Government at this time. The unrefonned
parliament and the justice of peace. Tho
younger P i t t in this setting.
Attempts to deal with social problems.
The Specnhamland system. Early humanitarian movements. Howard.
The French Revolution and the Wars with
Prance.
Nelson.
Wellington. The peace.
.Effects of the Revolution and tho Wars on
England. Particularly, the influence, of the
Revolution on the Government's treatment ot
political and social reform movements; and
the influence of t h e wars and the Continental
System on English prosperity. Labour agitation in the late war years.
The condition of England after the Wars. Corn
Laws.
Pear and repression.
Pcterloo.
Cobbett's writings.
The era of reform. Slavery and the slave-trade.
Peel and the criminal law. The New Poor
Law.
Parliamentary
reform
(1832-1911).
Chartism. The Factory Acts. Trade unionism. Peel, Gladstone, and frcetrade.
Victorian England. The Groat Exhibition of
1851. Material progress—steam navigation,
railways, penny postage, telegraphs.
Improvement in
public health after
the
cholera epidemic of 1831, and in medical
knowledge and service.
Queen Victoria.
£38
Prosperity aud confidence. Crimean War,
without detail. England's commercial and
industrial growth in relation with Imperial
policy. Palmcrston, Disraeli and Gladstone.
England in Egypt, in outline.
6. Ireland. Causes of Irish discontent, 1732-1800.
The Union. Daniel O'Connell and Catholic
Emancipation. The Famine. Home Rule and
the land question.
7. The main political problems of the 20th century—Labour, Imperial Preference, Ireland,
tho Entente Cordiale, and the armaments
race.
8. I t is suggested that much of the Australian
History contained in this course might be
. studied against the British background; e.g.,
the settlement of the colonies against the
background of British economic conditions,
the rising population, pauperism, the penal
code, the suppression of political agitation,
and the Napoleonic Wars.
The following
topics in Australian History are suggested
for outline study in the British History (2a)
course—Early settlements, particularly Sydney, Melbourne and Adelaide. Transportation.
Importance of the gold discoveries.
Chartism in Australia. Growth of Responsible Government. Development of industry,
primary and secondary. The federation movement in Australia.
9. Generally, the connection of British History
with developments in t h e colonies should be
noted. The following topics might be treated
in outline:
(a) India. P i t t ' s India Act. The Mutiny:
its causes and resulte.
(b) Canada.
1837 rebellions.
Durham's
report. Federation.
(c) South Africa. The Groat Trek.
The
First Boer War. Effects of the Gold
Discoveries.
The Second Boer War.
The Union.
Note.—Various personalities are suggested in thia
outline. Apart from these, much of the course can be
most vividly presented in relation with persons, like
Cobbett, Dickens, Thackeray, Browning.
(J ^ 9
CHEMISTRY—
The simpler physios and chemistry of the atmosphere
and its two chief constituent gases.
Examples of chemical change as opposed to physical
change. Combination and decomposition.
The chemistry ot combustion. Conservation of mass
Common fuels and their products.
The three states of aggregation of matter and t h e
transition from one state to another, as illustrated by
water. The simple chemistry of water and of its elements.
Water as a solvent for solids and gases and the simple phenomena of solution, such as crystallisation, saturation, and
super-saturation.
The chemistry of carbonate of lime, lime, calcium, carbonic acid (carbon dioxide), carbonic oxide (carbon monoxide), carbon (charcoal, graphite, and diamond); of common salt, chlorine, hydrochloric acid, sodium, caustic soda,
and the sodium carbonates; of sulphuric acid, sulphurous
acid, hydrogen sulphide, sulphur, and the sodium sul phates;
of magnesium, magnesia, and magnesium carbonate; of
nitre, nitric acid, the oxides of nitrogen; ammonia, and
ammonium chloride, sulphate, and nitrate.
Acids, bases, normal and acid salts. Double decomposition. Basic and acidic oxides.
The fundamental chemical laws of definite proportions,
multiple proportions, equivalents, and reacting gaseous
volumes, as illustrated by a practical study of the above.
The laws of Boyle and Charles. The density of gases.
The general characteristics of mixtures, compounds and
elements (metallic and non-metallic), allotropio modifications.
'I'he general scope ot the work and the mode ot treatment may be gauged from: Donington's: " A Class Book
ot Chemistry," Parts I. aud II., or Jamieson's "Junior
Chemistry."
PRACTICAL WORK.
Every candidate in this subject must have carried out
a course of practical work in a laboratory which has
been approved after inspection by inspectors appointed
by the Schools Board. This course must comprise at leas
640
DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1938.
twenty suitable experiments reasonably distributed over
the above syllabus, and the experiments mnst be the indipeudent work of the candidate.
A candidate whose practical work haa been carried
out in a laboratory which has not been inspected may
on application being made, be permitted by the Schools
with his written paper. This notebook must be certified
by the candidate's Headmaster aud by his Teacher as
being the record of the candidate's independent work.
COMMERCIAL P R I N C I P L E S AND PRACTICE—
Book-keeping .-—Double Entry—Books and accounts
used—Entering—Posting—Balancing.
Reconciliation Statements—Extracting Trading and
Profit and Loss Accounts and Balance Sheets
from
trial
Balances—simple
Consignment
Accounts—Provisions for Doubtful Debts and
Depreciation—Adjustments required at balancing.
Correspondence.-—Practice in writing letters and documents connected with Trading.
General;—General office routine, including filing
systems.
Description of a simple card system and of
loose leaf books.
Explanation of Commercial terms and abbreviations.
Example of a simple telegraphic code.
Two papers will be set, the first dealing with Practical
Book-keeping and the second with the theory ot accounts
Correspondence aud General.
DOMESTIC SCIENCE—
I t is assumed t h a t candidates before starting this
course have completed such a coarse of general science,
as indicated in course of study in general science, in
the Handbook, page 143, course (A).
Text Books: —
General Science, by Caldwell and Eikenberry.
Practical Science for Girls, by Evelyn E. J a r dine.
541
Section A-—BiologyAn elementary knowledge of the following: —
Germination of a broad b e a n ; nutrition of t h e
green plant.
Yeasts and moulds. Fermentation.
Nature of
ferments.
Principal ferments at work in everyday life—
e.g., in bread-making.
Bacteria.
Occurrence and characteristics.
Principles of bacteriological cleanliness.
Life history of fly.
Section B — A n a t o m y ond Physiology.
(a) M a n : The organs and processes of nutrition, including assimilation.
The organs and processes of respiration, circulation, excretion.
The skin.
Animal heat.
(as treated in Foster and Shore)
Section C-—The Chemistry of Foods and DieteticsCarbohydrates, fats, proteins, mineral matter, vitamines and water. The foods in which each
preponderates.
Elementary general knowledge of articles of
food and beverages (as in text-book).
Principles of feeding. Mixed diet. Food requirements.
Effect of heat on food. Objects of cooking.
Practical knowledge of the general principles involved in Boiling, Stewing, Roasting, Frying,.
Baking and Steaming.
Cooking—
Simple Soups.
Fish, Meat, Vegetables, Puddings. Pastry (suet
and short crust).
Plain cakes. Eggs and Cereals.
Comparative value of different forms of food.
Arranging meals.
Composition of milk.
642
DETAILS OF SUBJEOTS, 1938.
Section B-—Elementary Hygiene.
(a) Household Hygiene—
Sanitation.
Situation, construction, warming, lighting, heating and cooling of house.
Dangers of flies and mosquitoes.
Water. Sources and modes of supply. Impurities and means of purification.
Air. Impurities and ventilation.
Sterilisation.
<b) Personal Hygiene—
Necessity of right exercise and of rest.
Cleanliness.
Clothing.
Prevention of infectious diseases.
Text Book: —
Domestic Hygiene, First Stage, Lyster.
Teachers' reference:
Economics of Modern Cookery, by M. M. M»lloch, published by Macmillan and Co.
Practical Work.
Every candidate in this subject must have carried ont a
course of practical work in a School which has been
approved after inspection by inspectors appointed by the
Schools Board. This course must comprise suitable experiments reasonably distributed over the above syllabus, and
the experiments must be the independent work of the
•candidate.
A candidate whose practical work has been carried out
in a School which has not been inspected may, on application being made, be permitted by the Schools Board to
submit his practical notebook for examination with his
written paper. This notebook must be certified by the
•candidate's Headmaster and by his Teacher as being the
record of the candidate's independent work.
Practical Exercises.
Laboratory note-books (see general note in Handbook on
Laboratory note-books). The note-book must
give
(J43
evidence t h a t candidates have performed at least 25
experiments.
Suggestions as to experiments which would be suitable for the required laboratory exercises. I t must be
understood t h a t this list is suggestive only, and not in
any way compulsory.
(1) Typical Yeasts and Moulds grown in various
media and examined under microscope.
(2) Conditions giving best growths of yeasts and
maximum yield of gas.
(3) Examinations of Fly through magnifying glass.
(4) Growth and nutrition of the green plant.
(5) Simple experiments, showing convection currents
as applied to ventilation. Also conductivity
of water and air, and variations in radiation
of heat according to surface.
(6) Examinations of filter to show material removed from water.
Examination of same
through microscope.
(7) Examination of different samples of tea after
infusion.
Comparison
of
qualities
by
amount of stalk, size of leaf, etc. Test of
coffee pure and adulterated by chicory.
(8) Simple test tube experiments on digestion and
respiration.
(9) Practical exercises in Cookery as prescribed in
Section C.
N.B.—It is recommended t h a t 3/5th of the time
available should be devoted to practical work, minimum
time 5 periods per week.
DRAWING—
Oandidates must take four parts, and a for a pass
must pass in three parts, and in the remaining part
must satisfy the examiners t h a t they have some knowledge thereof.
P A R T I.—Drawing from Models and Objects.
Candidates will be required to draw a group of not
more than two models or objects or both combined.
The drawing may be in outline, or in very simple light
and shade, and must be executed with a lead pencil.
Time—1} hours.
^44
PART II.—History and Appreciation of Art.
Questions on the history and appreciation of Art of
the following periods and subjects: —
Grecian—Pheidias and the Parthenon.
Medieval—The cathedral builders: Early English
Gothic (Salisbury
Cathedral);
Decorated
Gothic (Exeter Cathedral);
Perpendicular
Gothic (Henry V I I . Chapel), Westminster
Abbey.
Painting and Sculpture—
I t a l i a n : Raphael, Michelangelo.
Spanish: Velazquez.
English: Reynolds, Turner.
Time—1^ hours.
or.
Geometrical Drawing—
The care and use of the drawing board, T-square,
set squares, protractor and compasses
To draw by construction an angle equal to a given
angle, and straight lines parallel and perpendicular to each other.
The division of straight lines into equal or proportional p a r t s ; the construction and use of
simple plain scales; the proportional enlargement or reduction of plane figures; easy
problems in the construction of triangles and
quadrilaterals; easy problems on t h e construction of regular polygons, given one of
the sides, a diagonal or a diameter.
The division of the circumference of a circle into
equal p a r t s ; tangent to a circle at a given
point.
Drawing in plan and elevation, t o full size or other
scale, simple solids or structures.
Development of cube, square and triangular prisms,
cylinder and cone, and the like.
T i m e — H hours.
PART III.—Drawing P l a n t Forms from Nature.
Candidates will be required to make a drawing from
N a t u r e of a spray of leaves, or of leaves and flowers, such
as the Eucalyptus, Pittosporum, Laurel, Moreton Bay
Fig, Geranium, Oak and the like, the drawing to be
executed with the pencil in outline or in moss with
brush and water-colour When the plant form is drawn
in silhouette black must not be used.
Time—1 hour.
645
PART TV.—Decorative Design.
Candidates will be required to design a horizontal
or a vertical border, diaper, or a filling for a simple
shape, such as a square, a circle, or a triangle, using
plant form as a motif; either the ground or the decoration or both should be tinted. The medium to be
used must be transparent water-colour, or " body "
colour. Tracing paper may be used to draw repeats.
Time—2 hours.
Reference books for teachers—
History of Art—
" Shown to the Children Series"—
Painting—Lawrence Wilson.
Architecture—Gladys Wynne.
Architecture—Water-house (Hodder and Stoughton)
Geometrical Drawing—
Perspective and Geometrical Drawing—Dean
and Jolly (Oxford Universitv Press).
ENGLISH—
(1) A composition of 300 words, or about one page
and a half.
[45 minutes.]
(2) Analysis of sentences into clauses, with explanation ot the grammatical function of each
clause. Detailed analysis. A ruled sheet for
analysis will be supplied.
[15 minutes.]
(3) Two set-books for special study—
(a.) Poems Old a n d New (ed. Cairncross, Macmillan's Scholar's Library 3/6), pp. 2994 and 130-154.
(b) One of the following: Shakespeare, " As
You Like I t , " or Shakespeare, " Merchant of Venice," or " One Act Plays of
T o - D a y " (Australian Edition, H a r r a p ,
3/6), viz., Campbell of Kilmhor, The
Man in the Bowler H a t , The Patchwork
Quilt, The Workhouse Ward, X = 0 .
(4) Two set-books for general reading: —
(a) " Essays by Modern M a s t e r s " (Methuen,
2/6)."
(b) Dickens, " A Talc of Two Cities," or Seton
Merriman, " Barlasch of the G u a r d "
(Murray, 2/6).
g4(}
Note-—In sections 3 and 4 alternative questions ou
each book will be usked. In addition to the Essay and
Analysis, candidates must answer two questions, from
saction 3 (one from " Poems Old and New," and one;
on the play chosen), and one question from section 4
either on (a) or on (b).
FRENCHNOTE FOB TEACHERS IK F R E N C H , GERMAN AND ITALIAN.
Teachers will see t h a t in the examinations iu 1938
there will bo no translation of seen or prescribed texts.
The prescribed texts are to serve only as a baîs tor free
composition, jand, consequently, t h e woid-.by-wor(d
analysis to which they have been subjected in the past
should no longer be necessary. This should leave time
for the rapid reading of more books, and for this purpose a panel of texts has been drawn up. These texts are
not prescribed but recommended, and teachers may set
their own limits to the amount read and choose which
books they please. I t is suggested t h a t schools might
buy a number of copies of two or three books for each
standard, and add these to the school-library, using
them for a number of years, instead of burdening successive generations of scholars with the expense of their
purchase.
I t will be observed t h a t some of the Intermediate
and Leaving Pass texts have been written or adapted
to conform to a word-count ot 1000 and 1200 words
respectively; t h a t is, they contain no words (except a
few essential to the particular narrative) beyond the
first 1000 or 1200 of the Vander Beke word-count, plus
their compounds and derivatives. As far as possible
these limits will be observed by the examiners in the
setting of unseen passages for translation into Frenoh
as well as of those for translation into English.
(a) Translation into English of easy unseen passages
of French prose.
(b) (i.) A short composition in French on a picture
representing" an incident or translation
into French of au easy unseen passage of
English or a short composition or series of
short compositions in French on the contents
of the prescribed text, the total length of
647
such composition or compositions to be h e
same as that ot the picture composition,
(ii.^Translation into French of short easy English sentences,
(c) (i.) Formal questions on accidence and the leading rules of syntax, excluding the subjunctive,
(ii.) Either (a) A short piece of simple dictation,
or (b) Transcription of a passage of phonetic script of about 130 words
into ordinary French—the subject matter of the passage to be
of the same standard as the
piece chosen for dictation.
N.B. 1.—The examiners will supply a few headings
(in French) for the guidance of candidates choosing t h e
Picture Composition in (b) (i.) above.
N.B. 2.—Candidates offering the picture composition
would benefit by the use of the following book in their
course: French Composition through Pictures (published
by Evans Bros.).
N.B. 3.—See notes on punctuation at the end of
general prescriptions tor the Leaving Certificate Examination in Frenoh.
INTERMEDIATE TEXTS F O R ' 1 9 3 8 .
Prescribed:
A New French Reader—Ford and Hicks (Dent).
The following texts to be read:
1. Le pays des marguerites.
2. Un Secret de medeciu.
3. r/affairo des Contrebandiers.
Recommended:
l.*An alternative New-French Reader—Ford and
Hicks (Dent).
2.*The Reading Approach to French, P a r t I I . —
Ford and Hicks (Dent).
3.'Oxford Rapid Readers (Ox. Un. Press)—16 p u b lished.
- 4. Emile et les Detectives—Erich E a s t n e r (G. Belt
and Sons).
40
(J48
5. A bon chat, bon rat—P. G. Wilson (Macmillan
and Co.).
6. Le Crvptogramme—P. G. Wilson (Macmillan and
Co".).
7. Talcs of Action (Longmans Green and Co.).
S. Tales, of Adventure (Longmans Green and Co.).
9. Harap's Shorter French Texts.
10. Le Petit Roi d'Ys—Toudoure— West (Oxf.n-d).
11. L. F . Palmer, Petits Contes Moderncs (Shakespeare Head Publication).
12. Descriptive: Le beau Pays de France—Spink
(Ginn).
Paris et les Parisions —Kiether et
1'icard (ShakKpcaie Head Press, Sydney) ; La
Vie de ohaque jour eu Krance—1!.. Mable
(Shakspeare Head Pruss).
13. X-de M a i s t r e : L a jcuno Siberienne, Dent's Mod.
Lang Scries (a longer, continuous story).
14. Plays: Tu seras Baronne—Jean Boulan (Macmillan).
Le philanthrope malgre lui.—P. G. Wilson (Macmillan).
Anatole est un Pur—Jean Boulan (Macmillan).
Trois Pieces a Jouer—N. W. H. Scott
(Macmillan).
One Act French Plays—N. W. H. Scott
(Macmillan).
French Plays for To-day—Maurice Thiery
(Longmans Green and Co.).
Short French Plays—A. P. Sack (Dent).
N.B.—It is suggested t h a t candidates should read
about 100 to 150 pages chosen from the books recommended
GEOGRAPHY—
Introductory Note-—Wherever possible the
teaching
of geography should be based upon observations in the
field, and be illustrated by pictures, globe, maps, models,
diagrams and sections. Australian geography should
be made the basis of much of the comparative work, and
should be dealt with more fully than t h a t of other
countries.
^ ^
• Books marked with an asterisk are within a word-count of 1000 words.
INTEriKE.DIATE EXAMINATION.
(549
In the teaching of the subject during the four years'
eourse leading to the Tntoriiiediate Examination, there
should be developed the idea of the inter-dependence
of t h e various geographical phenomena, the correlation
between the astronomical, topographical and climatic
factors and the bearing of these on industries, commerce
and human settlement and development. I t should be
emphasised t h a t man's activities are largely controlled
by t h e topographic and climatic factors which make up
his environment, but t h a t he is also able to a certain
extent to overcome natural drawbacks.
The making of sketch maps should be taught, and
in examinations sketch maps to illustrate the geography
of the countries dealt with should be freely used.
DetailsSimple proofs of the spherical shape of the E a r t h .
The meaning of latitude and longitude. The methods
of determination are not required. "
Simple treatment of the chief effects of the rotation
and revolution of the Earth.
Experimental demonstration ot the determination of
a. north-south line by the shadow stick, and ot the
meridian altitude of the Sun.
The determination and characteristics of the zones
(frigid, temperate, etc.) of the E a r t h ' s surface.
The general distribution of land and water.
Elementary treatment of tides and their effects.
Elementary treatment of ocean surface currents, and
their effects on climate and trade.
The work of the. sea, rivers, ice, and wind in altering
the Earth's surface. An elementary treatment of the
causes which operate to produce plains, plateaux, mountains, rivers, valleys, lakes and coastal features.
The representation of relief on topographic maps by
means of contours, haehures, and colour-layering.
The effects of latitude, altitude, diurnal and seasonal
changes on temperature. Atmospheric pressure, temperature, humidity and their inter-relation.
Meanings
of the terms isotherm, isobar, isohyet. Factors determining the formation of fog, cloud, dew, rain, hail,
frost and enow.
650
DETAILS OP SUBJECTS, I93S.
Elementary treatment of winds.
Trade winds,,
" h i g h s " and " l o w s , " monsoons, land and sea breezes.
An elementary treatment of the wind systems ot Australia, contrasting summer and winter conditions. An
elementary study of Australian meteorological charts.
Factors determining climate.
The build ot the continents, and a study of t h e following natural regions of the E a r t h : equatorial forest,
(i.e. equatorial lowland or Amazon type). Savannah
(summer rain or Sudan type), hot desert (Sahara type),
hot monsoon (India type), warm temperate west coast,
(winter rains or Mediterranean type), warm temperateeast coast (eastern margin or China type), cool temperate west coast (West European type), cool temperate
oast coast (St. Lawrence or Quebec type), temperate interior lowlands, temperate interior highlands, northern
forest type (coniferous forest or Taiga type). Tundra,
type, ice cap type. A study of the primary products
and the activities of man characteristic of each ot the
above natural regions. The principal fisheries ot the
world.
The factors favourable to the development of secondary industries, using as examples the chief manufacturing centres of the world.
The necessity for and the nature of world trade.
Elementary treatment of the chief methods ot transport
by sea and land, and their relative usefulness.
Thechief ocean trade routes of the world. The principal
air routes ot the British Empire.
The distribution of population over t h e world.
The names, positions, types of government and capital'
cities ot the principal countries of t h e world.
Australia: The following topics should be dealt within detail: —
Build (with t h a t of Victoria in greater detail).
Control exercised by climate and relief on vegetation
and on the location of primary industries.
Artesian water and irrigation systems, and their importance as a means of compensating for deficiency of
rainfall.
The sheep, cattle, "wheat, rice, sugar, fruit, t i m b e r
and pearling industries. The coal, gold, silver-leadzinc, iron and copper mining industries.
DJTEBMKDIATE EXAMINATION.
(551
The development of manufacturing centres, as controlled by factors favourable both to the manufacture
and distribution of goods.
The reasons for the development of the chief ports.
"The factors controlling the distribution of population.
The principal cable routes from Australia.
Books of reference for teachers: —
The World and its Peoples—R. R. Shearmur (for
Natural Regions).
.Intermediate Geography Textbook.—A. V. G. James.
A Modern Geography for Australian Schools—I. G.
Symons.
Australia, Physiographic and Economic—Griffith
Taylor.
Phillips' New Comparative Commonwealth Atlas.
I,at.est Kdition.
GEOMETRY AND TRIGONOMETRY.
The more important theorems of plane geometry up
to similar triangles, deduced from a broad axiomatic
basis, in accordance with t h e appended Schedule. (The
logical sequence followed in the Schedule is not obligatory.) Exercises on, and applications of, these theorems.
(Algebraical or trigonometrical methods may be used
whenever convenient.)
The sine, cosine and tangent of angles up to four
right angles, and their graphs. Solution of triangles,
including the finding of areas, preferably by subdivision
into right-angled triangles. Easy problems in two
dimensions. Use of four-figure tables. (Kaye and Laby's
four-figure tables of logarithms, etc., will be provided in the examination.)
Note-—The intended standard of this Syllabus is about
the same as t h a t of the Syllabus it superseded. Either
Porder, A School Geometry or Foster, Plane Geometry, Vols.
I xnd I I , together with either Durell and Writrht, Elementary Trignomenlry, P a r t I or Siddons and Hughes, Trigonometry, Part I would form suitable and sufficient text-books,
but their use is not prescribed.
SCHEDULE.
Asterisks denote that formal proofs will not be
•asked in examination, but it is of course assumed t h a t
(j 5 2
'teachers vnll take proper steps to convince pupils of
the t r u t h of ihe propositions so marked.
. Section 1.—*The standard theorems, direct and converse, on angles a t a point (adjacent angles,
vertically oiqiosio angles).
*The fundamental theorems, direct and converse,
on parallel lines (corresponding angles, alternate angles).
The sum of the angles of a triangle and of a convex
polygon.
*The three fundamental cases for congruence of
triangles.
' *The angles a t the base of an isosceles triangle are
equal, and the converse.
The congruence of right-angled triangles.
The fundamental theorems on parallelograms.
The standard constructions depending on the above
theorems (perpendiculars to a line, bisection
of lines and angles, parallels to a given line).
, The " equal i n t e r c e p t " theorems. The division of a
line into n equal parts. .
The mid-point of the hypotenuse of a right-angled
triangle is equidistant from the three vertices.
The concurrency of the medians of a triangle.
Section 2.- The comparison of the areas of parallelograms and triangles between the same parallels.
*The measurement ot the area of a rectangle.
• Pythagoras' theorem and its extensions.
Apollonius theorem.
Construction of a triangle or rectangle equal in
area to a given polygon.
•Geometrical illustration of algebraical identities.
Section 3.—The " s y m m e t r y " properties of chords of
a circle and of the common chord of two
intersecting circles.
The locus of a point equidistant from two given
points. The concurrency of t h e perpendicular bisectors of the sides of a triangle. The
circum-circle of a triangle.
, Angles in a segment. Cyclic quadrilaterals. Concurrency of the altitudes of a triangle.
§53,
The
inequality theorems: (i.) If in a triangle
b > c, then B > C, and the converse; (ii.)
t h e perpendicular is the shortest distance
from a given point to a given straight line.
The " s y m m e t r y " properties of tangents to a
circle, and of the common tangents to two
intersecting or touching circles.
The locus of a point equidistant from two given
lines. Concurrency of the angle-bisectors of
a triangle. The inscribed and escribed circles
of a triangle.
The alternate segment theorem.
• E q u a l arcs of a circle subtend equal angles a t t h e
centre.
The simpler loci and constructions based on these
theorems.
Section. 4 — * A line parallel to the base of a triangle
divides tho sides proportionally; and the converse.
• T h e fundamental theorems on similar triangles.
A right-angled triangle is divided into two similar
triangles by t h e perpendicular from the right
angle to the opposite side.
The bisectors of the vertical angle of a triangle
divide the base in the ratio of the sides.
Division ot a line in a given ratio.
Tho rectangle-property of intersecting chords of a
circle.
GERMAN—
Intermediate.
(See note at commencement of Intermediate French
details.)
(a) Translation into English of easy unseen passages of German.
(b) (i.) A short composition in German on a picture
representing an incident or translation into
German of an easy unseen passage of English
or a short composition or series of short
compositions in German on the contents of
the prescribed text, the total length of such
composition or compositions to be t h e
same as t h a t of the picture composition.
$54
(ii.) Translation into German of short easy English sentences,
(c) (i.) Questions on accidence and the leading rules
of syntax,
(ii.) Either (a) A short piece of simple dictation,
or (b) Transcription of a passage of phonetic script of about 110 words
into ordinary German—the sub.
ject matter of the passage to b i
of the same standard as the
piece chosen for dictation.
N . B . 1.—The examiners will supply a few headings
<in German) for the guidance of oandidates choosing
the Picture Composition in (b) (i.) above.
N . B . 2.—See note re German spelling a t end of
-General Prescriptions for German Leaving Honours
Examination.
N . B . 3.—See notes on punctuation at the end of
general prescriptions for t h e Leaving Certificate Examination in German.
INTERMEDIATE TEXTS FOR 193S.
Prescribed;
Tindall and Williams' Easy German Reader (G. Bell
and Sons), pages 1 to 45.
Recommended;
•Oxford Rapid-Re.iding Gorman Texts (64 pp.. Limp
cloth, 1/3 Eng.).
Der Doppclgiinger (edited by A. Wilson)—Tom
Shark "Series, No. 152.
Schmuggler in Masuren (edited by D. Jenner)—
Eberhard Strauss.
Die Fremdenlegionare (edited by S. Tindall)—F. W.
Mader.
Der Schatz im Morgenbrotstal (edited by J . E.
Maesen)—Paul Ernst.
Erail und die Detektive (Bell-Kastner, adapted
Jenner), 2/- Eng.
Bell's Graduated German Readers for Rapid Beading:
•Th^so texts are wirhin a word-r-mint of K'OO words.
INTKItMEDIATE KXAMINATION.
655
1. Abenteucrgeschichten (2/. Eng.).
2. Acht kurzweilige Geschichten (1/6 Eng.).
about 100 to 150 pages chosen from the books recommended.
GREEK—
(a) Translation into English of easy unprepared
passages of Greek prose.
Accidence and the leading rules of elementary
Syntax.
Translation of easy sentences from English into
Greek, as a test of grammatical knowledge.
(b) A book of Xenophon's Anabasis, or the equivalent thereof in the Attic dialect.
Question!
may be set involving translation, grammar
and subject-matter.
N.B.—(1) Candidates must do satisfactory work in
b o t h (a) and (b).
(2) The Grammatical Terminology of the J o i n t Com.
mittee will be used solely from December, 1938, onwards. The terminology recommended may be found
in Sonnenschein's Grammar and in Welters and Conway. The terminology for Greek is for the most p a r t
the same as for Latin, b u t the terms " aorist," " middle,"
and optative aire retained.
I t is strongly recommended t h a t candidates should
acquire such knowledge ot Greek History, Legends,
Customs, etc., as is provided in Tappan, " T h e Story
of t h e Greek People."
Special Book:
Xenophon—Anabasis I I I and IV.—Handford (Clarendon Press).
HEBREW—
(a) Translation into English ot easy unprepared passages ot Hebrew prose.
Accidence, including a knowledge of the following weak verbs, initial nun, initial,
medial and final g u t t u r a l , and the leading
rules of elementary syntax.
g56
Translation of easy sentences (not to be taken
from the English Bible) from English into
Hebrew as a test ot grammatical knowledge.
Pointing ot unpointed text. (b) About nine chapters of prose from the Old Testament, together with two of the simpler
short psalms. Questions may be set involving
translation, grammar and subject matter.
Candidates must do satisfactory work in both (a)
and (b).
Note.—Por purposes of examination the square writing
and not the cursive script must be used. Correct punctuation is essential.
Special Books—
Genesis cc. 32, 33, 47, 48.
Numbers cc. 16, 17.
Psalms 47, 145.
ITALIAN—
Intermediate.
(To understand the new type of Syllabus tor Italian,
teachers are recommended to read the Note for Teachers
in French, German and Italian preceding the French
details.)
(a) Translation into English of easy unseen passages of Italian prose.
(b) (i) A short composition in Italian on a picture
representing an incident, or translation
into Italian of an easy unseen passage of
English; or a short composition or series
of short compositions in Italian on the
contents of t h e prescribed text, t h e total
length of such composition or compositions to be t h e same as t h a t of the picture composition.
(ii) Translation into Italian of short easy Engglish sentences.
(c) (i) Formal questions on accidence and the leading rules of syntax,
(ii) A short piece of simple dictation in Italian.
l.Vl'KRMEDIATU EXAMINATION.
657
- N:B.—The examiners will supply a few headings (ia
Italian) for the guidance of candidates choosing t h e
Picture Composition.
For the Dictation, candidate*
•should be familiar with the Italian names of tho
ordinary signs of punctuation.
INTERMEDIATE TEXTS FOR 1938.
1, Prescribed (for those who wisli to make it a basis
for the composition):
Cowper—Italian Folk-tales and Folk-songs (Univ.
of Chicago Press), pp. 7-54 incl.
2. For reading: about 100 to 150 pages chosen from
one or more of the following books:
(a) Wilkins
and
Santelli—Beginner's Italian,
Reader, Heath (strongly recommended).
(b) Enrico Toscano—Raggazzi, evviva la V i t a
-.•••(Bcmporad, Florence).
'(c) II Libro della IV Class© Elernentare (Rome,
Libreria dello Stato).
JAPANESEINTERMEDIATE.
75 Katakana (Alphabetic Letters).
150 Ideographs iu single words.
150 Combined words in Ideographs.
The principal rules of grammar with construction of sentences:
(a) How to fonm the different cases of nouns and
pronouns.
(b) How to form simple adjectives, adverbs, par.
ticiples and (a) class verbs.
(c) Simple conjugation of verbs.
I'd) Conjunctions in simple and shortened forms.
Note.—(a) class verbs are known as colloquial verbs.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5. Simple Japanese sentences to be translated into
English:
(a) from prescribed texts.
(b) easy unseen passage.
6. Simple English sentences to be translated into
Japanese.
£58
DETAILS OF SUBJEOTS. 1938
7. A short composition in Japanese on a picture
representing some incident;
or
Translation into Japanese of an easy continuous piece of English prose.
Prescribed Text:
Jinjo Shogakii Tokuhon—School
J a p a n . (Books 1 and 2.)
text books
of
LATIN—
(a) Translation into English of easy unprepared
passages of Latin prose.
Accidence and the leading rules of Syntax.
Translation of easy sentences from English into
Latin, aa a test of grammatical knowledge.
(b) Portions of easier Latin prose and verse, together
not exceeding 700 lines, from Caesar's Gallic
W a r and Virgil's Aeneid, or their equivalent.
Questions may be set involving translation,
scansion, grammar, and subject-matter.
N.B.—(1) Candidates must do satisfactory work in
both (a) and (b).
(2) The grammatical terminology of the Joint Committee as used, e.g., in Sonnenschein's Latin Grammar
will be used solely from December, 1938, onwards.
I t is strongly recommended t h a t candidates should
obtain such knowledge of Roman History, Legends,
Customs, etc., as is contained in Tappan's " T h e Story
of the Roman People."
Special books under (b) above—
Caesar's Gallic War, Book I , chapters I - X V I I I inclusive (Henderson and Henderson, Shakespeare Head Press).
Selections from Ovid, Passages 1, 3, 4, 9, 10, 11,
20, 26, 33, 43, 50, 51, 53. (Heatley and
Turner, Longmans.)
Syllabus of Syntax under (a) above.
1..Agreement of verb with subject and adjective
with noun ; adjectives used as nouns; simple
apposition.
INTERMEDIA IK EXAMINATION.
65t>
2. The nominative case (a) as subject, (b) as complement or secondary predicate, (o) the nominative with infinitive, with dicor and videor.
3. The accusative (a) as object, (b) of extent of time
and space, (c) of motion towards a place, (d)
after prepositions in common use, (e) with
impersonal verbs, (f) the double accusative
after rogo, dooeo, and the more common factitive verbs.
4. The dative (a) the possessive dative; (b) as indirect object, (c) governed by verbs in common
use, as pareo, noceo, and in the impersonal
passive construction with such verbs, and
after compounds of sum, (d) with adjectives
of likeness, fitness, friendliness, etc., (e) after
the gerund-adjective, (f) as predicate.
6. The genitive (a) as a complement to nouns, including the partitive genitive, (b) of description, with qualifying adjective, (c) after verba
of remembering and pitying, and with the
impersonals paenitet and pudet, (d) governed
by adjectives in common use, (e) sapientis est.
It) after judicial verbs.
6. The ablative (a) of motion from a place, separation, and origin, (b) of agent with ab, (o)
of comparison, (d) of instrument, cause, manner,
price and measure of difference, (e) in abl.
absol. construction, (f) ot point of time, (g)
after verbs and adjectives in common use, (n)
after prepositions in common use, (i) of respect
(j) description.
7. The locative.
8. Comparison.
9. Pronouns and possessive adjectives iu common
use.
10. The infinitive (a) as subject or object of verbs,
e.g., iuvat me facere, possum facere, (b) after
doceo, iubeo, veto, and similar verba, (c) the
. accusative with infinitive, (d) the future infinitive with verbs of hoping, promising, etc.
11. The gerund, gerund adjective, and supines.
13. The more common uses of t h e participle.
13. Impersonal expressions like gratum est and impersonal verbs.
•660
14. Non-dependent
and dependent,
simple
and
double questions.
15. Ordinary co-ordinating conjunctions.
16. Voices aud the ordinary uses of the tenses.
17. Relative sentences with the indicative.
18. The sequence of tenses.
19. Clauses of Purpose with qui, ut, n e ; Clauses of
Result with ut, ut non, etc.
20. Other uses of ut.
21. Commands, prohibitions and wishes.
22. The construction with verbs of fearing.
23. Clauses of Time not involving the subjunctive.
Cum with the past tenses of the subjunctive.
24. Clauses of Cause.
25. Clauses of Condition with indicative.
EXAMPLES OP PARSING
Caesar, maxima coorta teinpestate, imperavit equitibus,
quos habobat, ut in ulteriorem portiim progrederentur.
Word
tUXIMA
Class
Inflection
Syntax
Adj from m a x i m un
-a -iiin supcrl. of
Feni. Sing. A'il,
a/w tempestate
Purf. Part, of
Fern. Sing. Abl.
coorior-iri-ortus
Hiun — Depon.
Nunn from tempest- Sinn'. AM.
rtjt-atin (f)
Verb from impcr- 3rd Sin if.
Perl".
are (i)
Indie. Act.
a/w tempestate
in alb. al>.
IlKl^lillS.
CO-OUTA
TEMPKSTATB
IMT'BRAVJT
KQUITIBUS
ULTBRIORKM
PORTUAI
Noun from equos Phir. Dat.
-iti* (m)
Adj. from ulterior- Masc. îng. Ace.
ius
Nf»uu portus-u* (in) Sing. Ace.
PROGRKDKRKSTUR
Verb from pro-jrc- :ird .phir. I m p .
dioi—i propfrossua
Subjunct.
sum -Depoii:
Qcos
Relative pronoun: qui, quae. quod.
v . . '.
In abl. abs.
with c o o r t a
a/w
subject
Caesar, main
verb
Gov. by imperavit
a/w portiim
Gov. by prep.
Contained subject, in indirect command depending on imperavit.
;
Mas. Phir. Ace. Obj. of habebat, a/w a n t e cedent equitibus
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATIONS.
REVISED
.
661
TERMINOLOGY F O R LATIN.
VKRBS.
The name of a verb is its present Active Infinitive
(e.g. scriberc
to write).
The Indicative Tenses of a verb are named as follows
i. The Imperfect Tenses.
Present Imperfect (or Present); scribo.
Future Imperfect (or Future); scribam.
Past Imperfect; scribebam.
ii. The Perfect Tenses.
Present Perfect; scrips!
I have written
Future Perfect: scripsero.
Past Perfect: scripseram.
iii. Past Historic: scrips!
I wrote.
The Subjunctive Tenses are named as follows:
Primary.
Present Subjunctive: scribam.
Perfect Subjunctive: scripserim.
Historic.
Past Imperfect: scriberem.
Past. Perfect: scripsissem.
VERB NOUNS.
i. Infinitives.
Present: scribcre, scribi.
Perfect: scripsis.se, scriptus esse.
F u t u r e : scripturus esse, scriptum iri.
ii. Gerund.
scribendum.
iii. Supine.
scriptum, —u.
V E R B ADJECTIVES.
i. Participles.
Active. Present; scribens. F u t u r e : scripturus.
Passive. Perfect: scriptus.
ii. Gerund-Adjective. „
scribendus.
NM.J.—The words " t r a n s i t i v e and i n t r a n s i t i v e " are
replaced by " used transitively and intransitively."
CLAUSES.
i. Clauses are divided into Main Clauses and Subordinate Clauses.
gP2
ii. I n Clauses of Condition, the two parts are called
the " if clause," and " the then clause."
iii. Non-dependent Sentences are divided into Statements, Questions, Desires (including Commands, Requests, Entreaties and Wishes),
and Exclamations.
iv. Dependent Noun Clauses are divided into
a. Dependent Statements, dixit se abiturum.
b. Dependent Questions, rogavit quid fecisset.
c. Dependent, Desires, oro facias; impero ut
fiat; vcllem adesset.
d. Dependent Exclamations, vides ut alta stet
nive Soracte.
v. Adverbial Clauses are divided into
a. Time, cum hoc fecisset, abiit.
b. Place, quo t u ieris, ego sequar.
c. Cause, quod aeger est, abest.
d. Purpose, ne id accideret, exiit.
e. Result, ita laboravit ut dux sit.
f. Condition, si nos adfiussemus, superavisset.
g. Concession, quamvis aeger sit, celeriter currit.
h. Comparison.
i. Manner, captus est, ut Livius narrat.
ii. Degree, nltior est quaim frater.
vi. " Oratio Obliqua." is replaced by " R e p o r t e d
Speech."
MUSIC
The certificates ot the Australian Music Examinations
Board in Grade I I I , Theory or Musical Perception, and
Grade I V Practice, or Grade TTI Practice, and Grade
TV, Theory or Musical Perception, passed at the one
examination, will be accepted.
PHYSICAL SCIENCE—
Measurement.—Use of beam balance t,tJ spring
balance; volume of solid bodies by measurement and by displacement—incidental use
of pipette, burette, and graduated j a r ; determination of density by separate measurement of mass and volume.
E a r t h ' s rotation
and pendulum
as time
measurers; compensation of pendulums.
fjgj
Mechanics.—Weight as a force (pull or push) and
its measurement with spring balance; the
simple lever law and its application in common appliances; Hooke's Law for simple
extensions.
Speed and velocity; simple treatment of Newton's 1st Law ot Motion. Simple descriptive treatment of centre of gravity and stability.
Work and energy; calculation of
. work in simple cases of lifting weights;
kinetic and potential energy and transformations between them (pendulums, clockwork toys, etc.); heat energy nnd mechani
cal energy—simple descriptive treatment of
the work of Rumford, Davy and Joule; heat
energy and chemical
energy;
chemical
energy
and electrical energy—the
lead
storage cell; heat energy and electrical
energy; mechanical energy and eleotrical
energy—the movement of a wire carrying
an electric current in a magnetic field aud
t h e electric current in a wire moving in a
magnetic field; sources of energy ot natioual
importance. (All work on transformations of
energy to be simple and descriptive.)
Properties of Fluids.—General properties of a.
fluid; thrust and pressure in a liquid; expression of pressures in gravitational units
and such units as " c m . of m e r c u r y " ; calculation of pressure as the weight of a
column of liquid of unit cross-section; descriptive treatment of transmission of pres.
sure through liquids and its application tothe hydraulic press, hydraulic brakes, etc.;
descriptive treatment of the siphon and its
applications.
Air pressure; the barometer—experiments of
Galileo, Torricclli. Pascal, von Guericke,
Boyle; simple lift and compression p u m p s ;
applications
of
air
pressure;
general
physical properties of t h e air.
Buoyancy; Archimedes' Principle;
extension
to floatation in liquids and in air with a p plioations.
fi64
DETAILS OP SUU.IECTS, IDSi
Elasticity of Air; Boyle's L a w ; the experiments of Boyle; simple calculations based
on this law; effect on measurement of gas
volume.
Heat and Temperature-—The thermometer and its
subdivision;
Fahrenheit
and
Centigrade
scales without conversion from one scale to
the other; the development of the tharmometer by Galileo, Newton, Fahrenheit,
Celsius. Expansion iof solids and liquids due
to heating; applications.
Simple treatment of conduction and convection
with applications;
simple treatment of
radiation; effects due to black and polished
surfaces with applications; differential thermometer or other means of detection and
measurement.
Melting and boiling points by direct methods;
applications of the use of metals depending
on the melting point.
Quantity of h e a t ; the calorie; specific heat of
a .solid aud its measurement with a calorimeter; latent heats ot fusion and vaporisation ; Black's experiments; determination of
latent heat ot fusion of ice only.
Charles's Law for constant pressure; effect on
measurement of gas volumes.
Combustion.—General study ot b u r n i n g ; methods
of starting fires; common fuels and effect
of varying air supply; explosive mixtures
of air and gaseous fuels; fire extinguishers;
• study of candle ,fiame burning in air.
Rusting ot -iron and. combustion of phosphorus
to show composition of the a i r ; increase in
weight of phosphorus or magnesium b u r n t
in air; Lavoisier's experiments with tin and
mercury; Priestley's experiment with calx
of mercury.
Combustion
in
oxygen; ,. Priestley's
and
Scheele's ^preparation ot oxygen; burning of
magnesium, calcium, phosphorus,
carbon
and sulphur in oxygen.
.
665
Identification of products of combustion of
ordinary fuels; honce main constituents ol
fuels.
Solution-—Saturated and unsaturated solutions of
solids in water; recovery of solid by evaporation ; effect of temperature on solution;
crystal growing using alum, bluestone or
other suitable substances; specification of
solubility in gm. per 100 gin. ot solvent;
general ideas of solubility curves such as
those of nitre and common salt; other common solvents such as alcohol, petrol, turpentine, etc.
Solubility ot gases such as air and carbon
dioxide in water; effect of pressure and
temperature (soda water).
The Study of Water.—Preparation of hydrogen
from zinc and dilute hydrochloric acid;
Cavendish's preparation from iron and dilute
sulphuric acid; eiamination of salts produced ; hydrogen a light gas.
Combustion of hydrogen; water as hydrogen
oxide; action of hydrogen on hot copper
oxide and steam on iron or magnesium as
qualitative confirmation of tho composition
of water.
Reduction of hot metallic oxides by hydrogen
and carbon; oxidation and reduction; application to the production ot metals from
their ores by reduction with carbon.
Volumetric (by electrolysis) and gravimetric
f simplified
form of Dumas' experiment)
composition of water.
Alknlirx. Acids, Bases and Salts.—General study
of tho dilute solutions of the three common
acids: simplest treatment of the reactions
involved in the preparation of hydrochloric
and nitric acids from sulphuric acid; simple
description of the contact process for preparing sulphuric acid.
Preparation of alkalies by the action of metals
ou water; properties of alkalies; neutralisation and salt formation.
666
DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 133S,
Metals and non-metals; basic and acidic oxideswith their relation to base and acid.
Carbon dioxide and tiie carbonates; relationsbetween limestone (marble), quicklime nnd
slaked lime, relation between basic oxide,
acidic oxide and salt.
The Law of Definite Proportions from the
composition of water nnd other oxides and
from the proportion of acid to alkali in neutralisation
Electricity a n d Magnetism.—Permanent magnets;
properties and production; simplest treatment of the earth as a magnet to explain
the behaviour of a compass needle; work
of Tlmles and Gilbert: simplest treatment of
magnetic induction to explain the attraction "f
a. piece of iron.
Magnetic effect of an electric current; Oersted's experiment; application to galvanometer, electromagnet and electric bell.
Chemical effect of an electric current; electrolysis of water; a simple case of electroplating; simple form of lead storage cell;
simple form of primary cell (theory of theaction in the liquid is not required).
Heating effect of an electric current; application to heating and lighting; simple qualitative idea of electrical resistance.
The scope of the above course may be gauged from:
James Hunter, " A School Course of Science" (Longmans Green).
PRACTICAL WORK.
Every candidate in this subject must have carried out a
course of practical work in a laboratory which lias been approved after inspection by inspectors appointed by the
Schools Board. This course must comprise at least twenty
suitable experiments reasonably distributed over the abovesyllabus, and the experiments must be the independent
work of the candidate.
A candidate whose practical work has been carried out in
a laboratory which has not been inspected may, on application being made, be permitted by the Schools Board to-
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION
667
submit his practical notebook for examination with his
written paper. This note-book must be certified by tho
•candidate's Head .Master and by his Teacher as being the
.record of tin; candidate's independent work.
Note: I t is intended t h a t at least two years' study
should be given to the work outlined above. PupiU
who have completed the Qeneral Science Course should
require only one further year for the additional work
involved.
PHYSICS—
The treatment of the subject is to be primarily descriptive and qualitative in character, based on commonsense ideas and on simple experimental work. Importance will be attached to a knowledge of simple
applications of physical principles in everyday life.
Onlv the simplest and most fundamental quantities are
included in the course, while the mathematical aspect
should not be unduly stressed; sufficient numerical
examples should be given to illustrate the relationships
between relevant physical quantities.
The work in Electricity and Magnetism is only t h e
most elementary .ntroduction to t h e subject, and is t o
b e purely descriptive and qualitative.
Note on Units.—The c.g.s. system of u n i t s is to be
u s e d t h r o u g h o u t t h e c o u r s e p r e s c r i b e d . Other units ot
importance for particular purposes are expressly mentioned in their proper context.
History.—Brief historical account of t h e physical
discoveries of Archimedes, Galileo, Newton
to the extent embraced by syllabus.
Geometry.—Physical treatment (including measurement) of Length, Angle, Area, Volume.
Specification of position. Displacement; t.hp
geometrical vector. Vernier (1/10), slide calipers, screw gauge.
Mechanics-—Time;
standard
of
measurement
Simple pendulum as a time-measurer and
variation of period with length, treated experimentally.
Motion: Sliced (scalar) and velocity (vector):
acceleration f vector).
Motions of constant
acceleration from initial rest (with arithmetical discussion); and illustration of acceleration by inclined plane or other method.
668
Force—Experimental justification for the definition of i'oroe as a vector-quantity—from,
consideration of a " particle " in eq-uilibrium
under action specified (a) by two, (b) by three,
forces. Weieht, and "the gmwt a n d fbwt units
of force. Principle of the lever, established
experimentally; moment ot a force; elementary illustrations—in particular, use of the
steel-yard.
Centres ot gravity in simple
oases.
Laws of Motion.—Elementary treatment of Newton's Laws. Mass and ite relation to weight;
use of the simplest balance for measurement
of mass.
Work and Energy.—The ft.ibwt. Kinetic Energy
and Potential Energy in easy cases and
descriptive treatment of transformation of
energy.
Friction, Mechanical advantage of
simple machines, lever, single moviiblo pulley,
wheel and nxli;. Power ; the watt; the horsepower.
Gravitation
Descriptive treatment of Newton's
Law of gravitntional attraction. Motion from
rest of freely falling bodies (with arithmetical discussion).
Hydrostatics.—Definition ot pressure, only in the
most elementary cases -especially of pressure
at a given depth in a homogeneous liquid at
rest under gravity.
Archimedes' Princinle
and the elementary principle ot floatation for
the very, simplest, cases. Manometers. The
mercury barometer and the aneroid. Hydrometers, variable immersion, e.g., battery
tester;
specific
gravity
by
balancing
columns.
Properties of Mutter.—Absolute and relative density
Boyle's Law. Hooke's Law. Simple treatment of molecular theory for solids, liquids
and gases.
Heat-—Temperature and the elemeiitarv phenomena
of heat, viz., conduction, convection, radiation
and expansion—treated qualitatively and descriptively. Coefficient of linear expansion.
Mercury-in-glass thermometers. Fixed points.
INTEKMBD1ATE
EXAMINATION
66if
Fahrenheit and Centigrade scales. Charles's
Law for constant pressure.
Changes of
state and of volume of the substance water,
due to changes of
temperature—the
effects
due to phenomenon of maximum density to
be treated in detail. Galorimetry; the calorie.
Elementary treatment of specific heat, defined a s
calories per gm and ot the latent heats, for the
case ot water. The phenomenon of change of
boiling point with change of atmospheric
pressure, treated qualitatively.
Electrostatics.—Two kinds of electrification; electric attraction and repulsion; conductors and
non-conductors.
Electroscopes,
including
gold-leaf electroscope. No electrification on
the internal surface ot a charged hollow
conductor.
(Proof
plane method only.)
Charging of conductor by induction.
Magnetism. — .Methods of making magnets, by
means of permanent magnets and solenoids. Magnetic attraction and repulsion. Lines of force,
traced by means of magnetic needle and of
iron filings. Magnetisation of iron by induction.
Current Electricity.—Elementary experiments giving
qualitative treatment of chemical, thermal and
magnetic effects of electric currents.
PRACTICAL WORK.
Every candidate in this subject must have carried
out a course of practical work in a laboratory which
has been approved after inspection by inspectors appointed by tho Schools Board. This course must comprise at least twenty suitable experiments reasonably
distributed over the above syllabus, and the experiments must be the independent work of the candidate.
out in a laboratory which has not been inspected may,
on application being made be permitted by t h e Schools
by the candidate's Headmaster, and by his teacher as
being the record of the candidate's independent work.
DETAILS OF SUBJECTS FOR THE SCHOOL LEAVING EXAMINATION, DECEMBER, 193S, AND
FEBRUARY, 1939
AGRICULTURAL SCIENCE— /'ass.
A fuller aud more detailed treatment of the work sat
o u t for the Intermediate Examination, with the following additions: —
I.—The Soil.
1.
Fertility of the soil—factors governing fertility.
(a) Chemical—Available and
unavailable
plant
food .- the limit to the value of chemical analysis
determination of soil requirements by experiment.
Fertilisers.—Composition, sources of supply, effects on the soil and crops of the following:
—Guano, bonedust, blood manure, nitrate of
soda, sulphate of ammonia, nitrolime, rock
phosphate, superphosphate, basic phosphate
basic slag, sulphate and chloride of potash
linio and gypsum.
Unit values aud calculation of commercial values
of fertilisers—Vide Vic. Journal of A g r i c ,
January.
(b) Physical—Physical constitution of the soil;
mechanical analysis; properties of aand, clay,
humus, calcium carbonate; soil texture; pore
space; water holding capacity; optimum proportion of water; percolation; capillarity;
evaporation;
diffusion of salts; drainage
water; factors affecting the temperature of
the soil.
Physical condition of the soil as modified by
tillage, drainage, humus, crop rotation, irrigation, manuring and use of soil amelioranta.
{o) Biological—Nature of the soil flora; bacteria;
structure and reproduction of a typical form,
such as Bacillus subtilis; functions of bacteria; putrefaction; decay, etc.
Soil bacteria; nitrification; denitrification; conditions favourable; control of these oondi-
LEAVING EXAMINATION.
2.
3.
1.
671
tions; Victorian conditions of rainfall and
climate favourable to nitrification; Bacillus
radicicola; relation to plante and soil; root
tubercles; symbiosis; inoculation of soils.
A knowledge of the origin and method of formation of the soils of the district in which the
school is situated.
Belation of Climate and Soil t o Crop Production.
Rainfall of Australia; distribution and incidence;
study of rainfall map of Victoria; isothermo,
isohyeta.
Influence of rainfall and temperature on crop production.
Climatic and soil requirements for wheat, potatoes,
maize, lucerne; distribution of wheat, sheep
and cattle and factors governing such distribution in Australia.
Food
H.—The P l a n t .
and water requirements — Sources of food
supply—(a) atmosphere, (b) soil; essential elements ; photosynthesis; osmosis; transpiration ratio with special reference to the factors
influencing it, such as climate and fertilizers
2. Crops.
(a) Wheat—The wheat producing countries of the
world; the Victorian wheat belt;
factors
limiting its boundaries, e.g., transport facilities, rainfall, competition with more profitable forms ot agriculture, etc.
Methods of cultivation; preparation of seed
bed; conservation of moisture; selection,
grading, pickling of seed; seeding; manuring; harvesting; development of use of
machinery; wheaten hay.
(b) Potatoes—Location of potato growing districts;
cultural methods; selection and treatment of
" seed."
(o) Lucerne—Lucerne-growing
districts;
preparation of seed bed; methods of seeding; manuring; renovation; irrigation; harvesting and
utilisation of lucerne.
672
Note.—A similiar detailed study of some loonl staple crop
may be substituted for either (b) or (c) above,
3. Pastures—The common species used in pastures;
the relation of pasture species to soil and climate;
natural and seeded pastures; permanent and
temporary pastures; deterioration and improvement of pastures as influenced by management; the. comparative food 'value of
various pasture plants at different stages of
their growth.
4. Weeds.
H a b i t s ; harmful effects: spread and control.
III.—General.
1. General care of farm animals: provision of shelter;
water supply, conservation of fodder, relative
composition of typical fodders—hay, bran,
oats, lucerne, oil cakes; balanced rations.
2. Milk; composition; sampling and testing (Babcock Test and its underlying principles); herd
testing, standard cows.
Genera! knowledge of the composition of milk
products—dried milk, condensed milk, butter,
cheese, milk-sugar, casein, separated milk.
3. Fungi and Bacteria—Life history ot a typical
fungus, e.g. Mucor; General division into
parasites and saprophytes. The part played
by fungi in breaking down organic matter.
Parasitic types, e.g. Smut, Irish B l i g h t :
their life histories, symptoms and prevention.
Bacteria—structure and reproduction; control
of growth of bacteria in foodstuffs, milk, etc ,
by(Q) Temperature—Freezing, chilling, boiling-, pasteurising.
(b) Moisture—Drying
fruit,
vegetables,
fish.
(c) Sterilization — Sealing of. tinned meats, etc.
(d) Hygiene—Cleanliness of person, utensils, buildings connected with food or
milk supply.
(o) Osmosis—Brines and syrups.
•.
6 7 3.
Insect pests—General principles of attack depending on the mode of feeding—distribution of
poison sprays for biting insects and oil emulsions, etc., for sucking insects.
Life history of the codlin moth—methods of prevention.
Any local insect pest t o be noted, e.g., outworms, grasshoppers, borers, eto.
Honour*.
A more advanced knowledge ot the foregoing, together with tho following subjects: —
1. P l a n t Breeding—Relation of biological principles to plant breeding, e.g.. Natural selection (Darwin); Mutation theory (De Vriea);
Pure Line theory (Johannsen); Segregation of
Unit Characters (Mendel).
Role of selection and hybridisation in plant improvement; methods ot hybridising wheat,
maize; examples of improvement effected by
cross breeding or selection in wheat, maize,
sugar beet, potato.
2. Classification and physical and chemical characteristics of the chief types of Victorian soils.
3. Grading and marketing of farm products.
Books of Reference: —
Chapters bearing on the subject in the following
books will be found useful: —
Paterson—Nature in Farming.
Fream—Principles of Agriculture.
Connell and Hadfield—Agriculture.
Percival—Agricultural Botany.
Richardson—Wheat and its Cultivation.
Victorian Journal ot Agriculture.
Prescott—The soils of Australia in relation tovegetation and climate {O.S.I.R. Bulletin,
No. 52).
Griffith Taylor—Australian Meteorology.
Wadham and Vasey—A Century of Agricultural
Progress in Victoria (M.U. P'ress pamphlet).
Wood, T. B.—Chemistry of Crop Production.
Wood, T. B.—Animal Nutrition.
The attention of teachers is drawn to the Bulletins
issued by the Department of Agriculture.
•67 4
DETAILS OF SUBJEOTS, 193 .
/'radical Work—Pass and Honours,
Every candidate in this subject must have carried out a
course of practical work in a School which has been
approved after inspection by inspectors appointed by the
Schools Board.
This course must comprise suitable
•experiments reasonably distributed over the above syllabus,
•and the experiments must be the independent work of the
candidate.
A candidate whose practical work has been carried out in
a School which has not been inspected may submit his
practical notebook for examination with his written paper.
This notebook must be certified by the candidate's Headmaster and by his Teacher as being the record of the
•candidate's independent work.
In the case of candidates who have not passed the
Intermediate Examination, the practical note-book submitted must contain evidence t h a t the practical work
of the Intermediate Syllabus has been covered by the
candidate.
Candidates- for the Leaving Examination, whether for
Pass or Honours, must submit the following collections
made by themselves: —
(a) Ten distinct grasses or clovers (either native or
introduced species).
(b) Ten common weeds.
I n both cases the specimens must be identified, named
and properly preserved, the date of collection and a
note as to the type of location being also recorded.
ANIMAL BIOLOGY—
2 W
A knowledge of the subject up to Intermediate standard is assumed, and questions involving this knowledge may be asked in the examination. In the case of
candidates who have not passed the Intermediate
examination, the record of practical work must include the work prescribed for t h a t examination.
1. The structure and life history of Amoeba, Paramecium, a simpe plant Flagellate, such as
Chlamydoraonas or Hacmatococcus.
The structure and life history of Hydra, the
earthworm.
Structure and life history of an insect with a
complete metamorphosis.
675-
2. The germ cells and fertilization.
Segmentation
of the fertilized egg up to the formation of
the three germinal layers, as illustrated by
the frog. Fate of the germinal layers in brief
outline. Development and metamorphosis in.
the frog.
3. General comparison of animals and plante.
especially in regard to nutrition.
4. Comparison of external features, and comparative anatomy of the circulatory, respiratory,
digestive, excretory and reproductive systems
of the forms of Protozoa studied. Hydra,
earthworm, insect, fish, frog, mammal, exclusive of the digestive, excretory and reproductive systems of t h e fish. External features,
including the structure of a feather, and the
alimentary canal of a bird.
6. General Physiology, to include some referenoe
to the physiology of the types studied; details as for the Intermediate examination,
the standard to be t h a t indicated by Huxley.
6. (a) The structure and function of the organs o f
special sense in man, excluding theories of
colour vision and hearing,
(b) The principal endocrine glands.
7. Each candidate must produce satisfactory evidence that he has—
(a) Personally dissected the mammalian eye
and heart.
(b) made a practical study of Amoeba; Param e c i u m ; a simple plant Flagellate;
H y d r a ; the earthworm; the external
features and metamorphosis of an insect;
tho external features and (alimentary
canal of the bird, including the structure of a feather; the dissection of ther a b b i t ; the microscopical structure of
bone, cartilage, striated muscle, nerve
cell and medullated fibre, epithelia, the
gastric mucous membrane, liver, pancreas or salivary gland, kidney, spinal,
cord.
£76
DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1938,
(c) made some practical study of the main
stages ot the development of the frog
(external features).
(d) performed .simple experiments on digestive
juices.
Text Books:
Buchanan: Elements of Animal Morphology, 2nd
Edition.
Huxley (revised by liarcroft): Lessons in Elementary
Physiology.
For reference:
Any elementary text-book of Zoology, such as Borradaile or Thomson, for the types mentioned
in paragraph 1.
Bainbridge and Menzies: Essentials of Physiology.
Holmes: General Biology.
HonoursIn the case of candidates who have not passed t h e
Leaving Pass Examination, the record of practical work
must include the work prescribed tor t h a t examination.
1. Cell division, mitosis, the chromosomes, meiosls
(very simply). Heredity. Examples and explanation of the monohybrid and dihybrid
Mendelian ratios.
Complex characteristics.
The conception of correlation between the
characteristics of parent and offspring (as
illustrated by the inheritance of stature).
The influence of heredity and environment on
the development of the organism.
2. The
general characteristics of the
following
phyla, including their morphology and tiie
physiological principles underlying the functioning of their main systems of organs. Except in the Arthropoda, and Vertebrata, no
sub-divisions of phyla are required to be known
by name, but pupils should have some
acquaintance from the study of specimens and
677
book illustrations of the general range of
form and modes of life exhibited in each
phylum.
Protozoa: with Plasmodium.
Porifera:
Coelenterata : Uydroid and Medusoid types j
colony formation ; the nature of corals.
Platyhelminthes.: tape worm.
Nemathelminthes: Ancylostpma.
Annelida: very brief comparison of t h e
external features and mode of life of
the earthworm, with those of the Polychaeta and leeches.
Arthropoda: Crustacea, Myriapoda, Insecta,
Araehnida: parthenogenesis, the organisation of an insect community such aa
t h a t of the hive bee or species of ant.
Mollusca: The general relation between
Gastropoda,
Lamellibranohiata
and
Cephalopoda.
Echinodermata.
Vertebrata: Pisces; Amphibia; Reptiles;
Aves ; Mammalia (Monotremata, Marsupialia, and Eutheria).
3. Evolution. Examples of the evidence from mor.
phology, embryology, palaeontology, and the
geographical distribution of animals (examples
to be taken.from the Vertebrata).
4. Micro-organisms and disease.
Parasitism in
general, illustrated by the forms mentioned
m Section 2.
u. Life and work of Darwin and Pasteur.
History of the discovery of the circulation of the
blood.
6. Practical Exercises.
Each candidate must produce satisfactory evidence
(a) t h a t he has personally dissected the frog and
rabbit (excluding the nervous system in the
latter),
and that he has examined
(b) so much as can be. observed without dissection
(except- in the case of the Mollusca) of t h e
following: three Protozoa in addition to
67S
DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1938|
Amoeba and Paramecium; examples of sponge
spicules and the dried skeleton of a horny
sponge ; transvere section of Hydra (low power
only), Obolia, coral; tape-worm ; a polychaete
worm, leech ; two crustaceans, a spider, cartwheel web of spider; external features of snail,
mussel and a Ccphnlopod, aud mantle cavities of
snail and mussel; starfish; lizard or snake;
two types of Bacteria,
(c) microscopical preparations of mitosis, and fertilization (e.g., in Ascaris).
Books recommended:
Text Books:
Buchanan : Elements of Animal Morphology, 2nd
Edition.
Huxley (revised by Harcroft): Lessons in Elementary
Physiology.
Por Reference:
Holmes: General Biology.
Radot: Life of Pasteur.
Holmes: Louis Pasteur.
Darwin: Autobiography of Charles Darwin.
Singer: The Discovery of the Circulation of the
Blood.
Borradaile, Eastham, P o t t s and Saunders: The
Invertebrata.
Graham Kerr: Evolution.
Any elementary text-book of Zoology, as for Leaving Pass.
Note.—A short synopsis of the scope of the special
work for honours is available on roneoed sheets for a
small fee, on application to the University Book Boom.
BOTANY—
Pass.
1. (a) Schizophyta, Bacteria.
0») Thallophyta.
1. Algae, Protococous, or an allied unicellular Alga, Spirogyra and Hormosira.
2. F u n g i , Mucor or
Rhizopus, Yeast,
Agaricus.
679
(c) Bryophyta, Marchantia.
(d) Pteridophtita, Pteridium, reproduction, macroscopic study of the vegetative structure.
(e) Angiospermae, Liliaceae, Amaryllidaceae, I r i daoeae,
Gramineae, .Rosaceae, Cruciferae,
Leguminosae, Prcteaceae, Myrtaceae, Solariaceae, Labiatae, Compositae.
The reproduction, ecology and economic importance of the types and families in this section should
be especially stressed: The work on types should be
a study of the evolution from lower to higher forms
rather than a series of isolated life histories.
2. Morphology a n d Anatomy of the Flowering Plant,
as for the Intermediate examination, but in greater
detail, with t h e addition of: Distinction between meristematic and permanent tissues; Microscopic structure of
tissues; Histology of young root, stem and leaf; Secondary growth of the Dicotyledon stem. Structure of
stamen. Development of ovule to seed.
3. P l a n t Physiology.—A detailed knowledge of the
chief physiological processes in plant life, including reproduction, with accounts of experiments, which have
been performed to illustrate these.
See scheme of suggested experiments.
4. P l a n t Distribution and Ecology.—An elementary
knowledge of plant distribution, as studied on at
least 3 field excursions, including t h e . modes of dispersal of plante. Accounts and maps, etc., should boentered into t h e pupil's practical book. The localities
visited should differ from one another as far as possible.
Use of quadrats in studying plant distribution;
5. Brief survey of the life and work of the following.-'
1. Joseph Dalton Hooker.
2. Baron von Mueller.
3. Robert Brown.'
4. Pasteur.
5. Pfeffer.
Practical Exercises (See under Honours details).
The following books are recommended: —
Text-book of Botany—Lowson.
or A Text-book of General Botany-^-Smith, ' Overton, Gilbert, or Botany for Senior' Students.
Thod»y.
£gO
For Practical Reference: —
Flora of Victoria—'Ewart.
An introduction to P l a n t Physiology — W . O.
James..
. The following references will give teachers some idea
of how certain experiments can be performed.
Nutrition and Growth—Yapp, p. 36, Expt. 5.
Carbon Assimilation—Lowson, Expts. 31-34.
Yapp, p. 60, Expt. 21.
Nitrogen Assimilation—Root Tubercles, James, p.
91, Expt. 27.
Plant Materials—Tests for cellulose, lignin and fats.
James, pp. 67-68, Expte. 19, 21, 23.
Respiration—Lowson, p . 204, E x p t . 57.
Darwin and Acton, Expt. 1.
Transpiration:— Potometer and weighing experiments.
Lowson, p. 183.
Irritability—
Geotropism—James, p. 217, Expt. 57.
Phototropisrh—James, p. 220, Expt. 64.
Honours.
Includes all School Leaving details for the present
year with a, more advanced knowledge of 1, 2 and 3,
involving a phylogenetic comparison of the reproduction of the members of the groups in section (1) to be
illustrated by revision of the types for Leaving Pass,
and the following additional types. These should ba
treated as broadly as possible more from the point of
view of evolution t h a n as individual types.
Algae—Vaucheria, Polysiphonia (or some other
member of the Florideae).
Fungi—Saprolegnia,
Penicillium or
Eurotium,
Ustilago (Smut), Puccinia (Rust).
Lichenes.—Usnea or Parmolia.
Musci—A moss.
Pteridophyta—Pteridium, Selaginella.
Oymnospermde—Pinus.
Angiospermae—Orcliidacbae, Chenopodiaceae, Rahun. cnlapeae, Rutaceae, Scrophulariaceae,
and
1
;
Epacridaceae.
V/; _
681
Morphology and Anatomy—
Secondary growth in a root.
Origin of lateral roots and stems.
Plant Physiology—
Pood-storage.
Translocation.
Enzymes.
Heredity, Evolution and the work of Darwin and
Mendel.
Plant Distribution and Ecology—
Types of vegetation such as tropical, temperate,
alpine, arctic, desert, coastal and marsh.
Practical Exercises, Leaving Pass and Honours.
out a course of practical work in a laboratory which haa
been approved after inspection bv inspectors appointed
by the Schools Board.
on application being made be permitted by the Schools
by tho candidate's Headmaster aud by his Teacher as being
the record of the candidate's indepentent work.
The pupils' practical books should give—
(1) Sketches and descriptions of the forms studied.
(2) Descriptions and sketches of experiments carried
out, or demonstrations seen.
(3) Descriptions of excursion"
Text-books as for Leaving Pass.
Teachers are recommended to consult more advanced
works, such as—
Plant Biology—MacGregor Skene.
P l a n t Physiology—Raber.
P l a n t Physiology—Maximo v.
Plant Geography—Hardy.
Text-book ot Botany—Strasburger.
Flora of Victoria.—Ewart.
42a
g-y2
Suggested Experiments:
Osmosis—Lowson, p. 172, Expt. 14.
Imbibition—Uptake ot water by seeds. James, p .
251, Expt. 68.
Carbon Assimilation—Lowson, Expts. 35 and 36.
James, p . 43, Expt. 12. Spectroscopic examination of the extract of a green leaf.'
Respiration—Lowson, Expt. 58. Darwin and Acton, Expt. 2.
P l a n t Materails—Tests for cellulose, lignin aud
fats. James, pp. 67-68, Expts. 20, 22, 24.
Enzymes—Lowson, p. 200, Expts. 50, 51 and 52 (or
use germinating barley).
An oxidase enzyme as in Potato, Broad Bean
or Apple.
Transpiration—Lowson, p. 184, Expt. 28.
Conduction—Measurement of length of vessels using
the mercury method.
Irritability—.
Geotropism—Lowson, p. 224.
Effect of temperature on protoplasm Death, points
of Oxalis and Tradescantia and the reasons
PhotoU-opism—James, p. 221, Expt. 65.
. for the difference.
Natural and artificial
pollination.
BRITISH HISTORY—
Pass1. British History from 1066-1603.
2. Australian History, with special regard
political and constitutional developments.
to
Honours1. British History from 1066-1603.
In addition—
J . B . Black—The Reign of Queen Elizabeth, 15581603 (O.U.P.).
Note.—It is intended t h a t there should be a rotation
of periods of study in , British History for, Leaving
Pass, a s follows:
i. 1066-1603.
ii. 1603-1783.
iii. 1783-1930.
683
CHEMISTRY—
Pass
• A.-fuller treatment, ot the work prescribed for the Intermediate Examination, and a more detailed
study of the following elements and their more
important compounds with one
another.
Hydrogen, chlorine (excluding the ory-oompounds), oxygen, sulphur, nitrogen, phosphorus, carbon, (excluding the preparation
and detailed properties of the simpler hydrocarbons), silicon, sodium, potassium, calcium,
magnesium, copper, zinc, aluminium, silver
and iron.
The chemistry, but not the technical details, involved
in the simpler methods ot extraction of t h e
elements mentioned above (excluding sodium,
potassium, calcium, magnesium, and silver),
and of the manufacture of glass, superphosphate, and alkali.
The molecular and atomic theory.
Avogadro'i
hypothesis. Vapour pressure. Dalton's Law
of Partial Pressures. Vapour density. Dulong
and Petit's Law of specific heats. Gaseous
diffusion. The determination of molecular
weights by the vapour density method. The
determination of atomic weights.
The nature ot salts, basic and acidic radicles, and the
more obvious phenomena of electrolysis. Dialysis (as illustrated in the preparation of
silicic acid).
Honours.
The details prescribed for the Pass Examination with
the addition of the following elements and their
more important compounds; chlorine (including the oxy-compounds), bromine, iodine
and fluorine: manganese; chromium; arsenic
and antimony; tin and lead; barium; meroury; the inert gases; and very brief treatment of cobalt and nickel. The methods of
extraction of manganese, chromium, arsenic,
potassium,
magnesium,
calcium,
barium,
nickel and cobalt are not required.
'
684
The natural classification of the elements (Periodiclaw).
A fuller treatment of the molecular theory, including some study of t h e deviations of gases from
the ideal state. Henry's Law ot the solubility of gases. Graham's Law of Diffusion.
An elementary treatment ot the modification of theproperties of a solvent by the presence of a>
solute, and the application of these phenomena to the determination of molecular
weights in solution by the freezing point and
boiling point methods..
Reversibility of actions, gaseous dissociation, massaction and equilibrium treated iu a simple
manner.
Electrolytes and non-electrolytes : an elementary
treatment of the ionic theory of electrolysis, of
" s t r o n g " and " w e a k " acids and of double
decomposition.
The chemical nature, sources and general properties of
the simple hydro-carbons (methane, ethylene,
and acetylene), alcohol, acetic acid, fat soap
and glycerine. An elementary treatment of
the destructive distillation of coal and t h e
fractionation of mineral oil.
The principles of homologous series as exemplified
in the paraffins, simple alcohols and fatty
acids.
The scope and standard ot the work for Pass are
indicated by the following books: Senter: Text Book of
Inorganic Chemistry or Jamieson: Senior Chemistry.
It is suggested t h a t teachers should recommend their
pupils to read selected parts of Smith's Inorganic Chemistry, edited by Kendall.
Practical Exercises—Pass and Honours.
out a course of practical work in a laboratory which hasbeen approved after inspection by inspectors appointed
by the Schools Board.
This course must comprise
suitable qualitative and quantitative experiments reasonably
distributed over the above syllabus, and the experimentsmust be the independent work of the candidate.
LEAVING. EXAMINATION.
685-
on application being made be permitted by the Schools
with his written papor; ' This notebook must be certified
by the candidate's Headmaster and by his Teacher as being
the record of the candidate's independent work.
COMMERCIAL
PRACTICE—
Pass
The Intermediate work prescribed under Bookkeeping
and, in addition :—-••
Errors.in Trial Balance; Adjustments before closingBooks; Single E n t r y problems;
Accounts
Current; Self-balancing ledgers and control
or adjustment accounts;. Partnership accoants—formation and dissolution—interest on capital—salaries—division of profits; Contingent
assets and liabilities; Income and Expenditure Account; Receipts and Payments Statement.
ffonoitrs.
The Pass Work, and, in addition: —
' Company Accounts; Entries ou formation includingconversion of sole traders and partnerships;
Forfeited Shares; Increase ana Reduction of
Capital; Classes of Shares; Statistical books.
Application and Allotment Book, Share Register,
Transfer Journal—Reserves Reserve F u n d s ;
Sinking Funds—Methods of providing for Depreciation—Tabular or Columnar Bookkeeping—
Executorship Accounts-—Statement of Affairs
and Deficiency Accounts—Branch Accounts
(excluding foreign currencies).
Book of r e f e r e n c e Company Accounts as applied to Australia and New
Zealand by Hislop.
COMMERCIAL PRINCIPLES—
Pass.
Kinds of Property, Real and Personal;
cial persons; Contracts; Agency;
CommerPartner-
-6^6
DETAILS. OF SUBJECTS, 1938
ships; Sale of Goods; Hire Purchase, Distinction from ordinary purchase; Bills of Exchange, Promissory Notes, Cheques; Insurance—Life, Fire, Marine—Qeneral principles
and documents; Bills of Lading, N a t u r e and
usual clauses; Nature ot a Oompany:
Methods of formation of different kinds of
Trading Companies; Classes of Shares; Bights
and Liabilities of Shareholders. .
Honours.
The Pass Work, and, in addition: —
Company Law, as dealt with in P a r t I of t h e Victorian Companies Act, in more detail.
Bankruptcy Law, Nature and objects. Acta of Bankruptcy, Petitions, Methods of Sequestration,
Consequences of Sequestration, Statement of
Affairs, Property divisible and not divisible;
Priority of debts, Discharge, Duties and]
Powers ot Trustee; Compositions and Schemes
of Arrangement, etc., according to P a r t 12
of the Act.
Trustees Under Wills; Nature and Classification
of Trusts; Rights, Powers and Duties of
Trustees.
Books of Reference: —
Victorian Companies Act, P a r t I., where applicable.
Federal Bankruptcy Act, omitting Administration,
Jurisdiction of Courts, Evidence, P a r t X I . ,
and Penalties.
Australian Commercial Law and Principles—last
edition (Mayman).
For Honours; Company Accounts as applied to
Australia and New Zealand by Hislop.
DOMESTIC SCIENCE AND ARTS—
PassSection AStudy of plant forms .used as foods, e.g., potatoes,
cabbage, onions, fruits, eto.
687
Section B .
Anatomy a n d Physiology.—
(a) A more advanced knowledge of the work as set
for the Intermediate examinations. The standard to be such as is indicated in Readable
Physiology and Hygiene, by J . Argyll Campbell, on Digestion, Nutrition, Circulation,
Respiration and Excretion:
Section CThe Chemistry of Foods and Dietetics-—Revision and
elaboration of the work as set for the Intermediate
Examination. The standard to be such as indicated in
Elementary Household Chemistry, by J. F . Snell, chapters XXXI to XXXIX inclusive."
Section D .
General-—
(a) The more common animal parasites transmissible
to man by meat and vegetables.
(b) Occurrence and importance of household animal
pests.
(c) The origin, choice - a d . care of animal and vegetable- fabrics in common use.
(d) Common poisons and their antidotes.
(e) The first treatment of common accidents (not
fractures) and simple illnesses.
(f) Organisation of work and finances of household.
(g) Catering and arrangement of menus.
Experimental Work.
The candidates must give evidence t h a t they have—
(1) Studied the structure of plant forms in Section
A;
(2) Performed- not less than 6 additional experiments illustrative of Section C. (Intermediate
Examination), and of Section C. (Leaving
Examination); •
(3) Carried out (under supervision), the practical
application of the principles involved in
Cookery, Laundry work and Housecraft.
688
DETAILS OF SUBJEOTS, 193S
Applied Practical ExercisesCookery.
Grilling, Invalid Cookery, Pastry (rough puff and
flaky).
More advanced work in Puddings and Cakes. Making of Jams, Bottling of F r u i t and Vegetables, etc., in addition to the work done in
the Intermediate Course.
Laundry Work.
Choice, cost, and care of utensils, labour saving
apparatus used in laundry work; choice and
economy in the use of cleaning materials.
Preparation for washing day, removal of stains,
arrangement of wash; making soap jelly,
boiling water starch.
Washing
flannels,
woollens stockings (woollen, cotton, silk), and
coloured materials; table and body-linen,
and household articles.
Care and use of ironing table. Starching. Ironing.
Treatment of lace, coloured embroidery, silks, and other materials as they are
brought into use.
Housecraft.
Cleaning and polishing materials, home-made or
otherwise.
Cleaning and polishing metals,
• woods (plain, painted and varnished), enamel
and lacquer ware, glass, brushes, windows,
shoes, gas fittings, walls, floors, and floor
coverings, baths. Turning out sitting-rooms
and bed rooms, daily and weekly routine.
Management of gas, oil lamps, candles and
electric light.
Spring cleaning. Laying of
..
table. Use of labour-saving appliances.
Books.
T h e Concise series of Practical Housecraft; 2.
Laundrywork, by F . Moat, published by
Longmans Green & Co., 39 Paternoster Bow,
London, E.C.4.; or,
Commonsense Laundry Book, compiled by N.S.W.
Cookery Teachers' Association, price 9d.
published bv Geo. B . Philip * Son, 45T
P i t t Street," Sydney.
689
Housecraft Principles
and Practice, by Ruth
Binnie and Julie Boxall (Sir Isaac Pitman
and Co.).
HonoursThis course definitely assumes a more scientific
approach to the subject.
An elementary knowledge
of the foundational sciences, physics and chemistry
will be of the greatest value to students taking this
course.
A more advanced treatment ot the work prescribed
for Pass with the addition of those aspect* of the
subject indicated in the details of the course.
DETAILS or
SUBJECT:
Section A.
Elementary Science in relation to the household.
The standard to be such as is indicated in
Snell, ch. IX to XXXI incl.
Section B.
Physiology a n d Hygiene(a) Tho standard and scope of the work is indicated in J . Argyll Campbell's Physiology and
Hygiene. Chapters I to V I I incl.
Section C.
The Chemistry of Food and DieteticsA revision and elaboration of the work as set for the
Pass examination, including a knowledge of the
general composition and function of foods, also the
dietary requirements of the body under varying conditions.
Snell: Chapters XXXI to XXXIX incl.
J . Argyll Campbell: Chapter V I I I .
Woods-Hutchinson: Chapters I I I . to I X incl.
Section D .
General.
(a) Illnesses and defences against illnesses.
Bacteria and other organisms, insects, etc.
Protection of food and water, infectious diseases,,
J . Argyll Campbell, Chapter XV.
690
0»
I. Textiles—origin, choice and care of animal and
vegetable fabrics.
Action of acids and alkalis in each; detection
of mixed fibres, bleaching, blueing and
dyeing
Snell. Ch. XL to X L I I I incl.
LT. Clothes — uses as protection, influence upon
evaporation, absorption and radiation.
J . Argyll Campbell, Ch. I X .
(c) Ventilation and Heating.
J . Argyll Campbell. Ch. X.
(d) Organisation of work and budgeting for household requirement.
Laboratory Work, Pass and HonoursEvery candidate in this subject must have carried
out a course of practical work in a school which has
by the Schools Board. This course must comprise suitable experiments reasonably distributed over the above
syllabus, and the experimente must be the independent
work of the candidate.
A candidate whose practical work has been carried out
in a school which has not been inspected may. on application being made, be permitted by the Schools Hoard to
submit her practical notebook for examination with her
written paper.
This note-book must be certified by the candidate's
Head Master and by her teacher as being a record of
the candidate's independent work.
Candidates must give evidence t h a t they have performed the following experimental and practical exercises :
Experimental and Practical Work.
Elementary Household Chemistry.
(1) At least three experiments to illustrate
chemical changes. Snell, Chapters I to IX
incl.
(2) Perform at least six experiments to show
the characteristics of acids, bases and salts.
691
Experimental—
Cookery.
(a) Determination ot amounts in 100 caloric
portions of following: meat, vegetable,
cereal and nuts.
(b) Study of vegetables—structure, classification.
Function in the dietary of potato, carrot,
onion, bean and cabbage.
Experiments to illustrate losses in cookery in different ways.
Examples: potato, carrot and parsnips.
Practical—
(a) Arrange daily menus for three meals.
(a) vegetarian diet.
(b) mixed diet, indicating the approximate caloric values of each item in
the menus.
(b) Prepare the dishes in successive lessons suitable for. a man engaged in
(a) sedentary work.
(b) muscular work,
at a minimum cost.
(c) Prepare a menu of meals suitable for children six years of age, indicating
the
approximate caloric values of each, and
prepare the dishes.
Laundry.
(a) Experimental—study the origin, choice and
care of animal and vegetable textiles.
Examine experimentally the action of acid*
. and alkalis on each using the above in
the detection of mixed fibres.
, (b) Work out a systematic course to be adopted
in. the removal of stains from fabrics, cotton, wool, silk and linen, stained with ink
(red and black), fruit, tea, grease and
paint. Show in practical books, specimen*
which have been treated.
Practical. -.
Test out t h e above experimental results for practical
laundry work and carry out more advanced work, t h a n
is indicated in the Pass Course.
€92
Housecraft—Experimental.
(a) Perform a t least six experiments to show
the characteristics of acids, bases and salts.
Illustrate specifically their relations to
rusts and tarnishes.
(b) Soaps and Scouring Powders.
Examine at least two commercial soaps and
two scouring powders for
(i.) Grit and insoluble matter.
(ii.) Detergent action of soap.
Practical.
Apply the above experimente to the cleaning of
metals, wood and carpets.
Text Books : ^
Readable Physiology and Hygiene—J. Argyll
Campbell. (Bell and Sons Ltd., London).
The New Handbook of Health—Woods Hutchinsou.
(The Riverside
Press,
Cambridge,
U.S.A.).
Elementary Household Chemistry—J. P . Snell.
(Macmillan).
Books for reference :—
Chemistry of Nutrition.—H. C. Sherman. (Macmillan).
Applied Chemistry—Tinkler and Master.
Feeding the Family—Rose. (Macmillan).
Primer of Dietetics.—W. A. Osborne (Ramsay).
Domestic Economy — Bidder
and
Baddelej
(Cambridge and University Press).
Physics of the Household—C. J . Lynd'e (Macmillan).
Practical Laundrywork for Home and School—
Louise Wetenhall (Sir Isaac Pitman & Sons).
DRAWING^
Pass.
Candidates must take four parts, and for a pass must
pass in three, parte, and in the remaining p a r t must
satisfy, the examiners t h a t they have some knowledge
thereof.
LEAVING EIAMINATION.
693
PAET I.—Drawing from Models and Objects
Candidates will be required to make a drawing from a
group of not more than three subjects, selected from
geometrical models and common objects, as they aippear
when placed before them. The common objects will be
selected from such articles as pails, basins, jugs, books
and the like. The drawing may be executed in outline
with the pencil, or in very simple l i g h t and shade.
Time—1J hours.
PART II.—History and Appreciation of Art.
Question on the history and appreciation of Art, as
for the Intermediate Examination, with the following
additions: —
Grecian—Grecian Vases.
Roman—The Triumphal Arch of Constantine.
Renaissance—Italy: Titian.
England: Sir Christopher Wren and
St. Paul's Cathedral.
Georgian—Constable; Flaxman and Wedgwood; the
Furniture Designers, Chippendale and Sheraton.
Time—1J hours,
or,
GEOMETRICAL DRAWING—
As in the Intermediate Examination, together with
simple problems on circles touching circles or straight
lines; the inscription or circumscription of circles
within and about circles or other plane figures; foiled
figures consisting of tangential arcs or of semi-circles
with adjacent diameters; the construction of the ellipse
under easy conditions; plans and elevations of simple
objects and structures t o scale; more difficult exercises
in the development of prisms, cylinder, cone and pyramids and the like.
Time—1$ hours.
PART I I I . Drawing P l a n t Forms from Nature.
Candidates will be required to - make a drawing from
Nature of a spray of leaves,' or of flowers and leaves.
The work to be executed with "the pencil, pen. or brush.
When the plant form is drawn in silhouette black.must
not be used.
Time-^-1 hour.
694
DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 193S.
PART IV.—Decorative Design.
Candidates will be required to design a border, a
diaper or a filling tor any simple geometric shape, using
suitable decorative forms derived from plant life. The
design to be executed in colour, on a coloured ground.
Any medium the candidate choses may be employed,
but preferably water colour.
1
Time—2 hours.
DRAWING—
Honours.
Candidates must take four parte, etc., a<s in Pass
paper.
PART I.—Drawing from Models and Objects.
A more advanced treatment of the work prescribed
for Pass.
Time—1J hours.
P A S T II.—History and Appreciation of Art.
A more advanced treatment of the work prescribed
for Pass, with the following additions:
Architecture:
The Church of St. Mark,
Venice.
Painting;
Rembrandt; Vandyck;
Gainsborough.
Time—1$ hours.
Or,
Geometrical Drawing—As for the Leaving Pass
Examination, with the following additions:
Diagonal scales. Sections of simple solids and
structures. More difficult exercises in geometric development.
Time—1J hours.
PABT m . — D r a w i n g P l a n t Forms from Nature.
. A more advanced treatment of the work prescribed
for Pass, t o be executed in colour.
Time—1 hour.
P a r t TV.—Decorative Design.—A more advanced treatment of the work prescribed for Pass, including the
employment of not fewer than three tones ot colours;
or
.Decorative Design applied to such subjecte as a cover
for a school magazine, a portfolio, an initial letter or
monogram, a sports programme, a certificate, a simple
poster, a menu card, and the like.
Time—2 hours.
,
LEAVINO EXAMINATION.
695.
Reference books for teachers—
History of Art—
" Shown to the Children Series "—
Fainting—Lawrence Wilson.
Architecture—Gladys Wynne,
architecture—Waterhouse (Hodder and Stoughton).
Architecture—Bell (Jack).
Little Books about Old Furniture—
Vol. II—Chippendale and his school.
Vol. IV—The Sheraton Period.
The Furniture Collector—Gregory (Herbert Jenkins)
Period Furniture (Woodworker's Series, Evan's Bros.
Ltd., London).
Geometrical D r a w i n g Perspective and Geometrical Drawing—Dean
and Jolly (Oxford University Press).
ECONOMICS—
Pass.
Economic Principles affecting the following topics:
W a n t s , Utilities and Welfare; wealth and c a p i t a l ;
wealth and income; the national income.
Methods of production; factors of production;
division of labour and specialisation of production generally; diminishing r e t u r n ; entrepreneurs and industry.
Exchange, value and price; marginal u t i l i t y ; consumers' surplus; specialisation and exchange;
business organisation and markets.
Demand and supply and market price; elastic and
inelastic demand; demand and supply curves.
Costs of production; market price and profit; marginal producers; representative
firm;..pricesand profits.
Land and r e n t ; marginal l a n d ; rent and prices;
economic and contract r e n t ; unearned increment.
Capital and interest; investment; its risks and
rewards; production and the r a t e of interest.
Labour and wages; causes of wage differences; t h e
demand for goods and the demand' for- labour ;•
V
real and nominal wages.
,696
DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 193 8,
Management and profits; the reward for fores i g h t ; the task of management; quasirente.
. .
Monopolies and prices; organisation of capital;
state control of monopolies.
Labour organisations; arbitration; basic wage;
unemployment.
Functions and qualities ot money; cash and credit;
banking
and
monetary
control;
bank
deposits and bank notes; central banks.
The value of money; general level of prices; index
numbers.
Credit and business cycles; cheap and
dear
money; investment and the cycle; speculation and crisis.
Theory of international trade and foreign exchange; comparative costs;
international
loans; the balance of payments; rates of
exchange.
Trade and tariffs; self-sufficiency and diversity of
industries; employment; dumping; reciprocal treaties.
Functions of Government; industry and t h e S t a t e ;
wage and factory regulation.
Taxation; theory of t a x a t i o n ; Federal and State
taxation in Australia; public debt.
Economic History. The manorial system; growth
of tho towns; mediaeval t r a d i n g ; Enclosure
Acta ; mercantilism; t h e wool industry; • the
Industrial Revolution;
laissez-faire;
Factory Acts; history of t r a d e unionism; the
growth of large scale production and the
t r u s t movement.
The paper will be partly on Economics and partly
on Economic History, one-third of the marks being
allotted to Economic History.
The topics should be treated as far, as possible from
an Australian point of view.
Students are expected to read t h e following:
Pass.
-,. (a) One of the following books—
•••-.••:
Derry-r-Outlines of:English Eoonomio.History.
Warner—Landmarks in iEnglish: Industrial History.
697
•(b) One ot the following books—
Clay—Economics tor the General Reader (Macmillan)
(omitting Chapters xxii and xxv).
Irving, G. W.—Man and His Wants (Macmillan)
Silverman—Substance of Economics (Pitman), Australian Edition)
(e) Copland—The
Australian
Economy:
Simple
Eoonomio Studies. (Angus and Robertson.)
Honours.
In addition to the books set for Pass students will be
required to read:
Henderson—Supply and Demand.
(Cambridge
Univ. Press.)
Lehfeldt—Money. (Oxford Univ. Press.)
Irving—Caveman t" * lapUalist— An Introduction to
English and Australian Economic History
(Macmillan.)
ENGLISH—
Pass1. A short Essay of about 400 words t o test candidates' power of expression, arrangement, aud thought.
Credit will be given for subject-matter, structure and
style. Attention must be paid to handwriting, spelling
and punctuation.
[50 minutes.]
2. Precis-Writing.—A short unseen passage of about
300 words will be set. Candidates will be required to
reproduce in their own words tho substance of the passage reduced to about .one-third of ite original length.
The Examiners recommend the use ot a. text-book
on Precis-Writing such as—
Aughterson—" Precis-Writing "
(Whitcombe
and
Tombs).
Compton—" A Systematic Course of Precis-Writing " (Harrap);
or
Halliday—" Guide to Precis-Writing," (E. Arnold).
[30 minutes.]
3. Two set-books for special study—
(a). Shakespeare, "The Tempest," or " Coriolanua."
43a
698
(b) " Browning " (cd. Marshall and Lyall. Australasian Literature Primers, Whiteombe and
Tombs, 2/-).
[Passages marked with an
asterisk are not set for examination.]
4. Three set-books for general reading:
(a) Hardy, " Under the Greenwood Tree " (Macmillan, Cottage Library, 2/9), or Charlotte
Bronte, " S h i r l e y , " (World's Classics, 2/6).
(b) Essays, " E n g l i s h and A u s t r a l i a n " (Ed. Cowling, O.U.P.), viz., the essays by Lamb, Hazlitt, Hunt, Dickens and Murdoch.
(c) " An Anthology of Modern Verse " (Methuen,
4/3).
In studying the books set for general reading, candidates should endeavour to understand and appreciateeach work as a whole. Minute annotational study is not
expected, but an English dictionary, such as the " Oxford Pocket Dictionary," should be used.
I n Sections 3 and 4 two alternative questions on each
book will be set.
I n addition to the Essay and the Precis, candidates
must answer three (3) questions from Sections 3 aud
4, at least one of which must be from Section 3.
;•
Honours.
PAPER I—
(a) A selection from Chaucer, to be studied in t h e
original language.
(b) A play ot Shakespeare to be studied in detail.
(c) Selections from Browning.
Five (5) questions must be answered, including a
compulsory context-question to test candidates' familiarity with the actual text.
Books prescribed for December, 1938:
Chaucer—" The Prologue to the Canterbury Tales."
Shakespeare—' 'Macbeth.''
Browning—Australasian Literature Primers (ed.
Marshall and Lyall, Whiteombe and Tombs).
For reference:
Manly—" The Canterbury Tales " (Harrap).
LEAVING EXAMINATION. ,
699
PAPER I I . —
. Three (3) set-books for General Reading.
The questions will not presume acquaintance with
matters of textual criticism or literary history, except
in so far as is necessary for the understanding of the
prescribed texts. Some choice ot Question in set-books
•will be given. .
,,
Five (5) questions must be answered.
Books prescribed for December, 1938:
1. Shakespeare—"The Tempest."
2. " The Outliue of English V e r s e " (ed. Cowling,
Macmillan).
Selections to be studied: Milton, Sovonteeth Century
Lyrics, Pope (excluding " The Epistle to Arbuthnot )
and Keats.
3. Essays, English and Australian (ed. Cowling,
O.U.P.) viz., the essays by Lamb, Hazlitt,
Hunt, Dickens and Murdoch.
For general reading, but not set for examination:
Groom—" Literary History of E n g l a n d " (Longmans).
Cowling—"The Use of E n g l i s h " (Melb.< Univ.
Press, 5/-).
Wollman—" Modern Poetry " (Macmillan, 4/6).
L.von—" The Discovery of Poetry " (Arnold, 4/6).
EUROPEAN
HISTORY—
Pass.
The period 1715-1914.
Honours.
The work prescribed for pass with an intensive
study of the Revolution in France, 178&'; 1799.
For the special Honours work, teachers may find the
following books helpful:
Madelin—The French Revolution.
A. G. Grant and Temperle'y—Europe. The Revolutionary and Napoleonic E t a s , chapters I
• to IV.
•Elton—-The Revolutionary Idea in Prance. '.:;,-:
700
DETAILS OF
SUBJECTS, 1938
FRENCH—
(See Note for Teachers at commencement of Intermediate French Details.)
GENERAL PRESCRIPTIONS.
Pass.
(a) Translation into English of unseen passages of
French prose; and a comprehension test based
on a passage of unseen prose.*
(b) Translation into French of short easy passages
of English,
(o) Original composition in French. Three subjecte
arising from the prescribed prose texts will
be given; a composition of not more t h a n
200 words must be written on one ot these.
(d) Reading aloud from prescribed prose and verse.
(e) Dictation.
•--.-Honours(a) Translation into English of unseen passages of
French prose.
. (b) Translation into French of short passages of
English.
(o) Original composition in French. Two subjects
will be set on the prescribed prose texts, aa
well ae three on general topics: A short
essay must be written on one of these.
(d) Reading aloud of unseen prose and prescribed
verse. Conversation.
(e) Dictation.
N . B . 1.—Two examination papers will be set for
Honours, the First Paper consisting of passages for
translation from and into French, the Second Paper
dealing with Composition.
N . B . 2.—Candidates taking dictation should copy
down the title exactly as it is written by the examiner,
and should know the French names for the punctuation
signs, as follow:
Point (.)
Point d'interrogation (?)
•A passage of unseen prose will be j-'iven, and the candidate will beasked to answerOn- English) questions on it* content, instead of translator, in order to show that he has understood it.
701,'
Point d'exclamation (!)
Points de suspension ( . . . . )
Deux points (:)
Point e t virgule (;)
Virgule (,)
Parenthese ( ( ) )
Guillemets (" ")
Tiret (
)
"
Trait d'union (hyphen)
I .-•'.
LEAVING PASS TEXTS FOR 1938.
Prescribed:
Cinq Maitres du Conte francais, ed. Cornell (Shakes~i-..-,;:
peatre Head Press). (N.B.—This book will be
-';,."', T
temporarily
discontinued after 1938.)
•••: ,•:•: - 1.-Mateo Falcone. . ;
. . . . . . :2. Un Episode sous la Terreur.
S. Le Loup.
Specimens of Modern French Verse, ed. Berthon
(Macmillan):
'
1. Berangcr: Souvenirs du Peuple.
2. L. de Lisle: Midi.
3. Baudelaire: Les Hiboux.
4. Sully-Prudhommc: L o V a s e brise.
5. Veriainc: Chanson d'Automne.
N.B.—This- book will' probably- be discontinued after
1938.
'"...."
:-:
N.B.—About 75.lines chosen from these poems should b e
memorised.
Recommended: —
•Le Tresor de Chateauvieux—Ford and Hicks (Dent).
1/6 E n g ,
*Colomba—Ford and Hicks' (Dent). 1/9 Eng.
L'He Sans Norn—Maurice Level (Blackie).
Jusqu'a la Lune—O. Haustein (Blackie).,
Durtol: lAviateur;—Adapted. Packer (Macmillan).
1/6
E n g .
L'He Fercor—Arranged.
2/- Eng.
••'
""'••
"
.-'
;
.';
A. C. Smith (Macmillan,).
* Books marked with an asterisk: are within a ward-count of 1200 words..
702
DETAILS
OF -SUBJECTS,' 1933.
Arsene Lupin — Maurice' Leblanc'". (Dent), Book
I . 1/6 Eng. '
- . : ... ••::
Arsene Lupin — Maurice Leblanc (Dent), Book
I I . 1/9 E n g .
Jean e t Jcannette—Gautier " (Shakespeare Head
Press).
Contours Francais—Collins (Macmillan). 2/6 E n g .
Two French Plays—N. W . H . Scott (Macmillan).
Six French Plays-^-R. J.:- Thompson (Harrap). 3/9
Aust.
French Comedies for Girls—ed. Ritchie (Nelson).
2/- Eng.
- Descriptive:— .
La France—Hills and Dondo (Heath). : 3/- Eng.
about 150 to 200 pages chosen from-the books recommended.
LEAVING HONOURS TEXTS FOR 1938. •
Prescribed: —
Cinq Maitres du Conte francais, ed, Cornell*
(Shakespeare Head Press). As for Leaving
Pass.
Specimens of Modern French Verse, ed. Berthon*
(Macmillan). As for Leaving Pass.
N.B.—About 100 lines chosen from the prescribed
poems should be memorised.
••
• Recommended :—
-•'..''.
Le Livre des Betes qu'on appelle sauvages—Deni.ii'-'
son (Cambridge). 3/6 Eng.
...
Maria Chapdelaine—Louis Hemon (Cambridge).. 416
Eng.
Les, Silences du Colonel Bramble—Maurois (Cambridge). 4/6 . Eng.
Les Disoours.du Docteur O'Grady—Maurois (Cambridge). 3/6 Eng.
Peoheur d'Islande—Pierre Loti (Harrap). 2/3 Eng.
Carmen e t Autr'es .Nouvelles—Merimee (Harrap).'
2/6 Eng.
•This book will be discontinued for
Honours after 1938.
Leaving
.. I-EAVItW EXAMINATION.
703"
Le Capitaine Fracasse—Gautier (Dent). 2/3 Eng. ,
Le Roi des Montagues—About (Harrap). 2/6 Eng.
.. Mon Oncle et mon Cure—Jean de La Brete (Har| •" ' r a p ) . 2/3 E n g .
Tartarin de Tarascon—Daudet (Dent). 1/9 E n g . " ' . '
', Les" Trois Mbusquetaires — Dumas (Harrap). 2j-~
'•••"
'-
"
E n g .
-
•
- . • " - • •
Vingt Ans Apres—Dumas (Ginn). 3/9 Eng.
"'••
!
L a Tuiipe noire—Dumas (Harrap). 2/3 Eng; •' Voyage au Centre de la Terre—Jules Verne (Ear-
-••r •'
rap).'
-:
2/. Eng.
De la Terre a la Lune—Jules Verne (Harrap). 21Eng.
;"• •
Robinson Crusoe1—Defoe (Cambridge). 2/6 Eng.
Jean-Ohristophe—Remain Holland (Albin-Michel),
5/6 ; Aust.
Le Livre de mon Ami—An stole France (Oxford).
Eugenie Grandet—Balzac (Harrap). 2/6 Eng.
Histoire d'un Merle blanc—Musset .-(Hachette). 1/6
Eng.
Plays—
'
-;.-.,;.
. :.;• Madame Sans-Gene—Sardou (Harrap). 2/6 E n g .
Le Docteui; Knocks-Jules Remains- ; (T,ongrnans).
- Four Contemporary One-Act Plays—edit.' • Fite
(Harrap).; 2/6 Eng.
Three Comedies—Musset (Harrap or Nelson). 2/.
Eng:
Le Voyage de Monsieur Perrichon—Labiche and
. M a r t i n (Dent). 6d. Eng.
,;. Lft-Poudre aux-Yeux—Labiche and Martin (Harrap). 1/3 Eng.
Les Romanesques—Edmond Rostand (Ginn). •. 2/9
Eng.
-Le Gendre de Monsieur Poirier—Augier (Dent or
Harrap); 1/9 E n g .
VJerse: —
... Fables—La Fontaine (Dent). 6d; Eng.
••'-,•'• One Hundred Pabjes—La Fontaine..(Ginn). 2/9
E n g .
.
'-
. • ' • ' •
N.B.—It is suggested that candidates . should/.read
about 200 to 300 pages chosen from the'books recommended. !-.':•"• .> -.;•
• ; :•.:••;;:-. — ::•••'!;•<»
704
DETAILS
OF SUBJECTS, 1038
GEOGRAPHY—
Introductory Note.—The chief purpose of Geographies a school subject is to be found in the study of the
world in relation to man's activities. I t is expected
therefore t h a t both in the fteld and in the class-room
teachers will emphasise the effects of geographical conditions upon human life, and occupations.
Practical determination of latitude a t equinoxes and
solstices.
Effects of the rotation and of the revolution of t h e
Earth.
Zone time and the time zones of Australia
Solar time.
General proofs of the spherical shape of the E a r t h ,
including the Bedford Level experiment.
Work- of running water.. Activities of rivers in
mountain, valley and plain tracts. The de;•
velopment of rivers.
V
Work of ice. Nature and origin of glaciers and ice
sheets. Ice movement, ice erosion, deposits
left by land and floating ice.
v Work of wind. Importance in arid climates; Sand
dunes, loess, sand blast erosion.
Work of sea along coasts. Description of different
coast types, such as Atlantic, Pacific and
'• '•' modified Pacific types. • The continental shelf,
the continental slope. The Great Barrier
' Beef.' ' "
The geographical cycle of erosion, and the effects
ot earth movements on ' streams a n d along
coasts.
Lakes. Formation and destruction.
Volcanoes. Types of cones. Distribution of active
and recently extinct volcanoes. Geysers and
hot springs. Relation to weak parts ot the
crust.
Simple treatment of the causes, effects and distribution of earthquakes. Relation to weak
parte of the crust. The recording of earthquakes by the seismograph.
Nature, origin and classification of the .'principal
land forms:
Plains—Alluvial flats, flood, d e l t a , . coastal
LEAVING- EXAMINATION.-
705-
and lava plains, peneplains, and shore
platforms.
Plateaux—young and dissected.
Mountains 1 —volcanic, residual. Mock and
fold.
Valleys and basins.
Ocean surface currents. Their distribution and relat i o n to wind currents. . The production of
tides and their effects in open oceans and
along coast lines..
Planetary circulation of the atmosphere, and itscauses. Ferrel's Law. " L o w e " and " h i g h s , "
, , and their weather characteristics.
Buys
V'.' .'Ballot's Law.of. the. Winds. Study, with the
aid of daily weather charts, of air circulation over Aus-tralia.
'""
A full treatment of the fallowing countries ot t h e
world, including as 'major
topics build,
climate, vegetation, people, population densities, industries (forestry, mining, agricul
ture, manufactures, etc.), internal communications, and the reasons for the importance
• of. the chief cities.
•-..-..
The British Einpirf
United States of
France
America
Germany
Argentina
Russia
Japan
Holland
China
Belgium
, Egypt .:
Denmark
Italv
Reading, of contoured . maps and drawing ot crosssections. Description of the physiography of
...- •
areas :of different character.
'"'.• / ' r a d i c a l Exercises—Pass.
All candidates must submit for examination indexed
Laboratory and'Field Note Books. (See general note in
Handbook eonoerning Laboratory Note Books.)
The note-books should give a record in the student's
own words of the field excursions, and of the practical
work performed by the candidate, but the following
are the minimum requirements t h a t will be accepted: —
7.06
DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 193S
-: 1. Records ot astronomical and meteorological
observations.
2. Descriptions, with sketches and sections, of five
geographical field excursions (geological information should be included only when
revelant t o a.' discussion of the geography ot
t h e . area described)..
Descriptions, with
sketches; of two excursions, illustrating important industries, may replace two of the
above field excursions.
3. Contoured topographic plans representing 'five
imaginary or real areas of distinct and diversified relief, accompanied by descriptions of
the physical geography of each area, and by
topographic sections.
4. A plane table survey of a schoolyard or other
convenient area.
Nxite.—The plane table survey may be a copy made
l>y the student of a map surveyed under the supervision of the teacher, but each student should take a
share,.in its production.
Sets of 8 topographic maps suitable 1 for practical work
i u Geography may be obtained from the Geological
Department, University, at 1/- per set.
Books of reference for teachers: —
The Groundwork of Geography—Wilmore.
The World—L. D. Stamp and A. Grenfell Price.
An Introduction to Physical Geography—Marion I .
Newbigin.
•• Australia, Physiographic and Eoonomio—Griffith
Taylor.
The World New Regional Geographies, Book IV.—
L. Brooks.
Australian Meteorology—Griffith Taylor.
. Outline of the Physiography and Geology of Vic. : . toria (Section on Physiography only).—Edited;
- b y Professor Skeats (Melb. Univ. Press).
Honours.
Introductory iVote.—Formal class teaching a t t h e
Leaving -Honours' stage should be reduced to permit ol
LKAVINO KXAMINATION
707
work of a more individual character being undertaken by
the student. Class discussions, reading, essays, map study
and excursions should play a large part in the programme of work planned by the teacher.
A. The Commonwealth of Australia, New Zealand,
P a p u a , and the M a n d a t e d Territories of Australia and New Zealand.
Detailed study ot the build, drainage, character of
coasts, climatic control, and natural regions of
the above countries. Geographical control of
settlement. Distribution of population and of
primary and secondary industries ; exports and
imports; direction and character ot overseas
trade ; communications and transport, including
principal parts.
B. The Pacific BasinThe submarine contours of the Basin; types of
islands; continental shelves; winds and currents : countries of the Pacific Basin treated
broadly, but with special reference to China
and J a p a n ; the production and exchange of
raw materials and foodstuffs; the islands and
their future; native races and their administration; tropical settlement; mandates.
C.
Selected Countries for Special Study.
The treatment expected is approximately of the
standard indicated in Laborde's " T h e World
in Outline " (Camb. Univ. . Press), i.e.,
physical, economic and political geography
in relation to other countries, and t h e
economic resources in some detail.
Canada
Italy
Tropical Africa
D. Mathematical and Physical.
(i) Foucault's pendulum experiment and the gyroscope,
(ii) Solar and lunar eclipses, with emphasis upon
proofs, of t h e E a r t h ' s sphericity, and other
results of scientific value.
708
UKTA1L8 OF SUBJKCTS
1D3S
(iii) Simple study of the properties of, and methoda
of obtaining the Mercator, globular, conical
and Mollweide map projections; great circles
and great circle sailing.
PRACTICAL EXERCISES (Honours).
Each candidate must submit for examination hia
Laboratory and Field. Note Book. (See general note in
Handbook concerning Laboratory Note Books.)
• These note-books may include those which have been
submitted for Pass, but where the number of excursions,
maps, etc., required for Honours exoeeds those required
for Pass, such additional work must be recorded in the
note-books submitted.
own words, of the field excursions, and of the practical
are the minimum requirements t h a t will be accepted: —
Descriptions, with sketches and sections, ot nine
geographical field excursions.
Descriptions
with sketches, of three excursions illustrating
important industries, may replace three of
the above field excursions.
Books of Reference for Teachers: —
Reference should be made to those books recommended
for the Leaving Certificate (Pass), together with the
following: —
Laborde—The World in Outline.
Wood—The Pacific Basin.
Simmons and Stenhouse—Class Book of Physical
Geography.
Tarr and von Engeln—New Physical Geography.
Commonwealth Year Book of Australia.
Lewis—A Handbook of Solar Eclipses.
GEOLOGY—
Pass.
Dynamical Geology—Geological agents which act upon
.-.-,,
rooks of the earth's crust, considered especially
as agents of denudation, transport and deposition.
LKAVING EXAMINATION.
709
Movements of subterranean water and the positions of springs, wells and soakages. Organic
and chemical agencies; their constructive effects
as in the formation of carbonaceous and calcareous deposits ; their destructive effects as in the
weathering of rocks, and the production of soils.
Subterranean agencies—the movements of the
earth's crust, including the formation of anticlinal and synclinal folds and over folds; faulting, including the formation of normal, step,
ridge and trough faults ; earthquakes and
volcanoes; mountain building (simpler aspects).
The chief types ot igneous intrusions.
'Penological Geology—The origin, composition, structures, classification and field relations of the
more important stratified, igneous and metamorphic rocks.
Historical Geology—A recognition of the prominent
characters of the great subdivisions of the
invertebrates and plants, and their value
when found in the fossil state. Methods of
fossilization. Classification ot the stratified
rocks.
The great geological groups, their
principal subdivisions, and the broad outlines
of the life forms on the globe during their
formation. An elementary knowledge of the
stratigraphy of Victoria.
Mineralogy—The physical properties, chemical composition and modes of occurrence of the common
ores and rock-forming minerals.
The types ot Minerals, Rocks and Fossils to be studied
are set out under practical exercises.
*Pradical Exercises.
..Laboratory and Field Note-books. (See general note
in Handbook on Laboratory Note-books).
*1. Sets of 12 maps suitable for practical work in 'Geology, may be
obtained from the Geological Department, University, at 1/- per set.
2. Complete sets of Specimens of Crystal Models, Minerals, Rocks and
Fossils' niay be obtained from the Geological Department, University, for
*
«
•
- . • • ' ,
• ;
L'71'0
; ; The note-books should give a record in the student's
; Own words ot the field excursions and of the practical
:
' are t h e minimum requirements t h a t will be accepted: —
(a) Descriptive notes with sections of uot less than
. five geological excursions.
(6) Not less than five geological diagrams or plana
(not necessarily hand-drawn) representing different ideal or real areas diversified of geology,
with geological sections and descriptions of the
geology of each area,
(c) Descriptive notes with sketches illustrating the
physical characters, etc., of the following
Crystal Models, Minerals, Rocks' and Fossils:—
Crystal Models—i. Cubic; 2, Tetragonal; 3, Hexagonal; 4, Orthorhombio; 5, Monoolinio; 6,
Triolinic,
Note:—The numbers correspond with the numbers of
specimens in sets supplied by the Geological Department, University.
Crystallographic axes and types of faces to be shown
in sketches.
Minerals—1, Quartz; 3, Orthoclase; 4, Labrador i t e ; 5, Biotite; 6, Muscovite; 7, Hornblende; 8, Augite; 9, Olivine; 10, Garnet;
11, Chiastolite; .12, Kaolin; 17, Calcite; 18,
Aragonite; 19, Magnesite; 23, B a r i t e ; 24,
Gypsum; 26, Hematite; 27, Magnetite; 28,
Limonite; 31, F y r i t e ; 32, Chaloopyrite; 34,
Galena; 35, Sphalerite.
Bocks—1, Granite (red); 2, Granite (grey); 3,
Granodiorite; 4, Syenite; 5, Diorite; 6.
Gabbro; 7, Quartz porphyry; 8, Diabase;
9, Pegmatite; 10, Graphic Granite;••11, Obsidian; 12, Pumioe; 13, Rhyolite; 14, Trachyte; 15, Dacito; 16. Basalt; 17, Tuff; 18.
Breccia; 19, Conglomerate; 20, Sandstone;
22, Mudstone; 23, Shale; 24, Limestone
(Tertiary); 25, Limestone (Palaeozoic); 28,
Chiastolite Slate; 31. Slate; 32, Mica Schist;
33, Mica Schist; 35, Gneiss; 36. Gneiss.
LEA VINO EXAiOJiATION.
71 J
Fossils—1, Amphistegina; 2, Globigerina; 3, Tetrag r a p t u s ; 4, Didymograptus; 5, Monograptus;
6, Placotrochus; 7, Favosites; 8, Cidaris;
9, Lovenia; 10, Spirifer; 11, Terebratula; 12,
Glyoymeris; 13, Chione; 14, Natica; 15, Turritella; 16, Amaltheus; 17, Belemnites; 18,
Dalmanites; 19, Calymene; 20, Lepidodendron; 21, Glossopteris.
Honours.
The Examination for Honours will be set on t h e
work presented for the Pass Examination, together
with the following additional work: —
Dynamical Geology—
The mineralogical and chemical changes by which
the valuable constituents of soil are made
available for plant food. Formation of monoclinal folds, reversed and thrust faults aud t h e
relationship between folds and faults. Tho chief
types of mountains and the processes involved
in mountain building. The chief types of igneous
intrusions and their modes of origin.
Historical Geology.—•
The geological systems, their principal subdivisions, including the recognition of terrestrial, lacustrine, marine, glacial and volcanic periods, and periods of great crustal
activity, with special reference to Victoria.
Economic Geology.—
The nature, distribution and modes of occurrenceof important economic rocks, such as building and ornamental stones, road-metals, etc
and of economic minerals, and ores, aa represented in Victoria.
Practical Exercises HonoursAll candidates must submit for examination their
Laboratory and Field Note Books. (See general not*
in Handbook concerning Laboratory Note Books).
These Note Books may include those which have been
submitted for Pass, but where the number of excursions, maps, etc., required for Honours exceeds those
required for Pass, such additional work must b»
recorded in the Note Books submitted.
,712
DETAILS OF -SUBJECTS, 1U38,
own words of the 'field excursions, and of the practical
work -performed by the candidate, but the following
a r e ' t h e minimum requirements t h a t will be accepted: —
(a) Descriptive notes with sections ot not less than
eight geological excursions.
(b) Not less than twelve geological diagrams o r
plans (not necessarily hand-drawn) representing
different ideal or real areas ot diversified geology,
with geological.sections and descriptions of the
geology of each area.
(c) Descriptive notes with sketches illustrating the
physical characters, etc., of the following
Crystal Models, Minerals, Rocks and Fossils:—
Crystal Models—As for pass.
Note.—The numbers correspond with the numbers of
specimens in sete supplied by the Geological Department.
Minerals—1, Quartz; 2, Opal; 3, Orthoclase; 4,
Labradorite; 5, Biotite; 6. Muscovite; 7,
Hornblende; 8, Augite; 9, Olivine; 10,
Garnet; 11, Chiastolite; 12, Kaolin; 13,
Tourmaline; 14, Topaz; 15, T a l c ; 16, Fluor i t e ; 17, Calcite; 18, Aragonite; 19, Magnesite; 20, Siderite; 21, Cerussite; 22, Malachite; 23, B a r i t e ; 24, Gypsum; 25, Apatite;
26, Hematite; 27, Magnetite; 28, Limonite;
29, Graphite; 30, Molybdenite; 31, P y r i t e ;
32, - Chaloopyrite; 33, Arsenopyrite; 34, Galena; 35, Sphalerite; 36, Stibnite.
Bocks—1, Granite (red); 2, Granite (grey); 3,
Granodiorite; 4, Syenite; 5, Diorite; 6,
Gabbro; 7, Quartz Porphyry; 8, Diabase; 9,
Pegmatite; 10, Graphic Granite; 11, Obsidian; 12, Pumice; 13, Rhyolite; 14, Trachyte; 15,;Dacite; 16, Basalt; 17, Tuff; 18.
• Breccia; -19, -Conglomerate; 20, Sandstone;
21,•"Sandstone,(felspathic); 22, Mudstone; 23,
Shale; 24, Limestone (Tertiary); .25, Limestone (Palaeozoic); 26, Quartzite; 27, Horn-
LEA VINO EXAMINATION.
713
fels; 28, Chiastolite Slate; 29, Marble; 30,
Chert; 31, Slate; 32, Mica Schist; 33, Mica
Schist; 34, Talc Schist; 35, Gneiss; 36,
Gneiss.
Fossils—Same as for pass, with the addition of
ten other typical genera to be selected from
at least four phyla.
Hooks for reference. (Pass and Honours) :—
W. W. W a t t s ' Geology for Regiuners.
Rutley's Mineralogy.
For Stratigraphy, of Victoria, consult:—
Outlines of the Physiography and Geology of Victoria. Edited by Professor E. W, Skeats. (Melb.
University Press).
'Teachers should consult: —
Explanatory Notes to accompany A New Geological
Map of the Commonwealth of Australia, by
Sir T. W. Edgeworth David. Sydney, 1932.
Lahoe, F . H.—Field Geology.
For geological mapping and section work, consult:—
Piatt, John I. and Challinor, J., Simple Geological
Structures (Murby).
•GERMAN—
GENERAL PRESCRIPTIONS.
Pass,
German.
(b) Translation into German of short, easy passages
of English.
(c) Original composition in German.
Three sub
jects arising from the prescribed texts will be
given; a composition ot not more than 200
words must be written ou one of these.
(d) Reading aloud from prescribed prose and verse,
(c) Dictation.
N.B.—See note re German-spelling and punctuation
at end of General Proscriptions for. Honours.
44a
714
DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1<J3S.
.Honours,
â) Translation into English of unseen passages ot
German.
(b) Translation into German of short passages of
English.
(c) Original composition in German. Two subjecte
will be set on the prescribed texts, aa well as
two on general topics. A short essay must
be written on OTI« of these.
(d) Reading aloud of prose and verse. Conversation.
(e) Dictation.
N . B . 1.—Two examination papers will be set for
Honours, the First Paper consisting of passages tor
translation from and into German, the Second Paper
dealing with Composition.
N.B. 2.—In questions of spelling and grammatical
forms examiners will be guided by the official German.
regulations as laid down in Der gro Be Duden. I t has,,
however, been agreed t h a t the distinction between ss and
C will not be insisted on at the Intermediate Examination.
N . B . 3.—Candidates in dictation should copy down,
the titles exactly as the examiner writes them, and
should know t h e German names of the punctuation,
signs (Satzzeichen), as follow:
Punkt
,
Beistrich
;
Strichpunkt
Doppelpunkt
Fragezeichen
Ausrufungszcichcn
— Gedankenstrich
Bindestrich (hyphen)
" " Anfiihrungszeichen
( ) Klammern (runde Klammern)
[ ] Eckige Klammern
Absatz (new paragraph)
LEAVING PASS TEXTS FOB
193S.
Prescribed: —
1.' Wir lesen Deutsch, R. Oldenbourg,
to 158.
pages
81
715
2. German Ballads (Dent), pages 1 t o 22.
N.B.—About 75 lines, chosen from these pages, should
bo memorised
Recommended: —
Harrap's Plain Texte—
Der Puppenepieler (Storm).
Auf Skiem im Harz (and two other short stories).
Abenteuer des Seeteufels (Lnckner).
Die Bmden, 1914 (von Miicke).
Vater und Sohn (Storm).
K u r t Berkner, Elf Fufiballjungens (Macmillan
and Co.).
LEAVING HONOURS TEXTS »OH
1938.
Prescribed: —
1. Wir leseu Deutech, B . Oldenbourg, pages 81
to 158.
2. German Ballads (Dent), pages 1 to 36.
N.B.—About 100 lines chosen from these pages, should
lie memorised.
Recommended: —
Lessing—'Minna von Bamhelm.
Goethe—Egmout.
Schiller—Maria Stuart.
Schiller—(Wilhelm Tell.
Freytag—Die Joumalisten.
Meyer und Nauck—Das neue Deutschland (G. Bell
. and Sons).
Schnoking—Deutsches Lesebuch (Harrap).
Deuteches Schrifttum, lierausgegeben von der Deutschen. Akademie in Munchen. Heft 1 bis 9.
IN.B,—It is suggested t h a t candidates should read
716
GREEK—
Passis,) One of the easier Greek plays (omitting t h e
lyrical passages), together with a portion of
comparatively easy Greek prose in the Attic
dialect, approximately equivalent to the
Apology of Plato. The questions set will require attention to -grammar scansion and
subject-matter.
In particular a knowledge
of all relevant history and mythology will be,
demanded.
(bj Translation of a comparatively easy, passage into
Greek prose.
Translation at sight from comparatively easy
Greek prose.
N.B.—(1) Candidates must do satisfactory work inboth (a) and (b).
(2) I t is strongly recommended t h a t oandidates should
acquire a knowledge of Greek History, such as is provided-by the following books: —
Blunt—The Ancient World and its Legacy to Us.
Owen—Brief History of Greece.
Petrie—Introduction to Greek History, etc.
Special Books: —
Sophocles, Philoctetes (Jobb and Shuckburgh), omitting the lyrical passages.
Plato, Apology (Adam, C.U.P.).
Honours.
(a) A more advanced treatment of the Special Books:
prescribed for the Pass examination.
(b) Passages for translation at sight,.consisting o*
verse and'prose in the Attic dialect.
(c) Translation from English into Greek'prose.' Tha
outlines of t h e History of Greek Literature
and of Antiquities," such as is contained in
Norwood', "•Writers of Greece and Borne,"
and Petrie, " Introduction to Greek History,
Literature and Antiquities," pages 79" to 139;
' LEAVING KXAMINATION.
717"
Special Books:—
• -•
Sophocles, Philoctetes (Jebb and Shuckburgh, t h e
whole.
Plato, Apology (Adam, O.U.P.).
The first paper. imGroek will contain passages tor Composition and Unseen 'I'rrtnslation. The-second paper will
coutaiu.quest ions on the Special Books and on Literature
and Antiquities.(Honours).
GREEK nnd ROMAN HISTORT^Pass,
A survey of the early civilisations of Greece, and
of Rome (to 732 A.D., the Battle of Tours),
as contained in Parts I I I , IV and V of " Ancient Times," Breasted (Ginn).
The following books should be in the School libraries
for reference:
The Ancient East—Hogarth. (Home University
Library.)
The Dawn of History—Myrea. (Home University
Library.)
Rome—Fowler. (Home University Library).
Crete, the Forerunner of Greece—Howes. (Harrap.)
Growth of Rome—Mathieson. (World's. Manuals.)
Ancient Greece—Casson. (World's Manuals).
Julius Caesar—John Bucha-n.
Our Hellenic Heritage—James.
(Macmillan.)
Hellas the Forerunner—Household.
(Dent.)
Also for more detailed work:
Roman ; Roman Republic—Heitland.
History of Rjome—Cary.
Grtek:
Grote's History of Greece (Mitchell and
Caspari).
History of Greece—Bury.
Honour*.
1. Greek History, from-595 to 404 B.C., as. dealt with
in such works as. that- of Bury- (larger edition).
2. Roman History from 133- B.Q. to, the- Battle of
Actium, as dealt with in such^ works as those
of Shuckburgh (larger edition), or Heitland,
or How and Leigh or Myres.
718
DETAILS OF SUBJECTS. 1938.
HEBREW—
Pass
(a) P a r t or whole of one of the minor prophets, or part
of one of the major prophets, together with six
psalms and a selection of Hebrew prose.
The questions set will refer to grammar, verse
form aud subject matter as well as to translation
(b) Translation at sight from comparatively easy prose.
One passage will be .unpointed.
(c) Translation of an easy passage (not to be taken
from the English Bible) into Hebrew prose.
(d) A more advanced treatment of Hebrew accidence
and syntax.
(e) Questions on a prescribed period of Hebrew his.
tory.
Oandidates must do satisfactory work in both (a) and
<b).
For examination purposes tho square writing and not
the cursive script must be used.
Correct
punctuation is essential.
Special Books :
Haggai, t h e whole.
Psalms 4. 76, 82, 84, 108, 138.
1 Kings 5 and 8.
Joshua 24.
. Prescribed Period ot Hebrew History. From the
death of Joshua to the Fall ot the Northern
Kingdom, together with related geography.
Honours.
(a) A more advanced treatment of the special books
prescribed for the pass examination, together
with additional prose and selections from
prophetical or wisdom
literature.
The
passages prescribed should be studied with
regard to their literary structure and their
relationship to Hebrew'literature in general.
(b) Passages for translation at sight, consisting of both
prose and verse. One passage will be unpointed.
LEAVINO EXAMINATION.
719
(c) Translation from English (not to be taken from
the English Bible) into Hebrew prose.
(d) Hebrew History from the fall of the Northern
Kingdom to the completion of the Second
Temple, together with related geography.
Additional Special Books:
Isaiah 1 and 2.
Zephaniah, the whole.
Proverbs 1 and 2.
ITALIAN—
General Prescriptions.
(See Note for Teachers preceding Intermediate French
details.)
Pass.
Italian.
(b) Translation into Italian of short, easy passages
of English.
(c) Original composition in Italian. Three subjects
arising from prescribed texts will be given,
and a composition ot not more than 200 words
must be written on one of these. The subjects set by the examiners will be such aa
are calculated to allow the candidate t o make
full use of the vocabulary acquired from t h e
study of the above books.
(d) Reading aloud from prose prescribed, and dictation .
N.B. — F o r the dictation test, candidates should
familiarise themselves with the Italian names of t h e
principal punctuation marks.
Honours
Italian.
(b) Translation into Italian of short passages of
English.
(c) Original composition in Italian. Two subjects
will be set on the prescribed texts, as well as
three on general topics. A short essay must ba
written one one of these.
720
(d) Reading, aloud of; unseen prose and prescribed
verse. Conversation.
(e) Dictation.
N.B.—Two examination papers will be set tor Honours,
the First Paper consisting of passages for translation from
and into Italian, the Second Paper (two hours) being
limited to Composition.
Leavimi P a s s Texts for December, 1938, and
February, 1939.
1. Prescribed as a. basis for Composition:
Borgatti—Modem Italian Reader (Cassell), from the
piece beginning on p. 47. to the end of the
book.
2.
Recommended for reading:
(a) De Amicis—Cuore (Harrap), ed. by Moore and
Rotunda).
(b) De Amicis—Bozzetti. della vita militare (Adiano
Salani, Florence),
(o). Silvio Pellico—Le mie prigioni (Madella.and.Co.,
Milan, cheap edition, or any other).
(d) M. Moretti—Mia Madre (Treves, Milan), (more
suitable for girls than for boys).
(e) Giuseppe Lipparini—Primiavera (Milan, C. Siguorelli), Seconda Parte (358 pages, may be
too long for some schools).
1. Prescribed (as a basis for Composition and, in t h e
ease ot poetic texts, for both Composition and
Reading aloud)—
As for Pass.
2. Recommended. Candidates should read from 200 to
300 pages from any ot the following books, with
a view to increasing their vooubulary and their
familiarity, with idioms and with the language
generally—
(a,y General reading—
Massimo d'Azeglio: I miei ricordi' (R. Carabba,
Laneiano—192 pages).
E' de Amicis : L"a carrozza di tutti (any edition).
Man'zoni : I promessi sposi (Carabba or any other
edition—an-historical novel). (Very long).
721
(•by P l a y s Goldoni: La locandiera (auy edition).
D"; Nicoderai': L'e tre grazie (any.edition).
(c). Poetry—
G. Lipparini : Primavera (as recommended for
Pass).
Dante.: La Divina Commedia—cpsiodi scelti
(Societa anonima editrice Dante Alighieri)
(older Italian, suitable for more advanced
students).
JAPANESE—
Leaving Pass.
1. 75 Hirakana (Alphabetic letters in cursive form).
2. 400' Ideographs in single, words, including the
150 ideographs of t h e , Intermediate work.
3. 350 Combined words in ideographs, including the
combined words of the Intermediate work.
4. Advanced grammar:,
(a) Discrimination of- the uses of Nominative
case in Compound and Complex sentences
in prose.
(b) Uses of various forms of adjectives a n d
adverbs,
(o) Simplified and shortenedi forms ot conjunctions; combinations. of. verbs and conjunctions, and. shortened forms of conjunctionsas used with clauses.
(d) The uses of various forms ot participles; distinct rules for participles and conjunctive
verbs.
The simplified, shortened
and
euphonised forms ot participles and conjunctive verbs,
(e) The original, and the usual forms of verbs—
(a) Class:
Rules for. the noun form of verb.
Modified or changed noun form of
verb.
Combined verbs- ih various forma.
The simplified, shortened and euphonised forms of the tenses of
verbs.
7^2
5. Translation ot Japanese prose into English, one
to be from the prescribed text. (In future
the translation of Japanese into English will
be divided into sections.)
6. I'ranslation into Japanese of short,, easy passages
of English.
7. An original composition in Japanese of not more
than one hundred words, subject matter to
be taken from the prescribed texts.
S. Reading from prescribed text.
Prescribed t e x t : Jinjo Shogahu Tokuhon, School
text-books of J a p a n (Books 3 and 4).
Leaving Honours.
1. 75 Hirakana (Alphabetic letters in Cursive form) as
for Leaviug Pass.
2. 450 Odegraphs in single words, including the 400
ideographs in Leaving Pass.
3. 500 Combined words in ideographs, including the
400 combined words in Leaving Pass.
4. Advanced Grammar—
(a) Discrimination of the uses of the Nominative
Case in complex sentences in prose.
(b) Uses of various forms of Adjectives and
Adverbs.
(c) Simplified and shortened forms of conjunctions as used with clauses.
(d) The uses of various forms of participles;
distinct rules for participles and conjunctive
verbs.
The simplified, shortened and
euphonized forms of participles and conjunctive verbs.
(e) The original and the usual forms of (a) class
verbs. Rules for the noun form of verb.
Modified or changed noun form of verb.
Combined verbs in various forms.
The
simplified, shortened and euphonized forms
of the tenses of verbs.
5. Advanced Japanese prose (unseen) to be translated
into English
6. Advanced English prose (unseen) to be translated
into Japanese.
LKAVIXCi EXAMINATION.
725
7. Intensive study ot the prescribed books (Jinjo
Shogaku Tokuhon, School text-books of Japan),
Books 3 and 4; and part of Book 5.
Original composition of about 150 words in Japanese ;.
. topics to be taken from the prescribed texts.
8. Dictation in Hirakana and ideographs (single and
combined).
9. Reading and Conversation.
N.B.—Two examination papers will be set for Honours,,
the First Paper consisting of passages for Translation from
and into Japanese, the Second Paper dealing with composition.
LATIN—
Pass.
(a) A book of Virgil's Aeneid aud a portion of a
book ot Livy, or their equivalent, together
amounting to uot more than 1350 lines. The
questions set will require attention to grammar, scansion and subject-matter. In particular
a knowledge of all relevant History and Mythology will be demanded.
.r<; Translation at sight from comparatively easy
Latin prose or verso. Translation of a comparatively easy English passage into Latin
prose.
N.B.—(1) Candidates must do «»t«factorw work in
both (a) and (bi
N.B.— (2) It is strongly recommended that candidates
should acquire a knowledge of Roman History such as is
provided in tiie following books:—
B l u n t : The Ancient World and its meaning to us.
Owen : lirief History ot Rome.
Potrie : Introduction to Koman History Literature aud
Antiquities.
Special Books under (a) above: —
Livy v, cc 32-50, and 55, Whibley (C.U.P.).
Aeneas Triumphant §§1-6, and §12, 11. 22-69,
Lake and Porter (Macmillan).
7.24
UETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1938
Honours(a) A more advanced treatment of the Special IJooks
prescribed for the Pass examination, together
with additional work amounting to not more
than 100 lines.
(b) Passages for translation at sight chosen from
authors not earlier than Cicero or later than
Tacitus.
(c) Translation from English into Latin prose.
(d) A knowledge of tho life, works and literary qualities of Lucretius, Catullus, Sallust, Cicero, Livy,
Caesar, Vergil, Ovid, Horace aud Tacitus. As
much as possible of the originals should be read.
Suitable comments may be found in Wight Duff,
" W r i t e r s of R o m e " or Kaeppel, "A. Short
History of Latin Literature."
(e) A knowledge of Antiquities sucli as is contained in
Petrie, " Introduction to Roman History, Literature and Antiquities," pp. 59-111.
Additional work under (a.) above:
Plinv, Selected Letters, I 15, I I 6, I I 11, I I 20.
VI 16, V I I I 24, I X 6, X 96, X 97, Allen
(Oxford).
Syllabus of Syntax (in addition to the Vyllabus for the
Intermediate Examination).
Clauses of Condition, with subjunctive.
Qui with the subj. in Clauses of Purpose.
Verbs of doubting and hindering negatived and not
negatived.
Clauses of Concession.
Clauses of Comparison, with talis, qualis, etc.
T h e more difficult uses of Gases and Prepositions.
Uses of Indef. Pronouns and Compound Pronouns.
Idiomatic uses of Negatives.
•Special uses of Tenses, e.g., present and past imfect with iamdudum, etc.
Special uses of Participles, e.g., ab urbe oondita.
Special uses ot Gerund-adjective, e.g., after euro,
etc.
Gerundive of Tendency; dative of Gerundive (solvendo, est, etc.).
I'ranslation of English Gerunds—e.g., without
waiting, instead of waiting, etc.
725
Potential and Deliberative Subjunctive—Indefinite
Second Person; velim adsit, crediderim, etc.
Noun clauses in Accusative and Infinitive, with u t ,
with quod; dependent question. 'Idioms like
nescio an, etc.
Idioms of quin ; Clauses of Condition depending ou
quin.
Fore ut, fnturuin fuisse ut.
Adjective clauses with Subjunctive.
Adverbial clauses, including special idioms—e.g.,
tantum abest u t . . . u t ; subjunctive of
alleged and false reason; non est quod venias;
dum, dummodb; cum inverted and frequentative : priusquam, antequam, donee, quoad,
dum with subjunctive; cum causal and concessive; limiting use of ita u t ; irregular conditions, clauses ot comparison and idioms.
Reported Speech.
N.B.—Poetical constructions are to be studied only in
their context, and are not to be imitated in composition.
The first paper in Latin will contain passages for Composition and Unseen Translation. The second paper will
contain questions on the Special Books and on Literature
and Antiquities-(Honours).
MATHEMATICS.
/General Note on the new Syllabus i n Mathematical
Subjects for the 'School Leaving ExaminationThe Syllabus is planned to provide for two classes
of students, namely (i) studente whose main interests
aro not in mathematics and physical science, who wish
to take Mathematics as a subsidiary subject; and (ii)
students whose interests or abilities are predominantly
mathematical, or who wish to study Mathematics as
specially relevant to a proposed career. For the first
class, the Subject Mathematics I provides a balanced
course of suitable standard; for t h e second class t h e
three Subjecte, Mathematics I I , I I I and TV, together
'provide a balanced > course of higher standard.
For
these three Subjects, a reasonably good pass in Arithmetic, Algebra and Geometry and Trigonometry for
Intermediate Certificate should be regarded as a necessary. pre-re.quisite. The standard of Mathematics I is a
72G
DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 11)38.
little higher t h a n t h a t of Intermediate Mathematics,
and it may profitably be taken by a student whose
work a t Intermediate has not been uniformly up to
pass standard.
I t is recommended t h a t in the school Time Table
for studente of the class (ii), taking Mathematics I I ,
I I I and TV, from 12 to 15 periods per week be allotted
to these Subjects; and t h a t little or no time be allotted
specifically to Mathematics I, which would be largely
revision of the previous year's work. For students of
the class (i) Mathematics I should of course receive the
usual time-allotment for a Subject.
No restriction is placed upon entry for any combination of the four Subjects; but no candidate may count
both of Mathematics I, II', or both of Mathematics I,
I I I , amongst the five subjeots ou which his Leaving
Certificate is gained. It is recommended t h a t students of
the class (ii) should take Mathematics II, I I I and IV in the
same year.
The intended standard of examination in the various
subjects is indicated by reference to text-books; these
are to be taken as setting the standard in the same
sense only as previous examination papers set the
standard of examination on an established Syllabus.
These text-books are not prescribed.
Candidates who have received credit for one or more of
Mathematics I , I I , H I , TV prior to June, 1935, may
receive credit for the remaining subjects after t h a t
date as though there had been no ohange of Syllabus;
except t h a t a candidate may not be credited with both
Mathematics I , passed prior to t h a t date, and Mathematics I I , passed subsequent to t h a t date.
MATHEMATICS I.—Pass,
A more mature treatment of the work prescribed for
Intermediate Algebra and Geometry and Trigonometry,
together with the necessary Arithmetic. In particular,
a more extensive knowledge will be required on t h a
following topics:
Ratio and proportion in Algebra and Geometry,
including the theorems: The areas of similar
727"
triangles and quadrilaterals are as thesquares on corresponding sides.
Variation, including simple cases of J o i n t V a r i a
tion, but excluding formal theorems thereon.
Indices (positive and negative, integral and fractional) and logarithms. (Bookwork will n o t
be asked in the examination.)
Arithmetic and finite geometric progressions.
The trigonometric formulae
sinA_sinB_sinC
a
b
c
h* + c - a
cosA = 26c
A =ib»sinA,
and their use in simple problems.
The easiest problems in three dimensions, which
involve only the solution of right-angled
triangles.
Note 1.—The intended standard of this Syllabus i»
about t h a t of t h e relevant portions of:
(1) Durell—A New Algebra for Schools, F a r t s
i-m.
with (2) Forder—A School Geometry.
or
Foster—Plane Geometry, Vols. I and I I .
end (3) Durell and Wright—Elementary Trigonometry, Parts I and Pi.
or
Siddons and Hughes—Trigonometry, P a r t I,.
excluding examples marked with an asterisk.
These are suitable and sufficient text-books, but are not
prescribed.
Note 2.—A Candidate may submit a Note Book containing an account of work done during the year in one or
more of the topics set out in the Optional Section of the
Course of Study in Mathematics I. A mark not exceeding
one-fifth ot the pass-mark will be awarded for the work
shewn in the Note-book, and will be added to the mark
awarded for the candidate's examination paper. Thesubmission of a Note-book is optional.
46
V 28
DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 19S8.
Honours.
ALOEBBA.
Elements of the theory of complex numbers: Specification by means of real numbers in t h e
Cartesian (real-imaginary) and polar (modulus-amplitude) forme. The complex-number
plane. Definitions of addition, subtraction,
multiplication and division, and the funda.
mental laws for these operations.
Use of
polar specification in cases ot repeated multiplication or division and integral powers.
The solutions of t h e equation zn — a when n
is an integer and a any complex number;
fractional powers.
(Demoivre's theorem is
here included).
Note.—In connection with this work it is desirable
t h a t there should be some, review of t h e principles of
the Algebra of real numbers, with reference in particular to the distinction between definitions, analysis
leading to definitions, and proofs.
Theory of polynomials a n d polynomial equations:
Relation between a factor of a polynomial
P(z) and a root of t h e corresponding equation
P(z) = 0. The decomposition of a polynomial
into linear factors is unique (the theorem
t h a t every polynomial equation has a root
being assumed). Relation between repeated
linear factors of a polynomial and roots of
the derived equation. Conjugate roots and
factors in the case of a polynomial with real
coefficiente. Simple examples of this theory
(for example factorization of
gn-t-on, z2n + 2gna* COS lt# + o2n;
calculation ot cos 2TT/5).
Relations between roots and coefficients ot an equation. Calculation ot simple symmetric functions ot the roots. Equations with related
roots (methods of symmetric functions a n d
of elimination).
Transformations of expressions and solution ot equations, with special referenoe to symmetry,
homogeneity and degree.
729
•Graphs of polynomials and rational functions of x
in simple cases, and of powers of x. Graphical considerations relating to tho number and
position of real roots of polynomial equations,
and approximation to roots by trial.
Condition t h a t a x l + hyl + cz% + 2f yz + -igzx + 2Axy
may have factors linear in x, y, z- Graph of
tho function of x defined implicitly by a quadratio equation ax% + 2hxy + by% + 2gx + 2fy +
c = 0 , (a, b, . . . c numerical).
Elemente of the theory of selections and arrangements, with simple examples.
F i n i t e series .- Binomial theorem (positive integral
index), S n 2 , 2»i 3 , 2cos (a + nfe), Ssin ( u + n Q ) .
Expression of cos n& and sin n@ as polynomials
in cos 0 and sinft. Expression of cos"fl siu'"0
as a series of cosines or sines ot multiplies otff.
Determinants.
Elementary properties of determinants, with application to the solution of
linear equations. Elementary ideas on inconsistent and redundant linear equations.
Elementary cases of elimination.
Note-—Questions involving determinants of higher
order than the fourth, and the product theorem, will
not be set.
MATHEMATICS I I . —
Pass.
1.
ALGEBRA.
The Algebra prescribed for Mathematics I , and in
-addition:
Theory of the quadratic function and equation,
viz.: solution of literal quadratic equations,
relatione between the roots and coefficients,
conditions for t h e roots to be real, equal or
unreal; conditions tor a quadratic function
to be essentially one-signed or not, and its
graphs in the several cases. Maximum or
minimum value of a quadratic function.
Tho Remainder Theorem, with application to factorisation and the roots of simple polynomial
equations; sketching of graphs of polynomials such as can be readily factorised.
46a
730
Harder equations, including equations Involving
surds, linear equations in three unknowns,
and simultaneous quadratic equations in two.
unknowns
without
first
degree
terms
(numerical
coefficients).
Simple cases of
literal equations of these types.
The infinite geometrical progression. Interest and
payment by instalments.
Recurring decimals.
A higher standard in manipulative work will beexpected than in) Mathematics I , with a view
to developing some appreciation of Algebraic " form," including features such aadegree, homogeneity, symmetry and generality.
Note.—The intended standard of this Syllabus i»
about t h a t of the corresponding portions of t h e
Syllabus in Mathematics I in force in 1934.
2.
Co-OBDINATE
GBOMETBT.
The general form (extent, shape, symmetry) of thocurves defined-)- by equations of t h e form
aT-^by-^-c—O , y = a « a -\-hx-{-c , z = a y - ,
« 2 / « 2 + !/-/''' 2 = l . a.''-/a'--i/'-/fc 2 = l , x y = c ,
(numerical coefficients).
The general formulae for: the distance between-.
two points, the co-ordinates of the point bisecting or trisecting the join of two points,
the equation of a straight line specified by
its gradient and one point or by two points,,
conditions for parallelism or perpendicularity
of straight linee, angles between two straight,
lines.
The equation of a circle of given* centre and
radius; centre and radius of a circle whoso
equation is given.
*" Given," here and below, means that the coefficients or coordinates are specified numerically, not literally,
tThe focus-directrix, property might form the subject (in a
numerical case) of a locus-problem, but should not be taken aatbe primary definition of a conic for the purposes of this Syllabus..
LEAVING
EXAMINATIONS.
731
Intersections, or in particular tangency, of a
straight line with a curve, viz.: Equation ot
the tangent at a given point of a given curve
(by finding what gradient gives coincident
intersections). Equations of tangente from a
given point or in a given direction to a given
curve (by determining the parameter in the
equation so as to give coincident intersections). Formula for the gradient a t any
point of a given parabola.
Simple problems (geometrical properties, loci) involving the above theory.
Note-—There are various stages of generality in Coordinate Geometry, e.g., (i) we may work with variabla
o r unknown points on definite curves, as when we find
t h e intersections of the line z + 2 t / = l and the ellipse
4« 2 + 2i/2 = ;<; (ii) we may work with variable or unknown curves, when some or all of the coefficients in
their equations will be literal. The emphasis in this
Syllabus is intended to be on numerical treatment and
on working from first principles, b u t the use of
general formulae is necessary in all but very element a r y problems, and a knowledge of certain formulae
is prescribed.
The intended standard of t h e Syllabus cannot be
stated by unqualified referenoe to a text-book, as no available book is sufficiently elementary.
The use of
selected portions of Tuokey and Nayler, Analytical
Geometry, or Chigncll and Fryer, Co-ordinate Geometry
and Elementary Calculus, is recommended. The difficulty of the Examination questions will imi, exceed
that ot the following Examples from Tuckey and
Nayler;
p. 35
p- 36
p. 39
p. 42
p- 66
p. 69
p- 71
2
8
Ex. 24
Ex. 30, 33
Ex. 50-52
Ex. 22, 23
Ex. 14 'K 17
Ex. 58-, 50'
Ex. 91
p. 72
p. 81
p. 86
p. 92
p. 94
p. 95
p. 98
Ex. 1002, 1042
Ex. 5:'
Ex. 15s
Ex. l-5:i
Ex. 2 * 3,3 53
Ex. 11
Ex. 47;i, d-83
To be worked from first principles.
Suitable, provided the ** literal " data arc made numerical
732
DETAILS OF SUBJECTS.
Honours.
I.
PLANE GEOMETRY.
E u d i d e a n Geometry. Medial section, and construction of a regular pentagon. Orthocentre. Nine-pointa
circle. Simson's line. Inversion of straight-lines and
circles. Application to the construction of circles to
touch given straight lines and circles.
Ptolemy's
Theorem.
Geometry of sigmd line - segments a n d angles.
Theorems of Ceva, Menelaus, and Dcsargues.
Harmonic ranges and pencils; harmonic properties of complete quadrilateral and quadrangle.
(Attention is drawn to Forder, Higher Course
Geometry, as a suitable text.)
EI.
ANALYTICAL
GEOMETEY.
Analytical geometry of the straight line, using rectangular axes. Change of rectangular axes. General
proofs of the addition theorems in Trigonometry.
Deduction ot the equations of conies (including circles)
from geometrical definition. Elementary properties of
ellipse, parabola and hyperbola, including tangents,
normals, diameters, asymptotes, derived from
their
simplest equations, b u t with use of general methods.
Use of parametric specification.
Notes-—1. Methods of pure geometry should be used
where they are more convenient than analytical
methods. 2. The intention in this course should be the
establishment of a body of geometrical theorems as
well as the practice of analytical methods.
III.
SOLID GEOMETEY.
A more advanced treatment of the work in Solid
Geometry prescribed for Mathematics H I (Pass); and
in addition: —
Direction cosines, and the angle between two directions.
Elementary calculations relating to polyhedra, including the application of Euler's theorem to
regular polyhedra.
The sine and cosine formulae for a spherical t r i angle, with simple applications to the earth:
and celestial sphere.
LEAVING EXAMINATIONS.
733
(Attention is drawn to Foster, Solid Geometry, as a
suitable t e x t ; and, for teachers' referenoe, to Lines,
Solid Geometry).
MATHEMATICS I I I . —
Pass.
1.
TBIOONOMETBT.
Trigonometrical functions of angles of any magnitude, their periodicity properties. and graphs.
The standard formulae for the solution of triangles.
Circular measure, and its application to the sines
and tangents of small angles.
Arc-length
and area of a circular sector.
The Addition Theorems; transformation of sums
aud products; simple identities.
Simple
trigonometric equations; (ability to give all
solutions in a specified range, but not necessarily to quote a formula for the general
solution, will be expected). The expression
of asinx-j-bcosg (a,b numerical) in the form
I-COS(JT-)-C) or rsin (ai-f-d).
Simple problems in two and three dimensions, including cases of the method of projection.
Note.—The intended standard of this Syllabus is
about t h a t of the relevant portions of Siddone a n d
Hughes, Trigonometry, P a r t s I , I I , or Durell and
Wright, Elementary Trigonometry, Parte I - I I I . Tha
examples marked with an asterisk in Siddons a n d
Hughes are in general rather beyond the standard of
attainment that will be expected.
2.
SOLID GEOMETRY.
Simple calculations (lengths, angles, areas, volumes)
relating to prisms, pyramids,
cylinders,
spheres and cones, including radius and arclength of great and small circles ot a sphere
in simple cases, b u t excluding the formulae
for the surface area and volume of a spherical .
segment.
The following propositions:
If each of three planes intersects the other two,
either the three lines of intersection are
concurrent or each, is parallel t o t h e other
two.
734
W38
Three or more parallel planes cut all transversal
lines proportionally.
The diagonals of a parallelepiped are concurrent
and bisect each other.
The lines joining the middle points of opposite
edges of a tetrahedron, and those joining the
vertices to the oentroids of the opposite faces,
are concurrent.
Construction of the perpendicular to a plane from
an external point.
Construction of the common perpendicular to two
skew lines.
Notes-—1. The scope and standard of the intended
work is about t h a t of Foster, Solid Geometry, Chapters
X L to XLV, omitting sections and examples marked
with two asterisks. 2. The intention of this work is
primarily t h a t i t should provide training in the power
t o grasp a configuration in space t h a t is described in
words or represented conventionally in a diagram. The
foundation for this training lies in the construction
(or improvization) and use of simple models, and the
course should include a certain amount of this pract i c a l work.
Honours.
CALCULUS.
An elementary course in differential and integral
calculus, treated as far as possible from the geometrical
point of view, with elementary geometrical and physical
applications.
Variable quantities; functional dependence of
one
variable on another; the general properties of the
elementary functions (algebraic, trigonometric, exponential
and logarithmic) as exhibited by their graphs; continuity;
limiting value; differentiation and derived functions;
fundamental cases obtained from first principles ; derivatives of sum, product, quotient, function of a function,
inverse functions, with applications; mean value theorem ;
applications of derived function (geometrical, curve sketching, maxima and minima, theory of equations, small
corrections, kinematics).
Integration- in simple cases, including the methods of
change ot variable and integration by parts and the use of
partial fractions; geometrical treatment of the definite
integral; simple applications (areas, volumes power series
inequalities for sins, cos*).
LEA VINO EXAMINATION.
735
The s t a n d a r d properties and applications of hyperbolic functions.
The solution of differential equations of the following
types: (1) first order equations where the variables are
separable, (2) linear equations of the first order, (3) second
order equations such us are effectively ot types (1) or (2), or
become so on taking the original dependent variable as
independent variable.
Convergence of infinite series : elementary notions and
t h e simplest tests; the values of the coefficients in an
assumed power series development of a function (Taylor's
series); the power series for c*, sin as, cos x, artan x,
log (l+.v), ( i + .r)a deduced as illustrations of Taylor's
series or (where more convenient) by integration of
another power series.
MATHEMATICS IV.—
Pass.
1.
CALCULUS.
The meaning of a limit and of a derivative. Differentiation of x • for integral and simple fractional values of n, and of sums of such
terms.
Integration as the inverse of differentiation, applied
to sums ot terms of the type x n (n uot equal to
-1).
The simplest geometrieal and physical applications
of differentiation and. integration.
Estimation of t h e derivative of a function from ite
graph.
Approximate evaluation ot areas by counting
squares.
Note-—The intended . scope and standard ot this
Syllabus is about t h a t ot Fawdry and Durell, Calculus
for Schools, chapters I - V I I ; or Milne and Weetoott, A
F i r s t Course i n the Calculus, chapters 1-3 and 5-9.
2.
MECHANICS.
Kinematics ot rectilinear motion:
Displacement
(s), . velocity (v), acceleration (.1). How t o
find v from a given jt-relation or graph, s
and a from a given ut-relation o r graph, v
from a given ai-relation or g r a p h . Formulae
for uniformly ' âccelerated motion.
Motion
73G
DETAILS OF SUBJEOTS,
1938.
under gravity is uniformly accelerated.*
Determination of g. Independence of horizontal and vertical motions* and simple
cases of the motion of projectiles.
Force and its measurement (gravitational system):
The spring balance and Hooke's Law.*
Action and reaction.* The lever and Principle of Moments.* Body in equilibrium
under parallel forces or not more than three
non-parallel forces.
Eesolution of a force
into perpendicular components.* The Laws
of Friction.*
Simple machines and the Principle of Work*: the
inclined plane, block and tackle (second
system of pulleys), wheel and axle, differential pulley, cog wheels, screws.
Efficiency
of a machine
Power.
Capacity of a body to do work in virtue of its
motion, i.e., Kinetic Energy. The energyequation.
Conservation of energy.
Momentum and the momentum-equation.
Conservation of momentum.*
Notes-—(1) I t is considered better in this elementary
course to assume such principles as are familiar from
ordinary experience, or easily verified by rough experiments conducted in class, ratlier than to enter on their
abstract proofs from Newton's Laws of Motion. The
prineiples marked with an asterisk (*) above belong
to this category. The course is treated in this way
in Durell, A School Mechanics, P a r t I—which covers
the syllabus at about the intended standard.
This
treatment is however not prescribed.
('!) The work in Mechanics should be brought into
relation with the work in Calculus so far as is possible.
Honours.
MECHANICS.
Dynamics of a particle. The equation F = ma,
where m is constant for any given body, as
a generalization supported by experience.
The law of action and reaction. The vectorial character of displacement, velocity, acceleration and force.
737
Motion of a particle in a straight line (1) under
constant force, (2) under variable force (simple
cases only, but including simple harmonicmotion), (3) with friction.
Parabolic motion under gravity.
Motion in a circle, including small oscillations of a.
simple pendulum.
The principles of work and conservation of energy;
potential energy of a particle in a gravitational field, and of a stretched elastic
string.
Kinematics of relative motion.
Dynamics of
motion relative to a frame of referenoe subject to (1) uniform velocity, (2) uniform acceleration, relative to the standard frame of
referenoe.
Dynamics of a system. The principle ot linear
momentum.
Impact.
The principle of
energy for frictionless systems.
Applications of the principles of momentum and
energy.
Elementary treatment of rotation of a rigid body
about a fixed axis. Moment, of inertia of a
uniform circular disc about its axis, ot a uniform rod about one end, and of bodies formable
from those by addition or subtraction (e.g. a
i-inir bounded by concentric circles). Time of
oscillation of a rigid pendulum.
StaticsEquilibrium of a particle, including
simple cases of forces in three dimensions.
Equilibrium of a rigid body under ooplanar forces.
Laws of friction. Efficiency of machines.
Centre of gravity.
Simple frameworks (graphical methods may housed, b u t are not prescribed).
Simple cases of stablility of equilibrium.
Note As compared with the Pass course, the
Honours course should be both more systematic and
more deductive. For instance, principles like those of
Moments and Linear Momentum, which can be deduced
from more fundamental principles, should be so deduced. Free use should, where appropriate, be made of
Calculus.
y38
MUSIC—
The certificates of the Australian Musio Examinations
Board passed as follows will be accepted.
A. Grade I I Practice, together with Grade I I
Theory or Musical Perception, taken, at one
Examination (to count as two subjects).
B. Grade I I Practice, together with Grade TV
Theory, or Musical Perception.
C. Grade I I Theory, or Musical Perception, together with Grade I V Practice.
In the cases of B and C, Music will count as one subject
only, and the Grade IV Section may be taken either at
t h e same or a t a previous Examination.
PHYSICS—
Pass.
The subject should be treated wherever possible from
a n experimental standpoint.
Particular reference
should be made to tho experiments of the early investL
gators such a s : Archimedes, Galileo, Gilbert, Boyle,
Newton, Faraday, Volta, Joule. Importance will be attached to a knowledge of simple applications of physical
principles in every-day life.
As prescribed for the Intermediate Examination
together with :—
Units.—The absolute C.G.S. units of mechanics;
for electrical quantities the electromagnetic
and practical; other unite expressly mentioned in their proper context.
Mechanics-—Addition and Subtraction of Vectors.
Motion: Straight motion of constant acceleration (full treatment); illustration by inclined plane or Atwood's machine; Resolution
of Forces. Couple. The balance: sensitivity
for the simple case when knife edges are coplanar. Projectiles with vertical and horizontal projection. Mechanics: Fuller treatment of Newton's Laws of Motion; inertia;
unit of force; action and reaction. Momentum.
Conservation of momentum (simple
cases). Conservation of Energy; degradation
of energy.
739
Hydrostatics.—The surface of a liquid a t rest under
gravity. Archimedes' Principle; Centre of
buoyancy (without stability considerations);
applications to specific gravity determinations; practical applications as balloons, airships submarines; Fortin barometer without
temperature and capillary corrections.
Properties of Matter-—Fuller treatment ot density
measurement and of molecular theory of
solids, liquids and gases including element a r y qualitative treatment of kinetic theory
of gases.
Heat.—Expansion of solids, coefficients ot expansion., linear and cubical; expansion of liquids,
coefficients of real and apparent expansion;
effect of expansion on density; weight thermometer. Calorimetry; fuller treatment of
specific heats. Latent Heats ot vaporization
and solidification of water.
Determination
of melting point from cooling curve. Determination of vapour pressure by boiling point
method. Determination ot boiling point by
direct and indirect methods; cooling due to
evaporation. Pressure coefficient of a gas.
Vapour pressure. Humidity. Dew point. Any
one type of dew point hygrometer. Wet and
dry bulb hygrometers (descriptive Treatment).
The mechanical equivalent of heat, and t h e
quantitative specification of heat in terms of
energy. Radiation: influence of (a) nature
of surface, (b) temperature (qualitative treatment).
Electrostatics.—Quantity of electricity; electrostatic
unit of charge.
Experimental study of the
distribution of electricity on special forms of
conductors. Faraday's ice-pail experiments.
Elcctrophorus.
Potential:
unit of potential. The electric field ; lines of force. Capacity
of a conductor; unit of capacity.
Current Electricity.—Voltaic cell (without theory);
e.m.f.; current s t r e n g t h ; resistance; Ohm's
Law; the ohm; the volt; the ampere. Resistance of a system of conductors (1) in
740
: KTAILS OF SUBJEOTS. 1938
series, (2) in parallel. Wheatstone's Bridge.
Heating due to current (quantitative treatment). Faraday's first law of electrolysis.
Magnetism
and
Electromagnetism, — (Simple
breatmeat only).—The law of force between
poles. The magnetic field; lines of force.
Field due to magnet in the end-on and
broadside-on positions.*
The earth's field;
dip and declination (without corrections)
Tangent magnetometer.*' The electro-magnet
Fields due (1) to long, straight conductor, (2) to solenoid. Tangent galvanometer.
Effect of magnetic field on conductor carrying
current.
Moving-coil galvanometer.
Lenz's
Laws of electro-magnetic induction; experiments illustrating electro-magnetic induction
and the factors controlling the induced effects.
The induction coil. The principle of a simple
type of direct current generator. (Moving
coil in magnetic field and commutator.)
Honour*.
There will be two papers ou Leaving Honours Physics.
Alternative questions will be set in both of these papers
on that part of the Syllabus set out below under the
heading " Compulsory Subjecte for Study." Questions
will also be set on t h a t part of t h e Syllabus set out
under the heading " Optional Subjects for Study."
Compulsory Subjects for Study.
I n addition to a fuller treatment of the work prescribed for P a s s : —
Mechanics.—Circular motion of constant
speed.
Simple Harmonic motion; oscillation of a
particle suspended by a spring; period of
the simple pendulum.
Properties of Matter.—Essentials of the history ot
the development of Newtonian dynamics including the contributions of Copernicus, Tyoho
Brahc, Galileo, Kepler, and Newton, and the
'These parts of the syllabus are to be treated quantitatively.
741
theory of the motion in a circle of a planet
round a Sun of relatively large mass. Stress
and Strain. Young's modulus.
Heat.—Radiant heat (see under light). Calorimetry with cooling correction. Thermal conductivity; measurement for solids.
Electricity.—Condenser;
Leyden j a r ;
capacity
ot condenser aud of system of condensers in
parallel. Condensing electroscope. The potentiometer. Secondary cells. The alternating
current generator and transformer. History of
tho idea that negative electricity is atomic,
including Johnstone Stoney's and Helmholtz's
deduction of the atomic character of electricity
from Faraday's law of electrolysis and the
atomic constitution ot matter, descriptive
treatment of Thomson's discovery ot the
electron, and Millikan's experiments. AVilson's
ray track photographs showing the properties
of electrons.
Wave Motion.—Elemente of wave-motion; relation
between frequency, wave-length, velocity;
graphic specification. Reflection, refraction,
interference, stationary waves. The application of the above to sound and electromagnetic waves. Resonance.
Sound-—The physical basis of the sensation of
loudness, pitch and quality. Pitch. Vibration of strings and organ-pipes. Beats.
Light.—Intensity; simple photometry.
Velocity:
rotating mirror method with the principle pf
Michelson's modifications. Plane and spherical m i n o r s .
Prisms;
single thin lens.
Focal length from position of object and its
image.
Magnification.
Determination of
refractive index by means of a prism and
by total reflection. Dispersion; the spectrum.
Descriptive treatment of the following optical instruments;
astronomical
refractingtelescope, compound microscope, camera, and
projection lantern.
742
Introduction to the idea t h a t radiation is a
single entity; the. electromagnetic spectrum
with special retereneo to the visible portion,
"radiant heat," and Hertzian waves.
The
reflection and refraction of " r a d i a n t heat," its
emission and absorption, the similarity ot its
properties to light.
Hertzian waves, their
production, detection, reflection, and formation
of stationary waves, as in Hertz's experiments.
Optional Subjects for Study.
Descriptive treatment ot the following :
The visible phenomena of the discharge of electricity
through gases at low pressures, and one method
of production ot the necessary low pressure.
X-rays: production: photographic and fluorescent
actions: ionization of gases by X-rays as illustrated by Wilson ray track photographs.
Thermionic valve: evaporation of thermions, the
two electrode valve, its action as a rectifier.
The photo-electric cell, a simple application.
Candidates will be expected to have seen simple experiments illustrating the foregoing phenomena.
Practical Work—Pass and Honours.
out a course of practical work in a laboratory which haa
by the Schools Board. The course tor Pass must comprise
at least fifteen suitable experiments reasonably distributed over the above syllabus, and the experimente
must be the independent work of the candidate; an additional fifteen experiments must be carried out hy candidates for Honours.
out in a laboratory which has not been inspected may
be permitted by the Schools Board to submit hia
practical notebook for examination with his written
paper. This notebook must be certified by the candidate's Headmaster and by his Teacher as being the
record of the candidate's independent work.
FACULTY
OF AGRICULTURE
DETAILS OF SUBJECTS AND RECOMMENDATIONS FOR T H E ANNUAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY EXAMINATIONS TO B E H E L D I N
T H E FOURTH TERM, 193S.
Students are advised that they are expected to use a
considerable part of the Summer aud Spring vacations
for reading purposes. I n some cases a list of suitable
books will be posted on the appropriate notice boards;:
in other cases the lecturers should be consulted.
AGRICULTURAL BACTERIOLOGY—
General Bacteriology and Bacteriological Technique.
Isolation, Cultivation, Staining and Characters
of Micro-organisms.
Tho Principles of Immunity.
Tho Bacteriology of water supplies for farm and
factory. Micro-organisms in air. The Bacteriology of Milk, Butter
and Cheese.
Starters.
Soil Unoteriii—A practical study of the economic aspects of tbu various species of soil bacteria, iu
relation to fertility. The relation of microorganisms to nitrification, dentriflcation, and
ammonification in the soil. The influence of
artificial fertilisers.
Disinfectants, eto.
Text-books: —
Mackie and McCartney—An Introduction
toPractical Bacteriology.
For reference: —
Or'a Jensen—Dairy Bacteriology. (2nd edition).
Hammer—Dairy Bacteriology.
Muir and Ritchie—Manual of Bacteriology. (9tb
edition).
Russell—Micro Organisms of t h e Soil.
Waksman—Principles of Soil Microbiology
46
744
DETAILS OF SUBJEOTS 1938
AGRICULTURAL BIO-OHEMISTEY—
Lectures twice a week for three terms.
The Carbohydrates ot the vegetable and animal kingdoms, including their occurrence, chemistry, an*.
the changes they undergo in vital processes.
Fats, Waxes, and Oils, vegetable and animal.
The
Lipins and Sterols,
The Proteins. Classification. Physico-Chemical properties, and methods of purification. Chemistry
of the proteins with reference to work done
on the elucidation of their chemical constitution.
Colloidal Chemistry. Colloid reactions and their importance in vital processes.
Enzyme Action. General properties and nature of
their actions. Special fermentations, e.g., alcoholic, lactic, butyric. Bacterial fermentations.
Foodstuffs. Their chemical composition and nutrient
value. Methods ot chemical analysis. Vitamins.
Food Preservation. Cool storage of fruit nnd
meat.
Milk nnd its Products. The chemical composition of
milk, with the chemistry ot the important
ingredients.
Milk products.
Cream, butter
and cheese.
Pigments- Haemoglobin, chlorophyll, carotin, lipochromes, and their derivatives.
Animal Metabolism. The use of inorganic salts, carbohydrates, fats and proteins, with their
economy in the animal body.
Special Plant Products. Essential oils, gums, glucosides, and alkaloids.
The Chemistry of the Hormones, Vitamins, etc.
Practical Work will include qualitative and quantitative
exercises covering the above subjects.
Students are advised to read the Monographs on Biochemistry. Longmans, Green & Co.
Examination:—
Written : (one paper)—3 hours.
Practical: (one paper)—3 hours.
AGRICULTURE.
745
AGRICULTURAL BOTANY—
1.
Agricultural.—
Reserve food materials in plants. Root absorption.
Transpiration.
Sources of Nitrogen. Carbon
assimilation. Tho digestion ot reserve materials.
Respiration and Fermentation. Growth. Types
of reproduction in plants. Seeds—Germination,
longevity, testing, recognition, impurities,
structure, dispersal.
Structure of stems and
roots. Characters and origin of the commoner
timbers. Shelter breaks, and farm plantations.
Soil types and their characteristic floras.
2. Systematic.
An account of weeds and cultivated plants and of such
native families as are ot economic importance.
Three lectures per week and four hours' practiciil
work a week for three terms and Field Excursions.
Studente to present not less than 100 mounted herbarium
specimens ol economic plants. Specimens should be in
flower but fruit should also be obtained and included where
possible. Students are required to enclose with each
juounted specimen brief notes regarding the plant. They
are advised to begin the collection during the previous
year.
Text book:—
Ewart—Flora of Victoria.
Books for referenoe:—
Percival—Agricultural Botany.
Miller—Plant Physiology.
MacGregor Skene—Biology of Flowering Plants.
Mnxiiuov—Tho Plant in relation to water.
Eiamination: —
Agricultural Botany: Written (one paper). Pasa
and Honour—3 hours.
Agricultural Botany: Written and Practical (one
paper). Honour only—3 hours.
746
Systematic: Written
Honour—3 hours.
Systematic: Practical
Honour—3 hours.
(ono
(one
paper).
Pass
and
paper). Pass
and
AGRICULTURAL CHEMISTRY—
Physical Chemistry, involving more advanced treatment than in Chemistry P a r t I .
The physical and chemical properties of soils, fertilisers, insecticides, and fungicides.
Laboratory Work—
Simple quantitative analysis, volumetric and gravimetric. Physical and chemical analysis of
soils. Examination of fertilisers and other
agricultural materials.
Text-Book: —
Russell—Soil Conditions and P l a n t Growth.
Books for reference: —
Marshall—Colloids in Agriculture.
Vageler—An Introduction to Tropical Soils.
Keen—Physical Properties of the Soil.
Robinson—Soils, their Origin, Constitution, a n d
Classification.
Prescott—The Soils of Australia in relation toVegetation and Climate.
Hall—Fertilisers and Manures.
Findlay—Introduction to Physical Chemistry.
Hall—Text-book of Quantitative Analysis.
Examination: —
Written:
Pass and Honour
cadi 3 hours.
Practical:—1 full day.
(two
papers)—
AGRICULTURAL E N G I N E E R I N G AND SURVEYING—
(a) Engineering—
Internal combustion engines and tractors.
Mechanical transmission of power.
AGRICULTURE.
747
Use of electric power on the farm.
Wind motors and pumps.
Artificial illumination.
Refrigeration and cool-room construction.
Water supply and irrigation systems for farms.
Materials of Construction.
Design of simple structures.
Farm buildings iind Architecture.
Farm implements and traction dynamometry.
Principles of ventilation.
Students will be required to execute dimensioned
sketches and working drawings of machine parts, buildings, etc., as directed from time to time by the lecturer. Practical work will include testing of materialg
and the adjustment and running of engines.
(b) Surveying—
Construction, adjustment and use of—Clinometer,
Prismatic Compass, Level, Theodolite and
Sextant.
Measurement of distances and angles and running of traverses.
Reduction of traverses with adjustment of discrepancies.
Levelling.
Contour surveying.
Measurement ot earthwork.
Setting out works, including simple circular
curves.
Piano table surveying.
Studente will be required to do chaining, levelling,
contouring, traversing and plane tabling in the field,
and plotting from field notes, ns directed by the lecturer.
Students must provide themselves during the year
with approved drawing instruments and slide rule, practical work note-books, and surveying field book.
Text-books: —
Malcolm—Elementary Surveying.
Kershaw—Elementary Internal Combustion Engines (Longman's, 1931).
Examination: —
Pass and Honours: (two papers)—each 3 hours.
748
AGEICULTUEAL ENTOMOLOGY, P A R T I.—
Classification, morphology and bionomics of t h e
more important types of insects.
Methods of control (meonanical, chemical and biological).
Dissections and preparations of forms dealt with
in lectures.
Field excursions and insectary demonstrations as
arranged through course.
Students to make a collection of insects, representative of t h e types dealt with in lectures and
laboratory work.
Text-book: —
Tillyard—Insects of Australia and New Zealand.
Reference books: —
Original Papers as indicated in Course.
French—The Destructive Insects of Victoria.
Eiamination: —
AGRICULTURAL ENTOMOLOGY, PART I I . —
More advanced study of work set down in P a r t I ,
conducted wherever possible in Field and Insectary.
General Account and examination ot Acarinos infesting domestic animals and plants: their
economic importance and control.
I n addition t o those recommended for P a r t I.—
Imms—Text-book of Entomology.
Wardle and Buckle—Principles of Insect Control.
Other reading as indicated in Course.
Examination: —
One combined
hours.
written
and
practical
paper—3
AGRICULTURE.
AGRICULTURAL
749
GEOLOGY— •
Long Vacation Reading, in preparation for Agricultural Geology.—Students who have not taken Geology
to School Leaving Pass Standard are recommended to
read:
Greenly—Tho Earth (Forum Series).
The constitution and origin of the earth.
E a r t h movements. The structural features ot rocks,
including folds, faults, etc.
The principal rock-forming minerals. The origin,
field occurrence, classification and chemical
relations of the commoner rock types.
The processes and results of rock weathering and the
chemical changes involved.
The formation
and geological classification of soils. Soil surveys and soil maps.
The occurrence and origin of mineral fertilizers.
Denudation and transport by wind, water and ice.
The nature and origin ot topographic forms.
The circulation of underground water, including
artesian water.
Elementary Stratigraphy of Victoria.
Laboratory Work.—The study of geological maps and
the construction of geological sections; the examination
of hand specimens of crystal models, minerals and
rocks.
Field W o r k — F i v e field excursions will be held on
Saturdays during the year.
Text Books :—
F. Rutlev—Elements of Mineralogy (Revised by
H. H. Read).
F. A. Singleton—Agricultural Geology Notes (typewritten).
For Reference: —
W. B. Scott—An Introduction to Geology.
P. V. Emerson—Agricultural Geology.
R. H. Rastall—Agricultural Geology.
G. P . Merrill—Rocks, Rock Weathering
Soils.
and
750.
K.
D. Glinka—The Great Soil Groups of the
World aud their Development (Mimeographed
Translation by C. F . Marbut).
G. W. Robinson—Soils, their Origin, Constitution
and Classification.
Examination: —
W r i t t e n : Pass and 1st Honour—3 hours.
2nd Honour—3 hours.
Practical: (one paper), to be held concurrently
with Geology P a r t I, Practical, Pass and
1st Hon.—3 hours 20 minutes.
AGRICULTURE, PART I.—
This course is designed to familiarise the student
with the Practice and Business of farm management as
carried out on a farm wliicb is operated under scientific
guidance. The term " t h e f a r m " in the following syllabus, is intended to mean the State Research Farm, Werribee, as long as-the students receive this instruotion on
that farm, but other farms in the district will also be
visited and studied as opportunity offers.
A.
AOMOTJLTTJEE—
The climate, soil types, and economic location
of the farm and district and their influence on
the types of Agriculture carried out therein.
A practical study of the physical condition of
the farm's soils. Their reaction to weather
and to tillage.
The preparation of all types of machinery and
equipment for various farm operations, and
a study of the effect which each has on the
soils of the farm.
Operations required in the production, harvesting
and disposal ot the various crops grown on the
farm. Adjustment ot methods in accordance
with special needs of particular soils or seasons.
Daily management and organisation of labour,
machinery and power during the season.
Use and effects of manures on growth and yield
of various crops.
AGRICULTURE.
7 5 ]•
Methods of feeding the kinds of live stock kept
on the farm. The rations which are in use.
Feeding costs. Practical considerations influencing purchase and sale of stock.
Arrangement of farm buildings and the maintenance of permanent improvements of various kinds, including stock and domestic water
supply and distribution.
Commoner breeds and types of poultry, their
management, tho planning and equipment
ot poultry farms.
The principles and methods followed in laying out
land for irrigation. Irrigation practices on the
farm and in the district. The seeding and
management of lucerne and irrigated pastures.
Every student shall keep an accurate Farm Diary
on a plan approved by the lecturer. This diary shall
be submitted to the examiners at the Annual Examination, and their approval of a student's diary shall ba
essential for passing the Examination. The examiners
may, a t their discretion, examine orally a candidate
on the subject matter of his diary.
Text-books: —
John W. Patterson—Nature in Farming (Lothian
Publishing Co., Melb.).
New South Wales Dept. of Agriculture—The
Farmers' Handbook, Sth ed.
Books of reference: —
The Journal of the Dept. of Agriculture of Victoria.
Bulletins of the Victorian Dcpt. of Agriculture
on Agricultural and Irrigation subjects.
The State Research Farm Guide Book published
yearly by Dept. of Agriculture of Victoria.
Examination: —
W r i t t e n : (one paper)—3 hours.
B.
ANIMAL HUSBANDRY—
Outlines of Anatomy.—Tho skeletal, muscular,
nervous, vascular and digestive systems ot the
Horse, Ox, Sheep and Pig. Mastication and
rumination, digestion and assimilation.
752
Farm Live Stock—Value of the industry. History,
form and characteristics of the chief breeds
of horses and cattle including methods of
judging and the relationship ot type characters
to utility.
The Breeding of Farm Animals.—The generative
system, the oestrus cycle, sterility and its
causes, development ot foetus. Care of sire,
dam "and progeny.
Breeding objectives and
practices and the extent to which they conform
to the science ot genetics. Utility of pedigree
and progeny records.
The Rearing, Management and Housing of young
and old stock. The site of buildings in relation to breeding and rearing. Disposal of
dead animals.
Care of the skin, teeth and feet.
Book of referenoe: —
Rice—Breeding and Management of F a r m Animals.
Examination: —
C.
SHEEP HUSBANDRY—
The various breeds of sheep. Their history, characteristics, special requirements and uses.
Systems of flock management, w i t i special
reference to practical details as carried out
on the farm. The special features desirable
in sheep farms or stations required for various
purposes. Management of sheep feeding and
of grazing paddocks. The mating and care
of the breeding flock. Fat lamb production as
carried out on the Farm. The farm stud flock.
Books of reference:—
Matthews—Sheep and Wool.
The Sheep Industry Bulletin, published by the
Department of Agriculture of Victoria.
Examination: —
AGRICULTURE.
D.
753,
DAIRYING—
The composition and properties of milk.
The
factors influencing the quantity and quality
of milk. The dairy breeds ot cattle—Their
characteristic features and suitability for specialised dairying. The use and application of
herd books. Milking shed practice and design. Dairy practice and design of dairy
buildings. Dairy machinery.
Whole milk
supply and cream supply for butter manufacturers—the necessary conditions and equipment for both. Dairy sanitation. Care of
utensils. Harmful metallic contacts. Cooling
systems. Controlling cream acidity. Pasteurisation and bacterial counts.
Milk and
cream
testing.
Herd management and herd recording. Bull
indexing. Feeding calves.
Breeds of pigs, their feeding and management.
Tho weights, types and quality required torpork and bacon.
Wing—Milk and Ite Products.
Ingle—Manual of Organic Chemistry.
Richmond—Dairy Chemistry.
Hunziker—The Butter Industry.
Henry and Morrison—Feeds and Feeding.
Maynard—Australian Dairyman's Handbook.
The Victorian Department of Agriculture—Bulletin 16 on the P i g Industry.
Examination: —
AGRICULTURE, PART I I . —
The Australian climate and ite effects on a g r t
cultural and pastoral organisation and practices.
The history and principles of genetics.
A systematic and cultural study of t h e chief
farm crops and pasture plants of Victoria.
754
The elements of statistics, with special reference
to yield trials.
Fundamental economic principles and their reference to the production and marketing of
Australian
agricultural,
pastoral,
and
horticultural products.
Text-book: —
Thurstone—Fundamentals
of
Statistics.
Students are advised to read: —
Wilson—A Manual of Mendelism.
Hayes and Garbcr—Breeding Crop Plants.
Montgomery—Productive Farm Crops.
Babcock and Clausen—Genetics in Relation to
Agriculture.
Griffith Taylor—The Australian Environment,
'laylor—Outline of Agricultural Economics.
Hunter and Leake—Plant Breeding.
Selected Scientific! Papers.
Examination: —
W r i t t e n : (three papers), the first on Economic
matters, the other two on the remainder of
the syllabus—each 3 hours.
AGRICULTURE PART i l l . History of development of agricultural and pastoral
industries in Australia. Farm livestock in
Victoria. Closer settlement studies. Trend
of Australian
conditions.
Land
tenure
systems. Rural Credit — The Problems of
Control.
Farm Accounts and Economic Surveys. A detailed
study of Victorian farming systems and their
cconomie management.
Principles and practice of irrigation.
Irrigation
of special crops. Drainage.
Alkali problems.
The chief results of investigational work of the
experiment stations of the world in relation
to problems connected with primary industries.
AGRICULTURE.
75f>
Students are advised to read: —
Hall—Feeding of Crops and Stock.
Orwin—Farming Costs.
Roberts—History of Australian Land Settlement.
Faber—Forage Crops of Denmark.
Widstoe—Irrigation Farming.
Hall—The Book of the Rothamsted Experiments.
O'Brien—Agricultural Economics.
Federal Dairy Investigation Committee's Report.
Federal Wheat Commission's Reports.
Selected Scientific papers aud C.S.I.R. Bulletins.
Examination:—
W r i t t e n : (two papers)—each 3 hours.
BOTANY, PART I. (Agricultural Course)—
As for Botany P a r t I (see under Science)—
CHEMISTRY, PART I (Agricultural Course)—
As for Chemistry P a r t I (see under Science).
DAIRY TECHNOLOGY—
Geographical distribution of dairy factories iu
Victoria and their sizes. Production figures
for Victoria and Australia and for the world.
Commonwealth exports and consumption of
cheese and butter-values and quantities. History of the Australian dairy industry. Prices
uf producte.
Dairy legislation. Salient features of dairy produce Acts.
Paterson and Equalisation plans.
Section 92.
System of control in force at the present
time.
Brief survey of contamination of dairy producte
on the farms. Development of acidity in
cream. Lactic acid fermentation.
Normal
and abnormal changes.
Milk.—Bacteriology ot milk. Pasteurisation. Stan,
dards and methods of control in world countries. Food values. Vitamins, minerals, ir-
756
radiation and curd tension. Modified Methylene blue test. Functions ol the Milk Board
of Victoria. Municipal control of the milk
supply of Wellington, N.Z.
Physiology ot Milk Secretion.
Butter.—Physical structure of b u t t e r : its relation
to keeping quality and manufacture. Action
of bacteria yeasts and moulds and factors
controlling their action. Proteolytic action
of bacteria.
Pasteurisation. Bacterial surveys of butter factories. Method and application. Chemical deterioration, tallowiness,
rancidity and fishiness, and t h e controlling
factors. Influence of metals.
Detergents.
Materials used in equipment.
Systems of
payment in butter factories.
Overrun.
Sources of loss of butter fat.
Layout of
butter factories.
Details of methods of
manufacture.
Butter flavours and aromas,
diiico.tyl, etc. Butter wrapping materials.
Cheese.—Methods of manufacture.
Lactic acid
starters. Types of organisms. Preparation.
Application in cheese, butter and casein factories. Chemistry and Bacteriology of cheesemaking.
Sundry milk products.—Ice cream, casein, dried
milk, etc
Engineering aspects.
Visits t o commercial dairy installations and regular observation of, and association with, tho
work on dairy products at the dairy products
laboratory of the Biochemistry and Bacteriology Schools.
Hunziker—The Butter Industry. .
Sogers—Fundamentals of Dairy Science.
Journals of Dairy Research.
Journals of Dairy Science.
Davie.s—The Chemistry of Milk.
Examination:—
!
AGRICULTURE.
ELEMENTARY ORGANIC CHEMISTRY—
The Organic Section of Chemistry P a r t
under Science).
757
IT. (see
HORTICULTURAL SCIENCE AND PRACTICE—
1. A u s t r a l i a n F r u i t Production.
F r u i t Production Statistics, aud a discussion of
the main features of the principal areas devoted to fruit production in each of the
States.
2. Horticultural Practice in Victoria.
Practical work will be given in this section wherever
possible.
(a) Orchard Practice.
A study of the methods of orchard management for the main Victorian fruits. Selection of site, preparation of land, planting,
maintenance of soil fertility, pruning, interpollination, budding and grafting; and tha
methods of harvesting, packing and disposal
ot fruit.
N.B.—Brief reference only will be made to " sprayi n g , " as this subject will be dealt with in lectures on
P l a n t Pathology and Entomology.
(b) Nursery Practice.
A discussion of the methods of propagating
fruit tree stocks from seeds, root grafts.
layers and stools, cuttings, e t c . ; and t h a
budding and grafting of the stocks with tho
varieties desired.
(c) F r u i t Preservation.
A short account of the cool storage, canning
and drying of fruits.
3. Horiicultui- al Science.
0
(a) A study ot the principles underlying t h e practice of horticulture in the light of experimental results obtained in Australia and a t
research stations in other countries.
-^
(1) The relationship of vegetative growth to f r u i t
fulness involving a study of—
758
(a) The annual cycle of growth in fruit trees in
relation to physiological factors.
(b) The carbohydrate/nitrogen ratio theory,
(e) F r u i t bud initiation nnd development.
(d) F r u i t setting phenomena.
(e) Periodicity in bearing.
(2) The improvement of fruits by selection.
(3) The 'interrelationships of stock and scion in fruit
trees and their bearing on nursery practices.
(4) The fertility of orchard soil with especial reference to the use of artificial fertilisers and
green crops.
(5) Cool Storage of Fruit.
(b) The Planning of Horticultural Experiments.
Text-book: —
Quinn—Pruning for Australia.
Auohter aud Knapp—Orchard and Small F r u i t
Culture.
Morris—Nut Growing.
Coit—Citrus Fruits.
Bradford, Gardner and Hooker-—Fundamentals of
F r u i t Production.
Chandler—Fruit Growing.
Hall and Crane—The Apple.
Hoblyn—Field
Experimente
in
Horticulture,
Imp. Bur. F r u i t Prod. T.C., 2, 1931.
Attention is particularly directed also to the Journal
of Pomology and Horticultural Science, and to the
Proceedings ot the American Society for Horticultural
Science.
Examination : —
o Written : (one paper)—3 hours.
NATURAL PHILOSOPHY—PART I.(AgriculturalCourse).
As for Natural Philosophy, P a r t I. (See under Science).
AGRICULTURE.
75i>.
PHYSIOLOGY (Agricultural Course)—
Elementary Biochemistry.
Proximate constituents of mammalian body. Water,,
inorganic salts, carbohydrates, fate, lipins, proteins,
enzymes.
Physiology—General and Comparative.
Muscular system.
General physiology of muscular work.
The horse as a machine.
Muscular co-ordination.
Locomotion.
Digestive system.
Digestion in mouth, stomach, and intestines
man, horse, cow, sheep and pig.
Correlation of activity in alimentary canal.
Functions of liver and pancreas.
Absorption.
The fate ot the foodstuffs.
or
Animal nutrition.
The functions of the nutrients, vitamins.
Food rations.
Nutritive ratio.
The essentials of a diet for—
(a) Milk production.
(b) Growing animals.
(c) Working animals.
(d) Production of meat.
Vascular system.
Blood, heart, blood vessels.
The circulation and its nervous control.
The lymphatic system.
Animal Heat, The regulation of temperature in the various types
of domesticated animals, with special reference
to the effects of characteristic Australian climatic conditions, both local and general.
Shearing, clipping, rugging, in their relation to animal heat.
760
Reproduction.
A general account.
The oestrous cycle.
Nutrition of the foetus.
Influence of internal secretions.
Lactation.
Controlling factors.
Importance in relation to dairying and export lamb
industries.
Milk—ite composition and suitability for the needs
of the young.
Practical.
A practical knowledge of t h e chemistry of the animal
body, ite secretions—including milk—and excretions—
including urine; together with the simple reactions of
the mam constituents of fodders—hay. oats, maize,
etc., is acquired by studente attending the laboratory
once a week and personally performing such experimental work.
Time.
Two lectures per week (two terms).
One practical class per week for three terms.
Hi" standard of the systematic course is given by th«
lectures.
Text-books:
Marshall—Physiology of Farm Animals. Osborne and Young—Elementary Biochemistry.
Examination:—
Written : (One paper)—3 hours.
Practical: 3 hours.
PLANT PATHOLOGY.—
(a) Principles involved in the nutrition, metabolism
and growth of fungi; an introduction to cul.
tural methods.
(b) A general treatment of Myxomycetes, Phycomyoetes,
Ascomycetes,
Basidiomycetes
and
Fungi Imperfecta, with special referenoe to
pathogenic forms.
AGRICULTURE.
761
Etiology, distribution and treatment of plant
diseases of various kinds.
Methods of control,
(c) Bacterial and Virus diseases.
All Students are required to present before the end
of the year a collection of not less than 20 pressed
specimens to the satisfaction of the Lecturer.
Text Books: —
Gwynne-Vaughan and Barnes—The Pungi.
Brooks—Plant Diseases.
Grainger—Virus Diseases of Plants.
For reference: —
Heald—Manual of P l a n t Diseases.
Gaumann-Dodge—Comparative
Morphology
of
Pungi.
Stevens—'I'he Fungi which cause Plant Disease.
Massee—Diseases
of
Cultivated Plante
and
Trees.
McAlpine—Systematic arrangement of Australian Fungi.
Examination: —
Written (one paper)—3 hours.
PRINCIPLES OF VITICULTURE—
Introductory.
The vine in antiquity—Vine industry of the world
to-day. Diversity of vine products.
The different
branches of the industry—Wine—Dried grapes—table
grapes—by-products—World Statistics—Australian Statistics.
1. Botanical S t u d y of Vine a n d Collateral Genera.
Ite place in classification—Faintly of Ampelidae—
Genus Vitis—European, Asiatic and American Vine species—Study of Vitis Vinifera—
Morphology, Anatomy and Physiology of
root, stem, leaf, flower and fruit.
Factors influencing the vine and ite products.—(a)
Climate, influence of irrigation, etc.; (b) Soil
and fertilisers—mineral requirements of the
vine; (c) Vine varieties; (d) Cultural methods.
762
Anipelography.—Principles of—Description of types
of the following:
(I) American vines and hybrids; (a) Resistant stocks; (b) Direct producers.
(II) Varieties of Vitis Vinifera, (a) Wine
making sorts, (b) Drying grapes, (c) Table
grapes.
Propagation of the Vine—seeds—cuttings—layers.
Grafting: mechanism of: its influence on the
vine and ite products.
3, Establisliment of a Vineyard and its yearly
treatment.
Selection of suitable site—Preparation of land;
Clearing—fencing—sub-soiling — draining—
laying out of vineyard—distance apart—arrangement of blocks.
Plantation—vine nurseries—bench
grafting—field
grafting. Economic aspect: cost of establishing vineyard.
Pruning and training the vine, (a) Winter pruning: (bl Summer pruning: (c) Forming tho
young vine.
Treatment of established vineyard—annual cycle of
operations other than pruning. Cultivation--irrigation — manuring.
Kconomic aspect:
annual cost of working.
Vine diseases and their control.
3. The Vintage.—The Products of the Vine
(a) Table grapes—packing, marketing, shipping
(b). In-ying grapes—methods ot processing.
(c) The fermentation industries—Wine making—Fermentation and subsequent treatment of wines. Wine diseases and control.
(d) Distillation — Brandy
and
Fortifying
Spirit.
(e) Acetic fermentation—Vinegar,
(f) By-products of Viticulture, (g) Eoonomio
aspect*. Annual returns.
PeroUl—A Treatise on Viticulture.
Wickson—Californian Fruits.
Arndt—Fruit growing under irrigation.
Victorian Dept. of Agriculture—Various Vitioultural Publications.
AGHICULTORK.
763
Examination: —
VETERINARY DIETETICS—
N a t u r a l Foods of animals—evolution of artificial
feeding, source and effect of food, nutrition of
animals.
Grouping 0/ Foods—Flesh formers. Heat givers.
Proximate constituents, water, mineral matter,
protein, nitrogen-free
compounds
(carbohydrates, fats')
Palatability a n d Digestibility of Foods—Palatability, quality, dryness, preserved and cured
fodders, maturity, preparation of fodders for
feeding, frequency of feeding, ratio of food
nutrients, influence of individuality, species
and age of animals, determination of digestibility.
Values " ' Foods—commercial values; nutritive
values; basis and standards of valuation.
Rations—palatability, suitability, digestibility, calculation of nutritive r a t i o ; compounding of
rations, maintenance rations, rations for work
(horses), milk production (cows), (quantities,
varieties), development rations (calf, foal and
lamb feeding), fattening rations (bullocks,
sheep and pigs).
Water—source and means of supply (storage tanks,
wells, waterholcs, pumps and troughs), quantity, purity and mineral content.
Examination: —
Written ; (one paper)—3 hours.
VETERINA ItY
PATHOLOGY.—
Signs of Health :—
General appearance, habits, temperature, pulse,
respiration, mucous membranes, gait.
Signs of disease:—
Digestive; •Respiratory; Lameness. Evidence of
contagion.
764
Notifiable diseases: —
Tuberculosis. Actinomycosis. Anthrax.
Bovine
Pleuro-pneumonia.
Swine Fever. Contagious
Abortion.
Blackleg.
Infectious
Mastitis.
Black Disease.
WOOL CLASSING—
P r e p a r a t i o n of the Clip—Picking up fleeces.
Skirting. Rolling and handling. Sorting all
grades ot Merino, Comeback, and Crossbred
Skirtings into lines suitable for large and
small clips. Dividing fleeces, showing qualities and varieties of different parte.
Grading and Classing-—Dividing mixed fleeces
into all grades, showing Merino, Comeback,
Quarter-bred,
Half-bred,
Three-quarter
bred, Lincoln. Sorting Merino and Crossbred, with a view to length, strength, condition and quality. Tender Wool. Classing
Merino and Crossbred, wool suitable for
small and large clips.
Pressing a n d Branding-—Wool-packs. The use
ot the wool press.
Weights of various
classes to put into wool-pack. Correct branding and use of stencils. The use of the
Bale Book. Specification list
Forwarding
to market.
Terms used in the wool trade (by growers, classers,
brokers aud buyers), their meaning and significance including exposition of -'Bradford
C o u n t s " and the relationship of this feature to
values and manufacturing requirements. The
relationship between greasy and scoured
relative weights. " Clean scoured" yields.
Marketing of wool— Selling methods—Woolbuyer's
practices—Calculation ot classed wool values
estimated on clean scoured yield basis.
Selecting and mounting suitable wool samples
covering the above course.
AGRICULTURE
765
Books for referenoe: —
The Pastoral Review, Wool Exchange, Melbourne—Sheep Farm and Station Management.
Hawksworth—Sheep and Wool.
Examination: —
Practical: (At the- State Research Farm, We ribee,
towards the end of the Third Term.)—(one
paper)—2 hours.
ZOOLOGY—PART I. (Agricultural Course).
Zoology, Part I. (See under Science).
As
for
FACULTY OF ARCHITECTURE
DETAILS OF SUBJECTS AND
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR THE ANNUAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY
EXAMINATIONS
TO BE H E L D .
IN T H E FOURTH TERM 1938.
HONOUR WORK—
Except in the cases ot subjects whore special
details are published, the Examination for Honours
will require candidates to have carried out more advanced
work than for Pass, and to attain a higher standard and
show more detailed knowledge.
ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING—
Study of the Classic orders of Architecture, including
drawing and design based on them.
Detail drawings of Elementary Building Construction.
Referenoe books: —
W. R. Jaggard—Architectural and Building
Construction plates.
C. F . Mitchell—Forty plates of Building Construction.
G. Ellis—Modern Practical Carpentry.
G. Ellis—Modern Practical Joinery.
J. Nanrde—Australian Building Practice.
D. W. Tulloch—Details of Australian Building
Construction.
F . Phene Spiers—Orders of Architecture.
Amer. Tech. Society—The Orders (Text and
plates).
Letaromlly—Edifices de Rome Moderne.
ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN, PART I.—
Theory;
Tho application ot History to Architectural Design
to give students aJi understanding of the influences t h a t helped create the styles.
The theory of composition and massing.
ABCHITECTU11E. ,
767
Practice:
Elementary compositions showing structural and
massing developments from Egyptian
to
•modern (Projets).
Short studies in modern and abstract designs.
Advanced drafting methods, free drawing, and
monotone and simple colour rendering.
ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN, PART I L —
Theory:
Principles of simple design.
The relation ot purpose and structure to design.
Practice:
Advanced composition in massing.
Designing of small buildings. (Projets).
Short studies in modern design. The treatment of
elevation and section in relation to plan.
Colour rendering and presentation.
ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN, PART I I I . —
Theory:
The principles of planning and decoration.
Requirements of modern practice.
Practice:
Advanced planning as applied to present day needs.
Short studies in modern design.
Advanced massing.
Advanced color rendering and presentation.
Text-books: —
Banister Fletcher—History ot Architecture.
Magonigle—Architectural Eendering in Wash.
Brown—Letters and Lettering.
Guptill—Color in Sketching and Rendering.
Howard Robertson—Modern Architectural Design.
Howard Roberteon—Principles of Architectural
Composition.
Harbeson—Study ot Architectural Design.
The above text-books aro all necessary; the first four,
however, are proscribed for other subjects.
768
ARCHITECTURAL HISTOBY, P A R T I.—
Historical sketch of Egyptian, Assyrian, Greek, Roman, Romanesque, Byzantine, Gothic, Renaissance, and
Modern Architecture, illustrated by referenoe to existing buildings, analysing their plans, construction, and
decoration, and the influences of material, climate,
tools, religion, race, etc., upon these elements.
Text-book: —
Banister Fletcher—History of Architecture..
H . H. Statham — Short Critical History of
Architecture.
A. D. F. Hamlin—History of Architecture.
D'Espouy—Fragments d'Architecture Antique.
D'Espouy—Fragments d'Architecture de la Renaissance.
ARCHITECTURAL HISTORY, P A R T H . —
The subject will be t h a t of P a r t I at a higher standard, together with mouldings, features and ornaments based on the various styles of Architecture.
Students are required to—
(a) compile a sketch book during the year, with
examples of all styles of Architecture, or
(b) submit an illustrated thesis on some architectural subject, the title of which must be submitted during first term, t o the lecturer in
Architecture for his approval.
Reference hooks: —
R. Glazier—Manual of Historic Ornament.
A. D. F . Hamlin—History of Ornament.
Speltz and Spiers—Styles of Ornament.
F . Meyer—Handbook of Ornament.
Owen Jones—Grammar of Ornament.
A. Speltz—Coloured Ornament of All Historio
Styles.
W. H. Ward—Frenoh Renaissance Architecture.
Anderson—History of Italian Renaissance.
ARCHITECTURE.
769
B . Blomfield—English Renaissance.
Pngin—Examples of Gothic Architecture.
S t u a r t and Revett—Antiquities of Athens.
Van Pelt—Theory of Composition.
B U I L D I N G CONSTRUCTION—
Practical The constructive details of buildings and
notes on specifications.
Text-Book: —
J . Nangle—Australian Building Practice.
(See under Architectural Drawing.)
CHEMISTRY, P a r t I.—
(See under Faculty of Science.)
ELEMENTARY PLANNING—
The elementary principles of planning.
Current periodicals.
ESTIMATING-T-
Method of compiling an approximate schedule of
quantities of materials and labour, including
the method-of estimating cost of same.
Reference book:—
Mayes — Australian Builders and Contractor**
Price Book.
F R E E DRAWING, PART I.—
For degree students and for the Diploma of Architectural Design.
Lectures:
Necessity of Free Drawing to the Architect.
The use of the various media, and the essential
equipment.
Practice:
Geometrical projections) Taken a t Engineering
Intersections of planes \
School.
Projection of shades and shadows.
Elementary model drawing (cubes, eto.) in line.
770
DETAILS OF SUBJECTS. 1G3S.
Elementary model drawing (cubes, etc.), in light
and shade.
_ Elementary east drawing (simple plaster casts) in
line.
Elementary cast drawing (simple plaster casts), in
light and shade.
Outdoor sketching under instruction.
(2 Saturdays per term.)
Demonstrations:
Use of pencil, charcoal, pen, brush and other
equipment.
The methods of procedure in relation to the various media.
Mounting paper.
Text-books:
Guptill —Sketching and Rendering in Pencil.
Magonigle—Architectural Rendering in Wash.
McGoodwin—Architectural Shades and Shadows.
Examination:—
One paper—4 hours.
«
F R E E DRAWING, P A K T II.—
Lectures:
General Composition in Art.
The spectrum.
Modelling
The presentation ot detail.
Practice :
Architectural perspective.
Elementary model drawing, in wash.
lilementary cast drawing, in wash.
Intermediate model drawing (from objecte) in line.
Intermediate model drawing (from objects) in light
and shade.
Intermediate cast drawing, in line.
Intermediate cast drawing, in light and shade.
Outdoor sketching under instruction, two Saturdays per term.
ARCHITECTURE.
77].
demonstrations:
Preparation of the wash medium.
Laying on of monotone washes.
Wash rendering of Architectural Details.
Examination: —
F R E E DRAWING, PART ILL—
Lectures:
Colour relations and values. Explanation of
colour chart.
Harmonies and discords.
Formal rendering.
The representation of small buildings.
the
Practice:
Intermediate model drawing (from
objects) in
wash.
Intermediate cast drawing in wash.
Advanced model drawing in line and shade.
Advanced cast d r a w i n g ' i n line aud shade.
Experimente in the use of colour.
Demonstrations:
Application of colour.
The cause ot harmonies and discords.
Colour rendering of Architectural Details.
Wash rendering ot Architectural drawings.
Text Book- :
Carpenter—Colour.
Examination: —
One paper—i hours.
F R E E DRAWING, PART IV.—
Lectures:
Architectural Rendering.
The properties of pigments.
772
Practice:
Advanced model drawing in line, shade and wash.
Advanced cast drawing in line, shade and wash.
Model and cast drawing in simple colour.
Modelling from the cast.
Drawing of sections of the human figure from the
cast.
Life work.
For Honours—Human figure from the oast (set
subject).
Demonstrations:
Water colour rendering of Architectural drawings
in wash.
Modelling design.
Examination: —
Oue paper—4 hours.
F R E E DRAWING, P A R T T.—
Lectures :
Mural decorations and painting.
The representation of large buildings and layout*.
Practice:
Advanced model and cast drawing in colour.
Drawing of the human figure from the oast.
Water colour rendering.
Modelling design.
Outdoor sketching two Saturdays per term.
Life work.
Examination:—
GEOLOGY, HART I. (Architecture Course) —
This includes all t h e work set out under Geology,
P a r t I (see under Science), provided t h a t if a candidate who enters for Pass attends t o the satisfaction
of the Professor of Geology, t h e lectures in Palaeontology, he may be excused the questions in the exami-
ARC1I1TECTUKK.
773
nation, both written and practical, in this portion of
the work. Candidates for Honours must do the full
examination.
I n addition i t includes work on the geology of building stones and stone used in concrete.
Students may be required in addition to attend •
special field excursion.
Book for Reference: —
Howe—The Geology of Building Stones.
Examination: —
As for Geology P a r t I, plus a two-hour paper a t
the Geology School on special work.
GRAPHICS—
(See under Faculty of Engineering.)
MECHANICAL E Q U I P M E N T O F BUILDINGS—
More advanced treatment of constructive details.
Mechanical equipment of buildings, lighting, heating,
ventilation, hot water supply, lifts, fire-preventive details, acoustic materials. Specification writing.
M. & M.B.W. Regulations.
Board of Health Regulations.
Fire-Underwriters Regulations.
Lift Regulations.
Specification.
NATURAL PHILOSOPHY, P a r t I.
(See under Faculty of Science.)
PROFESSIONAL PRACTICE AND ARCHITECTURAL
ECONOMICS—
Finance in relation to Buildings.
Office Management.
Costing Systems.
Huilders' accounts and Certificates,
Building Regulations.
Conditions of Contract.
Rights of Light and other easements.
Arbitration.
Architectural Ethics.
774
DETAILS OF SUBJEOTS, 193$.
Examination —
One paper —3 hours.
P U R E MATHEMATICS. P a r t I—
(See under Faculty of Arts.)
STRENGail AND ELASTICITY OF MATERIALS—
(See under Faculty of Engineering.)
SURVEYING—(Architecture Course).
Lectures: Two hours per week during the first term.
The construction and use of instruments, namely,
the steel band, optical square, compass,
dumpy level, Aibncy level, and plane table.
Traversing and the survey of details. Survey plans.
Levelling. Measurement of earthwork. Elementary computations.
Practical Work: Three hours per week.
Note-—This course will be covered in t h e first term
in Surveying P a r t I (see under Engineering).
TOWN PLANNING :—(Architecture Course).
A study of the physical, economic, and social conditions of towns and of the predominant
character and needs of tho various districts.
Development of a street plan with regard to contour, drainage, grade, economy of construction, local and through traffic, subdivision
of laud, building facilities, landscape architecture.
The economic factors determining the width of
streets—traffic,
cost of construction
nnd
maintenance, air and light, building lines
• Public amenities, educational, recreational, social.
The selection of sites for public and seraipublic buildings, parks, gardens, playing
fields. •
The growth ot towns and cities—comparison of
ordered with disordered growth, preplanning
with replanning. Replanning problems.
AaqgiTBioTuait.
77^
The selection of sites tor new towns.
The utilisation ot waste and barren lands.
Street aud landscape architecture ae related tobuilding and property lines, heights of buildings, street scenery and vistas, squares,
places, public buildings, parks, and gardens,
points of vantage.
Housing problems, congestion in factory and- office
buildings,
prevention
of slums,
garden
suburbs and industrial villages.
Note; Students will exequte such designs in the
drawing office as the Lecturer may direct, and attend
yiaita and submit reports and designs in connection
therewith as required.'
Books for reference : ^ John Noleiu^City Planning,
Raymond UnwinTr^Town Planning in Practice.
Sufman--^Town Planning in Australia.
Thompson—Site P l a n n i n g in Practice.
Purdom—The building of Satellite Towns.
Adams^-Recent advances in Town Planning.
Examination: —
Written : One paper—3 hours.
ANNOUNCEMENTS.
1. Candidates taking the subjects of Architectural
Design and Free Drawing shall attend the Atelier on
at least three official working periods per week of not
less than two hours' duration each during term.
2. Candidates shall attend the freehand drawing
classes on a t least one official working period per week,
and one of such attendances will b e ' credited in those
required by Clause 1.
3. The official working periods of the Atelier are on
Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, and Thursday of each
week during term, from 7 p.m. to 9.30 p.m.
4. Candidates in each year shall attend a t least
four of the outdoor sketching expeditions, as set out in
the List of Fixtures.
43
776'
DETAILS OP-SUBJECTS; 1938.
6. At the conclusion of three years-of work each candidate must have complied with the following conditions:—
.„..-.
. (a) That he has kept the course of work for each
year,
(b) That he has , completed 75 per cent, of the
number ot subjecte set during the year,
(o) For his nine best subjects he must have an
average mark of not less than 6.5, out of a
possible 20; and he must receive at least
two Mentions during the year; or, alternatively, ho must have an .average of 8.0 and
have received, one Mention.
;,'
(d) That he has passed a t the yearly examination
the En Loge design subject, and the terminal
and yearly tests in t h e Atelier A r t Course.
(e) That he has iu the First Year completed 76 per
cent, of the number ot theses set during the
year, and has received one Mention and an
average of 6.5, or, alternatively, an average
of
8.
''••'•
6. Honours For a student to enter for the Honour
Examination in Design or Free Drawing, he must comply with the following conditions: —
(a) He must complete 10 of the subjecte set during
the year exclusive of terminal tests;
(b) For First Class Honours, he must receive five
mentions during the year and an average mark
of 9, with a mention in the en loge subject.
, For Second Class Honours, he must receive four
mentions during the year and an average.mark
ot 8, with a mention in the en loge subject. For
Third Class Honours, he must receive three
mentions during the year and an average mark
of 8, with a mention in the en loge subject.
FACULTY OF ARTS.
DETAILS OF SUBJECTS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
FOR T H E ANNUAL AND SUPPLKMENTARY
EXAMINATIONS TO BE H E L D IN T H E FOURTH
TERM, 1938.
THE
ORDINARY DEGREE.
GROUP I.— LANGUAGE
AND
LITERATURE.
O R E E K — P A R T 1.—
Translation from Attic Greek.
'I'ranslation into Greek Prose.
Greek Accidence and Syntax.
Special Subjects of Examination.
Sophocles, A jax (Jebb and Pearson)!
Plato, Apology (Mrs. Adam).
Examination: —
Two 3-hour papers.
O R E E K — P A R T II.—
Translation from Classical Greek.
Translation into Greek Prose.
Outlines (Primer) of History, Antiquities and Literature of Classical Greec.'.
Text-book: —
A. Petrie—An Introduction to Greek History,
Antiquities and Literature.
.- Sophoclesi Oedipus Tyrannus (Jebb).1
Herodotus I X (Shuckburgh)... . •
Thucydides I I , cc. 1-54 (Mills). • " . . . , •
778
DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 193&,
Examination: —
Two 3-hour papers.
One 1J hour paper.
GREEK—PART III.—
As, for Greek P a r t I I , together with Pindar, Olympians I-VTJ, Pythians I-IV (Gildersleeve). Candidates
will take the paper on the prescribed books sot for
Greek P a r t I I , in the Course for tho Degree with
Honours.
Examination: —
•Two 3-:hour papers.
One i j hour paper.
LATIN—PART I.—
Translation from Classical Latin.
Translation into Latin Prose.
Latin Accidence and. Syntax.
Virgil, Aeneid FI (Page).
Caesar, Civil W a r I I I (Pcskett).
Examination: —
Two 3-hour papers.
LATIN—PART II.—
Translation from Classical LatiL
Translation into Latin Prose.
Latin Accidence and Syntax.
Outlines of History, Antiquities and Literature of
Classical Rome.
Textbook; \ „
A. Petrie—An Introduction to Roman History,
Literature and Antiquities.
Cicero, Select Letters, Vol. I, 72.99 (How, O.U.P.)..
Horace, Satires I 7Gpw).
Virgil, Georgics'(Page),
ARTS.
779
I , 1-70, 118, 159, 287-392, 461=514.
I I , 1-46, 109-176, 315-345, 371-396, 458-542.
Til, 1-48, 284-393, 478-566.
IV, 1-32, 67-94, 116-148, 315-332, 351-529, 559-566.
Examination : —
Two 3-hour papers.
One 1\ hour paper.
LATIN—PART 111.=
As for Latin, P a r t I t , together with Tacitus, Dialog'us de Oratofibus (Bennett, Ginn and Co.).
Candidates will take the paper on the prescribed books
set for Latin, Part 11., in the Course for the Degree with
Honours.
Examination: —
Two 3-houf papers.
One l i - h o u r paper.
E N G L I S H A—
The examination will consist of two papers: —
1. (a) An essay oil a subject Selected ffmn a number?
of alternatives, which have reference to t h e
literature studied.
( l i hours),
(b) Questions oh English Language. (1J hours)
Books prescribed: —
Cowling—The Use of English (Melb. Univ. Press).
II. (a) Questions on dertain prescribed books* (3 hours)
Questions will be set to test the candidate's knowledge
of the subject matter and the moaning of important
passages. Thero will be a compulsory context-question
testing the candidate's familiarity with the actual
texts.
Cowling—The Use of English (Melb. Univ. Press),
pp. 1-71.
Chaucer—Nun's Priest's Talo> in Chaucer, Selections from (Ginn).
The Spanish Tragedy, iu Everyman Library, No.
491.
730'
Shakespeare—Hamlet,
Milton—Paradise Lost. Book IV, (ed. Cowling,
Methuen).
'Johnson—Life of Milton, od F i r t h (O.U.P.).
The Outline of English Verse (Macmillan).
For essays for internal studente:
Chaucer—The Prioress's Tale, in Selections from
Chaucer (Ginn).
Shakespe'arc—Antony and Cleopatra. .
Milton—Paradise Lost, Book V.
Lamb—Essays of Elia, in World's Classics, No.
. 2.
An English Bibliography (Melb. Univ. Press)
Country studente will sit for both papers. Interna]
students are required to write essays and to attend
tutorial classes during the University terms. Internal studente whose essays and tutorials have reached
a credit standard will be excused Paper I.. •
Students who desire to take honours will take English Language and Literature P a r t I .
ENGLISH B —
I. The study of English Literature from 1500 to
- 1700, with special reference
to certain
. selected texts: —
(a) Marlowe: Dr. Faustus. (Everyman, 383).
Spenser: Faery Qneene, Book I I I ; Four Hymnes(Globe ed.).
Sidney: Apologic for Poetrie (Ginn's English'
Classics).
Six Elizabethan Plays (World's Classics, 199).
Shorter Novels, Elizabethan and
Jacobean:
Everyman, No. 824.
Bacon: The Advancement of Learning, Book I ;
Everyman, No. 719.
, ' ; .t
Milton: Samson Agonistes.
Browne; Urn Burial; Everyman, 92.
'-' Walton's Lives: World's Classics, 303.
Dryden: Absalom and Achitophel. "
' : :\ABTS. •;.,
7,81
Dry d e n : All for Love and
Congreve: The -Way of the World (Everyman,
-•
.. 604).
Pepys' Diary (Everyman, 53, pp. 1-262).
Grierson: Metaphysical Poetry; Donne to Butler.
(b) The Works of Shakespeare: a general study, with
, special reference to the Sonnets, Much Ado
About Nothing Measure for Measure, Henry
IV, Henry V I I I . Hamlet, Othello, and T h e
Tempest.
Books recommended for (b): —
Cowling: A Preface to Shakespeare (Methuen).
Raleigh: Shakespeare (Macmillan). --'•- Attention is drawn to the importance for thesestudies of a knowledge of outlines bf English literary
and social history.
For books recommended see : —
An English Bibliography (Melb. Univ. Press. 1/ti).
I I . An essay on one of the following subjects, to bo
submitted to the lecturer in English B*, on
or before June 30th, together with a list
of books read or referred to in the essay.
This list should contain: Author's name,
title of book, and date and place of publication.
The essays should not be longer
than 20 pages, or 5000 words. Legibility,
arrangement and punctuation will be taken
into account.
Country students must pay at least one term's fees and
lodge an entry on the correct form (to be obtained from t h e
Registrar) before forwarding their essays.
Subjects: —
The. Plays of Marlowe (Everyman, 383).
Sir Philip Sidney.
The Heroic Play, with reference to Dryden's Conquest of Granada, Aurengzebe, and All for
Love.
•Mlas Derham.
1(j%
The Epic in English Literature.
The Life and Works of Walton.
The Life and Works of Donno (Everyman, 867,
Walton's Life).
Students are advised to consult An English Bibliog r a p h y (Melb. Univ. Press, 1/6).
Studente who desire to take honours will take
jfingiish Literature, F a r t I I .
Examination: —
Two 3-hour papers.
ENGLISH C—
I. The study of English Literature from 17001900, with special reference to certain
selected texts: —
(a) Swift: Gulliver's Travels, Tale of a- Tub, etc.
(Oxford Standard Authors. 3/6).
Addison: Spectator, ed. Arnold (Oxford U.P.).
Pope: Essay on. Criticism (Globe edition).
English Verse, Vol. I l l : Dtyden to Wordsworth,
(World's Classics, No. 310).
Johnson: Lives of the Poets (2 vols.. World's
Classics, 83, 84), viz., Cowley, Milton, Dryden,
Swift, Pope and Gray.
Shorter Novels, 18th Century (Everyman, No. 856).
Fielding, Joseph Andrews (World's Classics, No.
334).
Wordsworth:
Wordsworth
(Oxford
Standard
Authors, 3/6).
Coleridge: Biographia Litcraria (Everyman, Nol l ) , Lectures on Shakespeare (Bonn's Pop.
Lib., Bell).
Scott: The Fortunes of Nigel.
English Verse. Vol. V, Longfellow to Brooke
(World's Classics, No. 312).
Shelley; Prometheus Unbound.
Carlyle: Past and Present (Everyman, No. 608).
Arnold: Essays in Criticism, First Series.
H a r d y : Tess of the D'Urbervilles (Macmillan).
F . D. Davison: Man-Shy (Angus and Robertson,
3/9)Serlo: An Australasian Anthology (Collins).
ARTS.
785
(b) The Poems and Letters of Keats.
Attention is drawn to the importance for these
studies of a knowledge ot tiie outlines of English
literary and social history.
For books recommended see :—
An English Bibliography (Melb. Uiliv.- Press, ]/(!).
I I . Essays on one of the following subjecte, to be
submitted to the lecturer in English C*, on
or before J u n e 30th, together with a list of
books read or referred to in t h e essay. This
list should contain:—Author's name, title of
book, and date and place of publication. Tho
Essays should be not longer t h a n 20 pages,
or 5000 words.
Country students must pay a t least one term's tees and
lodge an entry on the correct form (to be obtained from the
Registrar) before forwarding their essays.
Subjecte: —
The Novels of Fielding.
Poetic Diction in the 18th Century.
Rustic Lite in Eighteenth Century Poetry up t o
Lyrical Ballads.
The Novels of Mrs. Anne Radcliffe;
A Comparison of the Shakespearean Criticism of
Johnson and Coleridge.
Byron's Don Juan.
Tiie Poetry of Matthew Arnold.
Walter Pater and Aestheticisni,
The Poetry of John Shaw Neilson.
Students aro advised to consult An English Bibliography (Melb. Univ. Press, 1/6).
Studente who desire t o take honours will take E n g lish Literature, P a r t I I I .
Examination Papers: —
Second Year: Two 3-hour papers.
Third Year: Two 3-hour papers.
FRENCH—PART I.—
(a) Theory and practice of phonetics. Prescribed
Text-book—Chishnlm: A Manual of French
Pronunciation.
*.\lr. Seccombe.
784
(b) Composition, translation a t sight, and grammar.
Prescribed
text-book:—Lazare's
Elementary
'. French Composition
(c) Reading aloud, dictation, conversation.
(d) Lectures in English on the chief
literary
movements of the 19th century.
(e) Translation of the following prescribed books:—
A.ugier et Saudcau: Le gendre de M. Poirier
.-' (Dent's Treasury-).'
Fournier: Le grand Meaulnes (O.U.P., ed. by
Dunn). •
- -Bcrthoii—rNine French Poets (Macmillan), omit. . .
ting the poems which begin on the following
pages: 15. 28, 32, 46, 52 (both poems), 59, 60,
63, 66, 70 (both poems), 73. 74, 105, 113, 118,
126-132 (i.e., all Sainte-Beuve). 137, 138, 141,
(both poems), 142, 143 (both poems), 148, T50,
151 (both poems), 152, 153 (both poems), 156,r
157.
Examination: —
One 3-hour paper (Unseens and
Prescribed
Texts).
Ono li-honr paper (Literature).
Orals (10 minutes) in Rending and Conversation.
Dictation Test (30 minutes) and Phonetic T r a n scription (30 minutes).
N.B.—The course for French, P a r t I., assumes that
students have passed in French a t the Leaving Certificate Examination.
FRENCH—PART I I .
(a) Translation into and from French.
Prescribed text-book — Niklaus and Wood's
French Prose Composition (Duckworth).
(In Readina:. dictation, conversation, practical phonetics. Text-book:—Chisholm: A Manual of
Frenoh Pronunciation
(c) Lectures in French o n : —
Literature A. Politique e t L i t t c r a t u r e .
Literature B. Le Mouvement Symboliste.
ARTS.
785
Pass students may choose A or B.
(d) Translation ot the following prescribed t e x t s : —
Kastner: A book ot French Verse (C.U.P.), the
following poems: Nos. 16, 19, 21, 23, 29, 32,
42, 55, 63, 66, 67 69, 82, 83, 91, 93, 101, 102,
103, 106, 110, i l l , 116, 185, 186, 187, 188,
197 201, 202, 203, 204, 205, 206, 207, 208, 209,
210, 216, 217, 219, 222.
Moliere: L'Avare (Dent's Treasury).
Abbe Prevost: Manon Lescaut.
Examination: —
One 3-hour paper (Unseens).
Two 1^-hour papers (Prescribed Texts,
Literature A or B).
Orals in Reading. Conversation, Dictation
Phonetics (totalling 75 minutes).
andl
and
"Vacation Reading.—Suggestions will be posted on
the French notioo-board before the end of the year
1937.
FRENCH—PART III.—
(a) Translation into and from French.
(6) Reading, conversation, practical phonetics.
(c) Lectures in French on the following subjects: —
Literature A. As for P a r t I I .
Literature B. As for P a r t I I .
Students may choose A or B.
(d) Translation of t h e following prescribed works: —
Gauthier Ferricres—Anthologie des Ecrivains oontemporains, Poesie
Stendhal—Le Rouge et le Noir.
Vacation Reading.—Suggestions will be posted on
the French notice-board before the end .of t h e year
1937.
Country studente desiring the advice of the staff must
enter on the form prescribed tor external students (obtainable from the Registrar's Office) and pay their tees term
by term.
786
Books of referenoe recommended for consultation (all
years: —
Kirby : Students' French Grammar.
Clarke and Charpentier: Manuel lexique des difhcultes linguistiques du francais
Cassell's
French-English
and English-French
Dictionary.
Petit Larousse illustre,
Depras: Le francais de tons les jours
^Students taking the three years' course ate" strongly
recommended to purchase these works of reference.)
GERMAN—PART 1.
(a) Phonetics, including transcription into phonetio
script (Victor—J)ie Ausspraohe des Sohrittdeutschen).
ib) Beading aloud, conversation, recitation.
Each
student to learn by heart twelve poems as
set in class during the year, with a view
to the oral test.
(c) Composition, translation at sight and grammar
(Lubovius—Part II.)
(d) History and Civilisation of Germany (Karl
Remme—Lesebuch
fur
studierende
Aua.
lander),
{e) Intensive study: Goethes Gedichte.
(f) Lectures on the following books prescribed for
private reading:
Scheffel—Der Trompeter von Sackingen.
Grillparzer—Der arme Spielmann.
Grillparzer—Sappho.
Sudermann—F'raii Sorge.
Books of referenoe recommended in P a r t I :
1. Cassell's New German-English and English-German Dictionary.
2. Knaurs
Eonversationslexikon, or der VolksBrookhans.
3. Der grofje Duden (more particularly Vol. I).
4. Der Sprach Brockhaus.
Examination: —
Two 3-hour papers
Oral—15 minutes.
ARTS.
787
N.B.—The course for German, P a r t I., assumes t h a t
studente have passed in Gerjnan at tb.e School Leaving
Examination or reached the standard required at this
examination.
QERMANT-PAHT
n.
(a) Heading aloud, conversation
and recitation.
Each student to learn by h e a r t 60 lines from
Faust, and 60 lines from Grillparzer, with
a view to the oral test.
(b) More advanced translation, composition and
essay writing (H- P . Eggeling).
(c) History and civilisation o f Germany from 1740
to the present time. (Schweitzer-Simonnot—Lesebuch fur Sekunda, Prima und Oberprima).
(d) History of German Literature to 1830. (A..
Vogtlin, Geschichte der deutschen Dichtung).
(e) Intensive study of Goethe's Faust, P a r t I .
(f) Lectures on the following books prescribed for
private reading during the long vacation:
Schiller und
Goethe—Briefweohsel
(Velhagen
und Klasings Schulausgaben).
Grillparzer—Des Meeres und der Liebe Wellen.
Kleiet—Prinz Friedrich von Homburg.
Scheftal—Ekkehard (unabridged).
Examination: —
Two 3-hour papers.
Oral—15 minutes.
GERMAN—PAUT I I I .
(a) Advanced unseen translation, essay writing and
conversation (Eggeling).
(b) History of German Literature (Vogtlin).
(c) Faiiist, P a r t I I .
(d) Goethe's Gespriiche mit Eckermann (any complete edition).
(e) A. Study of Grillparzer's Dramas, with readings
of selected passages.
(f) Contemporary German Drama.
(g) Middle High German:
Baclimann - ^ (Lyrik.
Didaktik and Dramatik).
Studente are advised t o read the works referred to in
(d) and (e) as well as some dramas of Jiving German
authors during the long vacation.
788
Examination: —
Three 3-hour papers.
Oral—25 minutes.
Work done during the year will be taken into account
together with the oral and written teste a t the annual examination.
Country students should submit notes .or other proof
of work done during the year. They are advised to get
into touch with the Associate-Professor a t the beginning
of the academic year. Students should follow current
events in. Germany by reading t h e German magazines
provided in the University Library, and attending leotures
and meetings of the Leseverein. First-hand acquaintance
with these will be required a t t h e Examinations for tho
-ordinary degree and at the Ij'inal Examination in Germanic
Languages.
COMPARATIVE PHILOLOGY.—
. The general principles of Comparative Philology,
and the Comparative Grammar of the Greek
and Latin Languages..
Text-books:— '
Tucker—Introduction to the Natural History of
Language.
Giles—Comparative Philology.
GROUP II.—HISTORY, ECONOMICS AND
POLITICAL SCIENCE.
BRITISH HISTORY B.—
The History of Great Britain up to 1689,
special regard to the period from 1603 to 1689.
with
Books reoomtmended:
Trevelyan—History of England, Books 1, 2 and
::
3.
Tanner—Constitutional Documents of the Reign
of James I .
j.'. : ' Tanner—Constitutional Conflicts in the 17th Cen•../•.•..•;•,•;
•
t u r y : '
.
,i
.
•
•
. . . • : . ; ' .
ARTS.
789
' •'•
Gardiner—Constitutional Documents of the Puritan Revolution.
. . .
"
Firth—Oliver Cromwell.
Gooch—Political Thought from Bacon to Halifax.
Nichol-Smith—Seventeenth Century Characters.
Bland. Brown and Tawney—Select Documents in
English Economic History.
Note.—In 1938 only, British History B for evening
and country students will be as follows: —
The History of Great Britain from the earliest timea
to 1660. Special Study: T h e period from the Norman)
Conquest to the accession of Edward I .
Books recommended:—^
Haverfield—The Romanization of Roman Britain.
Davis—England under the Normans and Angevins.
Trevelyan—History ot England, Books 1, 2, 3
and Book 4, chape. I . to V.
Coulton—Social Life in the Middle Ages, Vol.
m.
Giraldus Cambrensis' Itinerary and Description of
Wales and Henderson's Historical Documents
of the Middle Ages,
in Bonn's edition.
References will also be given to Matthew of
Paris in the same edition.
Country studente should observe t h a t these prescribed books are all necessary to cover the period, and
that Vol. LTI of Coulton'e Life in the Middle Ages,
Giraldus Cambrensis' Itinerary and Description of Wales
(Everyman), aud Henderson's Documents are used for
essay work.
Country studente should enter for this subject early
in March in order to receive information about, essays
and other matters connected with the course.
Examination: —
Two 3-hour papers.
BRITISH HISTORY D.—
- The History of Great Britain after 1689, with special
regard to the period 1783 to 1901. The settlement a n d
79Q
e.arly history of the Australian colonies in relation with
the British background.
Books recommended:
(a) British History—Introductory:
Trevejyan—history ot England.
Text-books:
Ramsay Muir—Short History ot the British Commo'nwealth. Vol. I I .
Grant Robertsou-r=-Select Statutes, Cases and
Documents.
Bland, Brown and Tawneyr^-Select Documents in
English Economic History.
Laski—Political Thought from Locke to Bentham.
C. R. Pay—Life and Labour in the 19th Century.
Buer—Health, Wealth and Population.
Mantoux—The Industrial Revolution in the 18th
Century.
For
reference:
Macaulay—History of England.
A. S. Turberville (ed.)—Johnston's England.
K. Foiling—History of the Tory P a r t y .
Halevy—History ot the English People.
(b) Australian History:
E. ScotWrSbort History of Australia.
Shann—Economic History of Australia.
Cambridge History of the British Empire, Vol.
V I I — P a r t I : Australia.
Examination—
Two R-hqur papers,
Note.—Lectures in this subject will be given to evening
students in 1938 and 1940, but not in 1939,
For those studente whose courses were approved prior
to December, 1937, British History D will be taken:
during 1938. aa equivalent te the former British Histo?y Q CUP I).
ARTS
795
MODERN HISTORY A Europe and its influence since the close of the Middle
Ages, with special study of the French Revolution.
Books recommended:
Introductory:
H. Heaton—Economic History of Europe. .
H. A. L. Fisher—History of Europe.
L. Woolf—AJfter the Deluge.
Textbooks:
G. F . Hudson—Europe and China.
Robinson and Beard—Readings in Modern European History.
J . M. Thompson—Foreign History.
J . M. Thompson—French Revolution Documents.
Elton—The Revolutionary Idea in France.
E. Fucter—World History, 1815-1920.
Clapham—Economic Development of Franco a n d
Germany, 1815-1914.
For reference:
G. N. Clark—The Seventeenth Century.
Cambridge Modern History.
W. C. Abbott—The Expansion of Europe.
Examination—
Two 3-honr papers.
Note—Lectures in this subject will be given to evening
students in 1038 and 1939, but not in 1940.
MODERN HISTORY B—
The content of this subject is the same as t h a t of Modern
History A ; b u t students who take Modern History B (i.e..
Modern History as a Grade 2 or 3 subject) will be expected
to read more extensively and to write essays on topics of
greater difficulty.
Books recommended—As for Modern History A. Add.
for reference:—
Legg—Select Documents of the French Revolution.
J. A. R. Marriott—The Eastern Question.
49
792
Fay—Origins of the Great War.
6 . Lowes Dickinson—The International Anarchy
1901-14.
Moon—Imperialism and World Politics.
Examination: —
Two 3-hour papers.
Note.—Lectures in this subject will be given for evening
students iu 1938 and 1939, but not in 1940.
For those students whose courses were approved prior to
December 1937, Modern History B will be taken during
1938 as equivalent to the former European History B or C.
ANCIENT m S T O R Y . PART I.—
The general history of the ancient world in t h e
^Mediterranean and the Near East, with special attention to Greece and Rome.
Books recomended:
Bury—History of Greece.
Baker—Twelve Centuries of Rome.
Tucker—Life in Ancient Athens.
Fowler—Roman Life in the Age of Cicero.
Fowler—The City State of the Greeks
Romans.
Examination—
Two 3-hour papers.
and
ECONOMIC HISTORY—
Preliminary reading: —
Ashley—Economic Organisation of England.
Day—A History ot Commerce.
The general principles of the evolution of industry
and t r a d e ; the eoonomio history of England
to 1760 in outline; the industrial revolution
and its consequences in England; modern
• economic history of England, France, Germany and tho United States; the eoonomio
history of Australia in some detail; modern
industrial tendencies.
ARTS.
793
Text
Books: —
Clapham—The Economic Development of France
and Germany.
Shann—An Economic History of Australia.
Faulkner—Economic
History of the
United
States.
Knowles—Industrial and Commercial Revolutions
in Great Britain during the Nineteenth
Century.
Meredith—The Economic History of England.
Bland, Brown and Ta.wncy—English Eoonomio
History, Select Documente.
Day—A History ot Commerce.
References for further reading, both general and on
•special topics, will be made in the lectures.
Students are expected to prepare class exercises and
.essays as set by the lecturers.
Examination—
Two 3-hour papers.
:EGONOMICS—PART 1.
Preliminary r e a d i n g : —
Clay—'Economics for tho General Reader.
Scott—The Approach to Economics.
Outlines of the general economics of the production,
consumption, distribution and exchange of wealth, with
special consideration of value, industrial organisation,
t h e economic functions of government, wages, rent,
prices, money and banking, and the elementary principles of taxation.
Text Books: —
Henderson—Supr.ly and Deraaaid.
Gray—The Development of Economic Doctrine.
Taylor—Principles of Economics.
Lehteldt—Money.
Layton and Crowther—An Introduction to the
Study of Prices.
Bower—A Dictionary of Economic Terms.
Copland (Ed.)—An Eoonomio Survey of Australia
(The Annals ot the American Academy of
Political and Social Science, Sept., 1931),
Parts m - Y L
794
References for further reading, both genera] and on
special topics, will be made in the leotures.
Students are expected to prepare class exercises a n d
essays as set by the Lecturers.
Examination—
Two 3-bour pnpers.
ECONOMICS—PAUT
II.
Robertson—Money.
Marshall—Principles of Economics, Books I-IV.
Pigou—Economics in Practice (Macmillan).
(a) The theory of value, the distribution of wealth,.
.population, the theory of wages, unemployment, trade policy, the relation of the State
to economic organisation; treated in g r e a t e r
detail and to a more advanced standard than
in Economics P a r t I .
(b) The principles of money, international tradeand the foreign exchanges.
(c) The national income and ite measurement.
Text-books: —
Marshall—Principles of Economics.
Hawtrey—Currency aud Credit.
Copland—Credit and Currency Control.
The Australian Tariff: An Economic Enquiry.
Taussig—Principles of Economics (2 vols.).
Colin Clark—The National Income.
Hicks—The Theory of Wages.
Keynes—Scope and Method ot Political Economy.
Report of Royal Commission mi tin- Monetary aud :
Hanking Systems (Gov. Printer, Canberra).
References for further reading, both general and on.
special topics, will be made in t h e lectures.
Students a r e expected to prepare class exercises and;
essays as set by the lecturers.
Examination—
Two 3-hour papers.
ABM.
795-
ECONOMICS—PABT I H .
Dalton—Public Finance (Routledge).
Macfie—Theories of the Business Cycle (Macmillan).
Robinson—The Structure of Competitive Industry (C.U.P.).
King—Elements of Statistical Method (Macmillan).
Any three of the following sections may be selected.
Lectures will be given iu sections (a) and (b) each year,
a n d in sections (c) and (d) in alternate years, viz. (o)
in 1939 and (d) in 1938. Examinations will be held in
all sections annually, a n d studente will be given guidance as to reading in th© section in which there aro
no leotures.
(a) The theory of money, banking aud exchange,
international t r a d e ; industrial
fluctuations.
(b) Statistical method 'and Australian statistics.
(c) Public finance—expenditure, revenue, theory of
taxation, the public debt aud means of
amortisation.
(d) Industrial relations and Economic Organisation.
Text-books: —
(a) Keynes—A. Treatise on Money (Macmillan), Vol.
I.
Pigou—Industrial Fluctuations (Macmillan).
Copland—Australia in the World Crisis (C.TJ.P.).
Hayek—Monetary Theory of the Trade Cycle.
Harrod—International Economics (C.TJ.P.).
(b) Giffen—Statistics, edited by Higgs and Yule
(Macmillan).
Mills—Statistical Methods.
Mitchell—Business Cycles (National Bureau of
Economic Research, New York).
(c) Bastable—Public Finance (Macmillan).
Dalton—Public Finance (Routledge).
Stamp—Fundamental
Principles
of
Taxation
(Macmillan).
7"9'6"
Reports of Commonwealth Grants Commission,
1936 and 1937 (Govt. Printer, Canberra),
(d) Robinson—The Economics of an Imperfect Competition.
Clay—The Problem of
Industrial- Relations(Macmillan).
von Beckerath—Modern Industrial Organisation
(MoGraw Hill).
Anderson—The Fixation of Wages in Australia (M.U.P.).
Students must also consult the Commonwealth Y'ear
Book and other publications ot the Statistical Bureaux
of the Commonwealth and' t h e States, the budgete of
the Commonwealth and States, and articles in the
Economic Record, as directed iri lectures.
Examination—
Two 3-hour papers.
HISTORY OF ECONOMIC THEORY—(to be taken in,
1038).
Price—Political Economy iu England.
Gide and Rist—History of Economic Doctrines.
Development of economic theory from the Mercantilists to modern times, with special reference to t h o
doctrines of the Mercantilists and the Physiocrats,
Adam Smith and the classical period in England, J . S.
Mill, the Austrian Scliool, Jevons, Sidgwiok, Marshall,
Bohm-Bawerk, Marx and the development of socialism,
tariff theory; the nature, scope and method ot economics.
Text-books: —
Cannan—A Review of Economic Theory (King).
Mun — England's Treasure by Foreign Trade
(Blackwell).
Copland—W. E . H e a m : First Australian Economist (M.U.P.).
Mill..—Principles of Political Economy (Ashley's
edition).
Jevons—The Theory of. Political Economy.
AETS;
797"
Keynes—Scope and Method of Political Economy.
Articles in The Review of Economic Theory and'
other journals, as referred to by t h e lecturer.
Note.—Lectures in this 1 subject will be given in 193S
end thereafter in alternate y e a n .
Examination —
Two 3-hour papers.
MATHEMATICAL ECONOMICS—
An introductory course, selected from the following
topics: —
Place of mathematics in economic analysis and itsliterature; demand, individual and collective; supply; relation between demand and
supply; monopoly and duopoly; marginal
utility; theory of exchange and international
trade;
production;, indifference
curves;
theory of index numbers; analysis of t i m e
series; t a x a t i o n ; population.
Marshall—Prineiples of Economics, Appendices.
Cournot—The Mathematical Principles of t h e
Theory of Wealth, Chaps. I-VIII.
Bsoks for reference: —
Bowley—The
Mathematical!
Groundwork
of
Economics.
Pareto—Manuel d'Economie Politique.
Zeuthcn—Problems of Monopoly and Eoonomio
Warfare.
Robinfon—Economics of Imperfect Competition.
Chamberlin—Theory of Monopolistic Competition.
Reference to current periodicals will be made in thelectures.
A knowledge of Mathematics up to the standard o f
Pure Mathematics I , and of Economics up to thestandard of Economics I , will be assumed in this course-
798
Examination: —
One 3-hour paper.
Note.—Lectures in this subject will be given iu 1939
:and thereafter in alternate years.
MODERN POLITICAL
INSTITUTIONS—
A Comparative Study of the Practice
Government.
of
Modern
-A.
The Democracies.
(i.) A brief analysis of the theory of modern democratic government,
(ii.) A study of the working of government in Britain, France and U.S.A.—
(1) The party system.
(2) The electoral system.
(3) The legislature.
(4) The executive and civil service.
3?.
Fascism in I t a l y .
The theory and practice of the corporative state.
•0-
N a t i o n a l Socialism i n Germany.
The politics and government of Germany before
1918.
The Weimar era. 1919-1933. The Third Reich.
D.
The Soviet System i n Theory and Practice.
The constitution ot U.S.S.R. The organisation
and functions of the Communist Party and
the Third International. The technique of
Soviet planning.
'Text-books: •—
F. A. Ogg—English Government and
(1936).
A. Siegfried—France.
W. I. Jennings—Cabinet Government.
H. Finer—Mussolini's Italy.
Salvemiui—Under the Axe of Fascism.
Webb—Soviet Communism.
Wertheimer—Germany under Hitler.
Politics
ARTS.
799
For reference: —
H. Finer—Theory and Practice of Modern Government.
Smell ie—A Hundred Years of English Government.
Lindsay—Essentials ot Democracy.
Ritchie—Natural Rights.
Woolf—After the Deluge.
Laski—Democracy in Crisis.
Lenin-—The State and Revolution.
Stalin—Leninism.
Mussolini—The Political and Social Doctrines of
Fascism.
A large p a r t of the reading in the course will consist of articles in periodicals. Frequent reference will
be maoe to the Political Quarterly, Political Science
Quarterly and American Political Science Review.
Detailed reading lists are provided each term. Tho
course involves the writing of terminal essays.
Examination: —
One 3-hour paper.
CONSTITUTIONAL AND LEGAL HISTORY—
Before lectures commence, students sliould read
carefully:
Pollard—Factors in Modern History.
Fifoot—English Law and its Background.
An informal test ot students' knowledge of these books
will bo held during the first week ot term.
This subject comprises a study of the development of the
English constitutional system with special reference to
. (a) Tho evolution of Parliament in the Middle Ages,
(b) The definition of ' p o w e r s ' in the 17th century,
(o) The evolution ot Cabinet Government in the 18th
and 19th centuries,
(d) The evolution of the English judicial system.
The text-books recommended are :
Maitland—Constitutional History of England.
Pollard—Factors in Modern History.
800
Adams and Stephens—Select Documents of English Constitutional- History.
Potter—Historical Introduction to English Law and
it's Institutions.
F u r t h e r references will lie given in lectures, especially
to:
Pollard—The Evolution of Parliament.
Holdsworth—History of English Law, vol I .
Levy-Ullman—The English Legal Tradition.
Law students will also be examined on an outline
study of the history of certain selected branches of
English Law, as directed in class.
The text-book for this part of the course is the
relevant portion of Dr. Potter's book, referred to
above.
Students who do not desire to obtain credit for t h e
subject as a Law subject may submit an essay on au
approved subject, instead of taking the examination
on an outline study of the history of legal doctrine.
F u r t h e r references will be given in lectures, especially to—
Holdsworth—Historical Introduction to English
Land Law.
History of English Law, vols. I I - I I I .
Examination :
Two 3-hour papers in Constitutional and in Legal
History respectively.
INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS—
The course will be concerned with the underlying
factors rather than the actual content of current International Relations. The following sections indicate tho
chief subdivisions, but do not exhaust the content of
the course, whilst the details under each section aro
by way of illustration.
Section 1.—
The general problem of International Relations
• viewed as a conflict between State Independence and World Organisation.
Mm
801:
Section I I . —
The meaning and importance in International Relations of the idea of Race, State, Nation,
Nationality, Nationalism.
Section III.—
Tho machinery and methods of International Relations : e.g.. Treaties, The Foreign Services,
International Law, Conferences, " The New
Diplomacy."
Section IV.—
Imperialism and International Affairs, Raw Materials, Population Pressure, Colonies, Mandates.
Section V.—
The Permanent
Organisation of
International
Relations: (a) The League of Nations; (b) The
International Labour Office; (c) The Permanent Court of International Justice.
Text-books: —
R. L. Bnell—International Relations (2nd Ed.)
Students should road as a general introduction before
the commencement of lectures—
Mowat—The European State System.
J. Hampden Jackson—The Post-War World.
Reference will be made to the following: —
Schumann—International Politics.
Toynbeo—Annual Survey of International Affairs,
1924, et seq.
Macartney—National States and National Minorities.
Fischer Williams—The Covenant ot the League of
N ations.
Zimmcrn—The League of Nations and the Rule
of Law.
Periodicals sucli as " Foreign Affairs," " International Affairs," and Foreign Policy Reporte
of the Foreign Policy Association of NewYork, as referred to.
Examination: —
One 3-hour paper.
..SOii
CONSTITUTIONAL LAW—PART I
(See Faculty of Law).
GROUP
III.—PHILOSOPHY AND P U R E
MATHEMATICS.
P H I L O S O P H Y I.—
(i.) An Introduction to Philosophy: Plato's Republic.
Text-book: —
Plato—The Republic. (Translated by A. D. Lindsay.)
(ii.) Psychology.—Psychological Standpoint and Methods. Analysis of Mental life : Sensibility and
Purposive Behaviour.
Stages of Mental Development : The Perceptual and Ideational
Levels. Memory and Imagination, Thought
aud Language. Instinct and Habit. Emotion and Sentiment. Belief and Will.
'Text-book: —
B. Edgell—Mental Life.
For reference: —
(i.) Plato—The Apology.
Plato—Crito.
Plato—Gorgias (484-499).
Nettleship—Lectures on the Republic of Plato.
Barker—Greek Political Theory: Plato and Hi*
Predecessors.
Taylor—Plato: the man and his work (especially
ch. XI).
Joseph—Studies in Ancient and Modern Philosophy .
«(ii.) McDougall—Social Psychology.
McDougall—An Outline of Psychology.
Stout;—Manual of Psychology.
Wood worth—Psychology.
Gaxnett—Instinct and Personality.
Nunn—Education (eh. 1-12).
ARTS-
803-
James—Text-book of Psychology (ch. x, xi, xxiixxviV
Clark University—Psychologies of 1935.
The following works may be recommended for preliminary reading: —
James—Talks to Teachers about Psychology and'
Life's Ideals.
L. J . Russell—An Introduction to Philosophy.
Notes are obtainable from the Melbourne UniversityFress.
Eiamination : —
Two 3-hour papers.
HISTORY OF PHILOSOPHY—
(i.) The Historj'of Greek Philosophy from Thales toAristotle.
Burnet—Early Greek Philosophy.
Burnet—From Thales to Plato.
Adam—The Religious Teachers of Greece.
Plato—Laches, Mono, Phaedo, Thcaetetus.
Robin—Platon.
Hardie—A Study in Plato.
Taylor—Plato: The Man and His Work (relsvant Dialogues).
Taylor—Aristotle.
Selections from the Works of Aristotle,
(ii.) The History of Modern Philosophy from Descartes
to Hume, with special reference to Descartes,
Locke, and Hume.
Books recommended for reading or reference (thoseot special importance are marked with an asterisk):
Dos-curtc;—Philosophical Works (Haldane and
Ross).*
Merry lees—Descartes.
A. B . Gibson—The Philosophy of Descartes.
Locke—Essay Concerning Human Understanding:
(Pringle-Pattison's abbreviated edition).*
J . Gibson—Locke's Theory of Knowledge and its
Historical Relations.
Qilson—Etudes BUT la pensee mfidievale.
£Q4.
Berkeley—Philosophical Works (Everyman).*
Hume—Treatise of Human Nature (Everyman).*
Notes are obtainable from the Melbourne University
Press.
Recommended for preliminary reading:
C. 0. J . Webb—The History of
(H.U.L.).
Philosophy
Examination: —
Two 3-hour papers.
LOGIC—
(i) General Logic.
Problems of Judgment and Inference,
(ii) Symbolic Logic.
Books rccoliimended (those of special importance aro
m a r k e d with an asterisk):
C. A. Mace—The Principles of L o g i c *
H. W. B. Joseph—Introduction to Logic*
J . Venn—Symbolic Logic.
L. S. Stebbing—Modern Introduction to Logic.
F. H. Bradley—Principles of Logic.
J. S. Mill—System of Logic.
J. Cook Wilson—Statement and Inference.
W. E . Johnson- -Logic.
C. I. Lewis—Survey of Symbolic Logic.
Couturat—Algebra of L o g i c *
Notes arc obtainable from the Melbourne University
"Press.
Recommended for preliminary reading:
Thoule-ss—Straight and Crooked Thinking.
Examination: —
One 3-hour paper.
ETHICS—
This course will uot be given in 1938,. though an
examination in the subject will be held as usual. De-
ARTS.
805
tails of the course for 1939 will be published in the
Calendar for t h a t year. The course in 1937 was as
follows:
Books for reference—'
Plato—Protagoras.
Plato—Gorgias.
Plato—Hippias Minor.
Taylor—Plato: The Man and his work (relevant
dialogues).
Aristotle—Ethics, Bks. 1-3, 6, 10 (ch. 6-9).
Stewart—Notes on the Nicomachean Ethics.
Mill—Utilitarianism.
Butler—Three Sermons on Human Nature (vV
Matthews, Bell's English Classics).
Kant—Fundamental Principles of the Metaphysio of Morals.
Green—Prolegomena to Ethics.
Field—Moral Theory.
Sidgwick—Methods of Ethics.
Ross—The Right and the Good.
Joseph—Some Problems in Ethics.
Notes arc obtainable from the Melbourne University
Press.
Examination: —
One 3-hour paper.
POLITICAL
PHILOSOPHY—
1. The History of Political Philosophy, with special
reference to the period from Hobbes to the Present
Day.
Text-Books: —
Hobbes—Leviathan (Everyman).
Locke—On Civil Government (Everyman).
Montesquieu—The Spirit of Laws.
Rousseau—The Social Contract (Everyman).
Bentham—The Principles of Legislation.
J . S. Mill—Liberty and Representative Government (Everyman).
Green—Principles of Political Obligation. ,••
806
Bosanquet—The Philosophical Theory of tho State.
R. M. Maciver—The Modern State.
L. T. Hobhouse—Elemente of Social Justice.
H . J . Laski—The State in Theory aud Practice.
E . F . Carritt—Morals and Politics.
Books for Reference: —
D. G. Ritchie—Natural Rights.
C. E. Vaughan—Studies in the History of Political Philosophy.
C. E. Vaughan—The Political Writings of Rousseau.
E. Ilalevy—The Growth of Philosophic Radicalism
E . Barker—Political Thought from Spencer to
To-day.
Detailed reading lists will bo provided each term.
The course involves tho writing of terminal essays.
2. During second term the Professor of Zoology will
give a series of ten Lectures in Eugenics.
Examination; —
Ono 3-honr paper.
METAPHYSICS—
This course consists of a detailed study ot Bradley's
" Appearance and Reality," as an introduction tomodern movements in philosophy animated by a spirit
of revolt against the point of view which it represents.
(i) Text-book:
Bradley—Appearance and Reality.
(ii) References:
Moore—Pliilosophicnl Studies.
Hoernle—Studies in Contemporary Metaphysics.
Hocking—Types of Philosophy.
Campbell- - Scepticism and Construction.
Perry (cd.)—-The New Realism.
Macmurray—Interpreting the Universe.
Hocking—The Self: Its Body and Freedom.
Pringle-Pattison—The Idea of God.
Examination:—
One 3-hour paper.
AfiTS.
807"
P U R E MATHEMATICS.
Practice Classes will be held in Pure Mathematics
I , n , and ITT, and Tutorial Classes in Pure Mathematics I . The work done in the Practice Classes will
carry weight in the Annual Examinations.
VACATION READING.
The following books, relevant to the study of Mathe.
matics, are suitable for reading in the Long Vacations.
In addition, reference to books bearing specifically on
the work of each Year will be found in the Details for
individual Subjecte, and additional references may be
made in Leotures.
Historical.
Turubull—The Great Mathematicians.
Sullivan—The History of Mathematics in Europe.
Hobson—John Napier and the Invention of
Logarithms.
Hobson—Squaring the Circle.
Ball—A Short History of Mathematics.
Smith—Source Book of Mathematics.
Popular.
Whitehead—Introduction to Mathematics.
Perry—Spinning Tops.
Ball—Mathematical Recreations and Problems.
Darwin—Tho Tides.
Rice—Belativiiy. (Bonn's Sixpenny Series.)
PURE MATHKMATIVS—PAHT I.
Differential and Integral Calculus—An introductory
course, including a systematic discussion of
the elementary functions, with special regard
to calculation; simple treatment of Taylor's
'theorem; geometrical applications (curvature,
arcs, areas, volumes, moments); physical
applications.
Analytical Geometry.—The straight line, with a n
introduction to conies.
.8,08
DETAIL OP SUBJECTS, 1938.
Text-book recommended: —
(1) For students who have already done a year's
course in Calculus, and for students who inintend to proceed to P u r e Mathematics, P a r t
IL Michell and Helz—Elements of Mathematical
Analysis.
(2) For others: Fawdry and Durell—Calculus for
Schools.
Hooks for Reference: —
Dale—Five-figure Tables of Mathematical Functions, or
Castle—Mathematical Tables.
Osgood and Graustein—Plane and Solid Analytic
Geometry.
A knowledge of the work prescribed for Mathematics
I I and I I I a t the School-Leaving Examination (Pass)
will be assumed.
Examination: —
One 3-hour paper.
P U R E MATHEMATICS—PAST I I .
I n the Long Vacation, before undertaking this course,
students should read some systematic work on Integration, such as Michell and Helz — Elements of Mathematical Analysis, chaps. IX, X ; also Osgood and Grau
stein—Plane and Solid Analytic Geometry, chaps. 1-6.
Calculus.—Development of the First Year Course;
functions of two or more variables; methods
of integration, including t h a t of series;
double and triple integrals; differential equations of the first order and linear differential
equations of higher order with constant coefficients.
Algebra.—Elements of the theory of determinants,
infinite series and complex numbers.
Plane Geometry.—Elementary analytical methoda
with the application ot the Calculus (including the theory of tangents, normals,
.(;..
asymptotes, singular points, envelopes); the
chief properties of- oonios; special curves.
ARTS.
§09
Solid
Geometry.—Analytical
treatment of . the
straight line and plane, with an introduction to surfaces of the second order.
Text-books recommended: —
Michell and Belz — Elements of Mathematical
Analysis.
Osgood and Graustein—Plane and Solid Analytic
Geometry.
Examination: —
One 3-hour paper.
PURE MATHEMATICS—PART I I I . —
In the Long Vacation, before undertaking this course
students should read some systematic work on Infinite
Series, and on Complex Numbers, and should extend
their knowledge of Solid Geometry. Read Hardy—Pure
Mathematics, chaps. 3, 4, 8; or Bowman—Elementary
Algebra, chap. 38; and Durell and Robson—Advanced
Trigonometry, chaps. 8, 9; together with Osgood and
Graustein, chaps. 22-24.
A: A selection of topics from
Higher Algebra—Complex numbers, theory of
equations, determinants, matrices, infinite
series and products.
Plane and Solid Geometry (projective and analytical methods).
Trigonometry—Higher plane trigonometry; spherical trigonometry, with applications.
B: Analysis--—Definite
integrals;
elements ot
the
theory of functions of a complex variable,
with applications; Fourier series; differential equations.
0 : Principles of Mathematics-—The foundations of
Arithmetic, Algebra, Geometry, Analysis and
Mechanics.
:
Oandidates may take either sections A and B, or Sections A and C. In addition, the course work will include Practical Mathematics (see below), taken for two
hours a week during one term.
810
1938.
Durell and Robson—Advanced Trigonometry.
Dickson—Elementary Theory of Equations.
Michel! and Bel/, — Elements of Mathematical
Analysis.
Osgood—Advanced Calculus.
Piaggio—Differential Equations.
Burkhardt-RasoT—Functions of a Complex Variable.
Klein—Elementary Mathematics from the Advanced Standpoint.
Vallee-Poussin—Cours d'Analyse.
Weber and Wellsteiu—Enzyklopadie der Elementar-Mathematik.
Hobson—Functions of a Real Variable.
Heath—The Thirteen Books of Euclid's Elements.
Examination : —
Ono 3-hour paper.
PBACTICAI, MATHEMATICS—
Practical applications ot graphical, numerical and
mechanical methods for the solution of problems, together with the relevant theory, as follows: —
Graphical methods.—Curve t r a c i n g ; solution of
equations; quadrature.
Treatment of observational results.—Theory of
errors, curve fitting, harmonic analysis.
Numerical methods—Interpolation; construction and
use of tables; solution of equations; summation of series; numerical quadrature; use of
calculating machines.
Text-book recommended: —
Whittaker and Robinson—The Calculus of. Observations.
CORRECTION.
Two 3-hour papers will be set in Pure. Mathematioif
Part III.
ARTS.
81.1
GROUP IV.—SCIENCE.
MIXED MATHEMATICS.
Practice Classes will be held in Mixed Mathematics
T and I I . The work done in the Practice Classes will
.carry weight in the Annual Examinations.
MIXED MATHEMATICS—PART I.
Kinematics.—Displacement, velocity, acceleration:
their specification and composition; plane
motion of a particle and of a rigid body.
Dynamics.—Mass, momentum, force, energy, angular momentum;
their
specification
and
mutual inter-relations as furnished by the
Laws of Motion; simple practical applications ot the equations ot motion of particles
and of rigid bodies in a plane.
Statics.—Equilibrium ot . particles and of rigid
bodies under coplanar forces;
application
to simple frames, machines and otiier systems of rigid bodies; the energy-criterion for
equilibrium and its stability.
Hydrostatics-—Fundamental notions on the equilibrium of fluids; centre of pressure; equilibrium and stability of floating bodies; pressure in a uniformly rotating liquid.
Barnard—Elementary Dynamics.
Barnard—Elementary Statics.
Son—Hydrostatics.
A knowledge of the work prescribed for Mathematics
I I , I I I and IV at the School-Leaving Examination
(pass) will be assumed.
Examination: —
One 3-hour paper.
MIXED MATHEMATICS—PAKT 11.
In the Long Vacation, before undertaking this course,
•students should revise their knowledge of integration
a n d ot differential equations by reading, for example,
Michell and Belz—Mathematical Analysis, chaps.
IX, X, XI, XIX, XX.
fe-12
Statics.—The equilibrium and stability of continuous,
linear systems, inelastic and elastic (strings,
arches, beams, struts) ; analysis of stress and.
strain, with simple applications.
Dynamics—The analytical treatment of the motionsof particles and rigid bodies in two and (in
simple oases) three dimensions.
The course will be based ou Lecture Notes publishedby the Melbourne University Press.
Lamb—Statics.
Lamb—Dynamics.
Lamb—Higher Mechanics.
Examination: —
One 3-hour paper.
MIXED MATHEMATICS—PART I I I .
I n t h e Long Vacation, before undertaking this course
students should read Weatherburn, Advanced Vector
Analysis, chaps. 1-3; and Oarslaw, Fourier Series and
Integrals, Introduction and chap. 7.
Dynamics.—Lagrange's equations; theory of small
vibrations
about equilibrium
or
steady
motion; variational methods.
Stress-strain
relations for an clastic solid, with simple applications.
Equations of Mathematical Physics-—The differential and integral calculus of scalar and
vector functions of position, with applications
to gravitational, electrostatic and magnetic
fields, conduction of heat, diffusion; vibrations ot continuous systems.
Weatherburn—Advanced Vector Analysis.
Webster—Dynamics ot Particles aud of Rigid
Elastic aud Fluid Bodies.
Appell—Traite de Mecanique Rationelle.
Lamb—Hydrodynamics.
Prescott—Applied Elasticity.
Routh—Statics (Vol. II.).
Byerly—Fourier Series and Spherical Harmonica.
AET8.
815
Examination:—
One 3-hour paper.
THEORY OF STATISTICS—
An elementary course on tho Mathematical Theory of
Statistics, inclusive of:—
Graphs and charts, frequencies, mean values,
dispersion;
index
numbers;
probability,
normal and generalised probability curves;
method of least squares; curve fitting, including the method of moments; correlation.
Toit-books recommended: —
Jones—First Course in Statistics.
Bowley—Elements of Statistics.
Yule—Introduction to the Theory ot Statistics.
Kelley—Statistical Method.
Elderton—Frequency Curves and Correlation.
Tippctt—The Methods of Statistics.
Steffenson—Interpolation.
Fisher—Statistical Methods tor Research Workers.
A knowledge of Matbeinatics up to tho standard of Pure
Mathematics f., will be assumed in this course.
'
Examination: —
Two 3-bour papers.
For details of Botany, Part I ; Chemistry, Part I ;
Geology, Part I; Natural Philosophy, Part I ; Zoology,
P a r t I , see under Faculty of Science.
jg]4
DETAILS OF -SUBJECTS, 1938.
THE DEGREE WITH HONOURS.
A.
SCHOOL OP CLASSICAL P H I L O L O G Y . ;
The Course for the Degree with Honours consiste of
t h e following subjects: —
Greek, P a r t s I., I I . , and I I I .
Latin, Parte I., I L , and I I I .
Comparative Philology.
Additiona] Subject.
The details of study and examination for the Annua)
Examinations are as follows : —
GREEK—PAKT L—'
Translation into Greek Prose and Iambic Verse
'I'ranslation from unprescribed Greek authors.
Special liooks: —
(a) The books prescribed for Greek, P a r t
L
{Ordinary Degree), viz.:
Sophocles, Ajax (Jebb and Pearson).
Plato, Apology (Mrs. Adam).
.
(b) Additional: —
Herodotus I X (Shuckburgh).
Examination: —
LATIN—PAKT 1.—
Translation into Latin Prose, and Heroic and
Elegiac Verse.
Translation from unprescribed Latin Authors.
Latin Accidence and Syntax.
Special Books ; —
(a) The books prescribed for L a t i n , P a r t I
(Ordinary Degree), vie.:
Virgil, Aeneid I I (Page).
Caesar, Civil War ILT (Peakett).
AKTS
815
(b) Additional: —
Cicero, Select. Letters, Vol. I, 72-99 (How, O.U.P.).
Examination: —
GREEK—PART II.—
More advanced prose and verse composition and un
prescribed translation.
Special Books: —
Sophocles. Oedipus Tyrannus (Jebb).
Herodotus IX (Shuckburgh).
Thuevdides I I , 1-54 (Mills).
Pindar, Olympians I-VII, Pythians I-IV (Gildersleeve).
Outlines of History, Antiquities and Literature,.of
Classical Greece.
Text-book: —
A. Petrie—An Introduction to G-rc;'k History,
Antiquities and Literature.
Examination: —
Ono IJ-hour paper.
LATIN—PART II.—
More advanced prose and verse composition and un
prescribed translation.
Special Books: —
Cicero. Select Letters, Vol. I . 72-99
(How,
O:U.P.).
Horace, Satires I (Gow).
Virgil, Gcorgics (Page),
I, 1-70, 118-159, 287-392, 461-514.
I I , 1-46, 109-176, 315-345 371-396, 458-542.
III, 1-48, 284-393, 478-566.
IV, 1-32, 67-94, 116-143, 315-332. 351-529, 559566.
Tacitus. Dialogus de Oratoribus (Bennett, Ginn
and Co.)
816
Outlines of History, Antiquities. and Literature of
Classical Rome.
Text-book: —
A. Petrie—An Introduction to Roman
Literature and Antiquities.
Examination: —
One 1J hour paper.
History,
GREEK—PART I I I . AND LATIN—PART 111.—
Prose and verse composition; unprescribed translation; History, Antiquities and Literature of Classical
Greece and Classical Rome.
The Special Books will be the same as for Green, Part
11., and Latin, P a r t IT., respectively.
COMPARATIVE PHILOLOGY.—
The general principles of Comparative Philology, and
the Comparative Grammar of the Greek and
Latin Languages.
'Candidates for the Honours Degree in Classical Philology
must at Annual Examinations pass Greek, P a r t I., and
Latin, P a r t I., before they proceed to Greek, P a r t I I . ,
and Latin, P a r t I I . , respectively, and Greek, P a r t I I . ,
and Latin, P a r t H . , before they proceed to Greek, P a r t
III., and Latin, P a r t I I I . , respectively; Greek, P a r t I.,
and Latin, P a r t I., shall be the subjecte in oither the
course tor the Ordinary Degree or the course for t h e
Degree with Honours. Candidates will be examined in
the subjecte of Greek, P a r t ITI., and Latin P a r t TH.,
nt the Final Examination for the Degree with Honours;
and in Comparative Philology at the end of either the
second or the third year. The examination in the lastnamed subject will, in either case, be counted as p a r t
of the Final Examination.
••Candidates who p u r s u e t h e normal t h r e e years' course will naturally
t a k e Greek. P a n I., a n d Latin, Part I., and an additional snhjcct in the
first year, Greek, Part 11., and I,atin, Part II.. in the second year, and
Comparative Philology, in either t h e second or the third year. Candidates
are requested to consult with the Professor of Classical Philology at t h e
heginning of their course.
• ARTS.
817
The Final Examination in Classical Philology will
consist of the following nine papers: —
1. Prescribed Books (Greek).
"2. Prescribed Books (Latin).
3. Translation into Greek Prose and Verse.
4. Translation into Latin Prose and Verse.
5. Greek Unseen Translation.
6. Latin Unseen Translation.
7. The History of Greek and Latin Literature
8. Qeneral Paper.
9. Special Subjecte.
8. The General Paper will include: The chief Greek
and Soman Antiquities; the Elements ot Palaeography;
Greek and Latin Syntax; Classical Athens, as treated
in lectures.
9. Special Subjects: —
(a) Greek Philosophy, with special reference to
Logical Problems, as treated in lectures.
The following dialogues of Plato should be read:
Laches, Lysis, Meno, Phaedo, Theaetetus, Republic v-vii.
Recommended for reference:—Burnet—Early Greek Philosophy.
Jackson—Texts to illustrate the history ot Greek
Philosophy.
(b) Imperial 'Rome, as treated in lectures.
Recommended for reference :—
Bury—Students' Roman Empire.
Tacitust—Annals and Histories.
Suetonius—Lives of the Caesars.
Dill—Homan Society from Nero to Marcus
Aurelins.
Friedliinder—Roman Lite and Manners under
the Early Empire.
Tucker—Life in the Roman World ot Nero
and St. Paul.
Sandys—Latin Epigraphy.
Rushforth—Latin Historical Inscriptions.
Dessau—Inscriptiones Selectae Latinae.
gig
DETMLS OF SUBJEOTS, 1938.
The following books are suggested, but not prescribed
Those marked with an asterisk are specially recommended
for practical use in the first instance—
For Comparative Philology and the Greek and Latin Languages—
Brugmaun—Kurzo Vergleichendu Graiumatik der I.G.
Sprachen.
Roberts—Introduction to Greek Epigraphy.
Thompson-Greek and Latin Paheography.
•Gildersleeve and Lodge—Latin Grammar.
H. VV. Smyth—Greek Grammar.
Lindsay—The Latin Language.
Bennett—Syntax of Early Latin.
Rieiuann and Goelzer—Grammaire Compares du grec
et du latin (especially the "syntax).
"Giles—Manual of Comparative Philology.
Fur Greek and Roman Literature—
•Murray—Ancient Greek Literature ( T\i., m i a i s
*Mackail—Latin Literature
i
Mahaffy—History of Greek Classical Literature.
•Haigh—The Attic Theatre.
Haigh—The Tragic Drama of the Greeks,
•Tyrrell—Latin Poetry.
Jebb—Growth and Influence of Greek Classical Poetry
liuteber—Aristotle's Theory of Poetry and Fine Art.
Duff, J . W.—Literary History of Rome; I., In t h e
Golden Age; I I . , In the Silver Age.
Fur History and Antiquities—
*A Companion to Greek Studies (Whibley).
•A Companion to Latin Studios (Sandys).
Dictionary of Greek and Roman Antiquities (Smith).
E. Gardner—Handbook of Greek Sculpture.
*Zimmern—'I'he Greek Commonwealth.
•Fowler—Social Life at Rome in the Age of Cicero.
•Tucker—Life in the Roman World of Nero and St. Paul
Dill—Roman Society from Noro to Marcus Aurelius.
"Mau-Kelsey—Pompeii: Its Life and Art.
•Tucker—Life in Ancient Athens.
Gardner—Grammar of Greek Art.
•Bury's History of Greece
")
* Haitiand—Short History of the Roman f , , „„„•„
R
, ,.
r jManuaia,
epublic.
t
Pelham's Outlines of Roman History
J
ARTS.
B.
81»
SCHOOL OF HISTORY AND POLITICAL
SOIKNCE.
The course for the Degree with Honours consists of the
following subjects:
British History B.
Ancient History P a r t I.
and either Aneiout History I'art II, and General History
Parts l a u d I I ;
07- General History P a r t s I, I I and I I I .
together
with one of Political Pliilosophy, Modern
Political Institutions, Constitutional
and!
Legal History, Economic History, International Relations.
Candidates lor the Degree with Honours must also
take two additional Grade I subjects at pass standard,
one ot which must be a Language other than English,
and the other Philosophy I, English A, Economics I ,
or a. second Language other than English,
The first year is regarded in this course as a preliminary year of general study, during which the
Honour student should take British History B and
Ancient History P a r t I, together with the two additional Grade I subjects. Candidates for the Degree
with Honours must be placed in the class list in British
History B and Ancient History P a r t I a t an annual
examination.
I n the second year, the Honours student should take
one of Political Philosophy. Modem Political Institutions, Constitutional and Legal History, Economic History, International Relations, together with either
Ancient History P a r t I I and General History P a r t I,
or General History, Parts I and I I .
In the final year the Honours student must take the
remaining subject required for the Degree with
Honours—General History P a r t II or Part 1.11. In this
final year he is also required to study individually one
of an approved list of special subjects with specified
documents, and to attend for one term a class in t h e
Theory of History.
g20
The work of the second and t h i r d years iu pure
History subjecte is regarded as forming a whole.
Candidates who have made satisfactory progress in
Ancient History P a r t I I , and General History Parts I
aud II during their second year will be admitted to the
third year courses of the School without formal examination iu these subjects, aud will be classed for the second
year's work on their essays. Candidates whose progress in
thes-3 subjects during the first two terms is not for this purpose considered satisfactory will be notified at the end
of the second term t h a t they must sit for an annual
examination a t the end of the second year in the subjeots concerned.
Note.—Forjthose students whose courses were approved
prior to December, 1937, Honours classes will be provided
during 1938 in British History D and Modern History B
which will bo accepted as equivalent to the former British
History D and European History B. Such students will
not, bowovor, write a research thesis for Final Honours but
will study one of a proscribed list ot Special Subjects. Tho
Special Subject will be examined in two 3 hour Final
Papers.
The details of study and examination in the subjects of the course are as follow:
1.
BRITISH HISTORY B . —
Honour studente will be expected to do work of a
higher standard within the pass course, including
special study of a proscribed text-. The text tor 1938
will be—
Clarendon—History
of t h e Great
Rebellion,
Books I-TV (i.e., up t o 1642).
Examination :—Two 3-hour papers.
2.
BRITISH HISTORY D.—
Additional for Honours. .
Great Britain aud the American Revolution together
with the History of American Federation up to
1791.
ARTS
821
Books recommended.-—
Introductory :—
Egerton—Causes and Character of the .American
Revolution.
Texts :—
S. E. Morisou—Sources and Documents illustrating
tho American Revolution, 1764-1788.
Burke—Speeches and Letters on American Affairs
(Everyman).
Hamilton—The Federalist (Everyman).
Callendar—Selections from the Economic History of
the United States.
Reference: —
Namier—England in the Age of the American
Revolution.
C. H. Van Tyne—Causes of the War of Independence.
3.
ANCTKNT HISTORY, PART I.—
• Honour Htudcnts will be expected to do work of a
higher standard within tho pass course, including
special study of a prescribed text. The text for 1938
will be—
Xcnophon's Anabasis.
N.B.—Students should read a short history of Rome
and Rostovtzeff's Ancient Orient before the beginning
of first term.
Kxamination : —Two 3-hour papers.
4.
ANCIENT HISTORY, PART II (tor Honour Students
only) —
A more intensive study of Greek and Roman Civilization than in P a r t I .
Books recommended—
Plato's Republic.
Aristotle's Politics.
Joiiguet's Macedonian Imperialism.
822
Gibbon's Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire,
chs. 1-42 inclusive.
Rostovtzcff's Social and Economic History ot the
Remain Empire.
Others as referred to by tho lecturer.
The final examination iu Ancient History will be based
on more intensive study of the subject as treated in Part
II.
5. MODERN HISTORY B.—
For Honours a more intensive study of the
Revolution than tor pass.
Frenoh
Books recommended—
Introductory—
Tilley—Modern France.
Text-books—
Henri See—La France economique et sociale au 18e.
sieole.
J. M. Thompson—French Revolution Documents.
Legg--Select Documents of the French Revolution.
Madelin—The French Rcvoluticu.
Elton—Tho Revolutionary Idea in France.
Burke—-Reflections ou tho French Revolution.
Carlyle—The French Revolution.
Reference—
Aulard—Histoire politique de la Revolution francaise
Lavisse—Histoire de France.
E. Fagnet—Politicians and Moralists of the 19th
Century.
6.
GENERAL HISTORY, PART I.—
History of Europe (including England) and ot European expansion in the time ot the Renaissance and tho
Reformation.
ARTS.
S23--
Note.—Some knowledge of the mediaeval background,
will be assumed in this work, and preparatory vacation reading in Mediaeval History will be prescribed by
the Professor.
Books recommended:
Introductory:
H. A. L. Fisher—A. History ot Europe.
H. Heaton—Economic History of Europe.
Note.—These books are useful for General History,.
P a r t s I, I I and I I I .
Text-books:
Acton—Lectures iu Modern History.
W. G. Abbott—The Expansion ot Europe.
B. Ehr-enberg—Capital and. Finance in the Age
of the Renaissance.
E. Armstrong—Lorenzo de Medici.
Machiavelli—The Prince.
R. H. Tawney—Religion and the Rise ot Capitalism.
J . W. Allen—Political Thought in the 16th Century.
J . Huizingoi—Erasmus.
J. IT. Robinson—Headings in European History.
For reference:
Cambridge Mediaeval History.
E. Armstrong—Charles V.
7.
GKNERAL HISTORY, PART II.—
Historv of Europe (including England) from 1558 t o
1815, with special study ot the French Revolution and
ite importance.
Note.—Preparatory vacation reading will be prescribed by the Professor.
Books recommended:
Introductory:
As for General History P a r t I .
£24
DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 19S8
Text-books:
Acton—Lectures in Modern History.
G. N. Clark—The Seventeenth Century.
Mantoux—Tho Industrial Revolution in the 18th
Century.
H. See—Economic and Social Conditions in
Franco in t h e 18th Century.
Elton—The Revolutionary Idea in France.
J . M. Thompson—French Revolution Documents.
Legg—Select Documents of the French Revolution.
Holland Rose—Life of Napoleon.
F o r reference:
D. Ogg—Europe in the 17th Century,
i'. S. Oliver—The Endless Adventure.
The Cambridge Modern History.
.
GENERAL HISTORY", PART I I I . —
The
economic, social and political history of
Europe (including Great Britain) from 1816
to 1914.
Introductory—
H. A. L. Fisher—A History ot Europe, Vol. I I I .
J . R. Clapham—The Economic Development of
France and Germany in the 19th Century.
L. Woolf—After the Deluge.
Text-books:
E, Fueter—World History, 1815-1920.
G. M. Trevelyan—British History of the 19th
Century.
G. Elton—The Revolutionary Idea in France.
Grant Robertson—Bismarck.
G. M. Paleologue—Cavour.
J . A. R. Marriott—Tlio Eastern Question.
E. R. Turner—Europe Since 1870.
ARTS.
825
For refercnK :
Cambridge Modern History, Vols. X, XI, X I I .
E. Halcvy—A History of the English People in
the I9th Century.
W. Alison Phillips—The Confederation of Europe.
G. P. Gooch—Germany and the French Revolution.
Bolton King—A History of Italian Unity.
1'.". Bourgeois—A History of Franco in the 19th
Century.
A. Cecil—British Foreign Secretaries. 1807-1916.
Fay—Origins of the Great War.
G. Lowes Dickinson—The International Anarchy,
1904-1914.
Pribram—England and Europe, 1871-1914.
Brandenburg—From Bismarck to the World War.
9.
MODERN POLITICAL INSTITUTIONS—
A more
course for
quired to
references
detailed study of topics selected from the
t i e Ordinary Degree. Studente will be redo two terminal essays.
Detailed reading
will be given in the discussion classes.
Examination—
Two 3-hour papers.
10. CONSTITUTIONAL AND LEGAL HISTORY —
Honours students will be expected to show a more
advanced knowledge of the Pass work, with particular
reference to
(a) the history of the mediaeval Parliament,
(b) the constitutional theories of the 17th Century,
(c) the history of the Chancery.
Examination: —
Two 2-hour papers in Constitutional and in Legal
History respectively. Honours students will
not bo required to take the pass papers.
11.
ECONOMIC HISTORY—
The work prescribed for Economic History in School H
{Economics).
51 a
§26
12. POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY—
A more detailed study of topics selected from thecourse for the Ordinary Degree.
Detailed reading
references will be given in t i c discussion classes.
Students will be required to write essays a t intervals.
throughout the year.
13. INTERNATIONAL R K L A T I O N S I n addition to the Pass Course, Honours reading will
be arranged by the lecturer in conference with each
Honour student. This reading will develop in detail
specific portions of the Pass Course.
Examination—
Two 3-hour papers.
The Final Examination in t i e School of History and.
Political Science will consist of nine papers, set asfollows:—
Two papers in British History, one on the period
up to 1G89, t h e other on the period' from 1689
to the present day.
Three papers in either Ancient History, General
History P a r t I, and General History Part.
I I ; or General History, P a r t s I, I I and I I I .
One paper in one of Political Philosophy, Modern
Political
Institutions, Constitutional
and
Legal History, Economic History, International Relations. ('I'he paper in International
Relations will be taken at the time of the Nov
ember Annual Examination).
Ono general paper in the theory and method of
History.
Two papers on tho special subject, one on documente, one general.
Note.—Students' completing the course for the Degree
with Honours under the former regulations will take a
Final Examination, set according to those regulations, but
with the following modifications—
For such students Modern History B will be counted as
equivalent to European History B, and a special subjectexamined in two 3-bour papers as equivalent to the r e search thesis.
827
C. SCHOOL O F PHILOSOPHY.
The Course for the Degree with Honours consists of the
following subjects: —
Philosophy I.
Logic.
Ethics.
Political Philosophy.
History of Philosophy.
Metaphysics.
Aesthetics, or Advanced Psychology.
Candidates should take Pliilosophy I as proscribed
for the Degree with Honours, together with two additional subjects, one ot which must be a language other
t h a n English (preferably German I), a t the Annual
Examination at the end of their first year. Candidates
who at tho beginning of their second year decide on
t a k i n g the School ot Philosophy, but have not already
passed in 1'hilosophy I , as prescribed for the Degree
with Honours, must do so at the Annual Examination at
the end of their second year. If they have already taken
that subject as tor t i c Ordinary Degree they will be
examined in the additional work only. The courses in
History of Philosophy, Political Philosophy, and either
Logic or Ethics, should be taken in the second year.
The second and the third years of the Honours
•courses are regarded as forming a whole, and therefore
there will be no examination for Honour students at tho
end of their second year. Candidates will bo classed in
that year on their essay work. A.i candidate not reachir.g Pass standard on t h a t work prior to the end of
second term will then be notified, and he will be entitled
to sit for the Pass Examination.
These provisions
apply also t o candidates taking Philosophy as part of
a combined course.
In the Final Year there will be lectures on Aesthetics
and Advanced Psychology, and candidates are recommended to attend both courses, but they will be required to sit for the final examination in one of these
courses only.
The details of study and examination in the subiecte
of the Course are as follows: —
828
1.
DETAILS OF. SUBJECTS, 19i>8.
PHILOSOPHY I . —
(a) As for tho Ordinary Degree.
(b) Additional.
Tho Problem of Thought and Knowledge (with
special reference to the work of Berkeley).
Text-Book :—
Berkeley—A New Theory of Vision; The P r i n ciples of Human Knowledge; Three Dialogues
between Hylas and Philonous. (Obtainable
in one volume in the Everyman Edition.)
For Referenoe: —
Dawes Hicks—Berkeley.
G. A. Johnston—The Development of Berkeley's
Philosophy.
Stout—Studies in Philosophy and Psychology.
Berkeley—Commonplace Book (cd. Johnston).
0. D. Broad—Tic Mind and its Place in Nature
Examination—
Three 3-iour papers.
2.
HISTORY OP PHILOSOPHY—
(a) As for t i e Ordinary Degree.
(b) Additional.
The Philosophy of K a n t .
Text-Book : —
Kant—The Critique of Pure Reason (translated
by W. Kemp Smith).
Hume—Treatise of Human Nature.
Leibniz—Monadology.
Kant—Prolegomena (tr. Bernard and Mahaffy).
Kemp-Smith—A Commentary to K a n t ' s Critique
of Pure Reason.
Lindsay—Kant.
Windelbaiud—Geschichte der Neueu Philosophic
(Kant).
Paton—Kant's Metaphysio of Experience.
ARTS
82»
Preliminary reading:—
Lindsay — Philosophy
ot
Immanuel
Eant
(People's Books).
James Seth—English Philosophers and Schools of
Philosophy.
Studente should have before commencing their work,
on Kant a t least a general knowledge of the English
Empiricists: Locke, Berkeley, Hume. (Hume is particularly important.)
3.
ETHICS—
T i e course in Ethics will not be given in 1938. Details
of the course in 1939 will l»e published in this Calendar
for t h a t year. The special Honours course for 1937 waa
as follows:
(a) As for the Ordinary Degree.
(b) Additional.
The problem of value, with special reference to t h e
ethical philosophy of Hartmann.
Text Book: —
N. Hartmann—Moral Values.
Bradley—Ethical Studies.
Sorley—Moral Values (2-8).
Laird—The Idea of Value.
Hobhouse—The Rational Good.
Perry—Qeneral Theory of Value.
Clarke—A Study in the Logic ot Value.
Eaton—The Austrian Philosophy of Value.
Moore—Prinoipia Ethioa.
Morris Miller—Moral Law and the Highest Good.
Bosanquet—The Value and Destiny of the Individual, Lectures 2, 6, 7.
Muirhead—Elements of Ethics (Bk. n , oh. 2 and
Bk. V).
Urban—Valuation, its Nature and Laws.
Crooe—The Philosophy of the Practical.
jgJJO
4.
LOGIC—
(a) As for Ordinary Degree.
(b) Additional:
(i) Logic and Epistemology.
(ii) Logic and Metaphysics.
JBooks recommended:
F. A. Bradley—Principles of L o g i c *
J . Cook Wilson—-Statement and Inference."
Ludwig Wittgenstein—Tractatus Logico-Philosophicus*
J . R. Weinberg—Examination of Logical Poativism.
A. N. Whitehead and Russell—Principia M a t h c
matica.
C. I . Lewis and C. H. Langford—Symbolic L o g i c *
C. I. Lewi.s—Survey of Symbolic Logic.
Tliose marked * of special importance.
5.
POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY—
A more detailed study of the ground covered in the
•course for the ordinary degree. Students will bo required
to write essays during the year. Further reading references will bo given in lectures.
•6.
7.
METAPHYSICS—
(a) The Lectures in the subject for the Ordinary
Degree.
(b) Additional:
The discussions and the Essay Work will deal with—
Metaphysical Systems:
(i) Alexander—Space, Time and Deity. (Selected
portions),
(ii) Whiteiead—Process amd Reality (Selected
portions).
AiESTHETICS—
Thia course is intended in the first instance for
Honour students of Philosophy, in t i e pure or combined
courses, in their second or t i i r d year, but piilosopiical
tecinicalities are as far as possible avoided, so as to
ARTS.
831
meet.the needs of any Honour student in the second or
third year of a course of language and literature who
may happen to be interested.
Books recommended:
Plato—Symposium, Ion, Republic Sec 376-403,
595-608.
Tolstoi—What is Art?
Richards—Principles of Literary Criticism.
Croce—Aesthetic.
Stace—The Meaning of Beauty.
Carritt—The Theory of Beauty.
Ducasse—A Philosophy of Art.
Clive Bell—Art.
Listowcl—A Recent History of Aesthetic
8.
ADVANCED PSYCHOLOGY—
(1) T i e nature of perceptual and intellectual cognition, of conation and volition.
(2) The experimental basis and critical analysis of
the theories of associationism, beiaviourism,
gestalt, psycho-analysis.
Books recommended:;—
C. Spearman—The Nature of Intelligence and the
Principles of Cognition.
G. Spearman—The Abilities of Man .
F. Aveling—Personality and Will.
J . B. Watson—Behaviourism.
W. Kohlcr—Gestalt Psychology.
B. Petermann—Tie Gestalt Theory.
Flugel—Theories of Psycho-analysis (Outline of
Modern Knowledge).
B. Hart—Psychopathology.
The Final Examination in Philosophy will cons;=t of
the following six papers: —
Logic.
Moral Philosophy.
Aesthetics, or Advanced Psychology.
Metaphysics.
832
DETAILS OP SUBJEOTS, 1938.
Looio.
The
Examination will be upon the work for
the Course ot Logic, as set out under the
Details of Subjects for the Degree ot B.A.
with Honours.
MOBAL PHILOSOPHY.
The
the Course of Ethics, as set out under the
Details of Subjecte for the Degree of B.A.
with Honours.
POLITICAL P H I L O S O P H T .
The
the Course of Political Philosophy, as set
out under the Details of Subjects for the
Degree of B.A. with Honours.
H l S T O B T OP P H I L O S O P H Y .
The
the Course of History of Philosophy, as set
out under the Details of Subjects for the Degree
of B.A. with Honours.
METAPHYSICS.
The
Examination will be upon t i e work for
the course of Metaphysics, as set out under
the Details of Subjects for the Degree of B.A.
with Honours.
AESTHETICS OR ADVANCED PSYCHOLOGY.
D.
(As above).
SCHOOL OP MATHEMATICS.
The course for the Degree with Honours includes the
following subjeots: —
Pure Mathematics, Parts f, If, I I I .
Mixed Mathematics, Parts I, II, III.
Candidates taking these subjects may proceed in three
years either to tiie degree of Bachelor of Arts with
Honours or to the Degree of Bachelor of Science, accord
ing to the additional subjects taken. They may also
proceed in four years to both degrees by taking suitable
additional subjects.
ARTS.
83:5
(a) Candidates for either degree must pass t h e
examinations in Frenoh and in German, P a r t s
A and B, or Examinations accepted by the
appropriate Faculty as equivalents ; but a candidate who has passed the School Leaving
Examination in French or in German before
entering on his course will be excused the
Examination in Part A of the corresponding
subject and a candidate who has obtained First
or Second Class Honours at the School Leaving
Examination will be excused the Examinations
iu Parts A and B ot the corresponding subject.
(Oandidates are recommended to take P a r t
A in their first year).
(b) Candidates for the degree of B.A. must pass
in two additional subjects, viz. (1) Natural
Philosophy P a r t I, and (2) another subject
selected from those for the Ordinary Degree
or from a School for the Degree with Honours.
The choice of this additional subject must be
approved by the Faculty of Arts ; the Faculty
approves the choice of Logic or Theory of
Statistics, and does not approve the choice
ot Chemistry P a r t I, Zoology P a r t I, Botany
P a r t I , or Geology P a r t I .
In addition, such candidates will be required
to carry out under direction a study of a
special topic in their Third Year, involving
the reading of certain papers in Mathematical
journals.
This provision applies also to
candidates in a Combined Course which includes
Mathematics.
(c) Candidates for the degree of B.Sc. must pass in
their First Year t i e additional subjects of
Natural Philosophy Part I, and Chemistry P a r t
I, and iu their Second Year the additional
subject of Natural Philosophy Part I I .
(d) The following four-year course for the two
degrees of B.A. (Hons) and B.Sc. is approved :
First Year : Pure Mathematics Part 1 (Hons), Mixed
Mathematics Part I (Hons), Natural Philosophy
Part I, Chemistry P a r t I.
£34
DETAILS OP SUBJEOTS, 1938.
Second Year Pure -Mathematics Part II (Hons),
Mixed Mathematics Part II (lions). Natural
Philosophy Part II.
Third or Fourth Year: Natural Philosophy Part
I I I . Logic or Theory of Statistics.
Fourth or Third Year. Pure Mathematics Part I I I
(tions). Mixed Mathematics Part III (Hons).
(c) To obtain t i e degree ot B.A. with Honours,
candidates must be placed in the Class Lists
at the Annual Examination in Pure Mathematics P a r t I and Mixed Mathematics P a r t
I, and at the Final Examination in Mathematics. Oandidates, who have made satisfactory
progress in Pure and Mixed Mathematics during
their second year will be admitted to the third
year courses in these subjects without formal
examination. Candidates whose progress during
the first two terms is not for this purpose
considered satisfactory will be notified at the
end ot the second term that they must sit for
the examination in cither or both of Pure
Mathematics Part TI and Mixed Mathematics
I'art I I as prescribed for Honours in the B.Sc.
Course, and their admission to the third year
•courses will depend ou the result of this examination. A. list of all candidates who will be
admitted to the third year courses, eontaining
the names alphabetically within each class
will bo published at the end of the year.
These provisions apply also to candidates
t a k i n g Mathematics as part of a Combined
Course.
The Dixscu Scholarships in Pure Mathematics P a r t I I and Mixed Mathematics P a r t H
will be awarded on essays and special work
set during the second year.
The subjects of the Final Examination will
be tlioae prescribed for Pure M a t h e m a t i o
Parte I I and I I I , and Mixed Mathematics
Parts I I and I I I . The work done in tho
study of a special topic referred to in (b)
4HTS.
S35-
above, will be taken into account in awarding the Dixson Final Examination Scholarship and determining the Class List.
(f) In the B.Sc. Course there will be examinations
for Honours in Pure Mathematics P a r t I I
and Mixed Mathematics Fart'LT. These examinations will cover the easier
portions
of the subjects, prescribed
below
for
the courses in Pure Mathematics P a r t I I
and Mixed Mathematics P a r t I I .
Candidates for the degree ot B . S c may compete for
the Dixson Final Examination Scholarship under
the same conditions as candidates for the degree
of H.A.
VACATION READING.
The following books, relevant to the study of Mathematics, are suitable for reading in the Long Vacations.
In addition, reference to books bearing specifically on
t h e (work of each Year is given in the the Details of
individual subjects, and additional references may bemade in Lectures.
Historical.
Turn bull—The Great Mathematicians.
Sullivan—The History of Mathematics in Europe.
Hobson—John Napier and the invention of logarithms.
Hobson—ignoring the Circle.
Ball—A ,Short History of Mathematics.
Smith—Source Book of Mathematics.
Popular.
Whitehead—Introduction to Mathematics.
Perry—Spinning Tops.
Ball—Mathematical Recreations and Problems.
Darwin—Thu Tides.
Rice—Relativity.
Philosophy of Mathematics and Science.
Mach—The Science of Mechanics.
Poincare—Science and Hypothesis, Chaps. I to VIII.
Poincare—Science and Method, Book 1 and Book 2, Chapters:
1 and 2.
836
Dantzig—Number, the Language of Science.
Jeffreys—Scientific Inference.
Pearson—The Grammar of Science.
Klein—Elementary Mathematics from the Advanced Standpoint.
P U R E MATHEMATICS—PAST I .
Analysis.—An introduction to the theory of real
numbers and limits, and its application in
t i e infinitesimal calculus and in the theory
of infinite sequences; differential and integral
calculus, with geometrical and physical applications; simple
differential
equations.
Probability, with applications to statistical
variables. .
Algebra.- Theory ot equations, determinants and
continued fractions; complex numbers and
elementary functions of a complex variable.
Geometry.—Elementary Analytical Geometry of the
straight line and conic.
Durell and Robson—Advanced Trigonometry.
Dickson—Elementary Theory of Equations.
Michell and Belz — Elements of Mathematical
Analysis.
Sommerville—Analytical Conies.
Kuopp—Infinite Series.
Hardy—Pure Mathematics.
Goursat—Cours d'Analyse, Tome 1.
Examination—
Two 3-hour papers.
PURE MATHEMATICS—PAST U . _
I n tho Long Vacation, before undertaking this
students should read Smith—Solid Geometry,
1-4;
Michell ami Belz—Mathematical Analysis,
I , I X , X, X I X , X X ; and Piaggio—Differential
tions, chaps. 1-7.
course,
chaps.
chaps.
Equa-
ARTS.
837
Analysis.—Elemente of the theory of aggregates,
the number system, theory of limits, functions defined by limit processes, arithmetical
theory ot continuous, differentiable and integrable functions, improper integrals, functions
ot two or more variables, multiple integrals,
elemente of Fourier series.
Differential Equations.—Ordinary and partial dif.
fcrential equations soluble by integration,
and elementary cases of solution in series.
Plane Geometry.—Projective and analytical treatment of Conies.
Algebra
Elementary Theory of Linear and Quadr a t i c Forms.
Solid Analytical Geometry.—The s t r a i g h t line and
plane, with an introduction to surfaces ot the
second order.
The course will be based on Lecture Notes published
by the Melbourne University Press.
Michel] and Belz — Elements of Mathematical
Analysis.
H a r d y — P u r e Mathematics.
Sommerville—Analytical Conies.
Smith—Solid Geometry.
Piaggio—Differential Equations.
Books for reference:—
Burkhardt-Rasor—Functions of a Complex Variable.
Gibson—Advanced Calculus.
Hobson—Theory of Functions of a Real Variable.
Ince—Ordinary Differential Equations.
Goursat;—Cours d'Analyse.
Valleo Poussin—Cours d'Analyse.
Bromwich—Infinite Scries.
Knopp—Theory and Application ot Infinite Series.
Examination—
Two 3-honr papers.
PURE MATHEMATICS—PAHT m .
In t i e Long Vacation, before undertaking this course,
students should read B u r k i a r d t and Rasor, Functions
of a Complex Variable.
838
DETAILS OF SUBJECTS. ?938
The course will consist of a selection of topics from—
Differential Geometry.
Functions of a Complex VariableDifferential Equations.
Calculus of Variations.
F o u r i e r Series.
In addition. PRACTICAL MATHEMATICS (for Syllabus see
under
PUEE
MATHEMATICS,
PABT
III.,
Ordinary
Degree) will be taken for two hours a week during
one term.
Weatherburn—Differential Geometry.
Vallee-Poussiu—Cours d'Analyse.
Macrobert—Functions of a Complex Variable.
Carslaw—Fourier Series and Integrals.
Bieberbach—Different! algleichungen.
Couraut-Hilbert—Methoden der Mathematisohen
Physik.
Eiseuhart—Differential Geometry.
Hobson—Theory of Functions of a Real Variable.
Ince—Ordinary Differential Equations.
Whittaker and Watson—Modern Analysis,
Goursat—Cours d'Analyse.
Bieberbach—Funktioncntheorie.
Kneser—Variationsrechnung.
Lovitt—Linear Integral Equations.
MIXED MATHEMATICS—PART I .
Kinematics, Dynamics, Statics, Hydrostatics.—A
more advanced treatment ot t h e Syllabus prescribed tor Pass, with t h e use of Vector
Algebra, and simple extensions to three
dimensions.
Plummer—Tie Principles of Mechanics.
Lamb—Statics.
Ramsay—Dynamics;
Weatherburn—Elementary Vector Analysis.
Examination—
Two 3-hour papers.
ARTS.
83*
MIXED MATHEMATICS—PART I I .
In the Long Vacation, before undertaking this course,.
students should read Weatherburn, Advanced Vector
Analysis.
Dynamics.—The
analytical
treatment
of
the
motions of particles and rigid bodies in twoand three dimensions; Lagrange's equations;
theory of small vibrations about equilibrium,
or steady motion; variational methods.
Statics and Elasticity.—The equilibrium and stability of continuous linear systems, inelastioand elastic (strings, arches, beams, struts);
statically
indeterminate
systems;
stressstrain relations for an elastic solid, with
simple applications.
Equations of Mathematical Physics. —The differential and integral calculus of scalar and vectorfunctions of position, with applications togravitational,
electrostatic and , magneticfields, conduction of heat, diffusion; vibrations of continuous systems.
Text-books recommended; —
Lamb—Statics.
Weatherburn—Advanced Vector Analysis.
Books tor reference: —
Houth—Analytical Statics (Vol. II).
Lamb—Higher Mechanics.
Whittaker—Analytical Dynamics.
Byerly—Fourier Scries
and
Spherical
monics.
Jeans—Electricity and Magnetism.
Har-
Examination—
Two 3-hour papers.
MLX.ED M A T H E M ' A T I C S - ^ P A B T
III.
This course will consist ot a selection of topics from::
Oeneral Dynamics.
Potential Theory.
62
.840
Electricity and Magnetism.
Hydrodynamics
Elasticity.
Theory of Relativity.
Quantum Mechanics.
Kinetic Theory of Gases.
Appell—Traite de Mecanique Rationnelle.
Lamb—Dynamical Theory of Sound.
Lamb—Hydrodynamics.
Love—Elasticity.
Rice—Relativity.
Eddington—Mathematical Theory ot Relativity.
Pidduck—A Treatise on Electricity.
Livens—Theory of Electricity.
Jeaus—Electricity and Magnetism.
Jeans—Dynamical Theory of Gases.
Webster—Partial
Differential
Equations
of
Mathematical Physics.
Kellogg—Foundations of Potential Theory.
Fronkel—Wave Mechanics: Elementary Theory.
Mott—Wave Mechanics.
Thomson and Tait—Natural Philosophy.
E.
SCHOOL OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE.
The course for the Degree with Honours consiste of
the following subjects:-—
English Language and Literature, P a r t I.
English Literature, P a r t I I .
English Language, P a r t LI.
English Literature, P a r t H I .
English Language, P a r t LTI.
In addition to tie. five subjecte ot t i e school, candidates for the Degree with Honours are required to
take three approved additional subjects, one of which
must be a language, normally Latin P a r t I , in order
to complete a course of eight subjecte. Two of these
should constitute a sub-major subject.
All Honours
•Courses must be approved a t the beginning of the;
-session. The details of study and examination in the
Mibjects of the Honours course are as follows: —
ARTS.
841
ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE. PART I .
(a) The course in literature and composition prescribed for English A.
(b) Outlines of the history ot the English Language to the close ot tho Fourteenth Century, and tho special study of West Saxon
texts and of the language of Chaucer.
Flom—Old English Grammar and Reader (Heath).
Sisam—Fourteenth Century Verso and Prose.
Wright—Elementary Middle English Grammar.
British Museum Guide to Anglo-Saxon Antiquities. (Obtainable from Melb. Univ. Press)
Jespersen—Growth and Structure of the English
Language.
Ker—English Literature, Medieval.
E N G L I S H LITERATURE, P A R T I L —
(ft) The course in Literature prescribed for English
B.
Books prescribed: As for English B, and An English
Bibliography (Melb. Univ. Press, 1/6).
(b) Old and Medieval Knglisi Literature (for second
and third year students).
The course is in two parts.
Books for reference for the two parts of the course:
(1) I n 1938: 14ti-earlior 16th century.
(2) In 1939: Beginnings-14t.li century.
Parte 1 and 2 will be examined alternately in the
second year. In t i c third year there will be no examination, but essays will be set in class, and these will be
taken into consideration in awarding Final Honours.
•Tacitus, Germania (Everyman, 274); 'Anglo-Saxon
Poetry. translated by R. K. Gordon (Everyman, 794); *Bede, Ecclesiastical History
842
•
(Everyman. 479); Hodgkin, History of t h e
Anglo-Saxons; British Museum Guide to
Anglo-Saxon Antiquities; *Wa-rdale, Chapters
ou Old English Literature; *Ker, Epic and
Romance; Camb. Hist, of Eng. Lit., Vols. i.
ii and i i i : Wells, Manual of Writings in
Middle
English: "Taylor, The
Medieval
Mind; *Salzinan, English Life in t i e Middle
Ages; Jusserand, F.nglisi Wayfaring Life;
Lewis, The Allegory of Love; Huizinga, The
Waning of the Middle Ages; Chambers, Medieval Stage.
Students are advised to read during the vacation, as a
preparation for the five topics which thoy may choose to
study in particular detail.
(c) Shakespeare and Elizabethan Drama.
Book Prescribed: —
Shakespeare's Works; Cowling, Preface to Shakespeare (Metiuen);
Oliphant,
Elizabethan
Dramatists,
For the course ou Shakespeare and Elizabethan D r a m a
tho following books are recommended: —
Sir E. K. Chambers, Elizabethan Drama, 4 vols.;
Cambridge Hist, of Eng. Lit., vols, v and vi;.
Sir E. K. Chambers, William Siakespeare, 3
vols.; R a l c i g i , Siakespeare (E.M.L. Series);
Wyndham, The Poems of
Shakespeare;
Tucker,
Shakespeare's Sonnets;
Bradley,.
Shakespearean Tragedy; Vaughan, Types of
Tragic D r a m a ; Nioiol Smith, Shakespearean
Criticism (World's Classics, 212); Onions,
Shakespeare Glossary; Shakespeare's England : A Companion to Shakespeare Studies.
(C.U.P.).
ENGLISH LANGUAGE, PART I I —
(a) Old and Middle English prescribed texts.
Wyatt—Anglo-Saxon Reader.
Cook—Literary Middle English Reader.
ARTS.
(b) Chaucer and Langland.
Chaucer (Students' Edition, O.U.P.).
Langland—Piers
the
Plowman
(ed
O.U.P.).
843
Skeat,
ENGLISH LITERATURE, PART I I I . —
(a) The course in Literature prescribed for English
C
Books prescribed:—As for English C, and " A n English Bibliography " (Melb Univ. Press 1/6).
(b) History of Literary Criticism.
This course will not be given in 1938.
For the course on the History of Literary Criticism,
"the following books arc prescribed :
Plato, Republic, 377-403, 595-608;
Aristotle's
Poetics (trans. Bywater, O.U.P. 2/6); Longinus, Ou Elevation of Style (ed. Tucker,
M.U.P.); Dante, De Vulgari Eloquentia, in
Latin's Works of Dante (Dent's Temple Classics); Sidney, Apologie for Poetrie; Dryden,
Essay ot Dramatic Poesy (ed. Arnold,
O.U.P.); Lessing, Laocoon (Everyman, 843);
Wordsworth, Preface to Lyrical Ballads;
Shelley, Defence of Poetry; Macaulay, Essay
on Robert Montgomery's poetry; Arnold,
Essays in Criticism (second series); Meredith,
An Essay on Comedy;: Grierson, Classical and
Romantic (C.U.P.).
(c) Seminar Class for the study ot the English
novel after 1700.
ENGLISH LANGUAGE, PART I I I . —
(a) Old and Middle English prescribed texts, and
unprescribed translation.
Wyatt—Anglo-Saxon Header.
Cook—Literary Middle English L'eader.
(b) Beowulf.
844
DETAILS OF SUBJEOTS, 15133,
Book prescribed:
Klacber—Beowulf (Harrap).
(c) History of the English Language.
All candidates will attend such tutorial classes as theProfessor of English may consider advisable.
At the end of their first year, candidates will present
themselves for examination in English Language and
Literature, P a r t I (a) and (b), and in two additional
subjects, one of which normally will be Latin F a r t I.
At the end of their second year, candidates will
present themselves tor examination in English Literature P a r t I I , and in English Language P a r t I I . Towards the end of their second year, candidates will
select a subject for t i e i r Essay, which, must be approved by the Professor and afterwards completed during the year before the final examination. The essay
must be submitted a t the end of t h e third term.
The final Examination in the School of English Language and Literature will be in the following subjeots : —
1. An Essay upon an approved subject, to be completed during the year of the final examination.
2. Special Period of English Literature, 1700-1900.
3. Shakespeare and Elizabethan Drama.
4. History of Literary Criticism.
5. Old and Middle English Texts.
6. Beowulf.
7. Chaucer.
8. History of English Language.
The essay .should be 50-100 pp. in length, and
should be typewritten.
A bibliography of works consulted sliould be appended.
The front page should
contain the title of the essay, and t i e student's name
and address.
E N G L I S H I N COMBINED C O U R S E S —
A. English in Combined Courses will normally consist of the following subjects, as for School E .
For
AIMS.
845
details, see under E, School of English Language and
Literature.
English Language and Literature, P a r t I .
English Literature, P a r t I I .
English Literature, P a r t I I I .
In addition to the six honours subjects of the Combined School, candidates for the Degree with Honours
are required to take two additional subjecte in order
to complete a course of eight subjecte.
All Combined Courses must be approved at the beginning ot t h e session.
At the end of their first year, candidates will present themselves for examination in English Language
and Literature, P a r t I (a) and (b), and in one additional subject, which normally should be Latin P a r t I.
During their second year candidates will attend also
'he course of lectures on Chaucer and Langland.
At the end of their second year, candidates wilt
present themselves tor examination in English Literat u r e P a r t I I , and in one additional subject.
Tho final examination in English Language and
Literature in Combined Course A will be set in the
following- subjects: —
1. An Essay upon, an approved subject (as for School
E).
2. Special Period of English Literature, 1700-1900.
3. Shakespeare and Elizabethan Drama.
4. History of Literary Criticism.
B. Candidates who wish to combine another honours
subject with English Language may, provided t h a t
they show evidence of their ability to take the course,
substitute English Language for English L i t e r a t u r e ;
and, for such candidates, the course will b e : English
Language and Literature P a r t I., English Language
P a r t I I . and English Language P a r t TIT. Particulars of these courses will be found under School E, English Language and Literature.
The final examination in English (Combined Course
B) will be: —
1. Old and Middle English Texts.
2. Beowulf.
3. Chaucer.
4. History of English Language.
.J346
P. SCHOOL OF FRENCH LANGUAGE AND
LITERATURE.
The course, for the degree with Honours consists of the
following five subjects: —
(a) French, P a r t I .
ih] French, P a r t I I .
(ci French, P a r t I I I .
(d) Language and Literature of the Middle Ages.
(e) Language and Literature of the Sixteenth Century.
In addition, three subjecte must be taken from the
courses for the Ordinary or Honours Degrees, and one
of these must he Latin P a r t I, which is a compulsory
subject also for all combined courses of which French
forms a part. The two others must be approved by)
t h e head of the department. Details of study and
examination are as under: —
<a) FRENCH PART I.
1. Sections (a), (b), (c) and (e) of the course for tho
Ordinary Degree.
2. Lectures in French on the literature of the 19th
century. The lectures" will stress different
aspects of the century each year; students
are expected to study the rest of the century's literature in outline, using the following t e x t : Maynial, Precis de litt. franchise niodcrue, pp. 105-227, and, it they wish,
attending (but not for examination purposes)
the P a r t I pass literature lectures.
3. Introduction to French Philology and Mediaeval Literature.
Prescribed Text: Paris et
Langlois— Chrestomathic du
Moyen
Age
(Hacic-tte), the extracts prescribed in class.
Examination: —
One 3-hour paper, in addition to t i e examination
for ihe Ordinary Degree.
<b) FRENCH, PART I I .
As for the Ordinary Degree, but students will
take both the A and B Literature Courses.
ARTS
847
Examination; —
As for the Ordinary Degree, except t h a t
Literature paper will be one of 3 hours.
tho
<c) FRENCH, PART I I I .
Honours students will lake Literature A, and B.,
which will form p:ut of their Final Examination. They will also study the following texts
for translation: P. Valcry—Regards sur le
mondo actuel (Paris, Stock); Gauthier-Ferrieres, the anthology prescribed' for P a r t I I I ;
Baudelaire—Los Pleura du Mai (Lemcrre).
fd) LANGUAGE AND LIT.ERATUKE OF THE
MIDDLE AGES.
1. Phonetics, Morphology and Syntax.
2. Studies in Old French Literature.
3. Study of Old French Texts.
Prescribed Text for 1937: —
(i) Putebeuf—Le miracle de Theophilc (Classiques
francais du moyen age),
(ii) Aucassin et
Nicolete (ed.
by
Bourdillon,
Manch. U.P.).
Examination: —
One 3-hour paper (Language and Texts).
One li-lionr paper (Literature).
(e) LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE
TEENTH CENTURY.
OF THE
SIX-
Prescribed Texts for 1937: —
(i.) Kabelais, Pages choisies (A. Colin),
(ii.) Montaigne, Selected Essays (Manchester
U.P., edit. Tilley and Boase).
(iii). Kastner: A book of French Verso (C.U.P.),
all the extracts from Marot to Malhcrbe
in elusive.
Candidates for the degree with Honours in the School
of French Language and Literature should take at their
first annual examination French, P a r t I . (Hons.), Latin,
848
DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 193 S.
P a r t I. (Pass or Honours), and
subject; at their second annual
P a r t I I . (Hons.) Course (d), and
tional subject; and will include
Final Examination.
one other additional
examination, French,
their remaining addisubject (e) in their
The final examination in School F . will consist of the
following seven papers with Viva Voce :—
i. Advanced Unseen Translation into French,
ii. Essay in French on a prepared literary subject
(to be handed in not later than the last day of
t h e second term ot the final year),
iii. Unseen Translation from French and Prescribed
Honours Texts (Valery, Gauthicr-Forrieies and
Baudelaire),
iv. Special literary study (Literature A),
v. Special literary study (Literature B).
vi. Language and Literature ot the 16th Century.
vii. Sixteenth Century Texts: Translation and Commentary.
The viva voce examination will cover all t i e honours
work of the t i i r d year.
G. SCHOOL OF GERMANIC LANGUAGES.
1. The Course tor the Degree with Honours consists
of the following subjects: —
German P a r t I .
German P a r t I I .
German, P a r t I I I .
English Language and Literature, P a r t I.
English Language, P a r t I I .
Old and Middle High German and Germanic
Philology.
2. In addition to the subjects ot this school. Candidates must select two additional subjects from the
Course for the Ordinary or the Honours Degree. They
are advised to choose as one of tliose either Latin, P a r t
I , or Greek P a r t I.
3. The Details of Study and Examination for the
Annual Examinations are as follows :—
84»
GERMAN, PART I.
(a) 'I'he Lectures in the subject for the
Ordinary Degree.
(b) Additional:
i. For intensive study.
Schiller—Wallcnstein.
ii. For extensive reading.
Dcutsches
Schrifttum
lierausgegeben
von der Deutschen Akademie in.
Munchen, Heft 7, 8 und 9'(Stein-,.
Hesse. Ponton).
Examination : —
Two 3-hour papers—Pass and Honour.
One 3-hour paper—Honour.
Oral—15 minutes.
GERMAN, PART I I .
(a) The Lectures in the subject for theOrdinary Degree.
(b) Additional;
i. For intensive study:
Bachmann — Mittelhochdeutscbes Lese-buch (Lyrik, Didaktik, Dramatik).
About 80 lines to he memorised,
ii. For extensive reading (during the long
vacation): —
Goethe—Iphigenie.
Schiller—Die Rauber.
Dcutsches Schrifttum h r g . von der
Deutschen Akademie in Miinchen,.
Heft ] bis 6.
H. M. Elster—Die deutsche Novelle
der Gegcnwart.
Examination: —
Two 3-hour papers—Pass and Honour.
One 3-hour paper—Honour.
Oral—20 minutes.
GERMAN, P A R T I I I .
(a) As for P a r t I I I . , Ordinary Degree.
(b) Old and Middle High German and Germanic;
Philology.
#50
Baohmann—Mittclhochdeutsches Lesebuch. About
100 lines to be memorised.
Mansion, Alt-hochdeiitsches Lesebuch. About 25
lines ot the O.H.G. text to be memorised.
Sperber—Gesciichte der deutechen sprache.
4. Candidates for the Honours Degree in Germanic
Languages must take: —
German, P a r t I., a t the higher grade, and English
Language and Literature, P a r t I,
together
0
with one additional subject at their first
Annual Kxamination; and German, P a r t IT.,
a t the higher grade, and English Language
P a r t I I , together with one additional subject
at their Second Annual Examination; and
German P a r t I I I a t the third Annual Examination.
5. The Final Examination in Germanic Languages
consiste of the following five papers: —
1. Unseen Translation.
2. Essay.
3. History of German Literature.
+. Old and Middle High German.
5. Germanic Philology.
A viva voce examination will be held on all l i e matters dealt with in the third year's course.
N.B. Candidates for the Final Examination are expected
to read all the more important works of the great authors
of the classical period (Lessing, Goethe, Schiller), as well
as representative works of the chief authors of the later
period (for details consult the Associate Professor).
Other books recommended—for reading during the
long vacation; —
Hirt—Die liidogermn-nen.
Mei-iiis>-er—liHiuyerm.-nnêht: Spraehwissenschaft.
A m i u — D i e menschlicho Rede.
W. Fischer—Die deutsche Sprache von Heute.
Giintcrt—Grundfragen der Sprachwissenschaft.
Jespersen—Language : Its Nature,
Development
and Origin.
G. Schmidt-Rohr—Mutter Sprache.
Vogt und Koch—Geschichte der deutschen Literatur.
ARTS.
851
Franc-lie—Kulturworte der deutschen Literatur.
Nadler—Literaturgesciicite der deutscien Stammeund Landsciaften.
Strici—Deutsche Klassik und Romantik.
E. R. Curtius—Franzosischer Gcist im neuen
Europa.
Hans Giinthcr—Hassenkunde des deutechen Volkea.
Oswald Spengler—Jahre der Entscheidung.
Houston Stewart Chamberlain—Auswail aus seiuen.
Werken (Hirt, Breslau).
H. SCHOOL O F ECONOMICS.
The course for the Degree with Honours consists of
t h e following subjects: —
Eoonomio History.
Economies, P a r t I.
Economics, P a r t I I .
Economics, P a r t I I I .
together with two of the following subjecte approved
by the F a c u l t y : —
History of Economic Theory (Hon.).
Mathematical Economics.
Modern Political Institutions (Hon.).
Theory of Statistics.
Tho Faculty has approved the following pairs of sub.,
jects: —
(a) History of Economic Theory.
Modern Political Institutions.
(b) Theory of Statistics.
(c) History of Economic Theory.
(d) History of Economic Theory.
In addition to the subjects of this School, oandidates must select two subjects from the courses fertile Ordinary or t i e Hononrs Degree, so as to complete
eight subjects. One of these must be a language other
t h a n English, unless t h e candidate—
1. passes in French A and B, or German A and B
•as prescribed for the Honours School o f
Mathematics; and
.852
2. selects as his additional subjects one of the following pairs of subjects: —
(a) Pure Mathematics, P a r t I .
P u r e Mathematics, P a r t I I .
(b) Pure Mathematics, P a r t I .
(c) P u r e Mathematics, P a r t I .
(d) Pure Mathematics, P a r t I.
Natural Philosophy, P a r t I .
The details of study and examination are those pre-scribed tor the several subjecte for the Ordinary
Degree, together with the following books: —
ECONOMIC HISTORY—
Clapham—An Economic History of Modern Britain.
Vol. I. The Early Railway Age, 1820-1850.
Vol. I I . Free Trade and Steel 1850-1886.
Unwin—Studies in Economic History.
Wood—Borrowing
and Business in Australia.
Wakefield—A Letter from Sydney.
Examination—
Two 3-hour papers.
(ECONOMICS—PABT I .
Clark—The Distribution of Wealth.
Copland—The
Australian
Economy — Simple
Economic Studies.
The Economic Record (the Journal of the Economic Society of Australia and New Zealand), as referred to in lectures.
ExaminationTwo 3-hour papers.
ECONOMICS—PAKT I I .
Ciaimberlin—Theory of Monopolistic Competition.
Pigou—The Economics of Welfare.
Goscien—Foreign Excianges.
Keynes—A Tract on Monetary Reform.
Examination—
Two 3-hour papers.
ARTS.
853
ECONOMICS—PAKT I I I .
(a) Eoberteon—Banking Policy and the Price Level.
Keynes—The General Theory of
Employment,
Interest and Money (Macmillan).
Hawtrcy—The Art of Central Banking (Longmans).
(b) Clark—National Income and Outlay (Macmillan).
Gayer—Public Works in Prosperity and Depression (National Bureau of Economic Research).
(c) Garland—Economic Aspects of Australian Land
Taxation (M.U.P.).
Pigou—Public Finance (Macmillan).
Stamp—Wealth and Taxable Capacity (King).
Copland and Janes—Cross Currents in Australian
Finance.
(d) Jerome—Mechanisation of Industry (National
Bureau of Economic Research).
Foenander—Towards Industrial Peace in Australia (M.U.P.).
Articles in Economic Journals as referred to in
Lectures.
HISTORY OF ECONOMIC THEORY—
Adam Smith—The Wealth of Nations, Cannan's
Edition, 1904.
Sidgwick—Principles ot Economics (Macmillan).
Marx—Capital, Translation by Eden and Cedar
Paul (Everyman's Library).
Bohm-Bawerk—Capital and Interest (Macmillan).
MATHEMATICAL ECONOMICS—
More advanced treatment of the work prescribed for
the Pass Degree.
For details
see School of History and Political
Science.
Candidates must be placed in the Class Lists at tho
Annual Examinations in Economic History, Economics,
P a r t I and Economics, P a r t I I .
854
The Final Examination in the School of Economios
will include papers on the following subjects: —
Economic History.
General Economic Theory.
Monetary Policy and Public Finance.
Statistical Method and Applications ot Economic
Theory.
together with one paper on each of the two optional
honour subjects selected.
Final examinations iu Theory of Statistics and
Matiematical Economics will be "taken at the time of
the Annual Examinations.
An essay on an approved subject must be completed by t i e end of the third term of the year of tho
Final Examination.
COMBINED COURSES.
Combined Courses are Courses including parts of two
Honours Schools approved by the Faoulty as together
equivalent to a single Honours School, with such additions as are needed to complete the eight subjecte.
Additional subjects required in any Course may be taken
either from subjects for the Ordinary Degree or the Honours
Degree, but must be taken at the Annual Examinations.
Other subjects must unless otherwise specified be taken at
the Honours standard.
The subjects of Honours Schools forming part of a combined Course must be taken at Annual Examinations,
or at the Final Examination, as prescribed in the case
of each such subject for Candidates proceeding in the
Honours School to which the subject belongs.
The following Specimen Courses have been approved by
the Faculty:—
I. Latin and French.
I I . Mathematics and Pliilosophy.
I I I . French and Gorman.
IV. Greek and English.
V. Latin and Mathematics.
VI. Mathematics and English.
V I I . English and Philosophy.
COMBINED COURSES.
The following additional combined courses have been
approved by the Faculty: —
XIV.—HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY.
1st Year—Philosophy I : Ancient History P a r t I :
British History B ; Language.
2nd Year—Political Philosophy or Ethics: History of
Philosophy: General History I.
3rd Year—Ethics or Political Philosophy: General
History I I . •
Students taking this Course must also study a Special
Subject (to be announced later). This will be examined
in the Final Exa,mination.
Final Examination Papers:
(1) General History I
(2) General History I I
(3) Ethics
(4) Political Piilosophy
(5) History of Philosophy
(6) Special Subject
XV.—HISTORY AND FRENCH.
1st Y'ear—French P a r t I : Latin I : Ancient History P a r t I.
2nd Year-—French P a r t I I : Ancient History P a r t
I I : General History P a r t I .
3rd Year—French P a r t I I I : General History P a r t
II.
Students taking this courso must also study ai Special
Subject (in French History) to be announoed later.
This will be examined in tho Final Examination.
Final Examination Papers:
(1) French advanced unseen translation (Paper I
of School of French).
(2) Prescribed Honour Texts in Modern French
(Paper I I I of School of French).
(3) Special French literary Study A (Paper IV of
School of French).
(4) Special French literary Study B (Paper V„ of
School of French).
(5) Ancient History.
(6) General History I.
(7) General History I I .
(8) Special Subject
XVI.—ECONOMICS AND HISTORY.
1st Year—Economics I : British History B : Economic History: Language.
2nd Year—Economics I I : Modern History B.
3rd Y'ear—History of Economic Theory; British
.History D (with attendance at the General
History i n Class).
Studente taking this combined course will also study
during their second and third years a Special Subject
(with prescribed documents). Approved special subjects, on some aspects of Economic History, will be
announoed later; and will be examined in Finals.
Final Examination P a p e r s :
(1) General Economic Theory.
(2) History of Economic Theory.
(3) Economic History.
(4) British History.
(5) Modern History.
(6) Special Subject (2 papers).
AKTS.
855"'
VIII. Philosophy and German.
I X . English and Latin.
X. English and French.
XI. Economics and Mathematics.
X I I . Economics and Philosophy.
X I I I . Philosophy and French.
Candidates wishing to take a Combined Course ot
which History is a part are advised to consult the P r o .
fessor of History before submitting a Course for the
approval of t i e Faculty.
I
LATIN AND 1'HESCU.
First Year: Latin 1. (Pass or Honour), French I.,.
Additional Subject.
Second Year: Latin I I . , French EL, Additional SubjectThird Year: Latin I I I . , French I I I .
Final Examination Papers with Viva Voce iu French—
(1) Latin Composition.
(2) Latin Unseen (Translation from Latin).
(3) General Paper and History of Latin Literature.
(4) Latin: Special subject (Imperial Rome).
(5) Prescribed Books (Latin).
(6) French Advanced Unseen Translation, (Paper I.
(7) Prescribed Honours Texts in Modern French
(Paper I I I . in'. School of French).
(8) Special French Literary Study A (Paper IV. inSchool of French).
(9) Special French Literary Study B (Paper V. in
School of Frenci). The viva voce examination in French will cover all the Honours
work ot the third year.
I I . — M A T H E M A T I C S AND PHILOSOPHY.
An approved group of three or more subjecte for the
Degree with Honours chosen from Pure Mathematics I ,
LI. I l l ; Mixed Mathematics I, I I , I I I ; Natural Philosophy I, I I ; together with Philosophy I, Logic, History of Philosophy and Metaphysics (as for Degree witb
Honours).
866
DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1SB8
If, e.g.. Pure Mathematics I, I I , I I I are the subjects
•chosen, the course would be as follows: —
First Year: Pure Mathematics I, Philosophy I, Language other than English.
Second T e a r : Pure Mathematics I I , History of
Philosophy.
Third T e a r : Pure Mathematics I I I , Metaphysics.
In addition Logic must be taken either in the second
or t h e t h i r d year.
Final Examination Papers:—
(l)-(3) Pure Mathematics.
(4) Logic.
(5) History of Philosophy.
(6) Metaphysics.
I I I . — F R E N C H AND GERMAN.
First T e a r : French I., German I., Latin P a r t I .
Second Year: French I I . , German II., Additional
Subject.
Third Y'ear: French I I I . , German I I I .
Final Examination Papers, with Viva Voce: —
(1) French Advanced Unseen Translation (Paper I.
(2) Prescribed Honours Texts in Modern French,
(Paper I I I . of School of French).
(3) Special French Literary Study A (Paper IV. ia
School of Frenoh).
(4) Special Frenoh Literary Study B (Paper V. ia
School of French).
(5) German Unseen Translation.
(6) German Essay.
(7) History of German Literature.
(8) Middle High German.
Note-—'I'he Viva Voce Examination in French will cover
all the Honours work in the third year. The Viva Voce in
German will cover .all the Third Year's Course.
TV.—GREEK AND E N G L I S H .
First Year: Greek I., English Language and Literature I., Latin 1.
ARTS.
857
.Second Year: Greek I I . , English Literature I I . ,
Additional subject.
Third T e a r : Greek I I I . , English Literature I I I .
Final Examination P a p e r s : —
(1) Greek Composition.
(2) Greek Unseen Translation.
(3) General Paper (mainly History and Antiquities).
(4) History of Greek Literature, and special subject
(Classical Athens).
(5) Prescribed Books (Greek).
(6) An essay on an approved subject.
(2)-Special Period of English Literature: 1700-1900.
(8) Shakespeare and Elizabethan drama.
(9) History of Literary Criticism.
V.—LATIN
AND MATHEMATICS.
First Year: Latin T. (Pass or Honour) ; Pure Maths.
I.j Additional Subject.
Second Year: Latin I I . ; Pure Maths. I I . ; Additional
Subject.
Third Year: Latin I I I . ; Pure Maths. I I I .
Pinal Examination Papers:—
(2) Latin Unseen Translation.
(3) General Paper and History ot Latin Literature,
(t) Latin—Special Subject (Imperial Rome).
(5) Prescribed Books (Latin).
(6)-(8) Pure Mathematics.
VI.—MATHEMATICS AND E N G L I S H .
First Y'ear: Pure Mathematics I., English Language and Literature I., Latin 1.
Second Year: Pure Mathematics IL, English Literature I I . , Additional subject.
Third T e a r : P u r e Mathematics I I I . , English Literature i n .
Final Examination Papers: —
(2) Special Period of English Literature: 1700-1900.
(5) (6) (7) Pure Mathematics.
858
DETAILS OF SU13JKCTS, 1938.
V I I . — E N G L I S H AND PHILOSOPHY.
A.
First Y'ear: English Language and Literature I.„
Philosophy I, Latin I .
Second Y'ear: English Literature I I .
PoliticalPhilosophy or Ethics, Additional Subject.
Third Year: English Literature I I I , Ethics o r
*
B. First Y'ear: English Language and Literature I.,
Philosophy I, Latin I.
Second Year: English Literature I I , Additional
subject, Ethics or History of Philosophy.
Third Y'ear: English Literature I I I , History of
Philosophy or Ethics.
In addition Aesthetics must be taken in the second o r
third year.
(2) Special "Period of English L i t e r a t u r e : 1700-1900.
(5) Aesthetics.
(6) Moral Philosophy.
(7) Political Philosophy, or History ot Philosophy.
VIII.—PHILOSOPHY
AND GEEMAN.
First T e a r : German I ; Philosophy I ; Additional
Subject.
Second Y'ear: German I I . ; History of Philosophy.
Third Year: German I I I . ; Middle High German
and Philology; Metaphysics.
In addition Aesthetics must be taken in the second or
third year.
Final Examination Papers, with Viva Voce iu German
(1) German Unseen Translation.
(2) German Essay.
(3) History of German Literature.
(4) Middle High German.
(6) Aesthetics.
(7) Metaphysics.
The following course ha.s been substituted for shoso
shown under VILA and B.
VII.—ENGLISH
AND PHILOSOPHY.
1st Year—English Language and Literature I : Philosophy 1 : Laiiu I.
2nd V'ciir—English Literature II : Ethics of History
of Philosophy; Modern History B.
3rd Y'ear—English Literature I I I : History of Philosophy or E t h i c s : Special Subject.
I n addition. Aesthetics in 2nd or 3rd Year. (Both
Aesthetics and t i e Special Subject will be rather less
than, a full subject.)
The special subject proposed for 1939 i s : Rationalism and Romaiitici.sm: a study in the interactions of
philosophy and literature, 1720—1820.
Final Examination P a p e r s :
(1) Essay.
(2) Special Period of English Literature.
(3) Shakespeare and Elizabethan Drama. 1
(7) Aesthetics.
(8) Special Subject.
A UTS.
IX.-
ENGLISH
AND
85.9.
LATIN.
A.
First Year: Latin P a r t 1. (Pass or Honour), Engglish Language and Literature I., Additional
subject.
Second Year: l,atin P a r t I I . , English Literature I I . ,
Additional subject.
Third T e a r : Latin P a r t I I I . , English Literature I I I .
Final Examination Papers —
(2) Special Period ot English L i t e r a t u r e : 1700-1900.
(6) Latin Unseen Translation.
(7) General Paper, and History ot Latin Literature.
(8) L a t i n ; Special Subject (Imperial Rome).
(9) L a t i n ; Prescribed Books.
B. First Y'ear: English Language and Literature 1.,
Latin I . (Pass or Honours), Additional subject.
Second Year: English Language I I , English C,
Latin I I .
T i i r d Y'ear: English Language TIL, English Literature I I I (o), Latin I I I .
Final Examination Papers; —
(1) Latin, Prescribed Books.
(2) Latin, Composition.
(3) Latin, Unseen Translation.
(4) Latin, General Paper and History of Latin
Literature.
(5) Latin, Special Subject (Imperial Rome).
(6) Old and Middle, Englisi Texte.
(7) Beowulf.
(8) Chaucer.
(9) History of English Language.
X . — E N G L I S H AND EHENGH.
First Year: English Language and Literature I.,
French I, and Latin I .
Second Year: English Literature I I , Additional
subject, French I I .
860
DKTAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1938.
Third Year: English Literature ITT. French I I I .
Final Examination Papers, with viva voce i a
French:—
(2) Special Period ot English L i t e r a t u r e : 1700-1900.
(5) French Advanced Unseen Translation (Paper I,
in School of French).
(8) Prescribed Honours Texts in Modern French
(Paper I I I . in School of French).
(7) Special French Literary Study A. (Paper IV. i s
School of French).
(8) Special French Literary Study B. (Paper V. in
School of French).
The viva voce examination in Frenoh will cover alt
Honours work ot t i e Third Year.
XI.—ECONOMICS AND MATHEMATICS.
First Year: Economics P a r t I., Pure Mathematics
P a r t I. Additional Subject (Pass).
Second Year: Economics - P a r t LI., Pure Mathematics P a r t I I . Theory of Statistics (Pass).
Third Year: Economics P a r t I I I . . sections (a; and
(b). Pure Mathematics P a r t I I I .
Candidates must pass in French and German A and B
in accordance with Honours School of Mathematics.
Mathematical Economics is recommended ae the additional subject, but this entails some modification ot the
years, for w i i c i t i e approval of the Professor of Mathematics must be obtained.
1. General Economic Theory.
2. Monetary Theory and Crisis.
3. Statistical Methods and the application of
Economic Theory.
4. 5, 6. Pure Mathematics.
An essay in the final year on an Economic subject.
A special Matiematical topic for study in the final year.
DEGREE OF M.A.
XII.
861
-ECONOMICS AND PHILOSOPHY
A:
First Year: Economics P a r t I, Philosophy I , L a n guage other than English.
Second Year:
Economios
Part
II.,
Political
Philosophy or Ethics, Additional Subject
Third Y'ear: History of Economic Theory, or Eoono.
mics I I I (a), (b) and (d) Ethics, or Political
Philosophy.
In addition Advanced Psychology must be taken in
t h e second or third year.
B . : First T e a r : Economics P a r t I, Philosophy I, L a n guage other than English.
Second T e a r : Economics P a r t I I , Logic or History
of Philosophy, Additional subject.
Third Year : History of Economic Theory, History of
Philosophy or Logic.
Advanced Psychology must l»e taken in the second
or third year.
1. General Economic Theory.
2. Monetary Policy and Tariff Problems.
3. History of Eoonomio Theory.
4. Moral'Philosophy.
|
4. Logic.
5. Political Philosophy. ) o r 5. History ot Philosophy.
6. Advanced Psychology.
An Essay upon an>approved economic subject must b e
completed in the year ot the Final Examination.
X I I I . — F B E N C H AND PHILOSOPHY.
First Y e a r : French I, Philosophy I, L a t i n I .
Second Year: French I I , History of Philosophy, or
Ethics, Additional subject.
Third Year: French I I I , History of Philosophy or
Ethics, Aesthetics.
Final examination papers with Viva Voce in French:
(1) French advanced unseen translation (Paper I
(2) Prescribed Honour texts in Modern French
(Paper TIT of School of French) (with philoa.
ophical works in French added).
£62
DKTAILS O F SUHJUCTS,
ISSS
(3) Special French Literary Study A (Paper IV in
School of French).
(4) Special French Literary Study B (Paper V in
School of French).
(5) Aesthetics.
<7) History of Pliilosophy (modern section), (with
special questions on French Philosophers),
The Viva Voce examination in French will cover all
Honours work of the third year.
FOR T H E EXAMINATIONS FOR T H E D E G R E E
OP MASTER OF ARTS TO BE H E L D I N T H E
F O U R T H TERM, 1938.
(A).-.SCIIOOI, OF CLASSICAL PHILOLOGY.
The papers for the Final Examinations in Greek and
Latin Literature, Greek aud Roman History and Antiquities; two papers with passages for translation and
explanation from portions of Greek and of Latin authors
a t the option of the Candidate, viz.: —
One in List A,
~i
(
One in List C,
or
[- with 1
or
Two in List H,
)
(
Two in List D.
The Editions recommended f o r use a r e :
*
Aristotle
Ethics (Grant, or Stewart).
Politics (Jowett, or Susemihl and Hicks, or N e w m a n .
Rhetoric (Cope and Sandys).
EMato
Republic (Adam, or Jowett).
Gorgias (Thompson).
Thucydides
(Poppo, or t h e several books in Macmillan's Classical
Scries).
Demosthenes De Corona (Goodwin).
De Falsa Lcgatione (Shilleto).
Androtion a n d Timocrates (Wayte).
Private Speeches (I'aley and Sandys).
Olynthiaos (Sandys).
.-Eschylus
Prometheus Vinctus (Sikea and Willson).
Seven against Thebes (Tucker).
Choephori (Tucker).
Supplied! (Tucker).
Agamemnon (lleadlam).
Eumenides (Verrall).
DEGREE OF M.A
863-
Sophocles
Aristophanes
The several plays (Jebb).
The several pla\ s (IBlaydrn).
Acharnians (Rennie).
Wasps and Clouds (.Sturkie).
F r o g s (Tucker).
Homer
Iliad (Leaf).
Odyssey (Merry, or Monro).
Xenophon
Ilellenica I. and II. (Edwards).
Livy
P i t t ' P r c s s Editions.
Tacitus
Annals (Furneaux).
Germania and Agricola ( F u r n e a u x )
Histories (Spooner),
Cicero
De Oratore (Wilkins)
The separate speeches named (Pitt Press).
T)e Officii* (Holdcn).
De Senectute, T)o Amicitia (Reid).
De Finibus (Reid).
Tusculan Disputations (KUhner).
Virgil
.'Eiii.-id (Conington).
Horace
(Wickham).
Juvenal
(Mayor, or smaller work by Duff):
Persius
(Conington).
Lucretius
(Munro, or separate books by Duff).
Plautus
Mostellaria (Sonnenschein).
Captivi (Lindsay, larger edition).
Miles Glorioaus (Tyrrell).
T r i n u n i m u s ( P i t t Press).
Terence
Adelphi and Heautontimorunienos (Asbmore),
T r a n s l a t i o n s recoimu^mied:
Aristotle
Politics and Rhetoric (Welldon).
Ethics (Williams).
Plato
(Jowett).
Thucydides
(Jowett).
Demosthenes
(Kennedy).
.-Kschylus
(as rendered in the editions muntionwd).
Sophocles
(in J ebb's editions)
Homer
Iliad (Lang, Leaf and l^ryeis).
Odyssey ( U u t c h e r a n d Lang).
Tacitus
Annals and Histories (Ramsay).
Histories, Oermania and Agricola (Fyfe).
Juvenal
(Lcuper).
Persius
(in Conington'.s edition).
Lucretius
(Munro).
Texts with Translations of t h e Loth Series,
A
Aristotle.
Aristotle.
E t h i c s , witb P l a t o ' s G o r g i a s .
P o l i t i c s , with a n y one Hook of
dides.
Thucy-
864
Aristotle.
Klietoric, w i t h Demosthenes d e C o r o n a
a n d j E s c h i n e s in C t e s i p h o n t e u i , or
o t h e r O r a t i o n s of D e m o s t h e n e s of
e q u a l l e n g t h in t h e a g g r e g a t e .
Plato.
Thucydides.
Thucydides.
Republic.
Rooks I . - I ' V .
Books V . - V I I I . , w i t h Xenophon, H e l l e n i c a . Books 1. a n d I I .
B.
Aeschylus.
Sophocles.
The Orestean Trilogy a n d one other Play
(Edipus Coloneus, (Edipus T y r a n n u g
Antigone, a n d one other Play.
A r i s t o p h a n e s . A n y f o u r plays.
Homer.
I l i a d , Books I . - X I I .
Homer.
I l i a d , Books X 1 I I . - X X 1 V .
O d y s s e y , Books I . - X I I .
Homer.
O d y s s e y , Books X I 1 1 . - X X 1 V .
Homer.
C.
Livy.
Livy.
Livy
Tacitus.
Tacitus.
Cicero.
Cicero.
Cicero.
Cicero.
Cicero.
Virgil.
Horace.
Juvenal.
Lucretius.
Plautus.
Books l . - V .
Books V I . - X .
Books X X I . - X X V I I .
Annals.
Histories, G e r m a n i a a n d Agricola.
D e O r a t o r e , w i t h e i t h e r I n Verreiu
D i v i n a t i o , Actio I . a n d A c t i o I I . ,
l i b 2, or i n C a t i l i n a m , i n P i s o n e m ,
a n d in V a t i n i u m , or p r o P l a n c i o ,
pro Mnrena, and pro Miloue.
D e Ofticiis, d e S e n e c t u t e , d e Ami-"!
citia.
Any
D e K o p u b l i c a a n d de L e g i b u s .
two.
Tusculaune D i s p u t a t i o n e s .
De F i n i b u s Bonoruru e t M a l o r u m .
MnoiA.
T h e whole.
S a t i r e s ( e x c e p t 2, 0, 9) a n d P e r s i u s .
T h e whole.
Miles G-Ioriosus, M o s t e l l a r i a , C a p t i v i ,
T r i n u m m u s , with Terence—Adelphi,
Heautontimorumenos.
DEGREE OF M.A.
(H)—SCHOOL
OK
865
HISTORV.
(1) For candidates who have gained honours in the
School ot History and Political Science, a thesis
on an approved subject.
(2) Other candidates must, before submitting a
thesis for the Master's Degree, take the final
papers of the School of History and Political
Science. If they reach tho standard of those
classed in that examination, such candidates may
then submit a thesis on an approved subject for
the Master's Degree.
(C).
SCHOOL OF PHTLOSOPHT.
Candidates will prepare a thesis on some branch of
Philosophy, and will be advised as to a suitable course
of reading. Regular colloquia will be held to assist
candidates in their studies. *
Candidates must pass an oral examination, covering
such of the subjecte prescribed for tho B.A. degree
with Honours as are most relevant to the subject of
the thesis.
Theses must be submitted n«t later than 14th
February, 1939.
(!>).—SCHOOL O F MATHEMATICS.
Candidates will prepare a thesis on some branch ef
Mathematics, and will be advised as to a suitable
course of reading. Regular colloquia will be held to
assist candidates in their studies.
In addition, candidates must either submit a report
of their original work or take a written examination
on the subject of. their thesis, and ou one or more
(additional subjects which will bo announced by May
1st of the year preceding the examination.
Theses must be submitted not later than 14th
February, 1939,
(E).—SCHOOL OP ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND L I T E R A T U R E .
A Dissertation on an approved subject and an Examination in two of the following subjects:
(a) French Language and Literature of t h e
Middle Ages.
•866
(b) Old and Middle English Language aud Philology.
(c) English Literature, Anglo-Saxon and Medi.
eval.
(d) Elizabethan Drama, including Shakespeare.
The dissertation must be sent in at the end of tho
Third Term.
Note.—Candidates arc advised to choose a subject
for their dissertation, and to have it approved as soon
as possible, as the dissertation must be completed aud
handed in at the end of the Third Term. A substantial piece of work of at least 100 pages, or 30,000 words,
is expected. I t should entail a considerable amount of
leading, and a bibliography of books consulted should
be appended, which should state (1) author's name, (2)
title of book, (3) place of publication or name of publisher, (4) date of publication.
1'lie dissertation, -which must bo first approved by
the head of the department, should be typewritten,
and should bear on the front page, besides its title, t h e
name and address of the candidate.
If).—SCHOOL
OP
FRENCH
LANGUAGE
AND
LITERATURE.
A written and oral examination on subjects approved
by the head of the department, along with a thesis on
an approved subject. In certain cases candidates may
be tested by thesis and oral examination only.
(G).—SCHOOL
or
GERMANIC
LANGUAGES.
(I) Old Norse:
(a) K. V. Gordon—Introduction to Old Norse.
(b) Njals Saga.
(II) Germanic Philology; Paper 5 set for t h e Final
Eiamination in the same term together with a viva
voce examination.
(III) A thesis written in German on an approved
subject should be sent in before the end of the third term.
(H).—SCHOOL
OP
ECONOMICS.
(a) An essay of not more than 10,000 words on each
of the following: —
DEGREES OF M.A.
S67
(i.) An Australian economic problem as discussed.
in current booka and periodicals,
(ii.) Some contemporary problem in economic theory
upon which discussion or controversy has
been active over the previous throe years.
The topics for these essays will be set a t t h e beginning of the first term. The purpose of the essay is to
test the candidate's knowledge of current literature un economics and his critical ability. The essays must be
submitted by the end ot the third term.
(b) A thesis upon an approved subject. Candidates
are advised to select a subject t h a t offers
scope for statistical measurement or for constructive criticism of the use of statistics in
economic resea rch This suggestion, however,
is not to be interpreted as debarring a candidate from selecting for his thesis a phase of
economic history or a problem of pure theory.
The thesis must be presented by December 1st.
ggg
INSTRUCTORSHIP IN DUTCH.
DUTCH (Details of the course offered by the Instructor
in Dutch) :
Conversation, Reading and Composition.
B . W . Downs and H . Latimer Jackson—A Manual
of the Dutch Language.
Multatuli—Max Havelaar.
De Genestet—Gedichten (Wereldbibliotheek).
Bastiaanse—Overzicht (Vols. I I I . and IV.).
Beets—Camera Obscura.
Bergmann—Eirnest Staas.
Falkland—Kleine Vertelsels.
Timmormans—Pallieter.
Readings from records relating to Voyages and Discoveries by the Dutch in the sixteenth, seventeenth and
eighteenth centuries, and from literature dealing with
the Dutch Indies and South Africa.
INSTRUCTORSHIP I N SCANDINAVIAN
LANGUAGES.
Tho classes are adapted to the needs of forthcoming students.
Beginners will use Hugo's Swedish
Simplified, Norwegian Simplified, and Danish Simplified.
Grammars in use for continued s t u d y :
Nat. Beckman—Svensk Spnlklara;
P. Groth—A Norwegian Grammar; or
S. W. Hofgaard—Norsk Skolegrammatikk.
As readers the following will be used: —
Swedish: Schiick och Lundahl. Lasebok for Folk
skolans hogre Klasser, Forsta Delen, Sverige
(Lund, Gleerup).
Norwegian: -Munch og Svensen, Hjerame og Uta
(Steenske Porlag, Oslo).
Danish and Norwegian: Schiick och Lundahl, Lasebok for Folkskolans hogre Klasser, Andra
Delen, Norge och Danmark (Lund, Gleerup).
With more advanced students works of Ibsen,
Bjornson, Selma Lagerlof, Strindberg, Ellen Key,
Sigrid Undset, Johan Bojer, etc., will be studied.
1NSTKUCT0KSH1PS.
869
INSTRUCTORSHIP IN ITALIAN.
ITALIAN (Details of the course olfered by the Instructor in Italian): —
First Year: Elementa of grammar, pronunciation
and phonetics. Orthography. Logical construction. Article. Conjunctions.
Adverbs.
Prepositions.
Complements, etc.
Substantives.
Pronouns.
Adjectives.
Verbs.
Tenses. Indicative and subjunctive mood.
Various notes. Dictation. Beading. Composition. Conversation.
Commercial application of the language.
Second Year: History of the Italian Literature.
Italian writers. Continuation of the study
of the language.
I'hird T e a r : Leotures in I t a l i a n : —
Comments on Dante's Divine Comedy.
Text—books:
First Year: Hossfeld's Method—Italian Grammar.
A. Rota.
Second Year: Hossfeld's Method—Italian Grammar, A. Hota; and Cambridge Readings in
Italian Literature, E. Bollough.
Examination: —
One paper for each year (3 hours), and oral examination.
INSTRUCTORSHIP IN RUSSIAN.
RUSSIAN—(Details ot the course oft'ei-ed by the Instructor
in Russian).
ELEMENTARY.
Elements of Grammar. Pronunciation. Orthography.
Reading. Composition. Conversation. Dictation. Outlines of Geography.
ADVANCED.
Sound knowledge of Grammar.
Idioms. Conversation. Advanced Composition. Letter Writing.
Dramatic work. Outlines of Russian History
and Literature. Commercial Correspondence.
£-Q
Text-books :
Russian Grammar and Self-Educator, bv Louis
Segal.
Elementary Russian Reader, bv George Z. Patrick,
Ph.D.
The Album, and Other Tales, by Anton Chekhov.
Russian-English and English-Russian Dictionary, by
Prof. S. K. Boyanns and Prof. V. K. Muller.
Book of reference:
Russian-English and English-Russian Dictionary by
M. A. O'Brien
Brush up your Russian, by Anna Semeonoff.
Examination: —
1st year: oue paper.
2nd year: one paper and dictation test.
3rd year: one paper, dictation test and
examination.
INSTRUCTORSHIP IN
FIRST
oral
JAPANESE.
YEAR.
Advanced Grammar.
Lectures on Colloquial Terms (Middle and Modern
Periods).
Classification and Etymology.
Reading, Dictation, Composition from prescribed
texts.
Translation into Japanese and English from prescribed texts.
Lectures on the history of ideographs and their
origin.
Study of 300 single ideographs (second section).
Lectures on compound ideographs and their formation.
Lectures on combined words in ideographs.
Study of 400 combined words in ideographs.
Reading text-books: Toku-hon 5.6.
Study of Basic Japanese.
Oral practice in colloquial terms.
Note.—Ideographs are divided: First. Second and
Third sections.
The first section will be Leaving
standard.
- - INSTRUCTORSUIPS.
87 P
Books recommended:
1. Ojima—Tokuhon 5.6.
2. Doi—Basic Japanese.
3. Rosc-Innes—Phrase Book.
SECOND YEAH.
Advanced study of the language.
Lectures on Classical terms (ancient and modern).
Lectures on Literary terms (ancient and modern).
Reading and Composition.
Translation in both advanced' Japanese and English
from prescribed texts.
Translation from both Japanese and English newspapers.
Translation in both Japanese and English compositions.
Study of 400 single ideographs (third section), (700
ideographs, including the First Y'ear ideographs).
Study of 900 advanced combined words (in ideographs), including the First Year combined
words.
Lectures in Japanese and also iu English on Classic language.
Lectures in Early History.
Oral exercises in various forms (advanced terms).
Books recommended:
2. Kawasaki— Nihon Rekishi (History of Japan).
3. Baeho—Okuno Hosomichi (The Poetical Journey
in Old Japan). (Tran. by Lsobe.)
4. Kamono Chomei—The Hojoki. (Tran. by Itakura).
T H I R D YEAH.
Japanese and English Composition by variousauthors to be translated into English and
Japanese.
English into Japanese: Grey's Elegy, Goldsmith's
Deserted Village.
Study of Manyosliu (Poetical Collection of E a r l y
Japan).
Lectures in Japanese and in English o n ' History
(middle period).
54
€72
Study of Nihon Bungaku-shi (The Treasury of
Japanese Literature).
For translation:
Chikamatsu (one play).
Dickens' Tale of Two Cities (parts).
Reading text-books:
Tokuhon 9.10.
Books recommended:
2. Kawasaki—Nihon Rekis'hi (History of Japan).
3. Okada—Manyoshu (Poetical Collection of Old
Japan).
4. Watana.be—Nihon Bungaku-shi (The Treasury of
Japanese Literature).
5. Kenyu-kai—Chikamatsu.
Also Miyamori—Chikamatsu (smaller edition).
F O U R T H YEAR.
Lectures on the Literature of the Old and Middle
Periods.
Lectures on the Japanese Drama.
Lectures on the Noh Plays.
Lectures on the Kabuki and Kyogen Plays.
For translation:
Ohikamatsu (parts to be selected).
Genji Monogatari (Kiritsubo).
Taketori Monogatari.
Hagoromo.
Tosa-Nikki.
For translation:
Shakespeare (parts to be selected).
Bacon's Essay (parts).
Lectures (in Japanese and English) on History of the
later period, especially from the Restoration
(1868) to present day.
Lectures on Old and Modern J a p a n .
Books recommended:
••' • 1. Ojima Tokuhon, 11.12.
2. Kawasaki—Nihon Rekishi (History of Japan).
*;'="• 3! 'Wataua.be—Nihon Bunga.ku-shi (The Treasury of
Japanese Literature.),;.^' . -
' 1N-.TRUCT0RSIIIPS.'
' '
873
4. Kenkyu-kai—Chikamatsu.
Also Miyamori—Ghikam ate u ..(smaller edition).
5. (Abridged by Yamasaki)-—Kokinshu (Poetical Collection of Early and Middle periods).
6. Inagaki—Kokugo Bunpo.
7. Japanese-English Dictionary.
8. English-Japanese Dictionary.
9. Ideograph Dictionary.
INSTRUCTORSHIP IN SPANISH.
First Year: Pronunciation. Elementary Grammar
and Syntax. Translation of simple exercises
from Spanish into English and from English
into Spanish. Reading. Recitation. Dictation.
Beginnings of conversation.
Text-hook :
Heath's Spanish Course.
Second Year: More advanced Grammar, Syntax,
Composition, Translation and Conversation.
Business letters.
Reading of some Classic
authors. Outlines of Spanish Literature.
Text-books:
Cambridge Readings in Spanish Literature.
Caldor6n—Three Plays.
Selections from Don Quixote.
•Third Year: Outlines of the History of Spain and the
Spanish Language.
History of Spanish and
Spanish-American Literature. Reading of Modern authors. Advanced composition and Conversation.
Text-books:
M. Romera Navarro—Historiade la literatura espafiola
r Kelly, J. F.— A New History of Spanish Literature.
M. Romera Navarro—tlistoria de Kspana.'
J. Benaventc—Tres Comedias,
.)• Ben. I'. Galdos—Mariuoha,
D- M. de Unamuno—Vida de Don Quijote y Sanoho.
54:i
":-
g74
DIPLOMA OF JOURNALISM. .
(For Arts subjects see under Faoulty of Arts.)
LAW AFFECTING JOURNALISM—
1. Introductory—Place of Law in the Community—
Nature of Law—Sources of Law—Kinds and Divisions
of the Law—History of the Law—What law is in force
in Victoria—Accuracy and inaccuracy in use of Legal
Terms.
2. Fundamental Principles of English Law—Parliament
aud the Constitution—"Rule of L a w " and modern
developments—" Administrative Law "—public and private
rights.
3. Freedom of Speech and Press—History of the Press—
Licensing—Registration of printing presses—Printers and
Newspapers Act 1928—Postal Regulations—Censorship.
4. Leading Principles of the Law of copyright—Copyright Acts—Relation t.o Journalism and Broadcasting—
International copyright—Rights analogous to copyright—Unpublished information—Title of a newspaper.
o, 0, 7. Defamation—law of slander —law of libel—" injurious falsehood"—slander of title or goods—dangerous
statements—use of charge sheets aud Parliamentary papers
—seditious, blasphemous and obscene publications—false
advertisements—"Rights of Privacy " - l i t e r a r y , dramatic
8. Contempt of Court—Criminal Contempt—Speeches
and writings—Contempt of Crown and Parliament.
9. Electoral law—advertisements—legal reporting—
further illustrations of accuracy aud inaccuracy in
terminology.
10. Practical law for the Journalist—combines and
restraint of trade—self-defence—law of master and servant—Journalists'
Awards—publishers,
editors
and,
authors—privileges o( the Press.
Examination:—
One paper—3 hour*.
JOURNALISM.
875
Text Books (which students should possess): —
Pilley—Law for Journalists, 2nd Ed., 1932.
Cloutman and Luck—Law ot Author and Publisher
1927.
(Supplemented by Statute and Case Law of England,
the Commonwealth and Victoria.)
Books for Beferenoe.—
Dicey—Law ot the Constitution.
Robson—Justice and Administrative Law.
Lord Hcwart—The New Despotism.
Jenks—The Book ot English Law.
Whcare—The Statute of Westminster, 1931,
Salmond on Torts.
Odgers on Libel and Slander.
Gatlcy on Libel and Slander.
Spencer Bower on Defamation.
Oswald on Contempt.
Copinger on Copyright.
Halsbury's Laws ot England
Smith on Master and Servant.
Bishop—Advertising and the Law.
Fisher and Strahan—Law of the Press (1898). .
Cloutman and Luck—Law of Printer and Publisher, 1929 (for a fuller treatment than in the
shorter work).
PRACTICAL TEST IN JOURNALISM—
(A Paper of Three Hours.)
Selections will be made from the following topics:
1. Tho correction of a proof, marking the errora
in proper style ae understood by printers.
2. Making a summary of aboit 250 words of a
Parliamentary or other speech.
3. Writing a review- of about 250 words of a new
book. If the book is submitted a t the examination, the candidate will be advised aa
to the book selected three days before the
examination is held.
876
DETAILS OF, SUBJECTS, 1033.
4. Writing a short account of a recent theatrical
performance or film.
6. Constructing a narrative in readable form from
a few stated facts.
6. Sub-editing a piece of " bad " copy.
7. Elaborating a cable message or preparing a message to be cabled.
8. Writing a short article on a topic of the day,
of about 500 words.
9. Explaining the meaning of foreign and other
phrases commonly used in public life, and'
literary and historical allusions in commonuse.
10. Writing a character sketch of some prominent
public person, or an imaginary interviewon a topic of the day.
FACULTY OF COMMEECE.
'
FOE T H E ANNUAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY
EXAMINATIONS
TO
BE
HELD IN , T H E
FOURTH TERM, 1938.
• ' '
I n all subjects students will be expected to prepare
class essays and exercises as set by the • Lecturers.
Students not complying with this requirement may be
excluded from the annual examination.
. .
Candidates for the degree of B.Com. must attend lectures in a t least four of the subjects of. their course.
Tho subjecte must be approved by the Dean of the
Faculty. Not more than two subjecte from Group ITI
will be accepted for this purpose.
Students undertaking an approved eourse at Canberra
University College may regard attendance at lectures a t
Canberra aa fulfilling these requirements.
ACCOUNTANCY P A R T I.—
Preliminary reading : —
Kerr—Elementary Book-keeping, Parts I and I I .
(Angus and Roberteon).
or Webster Jenkinson—Elements of Book-keeping
(Edward Arnold a n d Co.).
History and Development of Book-keeping. The
Functions of Accountants. Classification of
Accounts.
Manufacturing,
Trading
and
Profit and Loss Accounts and Balance
Sheets.
Prepayments. (Outstandings.
Depreciation, Appreciation and Fluctuations.
Provisions, Reserves, Reserve Funds and
Sinking Funds. Columnar Accounting. Departmental and Branch Accounts. Foreign
Branch Acoounte and the treatment of foreign currencies in accounts. Income and Expenditure Accounts. Receipts and Payments
,g78
DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, li)38
Accounts.
Consignment
Accounts.
Joint
Venture Accounts. Ledger Control Accounts.
Conversion of Single Entry to Double E n t r y .
Packages. Goodwill. Partnership Accounts.
Simple Company Accounts. The Interpretation of Accounts.
Text-books: —
Rowland and Magee—Accounting (Part I) (Gee
and Co.).
Carter—Advanced Accounts (Pitman).
Hislop—Company Accounts as applied
tralia and New Zealand (Pitman).
Tovey—Balance Sheets (Pitman).
to
Aus-
Examination: —
Two 3-hour papers.
ACCOUNTANCY PART U A — ( T o be taken in 1939 and
thereafter in alternate years).
Preliminary reading:—
F . R. M. de Paula—Principles of Auditing (Australian Edition), Pitman..
History and Development of Accountancy and
Auditing. Ethics and Etiquette of the Accountancy Profession. Planning of Accounting
Systems. Internal Check. External Audits.
Audit ot Cash transactions.
Audit of the
Revenue Account.
Balance Sheet Audits.
Verification of Assets. Principles of Asset
Valuation.
Provisions, Reserves,
Reserve
Funds, and Sinking Funds. Secret Reserves.
Divisible Profits and Dividends.
Goodwill.
Investigations. Form and Content ot P u b lished Accounts.
The Law Relating to
Limited Company Accounts.
Hire Purchase
Accounts. The Double Account System. Advanced Company Accounts. Reconstructions,
Amalgamations and Absorptions.
Accounts
of Holding Companies and their Subsidiaries.
COMMERCE.
879
Trustees', Liquidators', Receivers' and Executors' Accounts.
Accounts for various types
of businesses and the audit thereof. Duties,
Powers, and Responsibilities of Auditors.
Audit Working Papers.
Auditors' Certificates and Reports.
Text-books: —
Carter—Advanced Accounts (Pitman).
F. K. M. de Paula—Principles of Auditing (Australian Edition), Pitman.
A. C. Littleton—Accounting Evolution to 1900
(American Institute Publishing Co.).
Victorian Companies Act, 1928.
Federal Bankruptcy Act and Rules.
H. G. Cocke- Summary of Principal Legal Decisions affecting Auditors.
P . D. Leake—Commercial Goodwill.
Sir G. Garnsey—Holding Companies and their
Published Accounts.
Ranking, Spioer and Pegler—Executorship Law
and Accounts (H.F.L. Publishers Ltd.).
A. E . Cutforth—Methods of Amalgamation.
Montgomery—Auditing
Theory
and
Practice
(Ronald).
Ross—Hire Purchase Accounting (The Law Book
Co.).
Examination: —
m
ACCOUNTANCY PART Iln.—(To bo taken in 1938 and
thereafter in alternate years).
L. A. Schumer—Cost Accounting (Commonwealth
Institute of Acountante).
History and Development of Industrial Accounting.
Planning of Accounting Systems. Classification of Accounts. Cost Accounting and Factory Organisation.
Stock and Store Ac-
880
DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, I t ' 8
counts. Perpetual • Inventories. Plant Hecords and Depreciation. Financial and Cost
Accounting as an aid to Management. Investigations for Management purposes. Budgetary Control and Standard Costs. Financial
and Operating Statements and
Reports.
Statistics as Applied to Commerce.
Text-books: —
L A. Schumer—Cost Accounting (Commonwealth
Institute of Accountants).
J . H. Bliss—Management through Accounts.
L. C. Boddington—Statistics and their Application to Commerce.
J . O. McKinsey—Managerial Accounting,- Vol. I
(University of Chicago Press).
T. H. Sanders—Cost Accounting for Control
(McGraw-Hill).
H. J . Wheldon—Cost Accounting and Costing
!Methods (MacDonald and Evans).
J . H. Bliss—Financial and Operating Ratios in
Management.
E. A1. Camnian—Basic Standard Costs (American
Institute Publishing Co.).
W. B . Castenholz—Cost Accounting Procedure (La
Salle Extension).
- G. C. Harrison—Standard Costa.
J . M. Clark—The Economics of Overhead Cost.
A. C. Littleton—Accounting Evolution to 1900
(American Institute Publishing Co.).
SutclifFe—Statistics *fdr the Business Man.
A. W. Willsmorc—Business Budgets and Budgetary Control.
Examination: —
BANKING, CURRENCY AND EXCHANGE—(To be
taken in 1938 and in 1939, and thereafter in the odd
number years).
Clare and r T ninp—The A B C ot the Foreign Exchanges.
COMMERCE.
8BI
Robertson—Money.
• Cole—What Everybody Wants to Know about
Money.
The theory ot money, banking, foreign exchange
and international t r a d e ; industrial fluctuations and their control, to an advanced
standard.
Text-books: —
. Keynes—General Theory of Employment, Interest
and Money. (Macmillan.)
Pigou—Industrial Fluctuations (Macmillan).
Hawtrey—The Art of Central Banking (Longmans).
Copland—Australia in the World Crisis (CD.P.).
Taussig—International Trade (Macmillan).
Examination—Two 3-hour papers.
COMMERCIAL LAW, P A R T I.—
Pollock—First Book on Jurisprudence,. Part x.
Chapters 1 and 2 ; Part I I , Chapters 1 and 2 ;
Chapter 4.
1. Introduction: Sources and general nature of
Victorian Law with special reference to
Commercial Law.
2. General principles ct the Law ot Contract.
(a) The nature ot a Contract.
(b) Formation of Contract.
(c) The Operation of Contract.
(d) Interpretation of Contract.
(e) Discharge of Contract.
(f) Remedies for Breach of Contract.
3. Special Topics.
(a) Principal and Agent.
(b) Partnership.
(c) Sale of Goods.
(d) Negotiable Instruments.
(e) Contracts of Carriage
(i) by Sea.
(ii) by Land.
8R2
(f) Bailments.
(g) Hills i.f Sale and other chattel securities,
(li) Principal and Surety.
(i) Insurance.
Text Books: —
Charles worth—Principles of Mercantile Law (3rd
ed., 1934).
Commonwealth and Victorian Statutes and cases
referred to by the lecturer. Students should
obtain copies of the Goods Act 1928 and t h e
Commonwealth Bills ot Exchange Act 19091912.
Lindley—Law of Partnership,
Byles—Bills of Exchange.
Chalmers—Sale of Goods.
Anson—Law of Contracts.
Coppol- Bills of Sale.
Examination—Two 3-hour p.-ipers.
COMMERCIAL LAW, PART I I . (To l-; taken in 1938,
and thereafter in ullcrnato years).
Preliminary reading:
Halsbury -2nd ed.. Vol. 22, Article, Master and
Servant.
P a r t I . : The Relation, pp. 112-118.
Part I I I . : The Creation of the Relation, pp.
120-12S, 130-135, 137-139.
P a r t I V : Duration and Termination of the
Contract, pp. 144-101.
Note.—References in the above reading to Imperial
Statutes .-Jionld be checked with the Pilot t o the volume
to ascertain the corresponding Victorian enactment (if
any).
1. The Law of Master and Servant.—A general outline, including the legal :aspecte of factory
inspection and of the constitution and function of industrial tribunals.
2. Trustees, Executors and Administrators.—-The
apiiointment, retirement and removal of
trustees and personal representatives; their
COMMERCE.
883
duties and powers, and the more common
breaches of trust.
3. Bankruptcy.—Bankruptcy proper; Deeds of As.
signment and Deeds of Arrangement.
4. Company Law.—
(a) The nature of a corporation.
(b) The modern limited company, including its
formation, conduct,
reconstruction
and
winding up.
(c) Mining Companies.
Text-books:—
1. No particular
text - book is
recommended.
Students should obtain copies of the Factories and Shops Act 1928, tho Workers'
Compensation Act 1928, and the Commonwealth Conciliation
and Arbitration Act
1904-1930.
2. Sweet and Maxwell—The Trustees' Handbook.
Students should obtain copies of the Trustee Act 1928.
3. Lewis—Australian Bankruptcy Law, 2nd ed.
1934. Studente should obtain copies of the
Commonwealth Bankruptcy Act 1924-1933.
4. Topham—Principles of Company Law (if pes.
sible), 6th ed. 1924. (Later editions are to
be used with discretion.)
Students should obtain copies of the Companies
Act 1928.
Generally, the authorities referred to in t h e
typed notes and in lectures.
1. Hals-bury—Laws of England, 2nd ed.. Vol. 22,
Article, Master and Servant.
Anderson—Fixation of Wages in Australia.
Willis—Workmen's Compensation.
2. Underbill—Trusts and Trustees.
3. McDonald, Henry and Mock—The Australian
Bankruptcy Law and Practice.
4. Palmer—Company Law.
884
COST ACCOUNTANCY—
Preliminary reading:
Schumer—Cost Accounting (Commonwealth Institute
of Accountants).
(a) General principles and objects of Cost Accountancy.
Relation to general accountancy.
Historical
and prospective methods. Classification of
Accounts.
(b) Historical Cost Accountancy applied to manufacturing enterprises.- Classification ot expenditure and methods of determining unit costs.
Accounting for materials and stores. Purchasing,
receiving, storing and issuing.
Accounting for labour. Timekeeping. Classification ot labour costs and distribution of units.
The composition ot manufacturing-expense. Distribution to departments and units. Factory
capacity in relation to manufacturing expense.
(c) Historical Cost Accountancy applied to other
activities.
The selling and distributing costs of the manufacturer. Wholesale and retail merchandising.
Service industries.
(d) Budgetary control and standard costs. Relation
of budgetary control to general accountancy and
cost accountancy.
Preparation ot budgets.
Determination and presentation ot cost variations. Standard cost in manufacturing enterprises. Setting cost standards.
Time and motion study. Standards as ideals or
measures.
Accountancy methods associated with standard
costs,
(o) Presentation of cost information.
Text Books—
Schumer—Cost Accounting (Commonwealth Institute
of Accountants)
,
Dohr, Inghram and Love—Cost Accounting. Second
Revised Edition, 1935 (Ronald Press Company)
Gillespie—Standard Costs (Ronald i'l-ess Company)
COMMERCE.
$85
Book for reference—Sinclair—Budgeting (Ronald Press Co.).
CONSTITUTIONAL AND LEGAL HISTORY—
(For details see Faculty of Arts)
ECONOMIC GEOGRAPHY—
Preliminary Reading—
Newbigin—Comcrcial Geography (H. U. S.)
Wood—The Tasmanian Environment (Robertson
and Mullens).
(a) Principles of geographic
control;
natural
regions of the world as the basis of production ; factors controlling land- utilisation and
settlement; the geographical bases of in. dustry and, trade. Special study of Australian conditions.
(b) The localisation of industry; organisation of
commerce and industry in special areas; tho
primary and secondary industries of Aust r a l i a ; transport problems.
(c) Leading commodities and their place in international trade, with special attention to Australan exports; economic problems of production or distribution associated with particular commodities; survey of world trade.
(d) International t r a d e ; the theory of comparative
;
costs; the balance of payments; protection
and tariffs; regulation of international trade,
with special reference to Australia and the
British Êmpire.
Text-books: —
Zimmerman—World Resources and Industries
(Harper's).
Copland (ed.).—Economic Survey of Australia
(Annals of the American Academy ot Political and Social Science), P a r t s I and Lt.
Wood—The Pacific Basin (Oxford
University
Press).
8SG
Whale—International Trade (H.U. Library).
Rowe, J . W.—Markets and Men. (C.U.P.).
ECONOMIC HISTORY
ECONOMICS. PART I .
ECONOMICS, P A R T I I .
EUROPEAN HISTORY, B or C.
HISTORY OP ECONOMIC
THEORY"
I For details
" see Faculty
ol Arts.
INDUSTRIAL AND FINANCIAL ORGANISATION—
Robinson—The Structure of Competitive Industry
(Cambridge University Press).
Robertson—Control of Industry (Cambridge University Press).
Pigou—Unemployment (Home University Series).
McKenzie—The Banking Systems of
Great
Britain, France, Germany and U.S.A. (Macmillan).
The structure of modern industry, commerce and
banking; technical and economic influences
upon the development of enterprises and
plante; plant and market
requirements;
rationalisation of industry; banking structure and the financing of business; investment, money markete and the Stock Exchange; measurement of business conditions;
business cycles aud the stabilisation of business; employer-employee relation within particular businesses and within tho community
at large. The course will have special
reference to Australia.
Text-books: —
Von Beckerath—Modern Industrial Organisation
(McGraw Hill).
Parkinson—Scientific Investment (Pitman).
Withers—Stocks and Shares.
Sykes—Banking and Currency (Butterworth).
COMMERCE.
887
Report of Royal Commission on Monetary and Banking Systems (Gov. Printer, Canberra).
Lavington—The Trade Cycle (King).
Walker—Unemployment Policy, with special reference to Australia (Angus & Robertson).
Articles in The Economic Record, s s referred t o
in lectures.
Examination Two 3-hour papers.
INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS—
(For details see Faculty of Arts.)
M A R K E T I N G - ( T o be taken in 1938 and thereafter in
alternate years).
Preliminary reading :—
Clark—Principles ot Marketing.
Structure of marketing and its divisions;
the
marketing function iu relation to other economic functions ;.
the middleman; wholesale marketing; retail marketing;
specialty marketing; instalment selling; determination
ot price; marketing primary products; co-operative
marketing; the warehouse in marketing; organised
produce markets; transport; market finance; export
marketing; the costs ot marketing; the interests of the
consumer; the social control of marketing; psychology
in marketing ; market research ; advertising; salesmanship.
Text-Books: —
Smith—Organised Produce Exchanges.
Kitson—The Mind of the Buyer.
Marshall—Industry and Trade.
Boiling—Sales Management.
Marketing Primary Products, with
Special
Reference to Australia and New Zealand.
Supplement to the " Economic Record,"
February. 1928. .
The Economics of Australian. Transport.
Supplement to the " Economic Record" August 1930.
Lemmon and Others—Some Problems of Marketing.
65
888
special topics, will be made in the lectures.
Examination—
Two.3-liour papers.
(For details see Faoulty of Arts.)
PHILOSOPHY I—
(For details see Faculty of Arte.)
PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION (in 1938, and thereafter
in alternate years)—
Lowell—Public Opinion and Popular Government
(Longmans).
Bland—Planning the Modem State (Angus and
Robertson).
Masterman—How England is Governed (Sclwyn
and Blount).
The theory of t h e State iu administrative terms.
The relations of Administration to the Legisture and t h e Judiciary. Budgetary procedure and financial administration.
Principles underlying distribution of powers and
functions between administrative agencies.
Comparative analysis of forms of local government administration.
Administration of
public utilities. The development and problems ot the Public Service.
The course will have special reference t o public ad.
ministration of the Commonwealth, the States, and t h e
local governing bodies of Australia.
Text-books: —
White—Introduction to the Study of Public Administration (Macmillan).
Bland—Budget Control (Angus and Robertson).
••' Finer—-The British Civil Service (Allen and Unwin).
COMMERCE.
889
Harris—Local Government in Many Lands (1933
Edn., King).
Knibbs—Local Government in Australia (Govt.
Printer).
Dimraock—British Public Utilities and National
Development (Allen and Unwin).
As referred to in lectures—
Articles in " Public Administration " (Journal ot
the British Institute of Public Administration).
Artcles in the "Economic Record."
Papers and Proceedings, the Regional Group,
Djstitute of Public Administration.
Proceedings of the Institute ot Political Science,
Australia.
Examination—
Two 3-hour papers.
PUBLIC FINANCE (iu 1939 aud thereafter in alternate
years)-—
Preliminary r e a d i n g : —
Withers—Our Money and the State.
Robinson—Public Finance.
Report of Commonwealth Grants Commission,
1934.
Public Expenditure; public revenue and the principles of taxation; public borrowing and
sinking funds; the public debt; principles
ot war finance; problems of federal finance;
banking and public finance.
The course will have special reference to tho public
finances of the Commonwealth and Victoria.
Text-books: —
Haetable—Public Finance.
Dalton—Public Finance.
Stamp—The Fundamental Principles of Taxation
in t h e light of Modern Developments.
890
Adarkar—The Principles and Problems ot Federal Finance.
Reports of Commonwealth Grants Commission,
1930 and 1937 (Govt. Printer, Canberra).
Articles in the " Economic Record," as referred
to in lectures.
Students must consult the four books of documents
mentioned below, the Commonwealth of Australia Constitution Act, recent budget statements of tho Federal and
State Treasurers, and show a knowledge of the main facts
concerning the public finances of the Commonwealth and
Victoria.
Shann and Copland—The Crisis in Australian
, Finance. 1929-31.
Shann and Copland—The Battle of Plans.
Shann and Copland—The Australian Price Structure, 1932.
Copland and Janes—Cross Currents in Australian
Finance.
References for further reading, both general and onspecial topics, will be made in the lectures.
Examination—
Two 3-hour papers.
STATISTICAL MET MOD Preliminary Reading:—
Elderton—Primer of Statistics.
Bauer—Mathematics Preparatory to Statistics and:
Finance; Chaps. I—V.
King—Elements of Statistics.
Form and nature of statistical d a t a ; source of
data and methods of collection; classification;
tabulation;
suniiiiui-y and review;,
averages of various kinds (moan, median,,
mode) and their characteristics; arithmetical and geometrical means; weighted and
unweighted averages; distribution about the
average and measurement of
dispersion;
probability of given deviations;
accuracy
and limits of error; errors due to defective
d a t a ; errors due to defective classification;
COMMERCE.
891
probalble error of
averages;
sampling;
necessity for random selection;
graphical
representation of d a t a and of averages and
other statistical functions; graphical solution of statistical problems; nature and UPO
of index numbers; methods of computation;
special application
of index numbers
to
variations in prices and wages;
common
statistical fallacies; interpretation of publications of statistical bureaux of the Commonwealth and States of Australia.
Text-books: —
Giffcu—Statistics, edited by Higgs aud Tule.
Day—Statistical Analysis.
Bauer. G. N. — Mathematics Preparatory to
Statistics and Finance.
Commonwealth Year Book—latest edition.
Students must also consult tho publications of the
statistical bureaux ot the Commonwealth and ' States
of Australia.
Examination —Two 3-hour papers.
T H E O R Y OP STATISTICS—
(For details see Faculty of Arte.)
SPECIMEN COURSES.
Courses of study must be planned subject to the
conditions prescribed in Section IV of the Regulation
for the Bachelor of Commerce and Section V of t h e
Regulation for the Diploma in Commerce.
I n general courses will not be approved unless t h e
following conditions are observed: —
(i.) Economics P a r t I must be passed before any of
t h e following subjects are taken; —
Banking, Currency and Exchange.
Industrial and Financial Organisation.
Public Administration.
892
Public Finance.
Statistical Method.
Marketing.
History of Economic Theory.
(ii.) P u r e Mathematics P a r t I .must be passed before
Theory of Statistics is taken,
(iii.) P a r t I of any subject must be passed before
P a r t I I is taken,
(iv.) The following subjects must not be taken until
candidates have passed in at least two other
Arts subjects: —
European History B or C.
International Relations.
Constitutional and Legal History.
SPECIMEN COURSES FOR B.COM. DEGREE.
I t is possible for a student to complete the B.Com.
course in three years, b u t experience shows t h a t it is
desirable for even full-time studente to take four years.
This is all the more important in the case ot studente;
whot wish to take honours in at least six subjecte and
to qualify for admission to the M.Com. degree by thesis.
Before deciding on a course studente should consult the
Dean of the Faculty.
The following specimen courses are planned on the
assumption t h a t students will take four years.
A. All students should take tho subjecte ot Groups
I and IV in approximately the following order: —
F i r s t Year—
Two subjects from Group I V .
Economics P a r t I .
Economic Geography.
Note.—If two parte of a subject are selected from
Group I V the second p a r t will be taken in second
year and Economic History in first year.
Second Year—
Economic History.
Accountancy P a r t I .
Commercial Law F a r t I .
COMMERCE
895
Third Year—
Statistical Method.
Economics P a r t I I .
F o u r t h Year—
Preparatory Investigation on Thesie if proceeding to M.Com. later.
B. The following additional subjecte are recommended for special courses.
Industrial and Financial
Organisation and Economics II are pre-requisites for Banking, Currency and Exchange.
1. Accountancy.
Third Year—
Accountancy P a r t LIB.
Commercial Law P a r t I I .
Public Finance.
F o u r t h Year—
Accountancy P a r t TIA.
Banking, Currency
and
subject).
Exchange, (extra
2. Public Service.
Third Year—
Public Administration.
Marketing or Commercial Law P a r t I I .
Fourth Year—
Public Finance.
Banking, Currency
subject).
and
Exchange
(extra
3. Managerial Position in Commerce or Manufacturing.
Third Year—
Commercial Law, P a r t I I .
Accountancy P a r t I I B .
F o u r t h Year—
Public Finance.
Marketing (extra subject).
.$9i
-4. Teaching.
Third Year—
Accountancy P a r t IIA.
Commercial Law, P a r t I I .
F o u r t h Year—
Public Finance.
History ot Economic-Theory (extra subject).
-6. Banking.
Third Y e a r Accountancy P a r t LIB.
Commercial Law P a r t I I .
F o u r t h Year—
Public Finance.
Marketing (extra subject).
•6. Statistical or Economic Advisory Work.
Third Year—
Theory of Statistics. (It is assumed t h a t the
subjecte from Group IV will include P u r e
Mathematics P a r t I and, possibly, also
Part H).
Public Finance.
F o u r t h Year—
History ot Economic Theory.
E x t r a subject from Group I I I .
Banking, Currency ond Exchange.
Note.—Lectures in certain subjecte will be given in
alternate years and the above order may be modified
on this account. The following are the subjects with
t h e year in which lectures will next be given.
Accountancy, P a r t IIA 1939
Accountancy P a r t I I B 1938
Commercial Law P a r t I I 1938
Public Finance
1939
Public Administration
1938
History ot Economic Theory 1938-1939
Banking, Currency aiid Exchange 1938-1939
Marketing
.
.
.
.
1938
COMMERCE.
895
SPECIMEN COURSES * FOR DIPLOMA IN
COMMERCE.
Students may complete the course tor the Diploma
in three years, b u t in many cases where time available
for study is restricted four years may be more appropriate.
The subjects should bo taken in the order
suggested, provided t h a t students desiring to pursue
the accountancy course may take Accountancy P a r t I
in the first year, and transfer Economic Geography to
the second year. A typical three-year course is as
follows: —
First
Year—
Economic Geography.
Economics P a r t I .
Commercial Law P a r t I.
Second Year—
Accountancy P a r t I.
English A, or some other subject from Group
n.
Third Year—
Statistical Method.
Two other subjects from any of the specialised B.Com. courses.
DETAILS OP SUBJECI'S AND RECOMMENDATIONS
FOR T H E EXAMINATIONS FOR T H E DEGREE
OF MASTER O F COMMERCE, TO BE HELD IN
THE F I R S T TERM, 1939.
The books prescribed tor the Degree of B.Com., together with the books prescribed for Honours in Economics, P a r t I and P a r t I I tor Arts, will be required.
In addition, all candidates must show a knowledge ot
current economic discussions in Australia, as found in
the " Economic Record,"' the Journal of the Economic
Society of Australia and New Zealand.
896
1.
2.
3.
DETAILS OP SUBJECTS, 1038.
History of Economic Thought and General EconomicTheory.
Pigou—Economics of Welfare.
Cassel—The Theory of Social Economy 2 vols.
Sldgwick—Principles of Political Economy.
r»wney—The Acquisitive Society.
Marx—Capital. Translation by Eden and- Cedar
Paul.
F i n a n c i a l Administration of Business.
Clark—The Economics of Overhead Costs.
Fraser—Problems in Finance.
Lincoln—Applied Business Finance.
McKinsey—Budgetary Control.
Cutforth—Methods of Amalgamation.
Bliss—Financial and Operating Ratios in Management.
Gerstenberg—Financial Organisation and Management.
Bruere and Lazarus—Applied Budgeting.
I n d u s t r i a l Organisation and Ixibour Problems(a) I n d u s t r i a l OrganisationMarshall—Business Administration.
Haney—Business Organisation and Combination.
Report of President's Conference: Recent Economic Changes in the United States, Vols. 1
and I I .
Levy—Monopolies, Cartels aud Trusts in British
Industry.
Urwick—The Meaning of Rationalisation
Committee on Industry and Trade. (Lalfour Committee): Factors iu Industrial and Commercial Efficiency.
(b) Labour ProblemsClay—The Problem of Industrial Relations.
Burns—Wages and the State.
Lauck—The
New Industrial
Revolution aud
Wages.
Gommill—Present-Day Labour Relations.
Wertheim Lectures on Industrial Relations, 1928.
Higgins—A New Province for Law and Order.
Anderson—Fixation of Wages in Australia.
COMMERCE.
4.
897
Public Finance, with Special Reference to Taxation.
Bastable—Public Finance.
Report of the Committee on National Debt and
Taxation and Appendices, 1929.
Pigou—Public Finance.
Durell—Parliamentary Grants.
Contemporary Reports and Discussions on Australian Public Finance.
5. Economic History a n d Economic Geography.
(a) The books prescribed for Honours in Economic
History for B.A., together with
Tawney—The Agrarian Problem in the 16th
Century.
Mun—England's
Treasure by Foreign Trade.
Fay—Great Britain, from Adam Smith to the
Present Day.
Lippincott—Economic Development of the United
States
(b) Kendrew—Climate.
Shanahan—Animal Foodstuffs.
Semple—Influence of Economic Environment.
Taylor—Environment and Race.
6. Banking, Currency and Exchange.
Keynes—A Treatise on Money 2 vols.
Gregory—Documents Relating to British Banking, 1832-1928.
Marshall—Money, Credit and Commerce.
Robertson—Banking Policy and the Price LevelFlux—The Foreign Exchanges.
FACULTY OF DENTAL
SCIENCE.
DETAILS OF SUHJECTS FOK THE
ANNUAL
AND SUPPLEMENTARY EXAMINATIONS TO
BE HELD IN THE SECOND AND FOURTH
TERMS 1938, AND THE FTKST TERM, 1939.
FIRST YEAR.
In the subjects of Chemistry, Natural Philosophy and
Zoology, the lectures and practical work are the same as for
medical students. The standard fur the examination is
.somewhat lower than t h a t for tho medical course. Dental
students attaining the standard of the latter examination
in any one ot those subjects will be returned as having passed
in t h a t subject as prescribed for the medical course.
Tutorial Classes in Natural Philosophy, Chemistry and
Zoology are held a t the Dental College.
CHEMISTRY—
(As for Medical Course).
DENTAL PROSTHESIS (PART I).—
The Courss of Lectures include:—
The consideration of the chemical and physical properties of the materials used, such as plaster of
Paris, artificial stones, impression materials,
moulding sand, metals for dies aud counter-dies,
vulcanite, porcelain teeth.
A consideration of the subjects of
Soldering.
Swaging.
Simple vulcanite, partial'denture construction
"I'he LaboratoryCourse embraces :—
The manipulation of plaster of Paris, with experiments to demonstrate expansion and the effects
of tho retarding and accelerating agents.
DENTAL SCIENCE.
899*
The making of plaster casts, suitable for denture
and for orthodontic purposes.
Exercises with vulcanite to demonstrate the necessity for careful vulcanisation to ensure elasticity, strength, and the elimination of
porosity, together with the construction of
solid and hollow cubes, etc.
The repairing ot vulcanite.
Soldering exercises.
Moulding and the production of dies and counterdies.
The Clinical Course is limited to the repairing of
vulcanite dentures.
Text-book: —
Turner and Anthony—Prosthetic Dentistry.
Examination: —
Written : Pass and Honour—3 hours.
NATURAL PHILOSOPHY—
(As lor Medical Course.)
ZOOLOGY—
(As lor Medical Course.)
SECOND YEAR.
ANATOMY—
Lectures.—A. course ot systematic lectures on
Anatomy.
Dissecting throughout the three terms.
Books recommended :—
Text-books: —
Anatomy for Dental Studente, by Six Teachers
For P r a c t i c a l Anatomy :
Cunningham—Practical Anatomy.
Book for reference : —
For Embryology:
Frazer—Manual of Embryology.
900
Keith—Human Embryology and Morphology i5th
edn.).
Examination: —
W r i t t e n : Pass and Honour—3 hours.
Oral examination if necessary.
HUMAN AND COMPARATIVE DENTAL A N A T O M T Lectures twice a week in first term.
Lectures and Demonstrations will Include—
Comparative studies in the teeth of Vertebrates.
Evolution of the Mammalian Molars.
During the first term studente will be required to
carry out the following exercises—Moulding and drawing of various teeth of the human dentition.
Text-books: —
Brooke Nicholls—Notes on Comparative
Anatomy.
G. V. Black—Dental Anatomy.
Tomes—Comparative Dental Anatomy,
Ti'ms and Hopewell-Smith.
Examination: —
Oral examination it necessary.
Dental
Marett-
DENTAL EMBRYOLOGY AND HISTOLOGY—
Lectures: Twice a week in second term. .
Practical Histology Class, once weekly.
Lectures will deal with—
General Embryology, with particular referenoe to
the development of the skull, jaws, antra,
pharynx, tonsil, larynx.
The growth of bone.
The development of the tooth germ.
The development of enamel, dentine, oementiun,
pulp, peridental membrane, and alveolar bone.
The histology of these.
The epithelium ot the gingival crevice.
The eruption of the teeth.
DENTAL SCIENCE.
901
Text-book: —
Orban—Dental Histology and Embryology,
Widdowson—Notes on Dental Histology.
Examination : —
DENTAL P R O S T H E S I S (PART IT>—
Tho Course of Lectures includes the consideration of:—
Crown work.
Swaged dentures.
Casting (Simple).
The masticatory apparatus and the effects of
the loss of teeth.
An introduction to the subject of the articulation of artificial teeth.
The construction ot partial dentures in vulcanite.
The Laboratory Course embraces all the technical procedures associated with the construction of:—
The various types of crowns.
Swaged metal dentures.
Gold, silver and aluminium castings.
Partial vulcanite dentures.
Bar lower dentures.
Obturators.
Splints.
The Clinical Course includes the repairing of dentures
and the construction of partial dentures in vulcanite.
Book of referenoe: —
Lee Walter. Doxtater—Procedures in Modern Crown
and Bridge Work.
Examination: —
Written : Pass and Honour—3 hours. .
Practical: 2 days.
HISTOLOGY—
A course of t h i r t y lectures, delivered once a week
during first, second and third terms in tho
902
Department of Anatomy; ; and ot laboratory
classes of 1£ hours' duration twice a week
during first term and once a week during
second and third terms.
Text book -.—
Lewis and Stohr—A Text-book of Histology. Latest
edition.
Examination : —
One paper a n d practical examination—combined
duration, 3 hours; supplemented |by oral
examination if necessary.
PHYSIOLOGY.—
(As for Physiology Part I Science Course).
Text books -.—
Halliburton—Handbook of Physiology, and
Osborne and Young—Elementary Practical BioChemistry.
THIRD YEAR.
BACTERIOLOGY (Dental Course)—
Lectures -. Twice a week in Second Term.
The course in Bacteriology will consist of lectures,
demonstrations and laboratory work, dealing with:
The biology, morphology, isolation, cultivation and
classification of bacteria and liltrablc viruses
of importance in medicine and dentistry.
The principles ot immunity, together with their
practical applications, including serological
tests and methods of vaccination.
Text books:—
Mackie and McCartney—An Introduction to Practical Bacteriology.
For reference: —
Q-oadby—Mycology of the Mouth.
Bulleid—Bacteriology for Dental Students.
Zinsser and Bayne-Jones—Text-book ot Bacteri•-.. : . ® l o 8 y . - . .
:••::..
-. •
Appleton—Bacterial
Infection.
DKNTAL SCIENCE.
905-
CONSERVATIVE D E N T A L SURGERY (PART I>—
Lectures twice a week in second term (20 lectures):
Instruments—sterilisation. Examination of Patients.
Prophylaxis and Scaling. Separation of the
Teeth. Control of Saliva. Avoidance of Pain
in Filling Teeth.
Onset and Progress of
Dental Caries. General Principles of Cavity
Preparation.
Filling) Materials (desirableproiierties). Gutta Percha—cements—amalgams.
Text-book:
Parfitt—Operative Dental Surgery (latest edition).
Book for reference:
Arthur D. Black—Operative Dentistry (vols. I I
and III).
'' Examination:
Pass and Honour (1 paper)—3 hours.
Practical—3 hours.
DENTAL MATERIA MEDICA—
One Lecture per week throughout the 3rd year.
Definition aud consideration of Materia Medica,.
Pharmacology, Toxicology, Therapeutics.
Pharmacy and Pharmaceutical Preparations.
Pharmacopoeias and Official Preparations.
Weights and Measures and Percentage Solutions.
Drugs—nu.mcs and synonyms, sources, characters,
preparations, doses, pharmacology and therapeutics.
Methods of administering and applying drugs and.
conditions modifying their actions.
Classification of Drugs and Remedies under the
following headings: —
Local.—Antacids, Antiseptics and Disinfectants,
Astringents,
Styptics
and
Escharotics,.
Bleaching Agents, Counter-irritants, Demulcents and Emollients, Local Anaesthetics,.
(Analgesics and Obtundents).
General.—Alteratives, Restoratives and Tonics..
Anodynes Sedatives and Hypnotics, Anaes-
904
thetics. Antipyretics, Cathartics, Diaphoretics,
Diuretics, Emetics, Sialogogues, Stimulants.
Artificial Hyperaemia, Massage, Light, Heat, Electricity, Radium.
Incompatability.—Synergism, Antagonism.
Poisons.—Their actions and antidotes.
Prescriptions.—Prescription 1 writing, with and
without abbreviations, using Apothecaries' and
Metric systems.
Ionic Medication—Principles of.
The pharmacology of local Analgesia agents.
Note.—The above list is intended as a guide to students and niust uot be taken as limiting the scope of the
lectures or the examinations.
Students will bo expected to recognise drugs.
Text-book:
Dilling aud Hallam — Dental Materia Medica Pharmacology and Therapeutics.
Book of reference:
Martindale and Westcott—Extra
Pharmacopoeia.
Examination: —
DENTAL METALLOGRAPHY—
Lectures. One per week throughout the year and
demonstrations during t h e year.
General Physical properties of metals—melting point,
colour, thermal expansion, hardness, ductility.
Crystalline nature ot metals. Effects of alloying on
the properties above-mentioned.
Considerations involved in the melting of metals—
occlusion of gases, oxidation, volatilisation of
constituents, use of Muxes and other protective
coverings.
Casting of metals. Factors affecting the strength and
ductility. Rate of cooling. Types ot mould.
Change of volume during solidification. Evolution of gases aud the formation of blow holes.
Crystal size.
DENTAL SCIENCE.
905
Methods of altering the hardness of metals—alloying,
cold working such as rolling and wire drawing.
Effects of annealing after cold working. Effects of heat treatment.
Properties of specific metals and alloys—copper, gold,
silver, platinum, 18ct,. gold. Oct. srnld. germa-n
silver, stainless steels, etc. Effects of cold
working and annealing on these metals.
Uniting metals. Nature and properties ot solders.
Use of fluxes.
Amalgams.
Physical properties. Volume changes.
Ageing. Crystallisation.
Practical demonstrations—To be given a t times to be
notified.
1. Testing the hardness of metals by the Brinell
hardness machine.
2. Making alloys in a gas furnace and measurement of
the hardness.
3. Melting metals iu an electric furnace.
4. Rolling of metals aud measuring the hardness after
various degrees of rolling.
5. Annealing after rolling and the measurement of
the hardness.
6. Wire drawing and the measurement of the tensile
strength.
7. Annealing ot drawn wires and measurement of the
tensile strength.
8. Making amalgams and measurement of the
crushing strength, flow under stress, etc.
9. Casting metals into chill and sand moulds and
noting the effect on the type of fracture.
10. Examination of the niicrostructuro of simple
metals and alloys.
DENTAL P R O S T H E S I S (PART LTIa)—
The Course of Lectures includes the consideration
of :—
Bridgework.
The retention of dentures and impression
taking.
The necessity of balanced articulation.
The value of, and the necessity for an articu-
906
DETAILS OF SUBJEOTS, 1938i
lator of the anatomical type to produce
balance.
All the technical procedures associated
with the construction ot full aud partial vulcanite dentures.
The designing and construction of partiametal dentures (elementary).
Casting.
The Laboratory course embraces all the technical procedures associated with tho construction of :—
Bridges.
Cast Dentures.
Full Dentures.
The Clinical Course includes the construction of full
and partial dentures in vulcanite.
No examination.
OPERATIVE TECHNIQUE—
Lectures and Demonstrations will be given daily during the first temi of third year, dealing with Tooth
Morphology; Cavity Preparation and use of filling
material, and Technique of inserting fillings.
During the First Term students will be required t o
carry out the following exercises:
1. Carving and sectioning of various teeth.
2. Preparation of simpler types of cavities in extracted teeth.
3. The insertion of plastic fillings.
Subsequently, Clinical demonstrations will be given
dealing with the preparation of cavities in the mouth
and restoration of teeth by plastic filling material, including—Charting of the Mouth; Prophylaxis; Exclusion of Moisture; Chair Positions; Technique of local
Anaesthesia and Exodontia.
On the completion of this class to the satisfaction
of the Lecturer, students will enter the Clinic and
perfonm the simpler types of operations in the_ mouth.
During part of the Second Term and the whole of
Third Term, Demonstrations will be given dealing with
tho more complex types of cavity preparations and the
insertion of gold (foil and inlay) and of combination
fillings.
DENTAL SCIENCE.
907
Text-book:
Parfitt—Operative Dental Surgery (3rd ed.).
Books for reference:
G. V. Black—Dental Anatomy.
Arthur D. Black—Operative Dentistry (Vols. I I ,
III).
(Examination included in Conservative Dental Surgery, P a r t I.)
ORTHODONTIA—
One lecture a week throughout the year.
Nomenclature.
The evolution of the masticatory apparatus.
Normal occlusion, and the factors concerned in its
establishment.
Facial harmony and balance.
Oral and facial manifestations of malocclusion
Diagnosis and Classification.
Etiology of malocclusion.
Prognosis and sequelae of malocclusion, aud
benefits resulting from its correction.
Treatment and care of t h e mouth during treatment.
Factors influencing method and time of t r e a t
ment.
Tho principles of retention.
Books for reference : —
McCoy—Orthodontia.
Angle—Orthodontia.
Strang—Orthodontia.
Examination: —
3rd Year B.D.Sc—
Practical: Pass and Honour—2 hours.
Sth year B.D.Sc.
Oral and practical: Pass and Honour—2 hours.
ORTHODONTIC TECHNIQUE—
A practical course occupying one term, designed to
train the student in the manipulation of orthodontic
appliances.
908
DETAILS OP SUBJEOTS, 193S.
PATHOLOGY—as for Pathology (not including Bacteriology) ot Medical Course, excluding Post-mortem
demonstrations and Lectures and Laboratory work
on special Pathology.
Examination: —
Practical examination of macroscopic and microscopic specimens—2 hours.
Oral examination.
MINIMUM CLINICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR
T H I R D YEAR STUDENTS.
Students must attend on the days allotted to them, fo1"
exodontia practice
Each Third Year student must complete during t h e
Second and Third Terms:
60 Amalgam restorations (of which 25 must be
Class 2).
25 Porcelain restorations.
40 Cases Infiltration Anaesthesia and Exodontia.
Such to be performed to the satisfaction of and under
the personal supervision of the Lecturer in Charge.
FOURTH YEAR.
CONSERVATIVE DENTAL SURGERY (PART II)—
One lecture per week during First and Second Terms.
Filling materials: Gold—Foil and Inlays. Pulpless teeth and their treatment.
Operation
of Crowning. Bleaching. Special considerations in the treatment ot children's teeth.
Radiographic interpretation.
Norman G. Bennett—The Science and Practice
of Dental Surgery (latest od.).
Davis—Operative Dentistry (latest ed.).
Arthur D. Black—Operative Dentistry (Vol. I I ,
IU).
Buckley—Modern Dental Materia Medica.
Examination:
Pass aind Honour (1 paper): 3 hours.
Practical: 4 consecutive days.
DENTAL SCIENCE.
9091
DENTAL PROSTHESIS (PART I l l b ) —
The course of lectures includes the consideration of
full and partial denture construction.
The Laboratory course is limited to one term, and isconfined to Bridge work.
The Clinical course extending over two terms is confined
to the construction of full and partial dentures
in vulcanite.
The Full Denture Course: —
Synopsis of lectures—
Preliminary examination.
Classification: Mental outlook of patient.
Tissue conditions.
Case History.
Diagnosis aind Prognosis.
Indication for the Surgical preparation of
the mouth.
Consideration of the principles underlying retention.
Impression materials.
Technique of impression taking.
The use of stone oasts and vulcanite bases.
Jaw relations (using i n t r a and extra oral
methods of securing registrations).
Articulators and the laws of articulation.
The selection and arrangement of teeth.
Festooning and cutting up and polishing.
The use ot vulcanite, thermo-plastic, and
thermo-set materials.
Immediate restorations.
Rebasing technique.
Text-Book: —
Turner and Anthony—Prosthetic Dentistry (latest
edition).
Examination: —
Practical: One week.
DENTAE SURGERY AND PATHOLOGY—
Ose lecture a week throughout the year:
Pathological Dentition, Disorders associated w i t h i t h e
process of teething. Caries—etiology, pathology
'910
_.
immunity and prevention. Erosion, Abrasion
aud Attrition. Diseases of the Pulp. Diseases
of the Peridental Membrane. Pyorrhoea Gingi. vae—its Etiology, Pathology, and-Treatment.
Diseases ot the Gums. Odontomata.
Odontalgia and Neuralgia.. Oral Sepsis. Oral Manifestations of Systemic Disease.
Text-book:
N. G. Bennett (latest ed.)..
Examination:
PREVENTIVE- DENTISTRY—
A scries of Lectures and Demonstrations during First
and Second Terms.
•GENERAL ANAESTHESIA—
One lecture a week in. Second Term.
History of General Anaesthesia. Physiological Ac.
tion of Anaesthetics. Selection ot the Anaesthetic. Preparation of the Patient. Accessory Appliances. Pharmacology—Methods of
administration, phenomena of anaesthesia,
etc., of the following; Chloroform, Ether,
Ethyl Chloride, Nitrous Oxide, combinatioBa
ot Nitrous Oxide, Ethylene, Carbon Dioxide.
Technique of Endotracheal insufflation and
inhalation anaesthesia. Basal Anaesthesia.
Analgesia.
Dangers and Difficulties of
Anesthesia. Remedial Measures.
Text-book:
Practical Anaesthesia—Staff of Alfred
Hospital.
Examination:
MEDICINE—
-Lectures and Demonstrations two mornings per week
throughout the year at Alfred Hospital.
DENTAL SCIKNCH. .
911
Introductory, Health and Disease, Old Age, Beginnings of disease and early symptoms,
Visceral reserve. General causes of disease.
Infectious diseases. Nature, Modes of infection,
Carriers, Toxin effects. Prophylaxis and immunity
Anaphylaxis, Pyrj.»ia, Principles of
treatment of fevers.
Septicaemia, Pyaemia, Toxaemia, Typhoid, Diphtheria. Tonsilitis, Coryza, Influenza. Pneumonia, Tuberculosis, Syphilis, Rheumatic
fever. Oral Sepsis. The role of focal sepsis in
systemic disease. The Intoxications, Metabolic diseases. Deficiency diseases, Vitamins
and their relation to oral disease. Alimentary, Renal, Respiratory, Blood, Circulatory
and Nervous Systems, and the more obvious
disorders affecting each. Ductless glands and
joints.
Anaesthetic risks and post operative respiratory
complications.
Text-book: —
Stevens—A Manual of the Practice of Medicine
(latest edition).
Examination: —
Honours: (one paper)—3 hours
Pass: (one paper)—3 hours.
Clinical Examination: —
Vica voce examination of candidates on suitable
cases in the wards of the Alfred Hospital.
Duration, approximately twenty to t h i r t y
minutes per candidate.
SURGERY—,
1. Surgical Anatomy of t h e Mouth, Pace, etc.
2. Inflammation, suppuration, ulceration, etc.
3. Control of infection. Asepsis, Antisepsis, Sterilisation.
4. Haemorrhage and its control.
5. New growths, general features.
6. Syphilis in relation to the head and neck.
9)2
DETAILS OF SUBJEOTS, 19S3.
7. Tuberculosis.
8. Repair nnd treatment ot wounds.
9. Fractures and dislocations.
.10. Surgical affections of the accessory nasal sinuses.
.- 11. Surgical affections of the tongue and lips.
12. Surgical affections of the salivary glands.
13. Surgical affections of the tonsils, adenoids.
14. Surgical affections ot the lips and cheeks.
15. Cleft palate.
16. Complications following operations.
Demonstrations a t the Alfred Hospital include:
Clinical instruction in the wards and out-patients' departments; attendance at operations, practical work in
the casualty department (dressing of wounds, bandaging, etc.); and visits to the museum and laboratories
associated with the hospital.
Text-books (appropriate chapters):
B'ailcy—Clinical Surgery for Denial Practitioners.
Mitchiner--Surgery for Dental Students.
Rcso and Oarlcss—Manual ot Surgery.
Spencer and Gask—Snrgery.
Beesley
and
Johnston—Manual of
Surgical
Anatomy.
Examination :
Written: Pass and Honour—3 hours.
Clinical : Viva voce examination of candidates ou
suitable cases in the wards of the Alfred Hosjiitnl. Duration--approximately twenty t o
thirty minutes each candidate.
MINIMUM CLINICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR
FOURTH YEAR STUDENTS:
Students must attend the extracting surgery on the
days alloted to them for the purpose ot exodontia and
anaesthetic practice.
Each student must complete iu the year—
75 Plastic restorations (of which 10 must be in deciduous teeth).
DENTAL SCIENCE.
91$
45
3
15
100
Gold restorations—15 foil, 30 inlays.
Crowns.
Root
fillings.
Cases of Local Anaesthesia, and Exodontia (including Block Anaesthesia).
General Anaesthesia and Exodontia, 60 cases.
The treatment ot two cases of malocclusion (one of
which to be carried out under the supervision
of, and to the satisfaction of, the Demonstrator).
All clinical work must be completed to the satisfaction of the Clinician in charge ot the case.
F I F T H YEAR
DENTAL PR)OSTHESIS—PART I V .
The Lecture Course includes Partial
dentures
and Ceramics.
Tha Clinical Course includes all types of advanced
work such as Obturators, Bridges, Full and
Partial dentures and Ceramics.
The lecture course—
History, Examination, Classification, Diagnosis, Prognosis for partial dentures.
Impression methods.
Preparation and use of Study Casts.
Impression materials and impression methods.
Design.
Direct and indirect retention.
Stress Breakers.
Technique ot Clasp Surveying and designing.
Construction methods.
Insertion and Maintenance.
Dental Porcelain and its place in dentistry.
Electric Furnace and its use.
The use of the Pyrometer.
The manipulation of porcelain.
Inlays.
Mineral stains: their practical application
in effecting changes in colour and t h e
imitation of natural d'efecte.
Firing and the use of super glaze.
914
The Clinical and Laboratory course includes the
construction of Crowns, Inlays and the staining of teeth.
Books for reference : —
LeGro—Ceramics.
Kennedy—Partial Dentures.
Examination: —
Practical: 3 days.
ETHICS AND JURISPRUDENCE—
Two lectures in the First Term.
ORAL SURGERY—
A course of lectures and demonstrations during the
First and Second Terms (also in Third Terra of Fourth
YearAcute and chronic infections associated with teeth
and associated structures. Extraction of tho
teeth. Apicectomy. Giugevectomy. Alveolectomy. Dielocation and ankylosis. Fractures
of the jaws. Diseases of the antrum. Plastic
repairs of the mouth, lips and jaws. Tumours
of the jaws. " Dental " haemorrhage. Technique of " Block " Analgesia.
The Principles of Plastic Surgery. Prosthetic Restorations.
Text-book:
Blair und Ivy—Essentials of Oral Surgery (latest
ed.).
Mead—Principles of Oral Surgery.
Berger—Principles and Technique of Oral Surgery (latest ed.).
Examination:
PERIDONTIA AND ORAL HYGIENE—
Four lecture demonstrations in the first term.
DENTAL SCIENCE.'
915
•PRACTICE MANAGEMENT—
Six lectures in the first term.
CLINICAL REQUIREMENTS—
-Students must attend for Clinical Instruction daily.
General Anaesthesia and Exodontia—
Students must attend the anaesthetic surgery on
the days allotted to them, and must complete
30 cases, arranged a t the discretion of t h e
Demonstrator.
Local Analgesia and Exodontia—
-- '
Students 'must attend the extracting surgery on
the days allotted, and complete 60 cases, including " Block " Anaesthesia. Elevator Technique and Surgical methods.
DETAILS OP SUBJECTS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
FOR T H E EXAMINATIONS FOR T H E D E G R E E
OF, MASTER. OP DENTAL SCIENCE. TO B E
HELD I N MARCH AND SEPTEMBER, 1938.
PART I.—
1. SURGICAL PATHOLOGY (Practical and Theoretical)
A knowledge ot the general principles of Pathology, will
be required, and of the morbid anatomy and pathological
histology of the commoner pathological conditions.
Text Books :—
MacCallum—Text-book of Pathology.
Muir—Text-book ot Pathology.
Beattie and Dickson—G eneral and Special Pathology.
Allen—Pathology, Lectures and Demonstrations.
Bowlby—Surgical Pathology.
The examination will include examinations of macroscopic and microscopic specimens.
2.
BACTERIOLOGY" (Practical and Theoretical).
Candidates arc expected to have a knowledge of the
subject to the Honours standard in Bacteriology at t h e
916
examination in Pathology and Bacteriology for M.B., B.S.
(4th year). For details of subjects, see Details for M.B.,
B.S.
TexUbook: —
Zinsser and Bayne-Jones—Text Book of Bacteriology.
3.
PHYSIOLOGY AND BIOCHEMISTRY.
Candidates will bo expected to have a knowledge of the
subjects equivalent to Honours Standard demanded in
the examination fox Physiology Div. I I . (Medical
Course).
The examinations will be partly written, partly practical,
partly oral.
4.
ANATOMY'.
The course to include lectures, demonstrations and
practical work, extended over one academic year.
The examination to include the anatomy of the Head,
Neck, Thorax and Central Nervous System up to the
Honour standard required for Anatomy in Division I I
of the Medical Course, and to include the embryological,
morphological and anthropological aspects of
the
cranial region.
N.B.—No course will be arranged unless at least
three (3) candidates present,
5.
NATURAL PHILOSOPHY.
Candidates will be expected to have a knowledge of the
subjects equivalent to that demanded in the examination
for above subject P a r t 11 (Science Course).
li.
CHEMISTRY.
Physical Chemistry—The standard
is approximately t h a t of Findlay, " Introduction t o
Physical Chemistry."
Gases—Elementary applications of kinetic theory;
the van der Waals equation of state and
critical phenomena.
Liquids—The additive properties of liquids; the
colligative properties of dilute solutions.
DENTAL SCIENCE.
917
Electrolytes—The ionic theory and the conductivity
of aqueous solutions.
The rates of simple chemical reactions; the application of the principle of chemical equilibrium to chemical problems.
The first law of thermodynamics and an introduction
to the use of t h e second law in problems such
as t h a t of equilibrium and ot electrode
potential; the hydrogen, quinhydrone, calomel and glass electrodes.
The phase rule.
Introduction to the theory of valency.
Organic Chemistry will include:
Purification,
Analysis and Isomerism.
The chemistry of typical aliphatic and aromatic
compounds.
7.
I.
ZOOLOGY.
The Vertebrata from the morphological, embryoloeical and systematic standpoints. The embryology of the frog and chick will be
studied in more detail. A few lectures will
deal with the distribution ot recent and fossil
animals with specinl reference to Australia.
Sedgwick—Text-book of Zoology, Vol. 11.
Graham Kerr—Text-book of Embryology, Vertebrata.
Parker and Haswell—Text-book of Zoology (Vol.
II), 2nd, or later edition.
Lillie—Embryology of the Chick.
Cambridge Natural History.
Eingsley—Comparative Anatomy of Vertebrates.
Hcilprin—Distribution of Animals.
Ncwbigin—Animal Geography.
I I . These lectures will deal with Heredity, Variation,
Evolution and cognate problems.
•
Text-book: —
Crew—Animal Genetics.
918
DETAILS OF SUBJECTS,. 19S8.
Holmes—The Trend ot the Race.
Morgan—Physical Basis of Heredity.
Thorndike—Mental and Social Measurements.
8.
METALLOGRAPHY.
Candidates will be expected to have a detailed knowledge of the following m a t t e r : —
(1) Application of the phase rule to binary and
ternary metallic systems.
(2) Crystalline structure, its mode of formation
and its effect on the physical properties.
(3) Phase changes in the solid state and their
application to heat treatment.
(4) Methods of determining the following physical
properties of metals: —coefficient of expansion, melting point, transformation temperature, hardness, elastic limit, and tensile
strength.
(5) Formation of cavities and other types of unsoundness in cast metals.
(6) Principles underlying the heat treatment of
alloys.
Quenching and tempering.
Age
hardening and temper hardening.
(7) Influence of cold working, wire drawing and
swaging.
(8) Influence of annealing after cold working.
(9) The properties of the following alloy series: —
Cu/Ag, Cu/Au, (Ju/Ag/Au.
Modification of
latter by addition of P t and Pd.
(10) Amalgams. Physical properties and effects of
manipulative details.
(11) Steel and its heat treatment.
(12) Stainless steels, their properties and treatment.
There will be two papers and a practical examination, which may include an oral examination.
The above matter will be partially covered in the
subjects Metallography and Properties of Metals P a r t s
I and IT in the Faoulty of Engineering.
•
DENTAL SCIENCE.
919
PART I I —
1. DENTAL SURGERY AND PATHOLOGY.
Candidates will be expected to have a higher knowledge of Dental Surgery and Pathology iu their widest
sense
The examination will be partly written, partly oral
and partly practical.
2.
DENTAL PROSTHESIS.
Candidates will be expected to have a higher knowledge of Dental Prosthesis in its widest sense. They .
must give evidence of familiarity with current literature, and will be expected to be able to discuss the
principles underlying technique.
and partly practical.
3.
ORTHODONTIA.
Candidates will be expected to have a higher knowledge of Orthodontia in its widest sense. They must
give evidence of familiarity with current literature,
and will 1 e expected to be able to discuss the principles underlying technique.
and partly practical
INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES PRESENTING
THESES FOR T H E DEGREE OP DOCTOR OF
DENTAL SCIENCE:—
Resolution of the Faculty of Dental Science.
That in the opinion of (lie Faculty a Thesis
(1) Should not be any ordinary compilation
from books
. . .
(2) Nor a mere compendium of cases
(3) Nor merely observational
(1) But shouid.be ;a substantial contribution
to knowledge and
..../.
(5) Should be in fit form tor publication or be
already published in approved form.
FACULTY OF EDUCATION.
•DETAILS OF-SUBJECTS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
FOR T H E ANNUAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY
EXAMINATIONS
TO
BE
HELD IN T H E
FOURTH TERM, 1938.
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION.
FIRST
PASS
1.
SUBJECTS.
YEAR.
(To be t a k e n by a l l S t u d e n t s ) .
HISTORY AND PRINCIPLES OF EDUCATION.
(a) H I S T O E T
or
EDUCATION.
A brief survey of the general history of schools
and educational practices from primitive
times to t h e present day.
Text-book: —
Cubberley—History of Education.
For reference:—
Freeman—Schools of Hellas.
Cubberley—Readings in the History of Education.
(b) PEIKCIPLES OF EDUCATION.
The Place of Education in Individual and Social
Life.
The Psychological Foundations of Education.
The Sociological Foundations of Education.
Principles governing the procedure in various typesof school.
Text-books: —
Norwood—The English Tradition of Education.
Chapman and Counts—Principles of Education.
For reference:—
Spencer—Essays on Education.
Nunn—Education: I t s Data and First Principles.
Dewey—School and Society.
Ruediger—Teaching Procedures.
EDUCATION.
2.
-
921.
ORGANISATION OF EDUCATION. -.
A discussion of the following topics: —
1 The State and education.
2. The historical development of national'
systems of education (a brief treatment).
3. The place ot public and private schools.
4. A general survey of educational facilitiesexisting a t present in Victoria.
5. The scope and function of
Pre-school education.
The primary school.
Post-primary and secondary
schools.
Special schools.
The University.
Adult education
6. The construction and modification of curricula.
7. The problem at examinations.
Current criticisms.
Internal examinations in Victoria.
New Type Examinations.
8. Equality of educational opportunity. Thoreorganisation of post-primary and secondary education.
9. Typical modern developments in educational practice, such as—
Individual methods.
Activity programmes.
Integrated courses.
Broadcasts to schools.
Educational films.
The platoon system.
Libraries in schools.
Modern school architecture.
10. A brief survey of educational organisation
and administration in—
England.
United States.
Germany.
Denmark.
Russia.
67a
922
DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 19)18,
Text-books:— •
.'
'
Chapman and Counts—Principles of Education.
N.E.F.—The Examination Tangle and the Way
Out.
University of Chicago—.Manual of Examination
Methods.
For Reference :—
Cubberley—History of Education, P a r t IV.
Cole—Education of the - Adolescent in Australia.
English Board of Education—Various Reports.
Tate—Lessons from Rural Denmark.
Eandcl—Kxaaiinations and their Substitutes in
the United States.
Kandel—Comparative Education.
Various publications of the Australian Council (or
Educational Research.
8. EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY.
I . Physiological Psychology.
(a) Study in outline of the nervous system and the
organs of response.
.. . (b) The sensory equipment of man and the development of sensory powers in children. Sensory
dcfecte and aphasias. The Gestalt theory,
(c) The conditioned reflex and behaviorism. The
hoimic conception of mental life, parallelism
and interactionism. Heredity and environment.
II.
Psychology of Cognition.
(a) Imagery and imaginal types.
Growth and
range of child's perceptions. Training of t h e
senses, apperception, observation,
kindergarten training, lett-handedness,
mirrorwriting. Report psychology. The pedagogical significance of imagination.
(b) Memory, the laws of association, theory of
associationism.'.' Higher thought processes,
eduction of relations and correlates, conception, judgment, reasoning. The develop-
EDUCATION.
92$
ment of language. Nature and measurement of intelligence,
(o) The laws of learning; improvement, permanence
and fatigue in learning. Transfer of training.
Educational
tests.
Psychology of
school subjects, special abilities and disabilities.
HI.
Psychology of Volition.
(a) Nature of feeling and emotion. The development of emotional reactions in children.
(b) The theories of instinct and their application
to education. Interest and attention.
(o) The growth of sentiments, values, ideals. Temperament and character. The psychology of
adolescents and their educational needs.
(d) The psycho-analytic contributions to education.
The unadjusted school child, mental disease
and mental hygiene.
Text-books: —
Sandiford—Educational Psychology,
Hughes—Learning and Teaching.
For referenoe: —
Watson—Behaviorism.
Spearman—The Nature of Intelligence.
Petermann—The Gestalt Theory.
Brooks—Psychology of Adolescence.
Thorndike—Educational Psychology.
J . Ward—Psychology Applied to Education.
McDougall—Social Psychology.
Colvin—The Learning Process.
4. METHODS OP TEACHING.
I . General MethodPsychological basis of teaching.
Types of lessons.
Gateways of knowledge.
Steps of method.
Motivation.
Teaching devices.
-924
The a r t of questioning.
Illustrations and teaching aids.
Examinations.
•
Homework and its problems.
Methods of study.
Personal factors in a teacher's success.
Record cards.
Courses of study.
Text-book: —
Hughes—Learning and Teaching.
For Reference:—
Bagley—School Discipline.
Oaldwell-Cook—The Play Way.
Adams—Modern Developments in Educational
Practice.
Hall-Quest-^Supervised Study in t h e Secondary
School.
I I . Sptcial Methods of Teaching Schtol Subjects.
(Students are required to select three subjects in
order ot importance, including at least one subject from Section A below).
The following methods are offered—
Section A.
English
History and Economics
Geography
Classics
Modern Languages
Music
Games and Physical Education
Mathematics
Biological Sciences
Physical Sciences
Art and Handwork
Commercial Subjects.
Section B.
Technical School Subjects
EDUCATION.
925j
Home Economics
Nursery School and Kindergarten
Sub-Primary
^
Primary (including Rural School Methods)
Methods included in Section B may be taken only by
teachers eligible for partial exemption from practical
teaching under Clause 3 ot the details of practical work
during the first year. (See next page).
Reading guides will be provided in each of these subjects
and, where the number of students warrants it, this will be
supplemented by a course of lectures.
6.
PRACTICAL TEACHING.
Practice of Teaching (including Drawing and
Writing on the Blackboard and Speech
Training).
Speech Training involves not only the elimination
of possible defects in the student's own voice and speech,
b u t an elementary knowledge of methods of dealing
with speech defects in school children.
Full details of the requirements in Practical Teaching are given below.
Examination:—
Pass—'
History and Principles of Education (one paper)
—3 hours.
Organisation of Education (one paper)—3 hours.
Educational Psychology (OHC paper)—3 hours.
Method (one paper)—3 hours.
Special arrangements are made for the examination,
during the year, of internal students.
HONOURS SUBJECTS.
(One subject to be selected by students presenting for
Honours, in addition to the work prescribed above).
1.
Comparative Education.
A comparative study of the educational systems of
England, U.S.A., France, Germany, Italy, Japan
and Russia, in relation to educational develop
in en to in Australia.
926
Text-books: —
Eandel—Comparative Education.
1929 and 1934 Year-books of the International
Institute, Columbia University.
For reference: —
1936 Year-book of the International Institute.
The Year-books ot Education (Evans Bros.), 1932
to 1937.
IT. History of Education (Special topic).
Education in tho Nineteenth Century.
(a) The development of national systems of
education in England, United' States,
France, Germany and Australia,
(b) Education in its relation to changing
economic and social conditions.
Text-book: —
Cubberley—History of Education.
Reisner—Nationalism and Education since 1789.
For reference : — .
Adamson—English Education 17S9-1902
m . Philosophy of Education.
A brief study of the effect of the political theory and
social development of the following nations upon their
national systems of education: —
England
Germany
Russia
United States
Italy
Australia
France
Japan
Text-book: —
The 1929, 1934, 1936 1'ear-books of the International Institute of Teachers' College, Columbia
University.
For reference :—
Kandel—Comparative Education.
Durant—The Story of Philosophy.
Gentile—The Reform of Education.
Dewey—School and Society.
Dewey—Democracy and Education.
The Year-books of Education (Evans Bros.), 1932
to 1937.
EDUCATION.
927'
IV, Modern Developmtnts i n Educational-Practice.
A careful examination' of modern methods of school
organisation and the presentation of subject-matter,
such as—
-i
Platoon System.
U n i t Teaching.
Activity Programmes.
Integrated Courses.
Dalton P l a n .
•• Project Method.
Libraries.
New Methods ot Examination.
Extra-Currioular Activities.
Vocational Guidance.
Film and Radio in Schools.
Plans of Reorganisation.
with special investigation of any one method in which
the student has experience or particular interest.
Text-books: —
Adams-^Moderri Developments in Educational
Practice.
Rugg—The Child-Centred School.
> ' Ballard—Tho Changing School.
For reference:—
Morrison—Secondary Teaching.
Spain—The Platoon School.
Kimmins—The Triumph of.the Dalton P l a n .
" The Yen*-hooks ot Education (Evans Bros.), 1932
•to 1937.
Examination :—
Honours—
History of Education (one paper)—3 hours.
Philosophy of Education (ono paper)—3 hour3._
Modern Developments in Educational Practice
(ono paper)—3 hours.
Comparative Education (one paper)—3 hours.
PRACTICAL WORK DURING T H E F I R S T YEAR.
1. The prescribed Practical Work consists of: —
(o) Attendance at Demonstration and Discussion
lessons, with subsequent tutorials on method
(at least 75 per cent, of the total).
328
(&) Observation of teaching in such schools as may
be directed.
(e) Teaching practice in the practising schools at
the disposal of the Professor or in other
schools approved beforehand by the Faculty
of Education for this purpose. The amount
is determined according to previous experience and aptitude of student, minimum, 80
h o u r s ; maximum, as prescribed.
Records of (a) (b) (c) must be kept in the prescribed
manner and handed to the Professor of Education at the end ot the third term.
During second term there will be a period of
continuous practice, during which no lectures will be delivered.
id) Unless the student is specially exempted by the
Professor, attendance each week for classes
in speech
training and for blackboard
writing and blackboard drawing.
Students
exempted from attendance are not necessarily
exempted from practical tests given d n r i n g
or a t the end of the year.
(f) Such attendance a t Tutorials (for essays and
discussion of method), and for discussion of
teaching practice as may from time to time
be directed.
(f) The preparing of plans of work and of notes of
lessons,
(o) The keeping of an approved Observation Book.
(h) Attendance at a special course in physical education and games.
3. Arrangements will be made for studente to do
some of their practice in approved secondary schools
under the following conditions: —
(a) That each student be placed under an experienced form teacher.
(b) That the form teacher write in the student's
" log book " a criticism on each day's work,
and give oral criticism in addition.
(c) That a monthly and final report on each student's
progress be sent to the Professor of Education by the Principal of the School.
EDUCATION.
929
id) That each student be under the supervision of
the Professor of Education and his staff.
3. Till further notice partial exemption from Practical Teaching prescribed may be granted to the following classes of students, and under the conditions laid
down in Sections 4, 5.
A. All teachers of the Education Department nominated under sub-section (1) (c) of section 33
of the University. Act 1928.
B. All teachers who have had five years' experience in
teaching and whose reports have been uniformly satisfactory.
C. (i) Teachers in country districts, or in other States,
who have had approved experience, with
satisfactory reports, and are able to teach
under approved supervision for a period decided upon by the Faculty,
(ii.) Teachers employed by permission of the Council
of Public Education on the staffs of.secondary
schools and engaged in teaching forms of
secondary standard.
D. All teachers who hold the certificate of a t r a i n i n g
institution approved by the Council of Public Education and by the Faculty ot Education, and whose reports have been uniformly
satisfactory.
4. Students under section 3 must—
(a) Be engaged in the full and regular practice of
their profession as teachers.
(b) Unless they arc head teachers, be under the
supervision ot head teachers (or of approved
assistant teachers), who are willing to send
monthly reports to the Professor of Education as to their progress in the a r t ot teach,
ing, the responsibility to rest with the
student to see t h a t these reports are regularly
forwarded.
(c) Undergo satisfactorily such tests in the practice ot teaching as may bo directed by the
Professor ot Education.
(d) Be supervised regularly by the Professor of
Education and his staff.
930
(e) Practise in a designated practising School for
such time as is directed in Section 5.
5; (i) Teachers under Section 3A and H will be required to teach three weeks in the University practising school, to attend Discussion and Demonstration lessons, and to spend certain periods in observation-as directed.
(ii:) Teachers under Section 3C (i.) will be required to
to take two years tor the first year of the course. They must
teach for two months in the University High School,
and attend all the Discussion, Demonstration and Observation lessons prescribed in that tiiiKr.
(iii.) Teachers under Section 3C (ii.) will be required
to take two years for the first year of the course, to attend
d u r i n g the first year the lectures in History and Principles of Education, Methods of Teaching, and the Discussion and Demonstration lessons. During the second
year they will be required to attend the lectures in
Organisation and Modern Problems, and in Educational
Psychology. During the two years they must teach
for a total period of 90 hours under approved supervision, and must attend for four weeks for teaching
practice in the University High School.
'Those who have had approved teaching^ experience
may be exempted, in whole or in part,-from the requirement of teaching for 90 hours under supervision,
but must teach for a total of from four to six weeks
(according to skill) at the University High School.
\iv.). Teachers under 3D may continue teaching in
an approved school and may do the work of P a r t I in
one year, provided that they teach for at least three
weeks in the University practising school, attend discussion and demonstration lessons, and produce satisfactory reports from the principals of the schools in
which they have been employed.
(v.) Teachers under 3B and 3D may bo granted permission to take two years for the first year of the
course if adequate reason bo shown.
6. All applications for partial exemption under Section 3 must be set out on the special form to be obtained from the Registrar.
EDUCATION.
.
.
931
Applications must be addressed directly to the Regist r a r , be accompanied by certificate
of employment,
and be sent iu before March 31st.
7. All applications for exemptions from attendance
at classes in Speech Training and Blackboard Work must be
addressed directly to the Professor of Education, not later
than 31st March.
8. The same theoretical and practical tests shall be
passed by candidates working under the provisions of
Sections 3, 4, 5, as are prescribed for other students.
9. If any student fails in practice he must undergo
in a succeeding year whatever extra practice and testa
may be prescribed and must, before re-entering for the
final test, lodge an entry for examination with the Registrar accompanied by a bank slip for Jil/1/-.
As a
general rule he will not be allowed to present again
till September of the following year. If he is then
teaching iu an approved school, arrangements mademay be
to permit him to give the final lesson in t h a t school. In
all cases the report of the school will be taken into
account.
The University High School (Principal, Mr. M. S. Sharman, M.A., M.Sc.), in Story Street, Parkville, is t h e
official secondary practising school. The Demonstration Lessons, Discussion Lessons, and as much of the
secondary practice as possible are taken in this school.
All students who are unable to attend lectures should
enrol as external students on the form obtainable from the
Registrar before the beginning of the University year, when
as far as possible arrangements will be made to guide
them in Experimental Education, and in their reading.
The Dwight's Prize will be awarded to the candidate
who has obtained the highest place in the first year (Pass
and Honours) of the course, provided t h a t he gains
First or Second Class Honours. The Hugh Childers
Memorial Prize will be awarded to the candidate
securing First Class Honours who ranks next to tho
winner of the Dwight's Prize.
Students taking Arts, Commerce or Science for Education
are advised to communicate with the Professor of Edcation in February or early in March in the first or second
(preferably the first) year ot their course in order that ad• vice may be given them as to the suitability of their courses
for a teaching career.
932 .
All students taking Education in 1938 are asked to
see the Professor a t 3 p.m. on February 18th, or earlier
by appointment, in order t h a t arrangements may be
made for their teaching practice. There will be a
fortnight's practical work with talks on Method before
the lectures begin.
Unless specially exempted, all students must begin
practical work before 16th March.
I I . Test in Practical Teaching.
Internal students may be exempted from a final practical test if the quality ot their teaching under supervision has been satisfactory.
If their teaching ia much
below pass standard, they may not be allowed to present
for a final test until they have had further practice. In all
cases, the quality of their lesson notes, blackboard work
and speech, as well as their disciplinary power and
general teaching skill, are taken into account.
Candidates who are required to present for a final
practical test must present lesson notes in at least three
subjects, and must reach the pass standard in at least
two lessons.
No candidate for the subjects of the First Year ot
the course who has not completed the practical work
prescribed by the Faculty of Education is allowed to
sit for any p a r t of t h e written examination unless he
is proceeding, by permission of the Faculty, under
Section 3C (i.) or 3C (ii.) or 15 (v.), or has been
granted dispensation by the Faculty on account of illness or other sufficient cause.
SECOND YEAR.
EXPERIMENTAL EDUCATION (To be taken by
all students).
Statistical Methods—
Collection, classification and graphical presentation of d a t a ; the normal probability curve;
measures of central tendency and variability,
percentiles, correlation. Application of statistics to t h e construction and standardisation
of mental tests.
EDUCATION.
933
Text-books: —
Hblzinger—Statistical Methods for Students in
Education,
or Garrett—Statistics in Psychology and Education.
2. Intelligence Testing and its History
The Binct^Simon tests. Group tests, performance
tests, tests of scholastic attainment, the newtype examination.
Spearman's
two-factor
theory. Educational uses of tests.
Text-book: —
Freeman—Mental Tests.
3.
Clinical a n d Vocational Psychology—
The problem of youthful delinquencies; the education of superior and retarded children;
present-day methods of vocational guidance;
employment—psychology.
Text-books: —
Wallin—Clinical and Abnormal Psychology.
Earle—Methods of Choosing a Career.
<6. Abnormal Psychology—
Tho nature of functional disorders; the theories
of Freud, J u n g , Adler and McDougall.
Text-book: —
5.
One recent investigation into some important educational problems—
The problem for 193S will be the Reliability of
Examinations.
Text-books: —
Valentine—Reliability of Examinations.
Hartog and Rhodes—An Examination of Examinations.
Books recommended for reference: —
Burt—The Young Delinquent.
Spearman—The Abilities of Man.
Burt—Mental and Scholastic Tests.
Pintner and Paterson—A Scale of Performance
Tests.
•934
Terman—The Measurement ot Intelligence.
Terman—The Intelligence of School Children.
McDougall—Abnormal Psychology.
Bachelard—Education of the Retarded Child.
Various publications of the A.C.E.R.
Kandel—Examinations and their Substitutes in the
United States.
B.
G.
One of the following subjects: —
1. COMPARATIVE EDUCATION.
2. HISTORY OF EDUCATION For details see
{prescriptions
3. PHILOSOPHY OF EDUCA- for the Honours
TION.
(subjects of the
4. MODERN DEVELOPFirst Year.
MENTS IN EDUCATIONAL PRACTICE.
;
AN EDUCATIONAL INVESTIGATION approv e d
by the Faculty ot Education.
Topics must be submitted for approval before March
31, and the investigation must be carried out under
the direction of the School of Education.
The investigation may be concerned with any recognised educational field. The following tojncs are given
as samples ot the type of enquiry which will be
approved:—
1. An examination of retardation in Victorian
primary schools.
2. A critical survey of various systems ot awarding
scholarships.
3. Historical reasons tor the establishment in Australia of highly centralised systems of educational administration.
4. Sociological determination of objectives in education in Australia.
5. Educational survey of a rural district.
6. History of Catholic Education in Victoria.
The student is recommended to submit a topic which
represents a.n aspect ot his major interest in educational work.
Investigations must be submitted for
examination not later than 29th October; •
EDUCATION.
935-
•EXAMINATIONS.
All examinations will be held in the fourth term,
1938. P a r t of the examination may lie completed^
during the year under conditions set out iu the reading,
guides issued to students.
Examination: —
History ot Education (oue paper)—3 hours.
Philosophy of Education (one paper)—3 hours.
Modern Developments in Educational Practico(one paper)—3 hours.
Comparative Education (one paper)—3 hours.
Experimental Education (one paper)—3 hours.
Reading-guides will be issued in all subjects.
Ex.
ternal students will be expected to attend seminars
specially arranged for them on Saturday mornings and
other convenient times.
For Interstate candidates a series of seminars and'
discussions will be arranged immediately prior to t h e
annual examinations,or iu the September holidays.
Candidates who obtain, under Section 13 of the Regulation, an exemption from examination in a special subject
will be required to undertake the following reading—
Kandel. Comparative Education.
1934 and 1936 Yrear-books of the International
Institute.
1936, 1937, 1938 numbers ot the Year-book of
Education (Evans Bros.).
and to present an essay on some problem of modern
education approved by the Faculty of Education. The
subject of this essay should be discussed with the Professor Education before submission for approval.
Theessay should be presented not later than 1st October.
EDUCATION LIBRARY.
In addition to the University Library, available to
all students, there is a special library in the School of
Education, which is designed to meet t h e needs of
country students. I t contains all the reference books
and a limited number ot each of the text-books.
The.
membership fee is 10/6, payable to the Registrar.
B8
FACULTY
OF ENGINEERING.
DETAILS
OF SUBJECTS AND RECOMMENDATIONS FOR T H E ANNUAL AND S U P P L E MENTARY EXAMINATIONS TO B E HELD I N
THE FOURTH TERM, 193S, AND FOR THE
FINAL HONOUR EXAMINATION TO BE H E L D
IN T H E FIRST TERM, 1939.
HONOUR W O R K Except in the cases of subjects where special details are
published; the Examination for Honours will be on the lines
indicated for Pass, but candidates will be required
t o read more advanced work than for Pass, and t o
a t t a i n to a higher standard of knowledge.
ARCHITECTURAL HISTORY, PABT I . _
(See under Faculty of Architecture.)
BUILDING CONSTRUCTION—
(See under Faculty of Architecture.)
CHEMISTRY, PARTS I. and I I . (See under
of Science).
Faculty
CHEMISTRY, PART I I . (Metallurgy Course)—
Details as tor Chemistry P a r t I I . without the laboratory
work (See under Faculty of Science).
CIVIL ENGINEERING (WITH DESIGN), PABT I.—
Lectures:—
General theory of design and methods of construction ;
Working stresses; determination of forces
iu simple structures; influence lines; criteria for maximum bending .moments and
shearing
forces under various loadings;
ENGINEERING.
937
deflection of trusses; wind pressure; theory
ot
earth
pressure;
elementary
soil
mechanics; retaining walls; foundations and
lootings; pile driving and pile structures.
Steel work:
Welding
processes and applications
to
engineering structures and industrial processes ; welding procedure and control; inspection of welds; properties of weld metal
and strength ot welded joints; design of
welded and rivetted members, joints and
structures; beams; plate girders; tension
and compression members; bearings, bases,
and footings; roof
and bridge trusses,
buildings, and other framed structures.
Concrete, plain and reinforced:
Setting ot cement; properties of aggregates; water-cement r a t i o ; composition and
mixing of concrete; factors affecting
the
strength
and
permanence
of
concrete;
shrinkage, creep; beams and slabs; columns,
footings; bridge decks; flat slab floors; beam
and tile floors; tanks and other simple
structures; design ot form-work; surface
treatment; waterproofing.
Timber:
Growth; structure; seasoning; preservation;
general properties; ultimate strengths and
working stresses; defects; beams, columns,
joints; trestle and truss bridges,
roof
trusses, and other structures; uses of various timbers; elementary methods of identification.
Drawing Office Work:
Students are required to attend in the Drawing
Office throughout the year, and to submit for examination original designs tor simple engineering structures,
with calculations, drawings, specifications and quantities. The work will normally comprise two major designs and minor design work.
5S:l
938
193S.
" T e x t Books: —
Johnson, Bryan and Turneaure—Modern Framed
Structures; or
Kirkhara—Structural Engineering.
Sutherland and Clifford—Reinforced Concrete De.
sign.
J . Singleton Green—Concrete Engineering, Vols.
I and I I .
Jacoby and Davis—Timber Design and Construction.
For reference and vacation reading: —
Taylor, Thompson and Smulski—Concrete, Plain
and Reinforced, Vols. I and I I .
Manning—Reinforced Concrete Design.
Andrews—Further Problems in the Theory and
Design of Structures.
Hool and Johnson—Handbook of Building Construction, Vol. I .
Jacoby and Davis—Foundations of Bridges and
Buildings.
Current Engineering literature, proceedings of
societies, reports, and standard specifications as directed in lectures.
CIVIL ENGINEERING (WITH DESIGN), PABT I A .
Lsctures:
As for Civil Engineering, P a r t I .
Students are required to sit for examination iu fundamental theory and the simpler parte of the work only
(approximately one-third of the full course), provided
t h a t thoy have attended lectures during such period
(approximately three-quarters of the year), as is indicated by the lecturer.
Drawing Office Work:
Office for the first two terms only, and to submit work
as for Civil Engineering P a r t I, but of approximately
half the amount, comprising one major design a n a
minor design work which may include mechanical
details.
Text Books, Referenoe Books, eto.: —
As for Civil Engineering, P a r t I .
ENGINEERING.
939
CIVIL ENGINEERING, PART II.—
Structures: Truss bridges, viaducts, arches, suspension bridges,- cantilever bridges, movable
bridges. Bridge erection. Deflection, secondary stress. Statically indeterminate structures. Unbraced frames. Methods of slope
deflection, successive approximations, and
least work. Foundations, bridge piers and
abutments. Coffer-dams, shoring, underpinning.
Marine Works:
Waves, tides, winds,
coastal
changes, littoral drift, bars, deltas.
Tidal
and
non-tidal harbours.
Training walls,
jetties, breakwaters, piers, wharves, docks.
Roads: General principles of location, road transition curves. Elementary soil mechanics,
simplified soil tests. General theory of road
pavement design. Traffic hound pavements
of gravel, etc. Rigid pavements, including
lean mix types. Bituminous road materials
and their application to road construction.
General treatment only of high class pavements. Special problems of urban street
design.
Railways: Conditions governing methods of transport. Steam and electric railways. Location,
gradients, curves, drainage, permanent way,
gaiiiges, signalling, train working.
Tramways: Cable and electric tramways; track.
Earthworks:
Embankment,
cutting,
tunnelling,
shaft sinking, dredging. Plant.
Organisation of Work: The organisation of labour,
materials and plant.
Cost and progress
records.
Specifications and contracts, plans, quantities, estimates.
The financial aspect ot engineering problems.
Structures.
For reference :—
Structures. (3 Vols.).
940
Sutherland and Clifford—Reinforced
ConcreteDesign.
Urquhart—Civil Engineering Handbook.
Hool—Reinforced Concrete Construction. (3 Vols.).
Jacoby and Davis—Timber Design and Construction.
Jacoby and Davis—Foundations of Bridges and
Buildings.
Marine, Works.—
For Reference : —Cunningham—Harbour Engineering:.
Cunningham—Dock Engineering.
Greene—Wharves and Piers.
Iln Plat Taylor— Docks, Wharves und Piers.
Roads a n d Streets.—
For reference: —
Coane—Australian Roads.
Agg—-Construction of Roads and Pavements.
Harger—Location, Grading and Drainage
of
Highways.
Railways and Tramways.
For referenoe: —
Williams—Design of Railway Location.
Excavation, Tunnelling and Use, of Explosives.—
For reference: Boulton—Blasting with High Explosives.
Hewett and Johannesson—Shield aud Compressed
Air Tunnelling.
Lauchli—Tunnelling.
General.
For reference : Kirby—Specification Writing.
McClelland—Civil Engineering Estimates
Contract Costs.
Cresswell—The Law Relating to Building
Building Contracts.
and
and
ENGINEERING.
941
Gillette and Dana—Construction, Oostkeeping
and Management.
Proceedings ot Engineering Societies and Journals,
etc., as quoted in lectures.
Examination: —
W r i t t e n : (3 papers)—each 3. hours.
CIVIL ENGINEERING DESIGN—PART I I . —
Office throughout the year, and to submit for examination original designs, with calculations, drawings,
specifications and quantities for advanced types of engineering work. Designs will usually include parts or
the whole of the following: —
(1) A structure of brnced-frame type, such as a
bridge, building, etc.
(2) An elastic (unbraced) structure, such as an
arch bridge, building frame, culvert, watertower, etc.
(3) A .scheme of water supply, irrigation, power,
sewerage, etc.
Small approved research projects may bo carried out
in addition to the above.
Candidates for final honours are required to submit
the above or similar approved designs.
ELECTRICAL E N G I N E E R I N G . PART I.—
Unite and standards.
Electrical measuring instruments.
Energy meters.
Direct Current:
Primary and storage batteries.
Magnetic circuit.
Direct Current Generators:
Construction and characteristics.
Voltage regulation, calculation of E.M.F.
Parallel running of shunt and compound machines.
Direct Current Motors:
Characteristics of shunt and series motors,
stalrters, regulators and controllers.
542
DETAILS OP SUBJEOTS. 1988.
Alternating Current:
Generating of alternating E . M . F :
Current and E.M.F. wave shapes, properties of sine waves. .
R.M.S. Values.
Inductance and capacity and their effects
in alternating current circuits. Leading and lagging current, phase differences, power . and power factor.
Separation of sine wave current .into
a power and watt-less component.
Theory of wattmeter in A.C. circuit.
Energy Meters; D.C. and A.C.
Transformers:
Theory, construction and characteristics.
T h r e e Phase:
Three phase electromotive forces and currents.
Three phase alternator construction.
Star and delta connection.
A.C. motors.
Vector diagrams.
A.C. transmission and distribution systems
single phase and three phase.
Text Books:
A. ( E s s e n t i a l Clayton and Shelley—Elementary Electrical Engineering.
Karapetoff—Experimental
Electrical
Engineering, Vol. I .
Smith—Practical Alternating Currents.
B. (Often required)—
Gray—Principles and Practice of Electrical Engineering.
Smith—Practical Testing of Dynamos and Motors.
C. (For referenoe)—
Sublet—Electrical Engineering
and Properties.
Materials : Tables
ENGINEERING.
.
;
943
McGraw-Hill—Standard Handbook for Electrical
Engineers.'
Laws—Eleotrical Measurements.
Edgcumbe—Industrial Electrical Measuring Instruments.
Naval Electrical Manual, 1928.
MaoCall—Continuous Current Electrical Engineer,
ing.
Ayrton and Mather: Practical Electricity.
Wiring Regulations ot State Electricity Commission of Victoria.
Examination : —
W r i t t e n : Honours (2 papers)—each 3 hours.
ELECTRICAL E N G I N E E R I N G . PABT I A . —
Details as set o u t for Electrical Engineering, F a r t I ,
except that students who have attended a satisfactory
proportion of lectures will not be examined on the theory
of instruments, and the amount ot practical work will be
two-thirds of t h a t required tor Electrical Engineering
Part I.
ELECTRICAL E N G I N E E R I N G , PART I I . —
Illumination and Photometry:
Principles and definitions.
Photometry.
Polar curves ot lamps and fittings, Isocandlo diagrams.
Mean spherical C.P. and its determination.
Illumination requirements.
Photo-electric cells and their applications.
Direct Current Measurements:
Precise measurement of voltage, current and
resistance.
Alternating Current Theory:
Application of symbolic method to circuits
with resistance, inductance and capacity.
944
Application to single and polyphase transmission lines, transformers, alternators,
synchronous motors, induction motors and
other A.C. apparatus.
A.C. wave shapes and harmonic analysis.
Wave tracers and oscillographs.
Causes of wave distortion and effects of harmonics.
A.C. Measurements;
Measurement of alternating currents, voltages, power and energy.
Instrument
Transformers.
A.C. potentiometer. A.C. bridges.
Inductance and capacity measurement.
Power factor and phase angle measurements.
Frequency measurement.
A.C. Machinery:
Transformers, single and polyphase, construction and connections.
Alternators, construction, characteristics and
regulation.
Synchronous motors.
Induction motors, construction, characteristics, circle diagram, various means of
starting, speed regulation, power factor correction.
Alternating Current commutator motors.
Conversion ot A.C to D.C.:
Motor generators, motor converters, rotary
converters.
Rectifiers—mercury arc, thermionic, copper
oxide.
Smoothing of rectified currents, filter circuits.
Magnetism:
Calculations of magnetic circuits.
Testing of magnetic materials with special
reference to Permeability, Hysteresis and
Eddy Currents.
ENGINEERING.
945-
Dielectrics:
The dielectric circuit, dielectric losses, high
tension, high frequency and surge t e s t i n g
of dielectrics.
Transmission Lines:
Calculation of resistance, inductance, and
capacity per mile.
Calculation of practical transmission lines.
Generator voltage regulation.
Automatic
voltage regulators.
Synchronous condensers.
Feeder regulation—tapping switches, induction regulators.
Protection:
Protective devices' and relays tor D.C. and
A.C. circuits.
Unbalanced 3 Phase:
Elementary theory
ponents.
of
symmetrical
com-
Oscillating Circuits.
Simple oscillating circuits with mechanical
analogies.
Thermionic Valves—characteristics and applications.
Text Books recommended: —
A. (Essential)—
Karapetoff—Experimental Electrical Engineering,
Vols. I and I I .
Karapetoff—The Electric Circuit.
Clayton—Power Factor Correction.
Still—Electric Power Transmission.
B.
(Often required)—
Laws—Electrical Measurements.
Stubbings—Commercial A.C. Measurements.
Dwight—Transmission Line Formulas.
Clayton—Alternating Currents.
Steinmetz—Electrical Engineering.
346
C. (For reference)—
-.
McGraw-Hill—Standard Handbook for Electrical
Engineers.
Drysdaie and Jolley—Electrical Measuring I n struments, Vols. I and n .
Edgcumbe—Industrial Electrical Measuring Intruments.
Lawrence—Principles of Alternating Currents.
Palmer—Wireless Principles and Practice.
Hague—Alternating Current Bridge Methods.
Peek—Dielectric Phenomena in High Voltage Circuits.
Hill—Rotary Converters.
Prince aud Vogdes—Mercury Arc Rectifiers.
Marti and Winograd—Mercury Arc Power Rectifiers.
Vinal—Storage Batteries.
Dover—Electric Traction.
Steinmetz—General Lectures in Electrical Engineering.
British Standard Specifications.
Cady and Dates—Illuminating Engineering.
Trotter—Elemente of Illuminating Engineering.
Walsh—Photometry.
Current numbers of The Illuminating Engineer
Garrard—Electric Switch and Control Gear.
, Examination: —
Two papers, each 3 hours.
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING DESIGN—
The principles underlying the design of electrical
apparatus and machines.
The chief applications of electrical plant ia
modern power systems.
The design and layout of power stations, substations, and transmission systems.
Specifications and Contracts.
The drawing office work, will include the preparation by studente of detailed designs of electrical apparatus and machines. These designs, together with
all necessary specifications, calculations and drawings,
* r e to be completed by the student and submitted for
•eiamination at such times during the year as may ba
ENGINEERING.
947
notified. Studente will also be required to preparepapers on various aspects of electrical engineering.
Text Books: —
Still—Elements of Electrical Design.
Sublet—Electrical Engineering Materials: Tablegand Properties.
Reference Books: —
Current issues of electrical technical magazines.
Warren—Electrical Insulating Materials.
Moreoombe—Overhead Power Lines.
J . and P.—The Transformer Book.
Gray—Electrical Machine Design.
Garrard—Electric Switch and Control Gear.
Wilson—Electric Control Gear and Industrial
Electrification.
Examination: —
Two papers, each 3 hours.
ELEMENTARY PLANNING—
(See under Faoulty of Architecture.)
E N G I N E E R I N G DESIGN—PART I.—
Principles and procedure in rational design.
Design properties of engineering materials in
common use.
Allowable stresses, factor of
safety, modes of failure.
Illustrative designs in the following:
Simple beams and trusses'in timber and steel.
Joints and fasteners, including screw fasteners,
rivetted and welded joints. Power screwe.
Pipes and pipe fittings.
Transmission mechanisms.
Shafting, couplings,
belt drives, rope drives, and gearing.
Approved original designs, with calculations and
drawings, are to be submitted for examination as required.
Text-books:
Spooher—Machine
Design, Construction
and
Drawing.
Low—Pocket-Book for Mechanical Engineers.
•948
or
DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1'joS.
Mechanical World Year Book (current issue),
Inst, ot Engineers, Aust.—Engineering Drawing
Practice.
Hyland and Kommers—Machine Design..
Moore—Materials of Engineering.
Chiiruock—The
Mechanical
Transmission
of
Power.
French—Enginering Drawing.
Kent—Mechanical Engineers' Handbook:
Vol. II.—Power.
Vol. 111.—Design and Shop Practice.
. ENGINEERING- DESIGN (PART la>—
The lecture work in this subject will consist of the
lectures in Engineering Design Part 1. together with
lectures on the Properties of Materials as given in
" Strength and Elasticity of Materials."
Students will also be required to spend three hours
per week in the drawing office on t h e preparation of
-designs, and two hours per week in the Testing Laboratory on the testing of engineering materials. This latter
work will Ije done in conjunction with the Practical
Classes in Strength and Elasticity of Materials.
Examination Papers:
Honour: As for Engineering Design I, and 2nd
Honour in Strength and Elasticity of Materials.
ENG I.S EERING DESIGN—PABT II.—
The properties, use and treatment of materials of
construct ion in relation to designs
of
mechanisms and machines.
Steam boilers and their fittings.
The derivation and use of design formulae.
Lubrication,
Books tor reference:
Unwin—Engineering Design, P a r t I.
Unwin—Machine Design, Part I I .
Nouman—Principles of Machine Design.
Examination:
Honour: One paper—3 hours.
E N G I N E E R I N G SCIENCE.
ENGINEERING, PART I.—
Als set out for Graphics.
APPLIED ELASTICITY—
The elastic theory and laboratory work as set out
for Strength and Elasticity of Materials.
THEORY AND DESIGN OF MACHINES—
Selected sections of the work as prescribed for t h e
subjecte Mechanical Engineering P a r t I and
Engineering Deeign P a r t I .
PEOPFJRTIES OF MATERIALS—
The " P r o p e r t i e s of M a t e r i a l s " work as set out for
Strength and Elasticity of Materials, together with the details as set out for Properties of Metals P a r t I .
T H E O R Y ANT> DESIGN O P STRUCTURES—
As set out for Civil Engineering (with Design)
Part la.
F L U I D MECHANICS—
As set out for Hydraulic Engineering Part I together
with an introductory approach to Aerodynamics
ENGINEERING THERMODYNAMICS—
As set out for Mechanical Engineering P a r t I I , with
the exception of t h e work on Mechanics of
Flight.
A P P L I E D ELECTRICITY—
As set out for Electrical Engineering P a r t I .
ENGINEERING DESIGN—
Selected portions of the work as prescribed for t h e
subjects Engineering Design P a r t I and
Engineering Design P a r t I I .
Notes.
1. In each of the above subjects candidates may bo
examined on reading matter as prescribed by
the lecturers during the year.
2. .The dctaile of other subjecte included iu tho
course will be as set out under the heading
of " Engineering."
3. Students are ^trr)ngly advised to obtain avrrdved
practical experience during the vacations.
ENGINEERING.
949
ENGINEERING DESIGN, PABT H A . —
The lecture work in this subject will consist of tho
lectures in " Engineering Design P a r t I I . "
In addition, students are required to spend three hours
per week throughout the year iu the Drawing Office on the
preparation of designs.
GERMAN (Parts A and B) J „
,ê
un
*e.r
(. Faculty of Science.
GEOLOGY, PARTS I. and I I . (See under Science).
GEOLOGY, PART I. (Engineering Course).—
This course will be taken by Civil and Mining
Engineering students. I t includes all the work set out
under Geology Part 1. (see under Science; provided
that if a Civil Engineering candidate who enters for
Pass, attends, to the satisfaction ot the Professor of
Geology, the lectures on Palaeontology, he may be excused the questions in t h e examination, both Written
and Practical, in this portion of the work.
Candidates for Honours must do t h e full examination.
In addition it includes work on the geology of
huildiug stones and road metals, and geological considerations affecting the location of siles for dams, reservoirs, etc., provided t h a t if a Mining Engineering candidate attends to the satisfaction of the Professor of
Geology, the lectures in this additional work, he may
be excused the special examination on Building stones,
etc. (whether he enters for pass or for hononrs).
Students may be required in addition to attend a
special field excursion.
As for Geology P a r t I, plus a 2 hour paper at
Geology School in special work.
GEOLOGY, PART L (Metallurgy Course)—
Tho lectures in this course will be those for Geology
Part I. (see under Science), omitting Stratigraphy and
Palaeontology, and will be limited to the First and
Second Terms.
The practical work in this subject
will be two hours per week during three terms.
950
Examination Papers : —'- •
As for Geology Part 1, but pass candidates will omit
certain questions.
GRAPHICS—
Graphics, is now divided into three sections as below, the
first section consisting of descriptive lectures, designed to
give students a broad view ot tho evolution of Engineering
in ite various braaiclies, and for tho most part contrasting ancient and modern methods and apparatus,
(a) Engineering History
Surveying and Road Building.
Engineering progress during the Industrial Revo.
In tion.
The development of the steam engine. Boilers
and Turbines.
Ancient and modern locomotives.
Development of the petrol and gas engines.
The evolution of automobile design.
Early and modern windmills.
Water-wheels and turbines.
Sailing ships, steam ships, and aircraft.
Water storage and supply.
Drainage and sewerage disposal.
Bridges, ancient and modern.
Ancient and modern structures ot masonry, concrete and steel.
Building materials and technique; early stone
buildings compared with modern buildings.
Manufacturing ot iron and steel. Production of
light metals.
Mine surveying; shaft sinking. Mine ventilation
and mining tools.
Electric power.
Production, distribution and
utilisation. Applications of Electricity. Communication. Electrical Relays.
Fuel—solid, liquid and gaseous. Gas production.
Chemical Engineering.
Conveying and Elevating machinery.
Mechanical and separation apparatus.
Bulk Transport.
High pressure processes.
.ENGINEERING.
95 f
Engineering in the food industries.
Enginering in warfare.
Ancient and modern
fighting
machines.
Methods of fabricating metals in the workshop
and in the field.
New materials and methods ot construction. Use
of Plastics in Engineering.
Light alloys and alloy steels. Manufacture by
pressing.
(b) Graphics.
The theory and application of Graphic methods t o :
Statics. Determination of resultant and equilibrium of co-planar forces.
Area evaluation. Use of differential and integral
curves.
Ceniroid determination. Second moments, radiusof gyration. First and second moment areas
and their application. Theorem ot parallel
:
axes.
Bending moment, shear and t h r u s t diagrams for
cantilevers and simply supported beams under
stationary loads.
Lead analysis in statically determinate framed!
structures, method of sections.
Log scales. Alignment charts.
Representation of Statistical facts. .
(c) Geometrical Drawing.
Use and adjustment .of drawing instrumentsDrawing conventions re sheet sizes, lines,,
title blocks, lettering dimensioning, sections.
Plane curves. In general, constructions only will'
be given.
Problems relating to straight lines, circles; rectification of the arc.
Conic sections. Nomenclature. Principal properties of general conic. Elementary properties,,
construction of curve and tangents to parabola, ellipse and hyperbola.
Centre a.nd radius of curvature. Evolute.
Roulettes. Definition and construction of involute, cycloid, epicycloid, hypocycloid and7
trochoids. Spirals. Definition and construc69
952
tion of Archimedean and logarithmic. Sum
curve and helix.
Solid Ge6metry.
Principles of orthographic projection.
Nomenclature. Representation on a plane surface of points, lines and planes in space.
Projection of plane and solid figures on inclined planes.
Problems relating to the intersection of pianos
aud the determination ot true shapes of
figures on oblique planes.
Isometric. Oblique parallel and perspective projections.
Interpenetration of solids and development of
surfaces.
Examples relating to sections (b) and (c) are to be
carried out in the drawing office and submitted for examination as required.
Text-book:
Abbott—Practical
Graphics.
Geometry
and
Engineering
Books recommended for reference:
(b) Andrews—The Theory and Design of Structures.
Goodman—Mechanics Applied to Engineering.
Structures, P a r t I .
Lipka—Graphical and Mechanical Computation.
(c) Harrison and Baxandall—Practical Geometry
aud Graphics for Advanced Students.
Petty—Perspective.
Eagles—Constructive Geometry of Plane Curves.
Examination Papers:
Hononrs (2 papers)—each 3 hours.
HYDRAULIC E N G I N E E R I N G , PART I.—
Hydraulics: General principles; the flow of water
through orifices, over weirs and in pipes and
channels.
P u m p s : Theory, design and d e t a i l s - o f following
types:—reciprocating,
centrifugal,
Pulso-
ENGINEERING.
953
meter, Humphrey, hvdraulic rain jet, airlilt.
Hydraulic Prime Movers: Impulse and pressure
turbines.
Power Trunsniission and Appliances:
Hydraulic cranes, hoists, trausmission gears, dynamometers, meters.
Laboratory work to illustrate the foregoing.
T e x t Book .—
Addison—A Textbook ot Applied Hydraulics.
For reference:—
Gibson—Hydraulics and ite Applications.
Daugherty—Hydraulic Turbines.
Jamieson—An Introduction to Fluid Machanics.
Examination papers —
W r i t t e n : Honours (1 paper)—3 hours.
HYDRAULIC E N G I N E E R I N G . PART I I . —
Rainfall: Distribution, intensity, run-oft, evaporation, percolation.
Determination of waterway for bridges and culverts.
Rivers; Flood prevention, improvement and regulation.
Storage Reservoirs: Determination ot capacity ;
earthen, masonry, concrete and other dams;
outlet works, waste weirs; preservation of
catchments.
Channels and Pipe Linee: Offtake channels, sluice
gates, flumes, inverted siphons ; variable flow in
channels; cast iron, wrought iron, steel, wood
stave, and reinforced concrete pipe lines; air aud
scour valves; cleaning of pipe lines.
Service reservoirs, water towers, stand pipes.
Water Supply : Purification of water.
Reticulation.
Sewerage and Drainage: Sewerage of towns and
isolated buildings, drainage, separate and
combined systems, sewage treatment aud disposal. Refuse' destructors.
.! . i- t
I r r i g a t i o n : Conditions suitable,' duty of water,
' methods of application to land, barrages,
head-works, regulators, distribution systems.
J>9a
954
Hydroelectric Engineering: Turbine characteristics;
settings; conditions determining choice of
type of t u r b i n e ; speed regulation; s u r g e
tanks; water power schemes.
Pumping Plants.
Hydraulics.—
Addison—A Textbook of Applied Hydraulics.
Gibson—Hydraulics and its Applications.
W a t e r Supply.—
Wcgmann—The Conveyance and Distribution o t
Water.
Sewerage.—
Metcalfe amd Eddy—American Sewerage "Practice.
3 Vols.)
Thomson—Modern Sanitary
Engineering,
(i
Vols.).
Irrigation.—
Etchevorry—-Irrigation Practice and Engineering
(3 Vols.).
Davis aud Wilson—Irrigation Engineering.
Parker—The Control of Water.
Hanbury Brown—Irrigation.
Kanthack—Principles of Irrigation Engineering
Hydroelectric Engineering.—
Spannhake—Centrifugal
Pumps, Turbines a n d
Propellers.
Daugherty—Hydraulic Turbines.
Gibson—Hydroelectric Engineering: Vol. I.
Barrows—Water Power Engineering.
Proceedings of Engineering Societies and Journals, s»
quoted in Lectures.
Written (2 papers)—each 3 hours.
HYDRAULIC ENGINEERING, PART IIA.—
Rainfall: Distribution, intensity, run-off, evaporation, percolation.
>Storage Reservoirs: d e t e r m i n a t i o n .-of capacity;,
outlet works; waste-weirs.
ENGINEERING.
955
Channels and Pipe Lines: Off-take channels; sluice
gates; flumes; inverted siphons; pipe-lines;
Hydro-elcctrio Engineering; Turbine characteristics; settings; conditions governing choice of
type; speed regulation; surge tanks; water
power schemes.
Pumping Plants.
As for the corresponding portions of Hydraulic Engineering P a r t TI.
Written: As for the 1st
Engineering, P a r t I I .
paper in Hydraulic
MACHINE DESIGN—
Design as applied to mechanical undertakings with
special relation t o ;
Details of prime movers.
High speed internal combustion engine and turbines.
Design of bearings.
Mechanical and' hydraulic power transmissions.
Clutches.
Conveying machines.
Machine tools.
Cutting . tools.
Grinding machines.
Gauging.
J i g s and tool fixtures.
Mounting of machinery.
The lay-out of power plant, mills and machine
shops.
Pipes and pipe jointing.
The design of heat transmission appartus.
Welding design.
Design of joints for .pressure vessels.
Specifications and contracts.
Approved original designs and drawings with specifications aud estimates (together with a fair copy ot all
computations') are to be completed by the student and
956
submitted for examination, at such times during
year as may be notified.
Book and other references will be given.
the
. Examination papers:
Three papers, each 3 hours.
MACHINING (Theory and Practice).—
Machining as carried out in the Mechanical Workshop
including the correct methods of procedure to ensure
accuracy in the final work and the application of these to
ensure the economical production of mechanisms and
structures.
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING, P A R T I.—
Theory of machines and mechanisms; constrained
motion; kinematics of link mechanisms;
relative motion of parts of machines; displacement, velocity and acceleration
diagrams; approximate and theoretically correct straight line mechanisms and their application in machine tools, etc.
Measurement of indicated horse-power; indicators;
indicator r i g s ; measurement of brake horsepower; dynamometers, both absorption and
transmission.
Dynamics of reciprocating engines; turning effort
diagrams; effect of mass of piston and connecting rod; measurement of M.I. of engine
p a r t s ; dynamics of the fly-wheel.
Governing of engines; simple and loaded governors;
sensitivity and stability; isochronous governors; spring controlled governors; hunting;
friction and inertia effects.
The reciprocating steam engine; simple slide
valve; valve diagrams and their use; simple
valve gears; variable cut oft gears, with
valve diagrams; reversing gears; determina.
tion of equivalent eccentric, and effect of
" notching up " reversing gears.
The principle of simple turbines.
ENGINEERING.
957
Mechanical transmission of power; friction gearing;
belt drive and arrangement of pulleys; speed
cones; rope drive.
Tooth gearing and its
application; bevel gearing and ite application; theory of tooth forms; helical geari n g ; the principle of tooth generating machines; universal coupling, theory and application. Cams: general layout;
application
ot cams in engines and machine tools.
Machine tools; screw cutting l a t h e ; boring m i l l ;
radial drill;
shaping machine; planing
machine ; etc.
Ewing—The Steam Engine and other Heat Engines.
Low—Heat Engines.
Other references will be given by the lecturer.
Annual Examination Papers: —
Honour: (2 papers)—each 3 hours.
MECHANICAL E N G I N E E R I N G , P A R T I I . —
The properties of steam and gases; the ideal heat
engine; the Carnot cycle; the Stirling cycle;
the Rankine cycle; entropy; the temperature
entropy; diagram and its luses; tho total
heat-entropy diagram; the various ideal
cycles and actual cycles illustrated on these
diagrams.
General outline of steam plant and accessories.
Hypothetical steam engine indicator diagrams; calculation of M.E.P. and steam consumption;
effects of clearance, point of cutôft, and compression ; steam locomotive tractive effort.
Actual behaviour of steam iu the cylinder; cylinder condensation; the missing q u a n t i t y ;
methods of improving steam consumption;
compounding
of steam engines; use of
superheated steam.
The combustion of fuels; losses in boiler p l a n t s ;
boiler t e s t s ; CO* recorders.
Theory of steam jets; the steam t u r b i n e ; simple
and) compounded impulse types; reaction
<I58
,
types; velocity diagrams for the blades; use.
ful and axial thrusts; efficiencies.
Steam condensing plante and their auxiliaries.
Outline of steam power plant practice.
Internal combustion engines; the four-stroke and
two-stroke cycles; the constant volume cycle:
its use in petrol and gas engines; the car. burettor; application of the petrol engine t o
motor transport; oil engine cycles; compression ignition and other types of oil
engine;
fuels
for
internal
combustion
engines.
T h e suction gas producer and its theory.
Refrigerating plants and their operation;
the
thermodynamics of refrigeration.
Elementary theory of film lubrication.
Elemente of the mechanics of flight; the aeroplane,
its parts and general structure; control surfaces and their operation; aerodynamic forces
on the wings; stalling of the wings and
stalling speed. Forces on the aeroplane in
straight (light and in t u r n s ; outline of performance.
"Reference Books: —
Low—Heat Engines.
Ewing—The Steam Engine and Other Heat Engines.
Ewing—The Mechanical Production of Cold.
Kermode—The Mechanics of Flight.
Other references will he given by the Lecturer.
Written : Honour (2 papers)—each 3 hours.
MECHANICIAL
ENGINEERING,
PART H A . —
A course of practical work in the operation of steam
engines, internal combustion engines and boilers, extending over seventeen weeks. Students are recommended to attend the lectures on Aerodynamics given
i n t h e third term of the full course of Mechanical Engineering P a r t I I .
ENGINEERING.'
959
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING, PART I I I . —
Advanced mechanical engineering, including: —
The flow of air and its measurement; air compressors atod fans; -their characteristics;
methods of testing.
Modern internal combustion engines and their
fuels.
Modern practice in steam power plants.
Higher theory of internal combustion engines,
steam engines and steam turbines.
Tho balancing of engines and locomotives.
Aerodynamics: General consideration of the flight
of an aeroplane; the properties of wings and
wing theory; the air-screw and its characteristics; aeroplane performance and its calculation; aeroplane structures and aeroengines.
Heating and Ventilation: The physiological conditions for health and comfort; the conditioning and handling of ventilating air in
public buildings and factories; direct and indirect h e a t i n g ; pipe reticulation for steam
and water heating.
Industrial management and works economics.
Ricardo—The Internal Combustion Engine.
Pye—The Internal Combustion Engine.
Dal by—The Balancing of Engines.
Whitlock—Elementary Applied Aerodynamics.
Joseliu—Ventilation.
Examination P a p e r s : —
W r i t t e n : (4 papers)—each 3 hours.
METALS, P R O P E R T I E S OF, PART I.—
Structure and mechanical properties (static) of cast
irons and carbon steels, case hardening of
mild steel by carbon, and of special steels
by nitrogen; influence of such elements as
nickel, chromium and tungsten on the properties of steel; consideration of defects in
castings and in mechanically worked products.
960
DETAILS OF .SUBJECTS, 1933
Influence of heat treatment and of cold working
on the mechanical properties of metals and
alloys.
Mechanical properties of brasses, bronzes and light
alloys.
The application of the d a t a will be considered in
relationship to design.
Corrosion ot metals, elementary principles.
Text-Book: —
Greaves and Wrighton—Practical Microscopical
Metallography.
Barr and Honeyman—Steel and its Practical Applications.
Sherry—Steel-treating Practice.
Bullous—Steel and Its Heat Treatment, 4th ed.
Budgeu—Heat treatment of aluminium and its
alloys.
Doau—Principles of Physical Metallurgy.
Examination:—
Honours: 1 paper—3 hours.,
METALS, P R O P E R T I E S OF, PART FI.—
Structure and preperties of special engineering
alloys, such as those for resisting abrasion
and corrosion; dynamic properties of metals;
failure under repeated loading; theory of
fatigue; theory of corrosion; influence of
alternating stresses in conjunction with corrosive conditions; mechanical properties of
metals a t elevated temperatures; plastic deformation; creep characteristics of different
metals.
Practical work: Mechanical testing and micro
examination of steels and cast irons after
various treatments; determination of critical temperatures in metals by thermal
analysis and by thermal expansion.
Gough—The Fatigue of Metals.
Tapsell—Creep of Metals.
Monypenny—Stainless Steels.
ENGINEERING.
961
Speller—Corrosion of Metals.
Budgen—Heat Treatment of Aluminium and its
Alloys.
Written : (1 paper)—3 hours.
Practical—3 hours.
METALLOGRAPHY One lecture per week.
Crystalline nature of metals. Formation of crystalline aggregates and their properties. Effects of cold working on properties of metals.
Application of the phase rule to binary condensed systems. Solid solutions. Formation
of stable atomic groups. Phase changes in
the solid state and their connection with
heat treatment of alloys. Relationship between constitution and properties.
Considerations of the space lattices of metals and
alloys and application of X-ray analysis to
the study ot constitution.
Constitution and physical properties of copper and
aluminium and the more important binary
alloys:—brasses, bronzes, duralumin.
Ag»
hardening.
Practical work: Three hours per week. Hardness
determinations.
Thermal curves and determination of critical temperatures in metals
and alloys. Micro structures of metals. Effects of cold work and heat treatment.
Text books:—
Greaves and Wrighton—Practical Microscopical
Metallography.
Eosenhain—Introduction t o Physical Metallurgy,
3rd edn.; revised by Haughton.
Jeffries and Archer—The Science of Metals.
Hume Rothcry—.Structure of Metals and Alloys
(Institute of Metals, Monograph No. 1).
Doan—Principles of Physical Metallurgy.
Practical: One day.
962
METALLURGY, ELECTRO—
Fundamentals of electro-chemistry applied to metallurgical processes. The electro-metallurgy of
copper, zinc and aluminium. Corrosion of
metals.
Practical work : —
Measurement of electrode potentials, over-voltages, p H
-values and resistance of solutions under varying conditions.
Electro-deposition of metals.
Allmand and Ellingham—Applied Electro-Chemistry.
Thompson—Theoretical
and
Applied Electrochemistry.
Miiller—Laboratory Manual of Electro-chemistry.
Focrster—Ele trochemie Wasserige Losungen.
One Pass—3 hours.
^METALLURGY, KERROUS—
Principles and practice of blast furnace operations.
Steel making by the Bessemer, open hearth and
electric furnace processes, treated from a
physico-chemical point of view.
Effect of
casting conditions on' type of ingot.
Mechanical working of steel.
Clements- Blast Furnace Practice.
Harbord and Hall—Metallurgy of Steel.
Lister—Practical Steelmaking.
Pass—3 hours.
METALLURGY, PART I.—
Consideration of various branches ot Metallurgy
and review of Australian metallurgical industry. Application of phase rule to metallic
ENGlNEEUIM.i.
96i}.
systems; pyrometry; formation of..-ore bodies
and methods of mining and concentration;
metallurgy of gold and silver; introduction
to the study of fuels and refractory materials and slags.
Practical work: Preparation of drawings and flow'
sheets; elementary
physical
metallurgy;
simple tests and micro-examination of minerals; separation of minerals from mixtures;
dry and wet assaying.
Referenoe Books: —
Dean—Theoretical Metallurgy.
Butte—Metallurgical Problems.
Desoh—Metallography.
Fulton—Fire Assaying.
Hatch—Study of Ore Deposits.
Spurr—Geology Applied to Mining.
Ferry—Practical Pyrometry.
Hayward—Outline of Metallurgical Practice.
Rabone—Flotation P l a n t Practice.
Practical:—1 day.
METALLURGY, PART I I . —
Technology of fuels; metallurgy of lead, tin, copper, zinc and mercury; mineral constitution
of ores in relation to ore dressing.
Practical work: Assaying and analysis; physical
testing of fuels, oils and refractory materials;.
pyrometry; micro-examination of ores.
Austin—Metallurgy of the common metals.
Jiiptner—Heat Energy and Fuels.
Lord and Demorest—Metallurgical Analysis.
Farnham—Determination of Opaque Minerals-.
Le Chatelier—Le Chauffage Industricl.
Written : Pass and 1st Honour—3 hours.
Practical: —2 days.
964
METALLURGICAL ENGINEERING—Pinal Honours—
In addition to the details above, special reading of
original works will be notified. Tho practical examination
will occupy five days and will be in the nature of a
complete metallurgical problem.
MINERALOGY AND PETROLOGY—
This course will include the work in Crystallography,
Mineralogy and Petrology, set out under Geology
Part II.
Field Work.—Not less than five days will be spent in
the field.
W r i t t e n : Pass only as for Geology, P a r t I I , 1st
paper.
Practical: As for Geology, P a r t I I , 1st and 2nd
Papers.
MINING PART I—
The place of mining in industry. Review of the Australian mining and metallurgical enterprises. Methods
of formation of ore bodies. Mineral properties affecting extraction processes. Introduction to mining practice and economics.
Practical
work:
Introduction
to
concentration
methods; dry and wet assaying.
Reference books:—
Fulton—Fire Assaying.
Hatch—Study ot Ore Deposits.
Spun-—Geology Applied to Mining.
Hay ward—Outline of Metallurgical Practice,
Lewis—Elements of Mining.
; Hoover—Principles of Mining.
Practical: 1 day (with Metallurgy T).
ENGINEERING.
965
MINING PART II—
Location of ore bodies by surface examination, boring and
geophysical prospecting. Sampling aud valuation ot mineral properties. Development and working. Open cut and
underground methods. Support of mine workings. Rockbreaking appliances. Ventilation and hygiene. Economic
aspects of mining. Mining legislation. Administration.
Practical work—Cutting nnd assaying of ore samples.
Measurement of air flow. Determination ot dust contents
of air. Testing of rock-drills; heat-treatment of drillsteel. Tests on corrosion and abrasion resisting materials
used in mine equipment.
, Reference books :—
Imperial Geophysical Experimental Survey Report.
Y"oung—Elements of Mining.
Peele—Mining Engineers' Handbook.
Eaton—Practical Mine Development and Equipment.
Hoover—Economics of Mining.
Mitko—Mining Methods.
Thome and Hooke—Mining of Alluvial Deposits.
Watermeyer and Hoffenberg — Witwatersrand
Mining Practice.
Truscott—-Mine Economics.
Pass only: 2 Exam. Papers of 3 hours each.
MINING DESIGN—
Design as applied to mining undertakings. The layout
of mine workings.
Study of mine plans and records.
Calculation of quantities and values. Design of mining
appliances.
'Designs and drawings with specifications and estimates
are to be completed by the student and submitted for
examination a t such times during the year as may be
notified.
-. Reference book:—
Staley—Mine Plant Design.
966
MINING GEOLOGY.—
(See .details of Mining
Geology, P a r t I I I . ) .
Geology,
under
Science,
Field Work.—There will be one week-end excursion.
Exam ination Papers: —
W r i t t e n : Pass only, as for Geology I I I ,
paper.
Practical: As for Geology I I I , 4th Paper.
M I X E D MATHEMATICS, PARTS I , I I and I I I .
under Faculty of Arts.)
3rd
(See
MIXED
MATHEMATICS, PART I I . (Engineering
Course)—
Candidates take the work dealt with in the first two
terms of the full course, viz: The Statics and the more
elementary portions of the Particle-Dynamics and of the
Rigid-Dynamics.
(For further details see under Faculty of Arts).
Examination: —
Written : (1 paper)—3 hours.
NATURAL PHILOSOPHY, PART I (See under Faculty
of Science).
Long Vacation Reading in Preparation for Natural
Philosophy Part fl (Engineering course)—
Descriptive and experimental parts of—
Roberts—Heat.
Grimsehl—Electricity,
NATURAL PHILOSOPHY, PART I I . (Engineering
Course) —
Properties of matter.
Heat.
(As in Natural Philosophy, P a r t II., Science
Course).
ENGINEERING.
967"
LABORATOBT W O R K
In the Physical Laboratory four hours a week.
Text-books:—
Worthington—Dynamics of Rotation.
Poynting and Thomson—Properties ot Matter,
(selected portions).
Roberts—Heat and Thermodynamics.
Poynting and Thomson—Heat. (Selected p o r tions).
Ezer Griffiths—Measurement
of
Temperature(Selected portions).
Starling—Magnetism and Electricity.
Practical Physics, Part II.—Staff of Department,
Books of reference :—
Glazebrook—Dictionary of Applied Physics,
Eiamination P a p e r s : —
Written : (2 papers)—each 3 hours.
NATURAL PHILOSOPHY, PART
under Faculty ot Science).
IL—Honours.
(See-
ORB DRESSING—
Economic and metallurgical aspects of concentration and leaching; crushing and grinding
machines and circuits; principles of classification, gravity concentration and
flotat i o n ; mill flow sheets; flotation and leaching
practice in detail.
Practical work: Gravity concentration.
Leaching
teste on gold and on copper ores; flotation,
concentration; mill control tests.
Reference books :—
Flotation Practice—American Institute of Mining
and Metallurgical Engineers.
Taggart—Handbook of Ore Dressing.
Gaudin—Flotation.
Milling Methods. Amer. Inst. Min. and M e t .
Eng., 1930 and 1934.
60
0,(58
Rabone—Flotation P l a n t Practice.
Miller—Crushers for Stone and Ore.
Dorr—Cyanidation and Concentration of Gold and
Silver Ores.
W r i t t e n : (1 paper)—3 hours.
P U R E MATHEMATICS, Parte I., I I . and I I I .
under Faculty of Arts).
(See
STRELNGTH AND ELASTICITY OF MATERIALS—
Elastic Theory (2 lectures per week).
The general theory of the elastic behaviour of
Engineering materials under simple and
combined stresses.
Modulae of Elasticity.
Resilience.
Principal stresses and strains.
Theory of failure.
Mathematical investigations of the stresses, strains
and deflections present in beams and cantilevers under bending; circular tubes and
cylinders under torsion; helical and leaf
springs, struts; thin and thick cylinders
under internal pressure.
Problems of instability, including long columns
under axial and non-axial loading, and thin
• cylinders under external pressure.
Metals:
General description ot metals used in engineering
construction ; origin of defects found in metals ;
pipe eavaties; blowholes; segregation; soldification et metals and alloys; elementary considerations of inicrostrueture,
manufacture,
mechanical properties and structure of cast iron,
and steel. Effects of cold deformation ; properties of brasses, bronzes, bearing metals, and
duralumin.
Concrete : . . ' • . . •
Manufacture of cements; mixing of concrete;
properties of concrete;:.calculation ot stresses
• "• ••
.
in reinforced ..concrete beams; properties of
mortar.
. i' . T .' -
ENGINEERING.
969
Timber:
Properties and testing of timber.
Practical work: 3 hours per week.
Demonstrations will bo given in t h e Testing Laborat o r y to illustrate the behaviour of engineering materials when subjected to various types of loading.
Text-book:
Salmon—Materials and Structures, Vol. I (Elasticity and Strength of Materials).
Barr and Houeymau—Steel and its practical application.
Reference-books:
Morley—Strength of Materials.
Case—Strength of Materials.
Boyd—Strength of Materials.
Bateon and Hyde—Mechanical Testing.
Examination P a p e r s :
W r i t t e n : Honour (2 papers)—each 3 hours.
SURVEYING, PAKT 1.—
Principles bf construction, adjustment, and use of the
surveying instruments—steel band, clinometer, compass, barometer, level, theodolite, sextant,
plane
table aud tacheometer.
Chain surveying.
Ranging
ot straight lines. Spirit and barometric levelling. Measurement of angles. Traversing. Survey and subdivision of
land. Re-determination of boundaries. Titles Office surveys,
including written descriptions of boundaries. Reduction
of traverses with adjustment ot discrepancies.
Areas,
including such as have curved and irregular boundaries.
Measurement and setting out of earthwork.
Plotting
from field notes and co-ordinates. Setting out curves,
elementary curve problems. Topographical surveys.
A short course of lectures will also be given on
Spherical Trigonometry and Rlemcntary Astronomy, for
all candidates proceeding to Surveying, P a r t I I .
NOTE.—Candidates are required to submit plan and field
notes ot a survey; reduced notes and drawing of a level
section, and specimens of lettering, drawings and tracings
atf required by the Lecturer:
«0a
970
Text-book: —
Clark—Plane and Geodetic Surveying
gineers, Vol. I .
for
En-
Annual Examination P a p e r s : —
SURVEYING, PAKT IL—
Determination of latitude, azimuth, time and longitudewith the use ot ephemerides.
Calculation of probable error by method of least
squares.
Harder curve problems.
Trial and permanent surveys for engineering works
Selection of roads and railroads in flat, u n d u l a ting and mountainous country. Determination
of gradients.
Underground surveying ; connection aud reduction of
bearings to datum of surface survey; the survey of vertical and inclined shafts, drives and
workings ; mineral veins, lodes, leads, and drifts,
with the measurement of ore bodies.
Introduction to geodetic surveying. Location o f
stations, location and measurement of baselines,
measurement of angles.
Spherical excess,,
computation of sides, latitudes, longitudes and
azimuths.
Adjustment of angles in simple,
figures.
Measurement of heights.
Precise levelling and traversing.
Radii of curvature of the geodetic surface.
Plotting from air photographs.
Map projections.
Route traversing by mid-latitude method, a n d b y
Mercator's method.
nydrographic surveying with tide gauging, and preparation of charts.
NOTE.—Candidates are required to produce plan and fiel d.
notes of au original traverse and subdivisional survey, an d'.
a topographical contour map of the area surveyed durin g:
the summer camp to the satisfaction of the Lecturer.
ENGINEK1NG.
971
Text-books: —
Chapman—Astronomy for Surveyors.
Clark—Plane aud Goedetic Surveying for Engineers, Vol. I I .
•Books for Reference: —
Nautical Almanac.
Merriman—Precise Surveying and Geodesy.
Hinks—Map Projection.
Durham—Mine Surveying.
Hotine—Simple Methods of Surveying from Air
Photographs.
TOWN PLANNING.—
A study of the physical, economic, and social conditions of towns and of the predominant
character and needs ot the various districts.
Development of a street plan with regard to contour, drainage, grade, economy of construction, local and through traffic, subdivision
ot land, building facilities, landscape architecture.
'The economic factors determining the width of
streets—traffic,
cost of construction
and
maintenance, air and light, building linos.
Public amenities, educational, recreational, social.
The selection of sites for public and semipnblio buildings, parks, gardens, playing
fields.
The growth of towns aud cities—comparison [of
ordered with disordered growth, preplanning
with replanning. Replanning problems.
The selection of sites for new towns.
The utilisation of waste and barren lands.
Transportation—The functions and inter-relation of
ports, railways, roads, and canals as units
in a transportation system. Alternative situations for warehouses. Combined and separate warehouses and transit sheds. Railway
assembly yards.
Railway and
tramway
passenger transportation.
972
Note: Students will execute such designs iu theDrawing office as the Lecturer may direct, and attend
visits and submit reports and designs in connection
therewith as required.
Books for reference .-—
Raymond Unwin—Town Planning in Practice.
Suliuan—Town Planning in Australia.
Thompson—Site Planning in Practice.
Purdom—The liuilding of Satellite Towns.
Adams—Recent Advances in Town Planning.
Written: (1 pa.per)—3 hours.
WORKS PRACTICE—
The p a r t of Mechanical Engineering, P a r t I I I , dealing with Industrial Management and Works.
Economics.
Written: (as tor Mechanical Engineering Part I I I
1st Paper).
RECOMMENDATIONS
AND ANNOUNCEMENTS.
REQUIREMENTS AS TO WORK.
J. Lectures in Engineering coiiinicnce on the 10th
Monday of the year. Engineering Students are required to devote the first week of the first term beforethe commencement of lectures to Office work at theEngineering School. This will consist in the case of first
year students in Draughting, in the case of second year
Students in Engineering Design. Third year Studentsshall compute and plot the work ot the University Survey
Camp.
2. Throughout tho couise. Students are required to be in
attendance during the hours notified on the Time Table,
and shall not absent themselves from Drawing Office,
Laboratory, Field work or Excursions except with the
express permission of the Lecturer or Demonstrator in
ENGINEERING.
973'
charge. They shall keep note books, calculation books,
and reports fully and neatly, and shall conduct themselves
as if they were doing responsible Engineering work. No
Student will be admitted to Examination unless his
work and reports be approved by the Lecturer concerned, or unless he produce a written Certificate
showing t h a t he has fulfilled this condition as to Office
work, iu some Office approved by the Dean.
The Dean may grant remission in the case of illness or
for other sufficient reason.
UNIVERSITY SURVEY CAMP.
3. A University survey camp is arranged in J a n u a r y
or February a t a site selected by the Lecturer in Surveying, to enable studente to obtain the practical experience required under Section 9b, Regulation XX„
Chapter I I I .
Three weeks aro devoted to practising
the various operations of land and engineering surveying under the direction of the Lecturer.
Three
weeks' •ffioe work is required to be done in oonneotion
with the surveys made. Students who have not obtained the requisite experience under a competent surveyor must attend a t least one University survey oamp
and do the office work in connection therewith; students from other Universities and the recognised
Technical Schools may be admitted by the Lecturer.
Members of the camp defray their own travelling
and camp expenses*. The Uuiversity provides the instruments used and a limited number ot tents. A meeting of
intending members is called during t h e second or third
term to elect a student camp committee which is
responsible to the Lecturer for arranging details of
transport, commissariat, etc. All intending members must
be approved by the Lecturer before admission and each
must pay to the committee, at least seven days before the
end of the third term, a contribution for camp expenses,
about £o usually, and also an amount, about £ 1 to cover
the cost of transport and repairs and renewals of equipment.
If these fees are not paid by the due date admittance to
camp may be refused.
PRACTICAL WORK.
4. Various Government and other Engineering Departments have generously made i t possible for a
<)74
DETAILS OF SUBJECTS. 1938
limited number of studente who have completed their
third year to obtain not less than 5 weeks' practical
•experience in their employ.
Any student wishing
to take advantage of this should notify tho Dean of the
Faoulty of Engineering during the second week of the
third term, in order t h a t the Dean may, at his discretion,
make the necessary arrangements.
Excursions are held from time to time during the year in
•connection with certain subjects of the course. In Civil and
Hydraulic Engineering, Farts I and I I , excursions are
usually held during the first days ot the first vacation and
.at any other times which may be notified.
All Fourth Yrear Students in Electrical Engineering
are required to attend classes in the mechanical workshops for a period of 2 weeks during the Second Vacation.
Any Student having obtained the necessary experience elsewhere may be exempted by the Dean.
LAND SURVEYOR'S EXPERIENCE.
o. Civil and Mining Engineering students who intend to
acquire the Land Surveyor's Certificate are required to
have passed the examinations for degree of B.C.E. or
B.M.E., and to obtain not less than eighteen mouths'
•experience in the practice of Land Surveying under
•qualified Land Surveyors. Special arrangements have
been entered into between the Lands Department of
Victoria and the University, by which students
who have passed in Surveying Parts 1 and II may,
if circumstances permit, obtain the necessary Field
Experience under the Lands Department by interpolating
15 months ot such work between the 3rd and 4th years
of their course, i.e. 2 long vacations and 1 academic year.
Only such students as intend to acquire the Land Surveyor's
•Certificate may be taken by the Lands Department.
Any Student wishing to take advantage of these arrangements should notify the Dean of the Faculty of Engineering
of his desire during the second week of the third term
of his third year, to enable the Dean to make the
•necessary arrangements with the Lands Department.
ENGINEERING.
975
AMBULANCE CLASSES.
6, Classes for instruction in Ambulance Work (First Aid
t o the Injured) will be held during the second term if
there is a sufficient number of entries. The Classes will
include five lectures and demonstrations in First Aid
to the Injured, aud two lectures on ludustrial Hygiene,
Industrial Hazards (accident and disease) and their
prevention. Fee, 10s. 6d. E n t r y must be made before
tho end of the first term on a separate Enrolment Card.
Mniing Engineering students are advised to take a full
St. John's Ambulance Course in view of the requirements
for the Mine Manager's Certificate.
DETAILS FOR PINAL HONOURS.
The examination for Final Honours may include all work
prescribed for the specified subjects.
REPORT FOR MASTER'S DEGREE.
Reports, theses and designs must reach the Registrar's
•office a t least four weeks before the date set down as the
last day of entry for degrees.
FACULTY OF LAW.
DETAILS OF SUBJECTS
AND
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR THE ANNUAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY EXAMINATIONS TO HE HELD IN
T H E FOURTH TERM, 1938.
For Arts Subjects of the course, including Constitutional
and Legal History, see Details under Arts.
Lecture Syllabuses.
• In all the following subjecte the lecturers have prepared, and issued to students, an extended syllabus
of the lectures, showing the course in detail, and setting out the reading to be pursued, and the references
to text-books, cases and statutes made by the lecturers. Studente who desire to obtain these must present to the Secretary of the Law School an order from
the Registrar's Office. Applications may be made,.in
person or by post.
An additional fee of 5/- for each subject, is payable for
the Syllabus. This fee is payable with the lecture fees ot
the first term.
Examination /'apers.
I n each of the following subjects the examination will
consist of one 3-hour paper for Pass and (in the appropriate
subjects) one for Honours. Students sitting for Honours
are not required to take the Pass paper.
CONSTITUTIONAL LAW, P A R T I.*—
Before lectures commence students should read carefully:—
Dicey—Law of the Constitution.
An informal test of students' knowledge of this book
will be held during the first week of term.
•This subject includes the subject .formerly called Administrative Law.
LAWS.
977
This subject comprises:
(a) A general study of the structure and functions
of the organs of government in the British
constitutional system.
(b) A special study of the legal position and functions of the administration.
The text-books recommended a r e :
For (a)
Dicey—Law of the Constitution.
Jennings—The Law and the Constitution.
Keir and Lawson—Cases on Constitutional Law.
For (b)
Robson—Justice and Administrative Law.
Report of the Committee on Ministers' Powers
(1932), Cmd. 4060.
Reference to additional works will be made in class,
more particularly to—
Keith—Introduction
to British
Constitutional
Law.
Port—Administrative Law.
Roh'ison—Public Authorities and Legal Liability.
Allen—Bureaucracy Triumphant.
CONSTITUTIONAL LAW, PART II.*—
Before lectures commence studente should read carefully:—
Wheare—I'he Statute of Westminster.
Studies in the Australian Constitution, chaps. 1-B.
An informal test of students' knowledge of t h i s
material will be held during the first week ot term.
(a) A study of the constitntii-nal law of the
British Commonwealth of Nations.
(b) A special study ot the constitution of the Commonwealth of Australia, and its judicial interpretation.
For (a) the text-books recomended a r e :
Keith—Th» Constitutional Law ot the British
Dominions.
•Thia subject includes the subject formerly called Constitution of theCommonwealth of Australia,
-978
Keith—Speeches and Documents on the British
Dominions (1918-1931).
For (b) no text-book is prescribed, but extensive reference will be made iu class to—
Wynes—Legislative and Executive Powers in Australia.
Report of the Royal Commission on the Commonwealth Constitution (1929).
In both sections of the course reference to additional
works will be made in class.
CONTRACT AND PERSONAL PROPERTY, THE LAW
OP—
Before the commencement of tho course of Lectures
• students should make themselves generally familiar with
the matters dealt with in pages 1 to 8 of the printed notes
. and should make a close study of the matters dealt with in
pages 8 to 12 thereof.
Definition of Contract; Formation of Contract
(including the principles governing Offer
and
Acceptance,
Form,
Consideration,
Capacity of Parties, Reality of Consent, and
Illegality); Operation of Contract; Interpretation, and Discharge of Cum ract; Remedies
for Broach of Contract; Agency in relation to
Contract.
Distinction between Real and Personal Property; Classifications of Personal Property;Choses in Action and their Assignment;
Negotiable Instruments; Choses in Possession and their Ownership; Cases of Qualified Ownership; Acquisition of Ownership
by alienation, devolution and otherwise.
A special studv of the Victorian Goods Act
1928, Parts"' I , TJ, and I I I , and the Commonwealth Bills of Exchange Act 1909-32,
aud the Victorian Instruments Act 1928, P a r t s
VI. VII, V I I I and I X .
'Textbook: —
Anson—Principles of the English Law of Contract.
LAWS.
979.
For reference: —
Joshua Williams—Principles of the Law of P e r sonal Property.
Coppel—Law Relating to Bills of Sale.
Reports of a largo number of cases referred to in Ansoui
and in lectures will bo found in Miles and
Brierly's Cases on the Law ot Contracts.
Additional for Honours.
An advanced study of the Pass Work,
EQUITY—
P r i o r to the commencement of Lectures studente araexpected to read Ashburner on Equity (2nd Ed.), p p .
1-69.
The course comprises: —
1. Private Trusts: their creation and classification.
2. Charitable Trusts.
3. Administration ot Trusts.
4. Administration of the Estates of Deceased.
Persons.
i>. Equitable doctrines: Satisfaction,
Ademption,.
Conversion, Election and Injunctions,
(i. Equitable Defences.
7. Bankruptcy Law.
8. Company Law.
Items 3, i, 7 and b will constitute the major p a r t ;
of tho course.
Students should read Maitland on Equity, and the
following works should be referred to upon t h e topicstreated in the course: —
Underbill—Law of Trusts and Trustees.
Hanbury—Modern Equity.
Ashburner—Equity.
Studente should provide themselves with copies of"
t h e following Acts, which will be used in Leotures: —
Bankruptcy Act, 1924; Companies Act, 1928; TrusteeAct, 1928; Administration and Probate Act, 1928.
0,80
JURISPRUDENCE, PART I.»—
Vacation Reading.—
Before lectures commence, students should read carefully.-,
.
Pollock—First Rook of Jurisprudence.
An informal test of students' knowledge of this book will
be held during the first week of term.
This subject comprises: —
(a) Elementary legal concepts.
(b) The sources of law, custom, precedent, statute.
Vinogradoff—Common Sense in Law.
Holdsworth—Sources and Literature of English
Law.
Allen—Law in the Making (2nd edition).
Pollock—First Book of Jurisprudence.
Reference should be made t o : —
Salmond—Jurisprudence (as referred to in lectures).
Keeton—Jurisprudence.
F u r t h e r references will be given by the lecturer.
A class for Honour studente is held, a t which »
special course of reading is prescribed.
J U R I S P R U D E N C E , PART I I . —
Vacation Reading.—Before lectures commence students
should read carefully;.—
Salmond—Jurisprudence.
The course comprises—
(a) The nature and definition of law: law and the
s t a t e : law and justice: the end of law.
(b) Fundamental juristic conceptions—personality.
legal rights and duties, obligation, property.
'(c) Divisions . of the law,
'This subject takes the place of "Sources and Historj of English
and Australian Law.''
LAWS. .
981
Text-books.—A thorough knowledge of the following
books will be presumed, and the lectures will be in the
nature of a supplement to, and a criticism of them.
Allen—Law in the Making.
Salmond—Jurisprudence.
Holmes—The Common Law.
Maine—Ancient Law.
The following should be referred to, ae indicated
by the lecturer: —
Goodhart—Essays in Jurisprudence
and
the
Common Law.
Pound—Interpretations of Legal History.
Diamond—Primitive Law.
Maine—Ancient Law.
Allen—Legal Duties.
Modern Theories of Law (London School of Economics).
Pound—Introduction to Legal Philosophy.
Robson—Civilisation and the Growth of Law.
F u r t h e r references will be given by t h e lecturer.
iPRIVATE INTERNATIONAL LAW—
Studente are recommended to read the introduction
to Dicey, (pp. 1-49) before commencing lectures. This will
provide a complete introduction, and explain the nature and
scope of the subject to be studied.
Text-books: —
G. C. Cheshire—Private International
Law
(O.U.P.).
For reference: —
Dicey—Conflict of Laws, Sth ed.
Westlake—Private International Law, 7th ed.
PROCEDURE AND EVIDENCE, THE LAW OF—
General Principles of the Law of Evidence.
Civil Procedure in the Supreme Court.
Civil Procedure in the High Court relating to
Appeals from the Supreme Court.
Criminal Procedure— Procedure before Magistrates in and out of
Sessions.
•" : '-- Proceedings by Presentment and in a- Criminal
Trial.
982
The Victorian and Commonwealth Statutes and Rules of
Court which refer to these subjects will be dealt with by
the Lecturer.
Text-books: —
Cockle—Leading Cases and Statutes on the Law
of Evidence.
Blake Odgers—Principles of Pleading and P r a c tice.
PROPERTY IN LAND AND CONVEYANCING, TH!
LAW OF—
Before lectures commence students should read carefully—
Holdsworth—Historical Introduction to the Land
Law.
An informal test ot students' knowledge of this book will
be held during the first week of term.
Legal Estates and Interests in Land considered with
regard to their nature, commencement, duration
and enjoyment.
Equitable Estates aud Interests in Land, with
especial referenoe to their destruction and
to their priority in relation to other estatesand interests, legal or equitable.
Assurances by way ot purchase, including leases and
assignments of leases; assurances by way of
settlement, assurances by way ot mortgage, aud
assurances by will.
Contracts of Sale of Land.
The rights of creditors against the property of their
debtors, not including the rights of the creditors of deceased persons against estates in the
hands ot executors or administrators, or the
rights ot the creditors of insolvents against
estates in the hands of assignees or trustees
or the rights of creditors in the liquidation of
companies.
For information upon these topics Students are referred
to the following text books and Statutes:—
LAWS.
98$
•Holdsworth—Historical Introduction to the Land
Law.
•Joshua Williams—Real Property, 23rd edition (or
eaiiier edition), except ch. 9 of Part 1; ch. 5 of
Part II, Part I I I , and P a r t VII.)
•Maitland—Equity.
•Deane and Spurling—Elements of Conveyancing
with Precedents
Leake—Digest ot the Law of Property iu Land, ch. 1,
3 and 4 of Part I ; P a r t II, ch. 1, ch. 2, sections 1, 2, 3, 4 (i), 5, 6 (i).
Leake—Uses and Profits of Land, except ch. 6, 9,
10, sec. 2, 11, 12 ot Part T; sect. 3 of ch. 3 ; ch.
4 of Part IT.
Supreme Court Act 192S. Parts VI, VII, Divisions
1, 5 and 6.
Transfer of Land Act 1928.
Settled Land Act 192S.
And other Statutes as referred to in Lectures.
Additinnal for Honours.
Leake—Digest of the Law of Property in Land.
Parts I, I I , except ch. 2 ot Part I.
Special Study of Covenants affecting Land.
A Special Study of tlio cases referred to in lectures.
P U B L I C INTERNATIONAL LAW—
(a) A study of the nature, sources, and history of
Public International Law.
(b) A study of the rules regarded by States aa
legally binding in their relations in time of
peace, and of the institutions by which such
rules are created, interpreted and maintained.
Text-books recommended :—
Brierly—The Law of Nations.
(For preliminary reading.)
Oppenheim—International Law, Vol. I (4th ed.).
*Stndetit.s should obtain these books.
984
Cases may be studied in
P i t t Cobbett—Cases on International Law.
Dickinson—Cases and Opinions in International
Law.
McNair and Lauterpacht—Annual Digest of International Law Cases.
•Reference to additional works will be made in class,
more particularly t o : —
Lauterpacht—The Function of Law in the International Community.
—Private Law Sources and Analogies
of International Law.
—The Development of International
Law.
Proceedings of the Australian and New Zealand
Society of International Law, Vol. I .
ROMAN LAW—
Vacation Reading
Before lectures commence studente should read Sohm, sections 1-28; Hunter's Introduction to Roman Law (9th ed.), by Lawson.
An informal test of students' knowledge will be held
d u r i n g the first week of t e r m .
The main principles of Roman law, with special
reference to the law of contract and of
delict: the history in outline of its development and its influence on modern legal
systems.
Detailed references will be given by the lecturer.
Text-Books: —
Vinogradoff—Roman Law in Mediaeval Europe.
Leage—Roman Private Law (2nd Ed., by Ziegler).
Jolowioz—Historical Introduction to Roman Law.
For Reference: —
Buckland—Manual of Roman Law.
Buckland—Main Institutions of Roman Law.
Institutes of Gaius. (Ed. Poste.)
Institutes of Justinian.
LAWS.
985
Buckland and McNair—Roman Law and Common
Law
,
Digest of Justinian.
Zulueta—Dig. 41.1 and 41.2.
Thayer—Dig. 9.2.
Monro—Dig. 47.2, De Furtis.
Moyle—Contract of Sale in the Civil Law.
Oachard—French Civil Code.
WRONGS, T H E LAW OP—
Vacation Reading.—Before lectures commence students
sliould read carefully :—
Kenny—Outlines ot Criminal Law, Books I and I I .
An informal test of students' knowledge of this work will
bo hold during the first week of term.
This subject comprises :
Criminal Law.
The Law of Torts.
The Victorian and Commonwealth Statutes which refer
t o these subjects will be dealt with by the Lecturer.
Text-Books recommended: —
Kenny—Outlines of Criminal Law, Books I a»d
n.
Kenny—Cases on Criminal Law (Sth edition, by
cE. Garth Moore).
Salmond—Law of Torts (193b).
And for reference :—
Pollock—Law ot Torts.
Further references will be given by the lecturer.
A class for Honour students is held, a t which a
special course of reading is prescribed.
61a
986
DETAILS OF SUBJECTS FOE FINAL HONOURS I N
LAWS AT T H E EXAMINATION TO BE HELD
IN F E B R U A R Y , 1938.
By virtue ot the power conferred by Chapter I I I . Reg. XI.
Section 7, the Faoulty of Law directs that tho Final Honour
Examination which would otherwise be held in February,.
1938, shall be held as to the subjects of Equity, Jurisprudence P a r t IT, and Private International Law, at
the same time as the Annual Examination, 1937.
Note.—In all cases wheie special subjects are prescribed
oandidates are expected to make a particular study of thocases on t h a t subject dealt with in lectures.
CONSTITUTIONAL LAW—
There will be a general paper, requiring an advanced,
study of the main features of work prescribed in Constitutional Law P a r t s I and I I .
CONTRACT AND PERSONAL PROPERTY, THE:
LAW OF.
An advanced study of the Pass and Honour work.
The work should include a thorough study of the
authorities (English and Australian) referred to in Anson
or in lectures.
Honour students are recommended to read Salmondand Winfield on Contracts.
EQUITY—
The Examination in this subject will be on an advancedstudy of the work prescribed for tho Pass Examination.
J U R I S P R U D E N C E PART I I .
A special class for honours candidates will be held at
which a special course of reading will be prescribed.
LEGAL HISTORY—
(a) An outline study of English legal history, i n cluding the history of the judicial system.
LAWS
987
Plucknett—Concise
History of
the
Common
Law, or
Potter—History of English Law and its Institutions.
Holdsworth—History of English Law, Vol. I.
Fifoot—English Law and Ite Background.
(b) A more detailed study of the history of tho
chancery and of equity, as dealt with in
Holdsworth, History ot English Law.
PR1VATH INTERNATIONAL
LAW.—
The Examination in this subject will be on an advanced
study of t h e work prescribed for the Pass Examination.
PROPERTY I N LAND AND CONVEYANCING, T H E
LAW OF.—
An advanced study of the Pass and Honour work
prescribed for the annual examination. Special attention should be given to authorities referred to.
WRONGS, T H E LAW OF—
The examination in this subject will be on an advanced study of the work prescribed for the Pas*
examination.
Candidates should note the special references for
Honours students given in the Pass lectures. A special
class will be held for Honours Students at which a course
ot reading will be prescribed.
FACULTY OF MEDICINE.
FOR THE ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS TO BE
HELD IN 1938, AND F I R S T TERM, 1939.
FIRST YEAR.
BOTANY (Medical Course)—
Plant cell and comparison with animal cell. Growth
and division of plant cells. Turgidity, plasmolysis.
Osmotic pressure.
Permeability and
semi-permeability.
Chief types of plant cell. Cell-contents. Changes
in cell-wall. Cork, lignin, wood fibre.
The storage food materials of plants. Starch, cellulose,
cane-sugar, glucose, levnlose, inulin, oil, fat,
amides, proteins.
Distribution of these food materials iu chief types ot
seeds (pea, maize, wheat, castor-oil), vegetables
(carrot, potato) and fruits (apple, banana).
The mode of nutrition ot plants. Dependence of
animals on plants tor food and energy.
Respiration and transpiration in plants.
Influence
of plants on air.
A typical bacterium.
Lite history and structure.
Types, shape and structure in bacteria generally.
Beneficial and injurious bacteria. Root-tubercle
bacteria.
Yeast. Structure and life history. Beer yeast and
wine yeast. Alcoholic fermentation.
Zymase
and plant enzymes.
Typos ot fungi. Structure and reproduction. Mucor
and mucor yeast. Penicillium. Green mould.
Aspergillus- Black or brown mould.
Pungi
causing disease in animals.
For Honours.
Primary and secondary structure of stem.
growth.
Secondary
MEDIOTNB.
989
Structure and function of wood. Healing of wounds.
Grafts and grafting.
The phylogenetic origin of the flower as evidenced by
Pteridium and Selaginella.
The flower and development ot the ovule.
Pollination and development of the seed.
Heredity.
Laboratory Work.—
Cell, cell contents, cell-tissues. Bacteria, Yeast and
Fungi.
In addition to the requirements for Zoology, students
will require a flat ground razor.
Text Book:
Godwin—Plant Biology.
Lowson or Fritsch and Salisbury—Text-book ot Botany
W. O. James—Plant Physiology.
»
Examination: —
Pass and Honour: One 3-hour paper, written.
One 3-hour, practical.
Honour : One 3 hour mixed (written and practical).
CHEM1STRV (Medical Course) —
Long Vacation Reading in preparation for Chemistry
(Medical Course): —
Philip—Physical Chemistry and its Bearing on
Biology and Medicine.
A knowledge of chemietry up to the Intermediate
Certificate Examination will be assumed. The course
ot study will include the following topics: —
Physical Chemistry—.
Atomic and Molecular Theory.—Weight relations
in chemical reactions; the atomic theory,
the atom and the molecule; the determination of molecular weights, formulae and
atomic weights; chemical equations.
990
•
DETAILS OF-SUBJECTS, 1U3S.
The Properties of Gases.—The laws of Boyle and
Charles, and a qualitative introduction to
the kinetic theory ot gases; Gay-Lussac's law
of combining
gas volumes;
Avogadro's
Hypothesis; the molecular weights of gases;
t h e equation of state—PV —nRT; Dalton's
law of partial pressures; the rate of gaseous
diffusion; deviations from the simple gas
laws and the Van der Waals equation; the
ideal gas.
The Properties of Liquids and Solids.—Vapour
pressure and ite kinetic interpretation; the
critical temperature; simple phase relations
in the one-component system solid-liquidgas.
Solutions-—Solutions of gases in liquids, Henrv's
law; liquid-liquid solutions, conjugate solutions, critical solution temperature; solutions
of solids in liquids, saturated and supersaturated solutions, simple phase diagrams of
two-component systems.
The colligative properties of dilute solutions and
the molecular weights of dissolved substances—the lowering of vapour pressure and
freezing point, the elevation of boiling point,
osmotic pressure and their inter-relation; abnormal molecular weights in solution and
their interpretation.
Electrochemistry.—Simple phenomena
of electrolysis; Faraday's laws; the ionic theory; ionic
interpretation
of acids, bases and salts;
chemical equations in ionic form; electromotive force and simple chemical applications; the measurement of hydrogen ion concentration.
Chemical Kinetics-—The rate of chemical reactions, and t h e effect on rate of concentration,
temperature and catalysts; the law ot mass
action.
Chemical Eg"ilibrium,.—The equilibrium constant;
the law of van't Hoff and the principle of
Le Chatelier; ionic equilibria; qualitative
treatment of strong and weak electrolytes,
hydrolysis, buffer solutions, solubility pro-
MEDICINE.
991
d u c t ; hydrogen ion concentration, p H , and
elementary theory of indicators; equilibria
in analytical reactions.
Thermochemistry.—Heat of reaction, and its determination by the bomb calorimeter and from
van't Hoff'e law; Hess's law; calorific values
of foodstuffs.
The Colloidal State.—The nature of colloids;
methods of preparing colloidal solutions;
conditions necessary for their preparation,
stability and destruction.
Descriptive Chem istry.
The periodic classification of the elements; the
chemical relationships between the different
groups and periods ot the periodic table.
The chemistry underlying the analytical reactions for the commoner inorganic radicles.
I h e following elemente will be selected for more detailed study, with special reference to the topics mentioned with each element: —
Non-Metallic Elements.
Group V I I .
Chlorine; hydrogen chloride; the oxides and oxyacids of chlorine and their oxidising properties.
Fluorine, bromine, iodine; relationships of their
compounds to corresponding compounds of
chlorine; analytical reactions of iodine.
Group V I .
Oxygen; water; oxides (acidic and basic); peroxides; hydrogen peroxide; ozone.
Sulphur; allotropy; hydrogen sulphide and its
use in analysis; sulphur dioxide; sulphur
trioxide ; the oxy-acitle of sulphur; principles
of industrial processes for sulphuric acid.
Group V.
Nitrogen; ammonia; oxides of nitrogen; nitrous
and nitric acids; nitrogen compounds in na-
992
DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, U 3 8 ,
ture and industrial processes for nitrogen
fixation; the atmosphere; discovery of the
rare gaês.
Phosphorus; allotropy; phosphine; oxides and
chlorides ot phosphorus; the oxy-acids; tho
phosphate buffer system; superphosphate.
Arsenic, antimony, bismuth; their relation
to
Group V ; the detection of Ae and Sb in
small quantities.
Group IV.
Carbon; allotropy; oxides of carbon; carbonic acid
and carbonates; the equilibrium carbonic
acid—bicarbonate—oarbonate; fuel, combustion and flame; active charcoal; adsorption
phenomena.
Silicon; silica and silica gel; silicic acid and silicates; ceramics; cement; glass.
Metallic Elements.
Group I .
Alkali metals', sodium hydroxide; sodium carbona t e ; soap; ammonium and potassium salts.
Copper, silver (gold); relation to main group; complex formation.
Group LT.
Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, R a ; lime and calcium carbonate;
dissolved impurities in natural waters and
their removal; extraction of radium from
i t s ores.
Zn, Cd, H g ; relations to main group; complexes; amphoteric properties.
Group I I I .
A l u m i n i u m ; alums; amphoteric properties.
Group TV.
Tin, lead; relationship to carbon and silicon.
Transition Elements.
Chromium; variable valency;
dichromates.
analytical
use
of
MEDICINE.
993
Manganese; variable valency; analytical. use of
permanganates.
I r o n , cobalt, nickel; their industrial importance.
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY—
Meaning and origin of term " Organic Chemistry."
Purification and some criteria of the purity of
organic compounds.
The principles of qualitative and quantitative
analysis ot organic compounds.
Aliphatic Organic Chemistry.—Ethyl alcohol and
some of its derivatives, including ethyl ether,
ethyl chloride, and chloroform. The chemistry of other alcohols. Acetic acid and some
of* its derivatives, including acetyl chloride
and acetic anhydride.
Homologous Series-—Illustrated by the paraffins.
Aldehydes a n d ketones, with special reference to
formaldehyde,
acetaldehyde, and acetone.
W h a t is meant by " p o l y m e r i s a t i o n " ?
Carboxylic acids, and acid amides.
Meaning of t e r m s : esters, fats, oils and waxes.
Unsaturated hydrocarbons, especially acetylene and
ethylene.
Amines, amino acids and proteins.
Isomerism in general.
" P o s i t i o n isomerism.*'
Stereoisomerism, mirror image isomerism and
geometrical isomerism. Tautomerism.
The carbohydrates, and some of tho uses of cellulose and starch may be dealt with.
Aromatic Organic Chemistry-—Tho properties and
reactions of several typical compounds, including
phenol, picric acid, salicylic acid, aniline,
and phenylhydrazine.
Laboratory Work.—As for Chemistry P a r t I (Science
Course).
Text-books.—As for Chemistry P a r t I
(ScienoeCouree).
Additional tor Medical Students: —
Cohen—Class Book of Organic Chemistry.
•994
Findlay—Introduction to Physical. Chemistry.
Cave n—Foundations ot Chemical Theory.
Hitchcock—Physical
Chemistry
tor
Medical
Students.
Examination Papers—3 hours each:
W r i t t e n : Pass.
Honour.
Practical: Pass.
Honour.
NATURAL PHILOSOPHY (Medical Course)—
Methods of Physical Science, and outlines of history.
KinemaHcs.—Applications of Geometry;
length,
angle, area, volume, standard and unit of
length. Time, the sidereal day and the second.
Vectors, addition, subtraction;
components,
resolution. Motion. Specification of velocity,
variable
velocity.
Acceleration; constant
acceleration. Motion in circular path with
uniform speed. Ribbon Atwood machine.
Statics.—Force, addition and resolution of forces.
A particle is in equilibrium when resultant
of all forces acting ou it is zero. Parallel
forces, principle of lever, couple. Centre of
mass. Coplanar forces equivalent to a single
force and a couple.
Dynamics-—Newton's Law I. Mass, standard, unit.
Weight. Conservation of mass.
Density.
Momentum.
Impulse.
Newton's Laws I I
and I I I . Work, energy, power; units. Principle of conservation of energy. Elements of
dynamics of rotation.
Simple harmonio
motion.
Gravitation
Cavendish experiment, determination
of G. Pendulum determination of g.
Hydromechanics.—Pressure at a point. Pressure due
to a column ot liquid'.
Archimedes' Principle.
Manometers. Barometer. Principles underlying measurement of blood-pressure; RivaRocci method for elimination of rigidity ot
tissues. Filter pump. Low pressure pumps.
MEDICINE.
995,
Properties of Matter.—Density.
Boyle's Law.
Hooke's Law. Young's modulus, compressibility. Osmosis. Viscosity. Surface tension.
Diffusion. Constitution of matter.
Colloid State.—Preparation of dispersoids. Appear.
ance
under
ultra-microscope.
Brownianmotion.
Heat.—Thermometry.
Expansion.
Calorimetry,
specific aud latent heats. Mechanical equivalent of heat. Change of state, fusion and
vaporisation. Liquefaction of gases. Conduction.
Radiation.
Conservation
of
energy and the animal body; the respiration
calorimeter; determination of the intake and
output of energy for animals.
Effect of
humidity on the body; regulation temperature
of the body; the Kata-thermometer. Reflection and refraction.
Wave Motion and Sound-—Nature and propagation
of waves. Velocity of sound. Pitch, loudness,
quality. Reflection. Refraction.
Resonance.
Stationary waves.
Vibration of strings and
air columns. Ear and hearing.
Light.—Sources,
intensity;
photometric
units.
Reflection,
mirrors.
Refraction,
prisms,
lenses.
Velocity
of
light.
Dispersion.
Spectrum analysis. Correction of the defects
of vision by spherical and cylindrical lenses.
Measurement of lenses. Camera, human eye,
microscope, telescope. Nature of light. Interference. Diffraction. Polarisation. Ultra-violet
light and applications.
Electrostatics-—Fundamental Phenomena.
Inverse
square law, quantity. E.S. Units. Electric
field. Lines of force. Potential. Electroscope
and electrometer. Distribution ot electricity.
Condensers. Capacity of conductors and condensers.
Energy of a charged conductor.
Specific inductive capacity.
Current
Electromotive force. Resistance. Ohm's
Law, ampere, volt, and ohm.' Wheatstone'e
Bridge. Potentiometer. Joule's Law. Seebeok
and Peltier effects.
Electrolysis.
Primary
and storage batteries. Hydrogen Ion Concentration.
996
'JETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 193S.
Magnetism-—Inverse square law. Moment of magnet. The magnetic field. Lines of force.
Induction, magnetisation. Properties of iron.
Terrestrial magnetism.
Magnetic field due to a current.—Magnetic field du*
t o current in (a) straight conductor, (b) circular coil, (c) solenoid. Electro-magnete.
Electrodynamics.—Action of magnetic fields on
conductors; galvanometers, ammeters, voltmeters.
Electromagnetic induction.—Lenz's and Faraday'*
laws.
Self and mutual induction, henry.
The transformer and induction coil. Direct
current generator and motor.
Alternating
currents (elementary treatment).
Applications.—Telephone.
High frequency currents.
Wireless telegraphy.
Electrical
units.
Electricity a n d Matter.—Electric discharge, cathode
rays, Rontgen rays. Radiography. Radioactivity.
Laboratory Work
Experiments relating to the
above course.
For Pass.
Watson—Intermediate Physics; or
Duncan and Starling—Text-book of Physics.
J. S. Rogers (edited by T. H. Laby)—Physics for
Medical Students.
For Honours.
Watson—Text-book of Physics.
For Laboratory Work.
Practical Physics—By the Staff of the Department.
Examination: —
Pass : One 3-hour paper.
Honour: One 3-hour paper—Pass and 1st Honour.
One 3-hour paper—2nd Honour.
MEDICINE.
997
ZOOLOGY (Medical Course).—
The elements of vertebrate and invertebrate morphology, including the characters of the chief
divisions of tho animal kingdom, illustrated by
reference to typical examples of each.
The more important points in the structure and lifehistory of the following parasites : Trypanosoma,
Plasmodium,
Fasciola,
Taenia,
Ascaru.
Ancylostoma, Filaria, Trichinella, and others.
Outline of the development of the bird and of the foetal
membranes in mammalia.
The formation of the germ-cells, meiosis and syngamy; elementary genetics.
Outline of the Theory oi Evolution.
Laboratory Work.—
Examination by means of dissections and preparations
ot examples ot the chief types dealt with in
lectures. The types studied include the foll o w i n g : — Amoeba, Paramecium, Frog, Shark,
Rabbit.
Dissection of the mammalian eye.
The examination of specimens and sections
illustrating the embryology of the fowl and
frog.
Text Books: —
O'Donoghue—Introduction to Zoology.
Buchanan—Elements of Animal Morphology.
Dunn—Heredity and Variation.
Students must be provided with the following:—
Microscope, with low and high powers, magnifying a t
least 60-450 diameters, and provided with
coarse and fine adjustments; to be approved
by the Professor.
Box of approved dissecting instruments.
Note books.
Slides and Coverslips.
Box of coloured crayons.
Examination: —
Pass: One 3-hour paper.
One 3-hour practical.
Honour: One 3-hour paper (Pass and 1st Honour).
One 3-hour paper (2nd Honour).
One 3-hour practical.
998
SECOND and THIRD
ANATOMY
(INCLUDING
YEARS.
HISTOLOGY)—
Lectures in Anatomy will be distributed over the three
Terms of the Second Year and of the Third Year in
accordance with the details published in the Department.
PKACTICAL ANATOMY.
Each student must dissect the five parts of the human
body twice, once in the second year and once in the
third year, subject to possible omission of one part in
the third year, if such omission is directed by the Professor of Anatomy. Certificated evidence must be produced t h a t all dissections have been satisfactorily performed.
HISTOLOGY AND EMBRYOLOGY.
Lectures in Histology and in Embryology will be held
a t the Department of Anatomy in Second and Third
Tears.
.fi-acticai Classes iu Histology will be conducted by the
Lecturer in Histology in Second and Third Tears, according to a special time-table to be published in the
department.
ExaminationsSecond Year: Annual.—The Examination in November, at the end of the second year and the corresponding Supplementary Examination will be for pass only, and
will be restricted to the work of the year. No paper
is set, the examination being entirely oral in both
Anatomy and in Histology and Embryology.
Third Year.—The October Annual and November Supplementary examinations, the former for pass and
honours, the latter for pass only, will comprise the subjects of Anatomy, Surface Anatomy, Histology, and!
Embryology in full.
Books recommended:—
Text-books :—
Cunningham—Text-book of Anatomy, or
Gray—Text-book of Anatomy.
For Practical Anatomy .Cunningham—Practical Anatomy.
MEDICINE.
999,
For HistologyText-book: —
Lewis and Stohr—A Text-book of Histology. L a t e s t
edition.
Book for referenoe: —
Maximow—Text-book of Histology.
For Embryology:
Text-book: —
Examination :—
One paper of three hours' duration, supplemented
by oral examinations in Anatomy, and one
three-hour paper in Histology and Embryology, and practical examination in Histology and Embryology.
PHYSIOLOGY—
A course of Lectures, about one hundred and five in
number, on Systematic Physiology and Bio-Chemistry is
given by the Professor of Physiology and the Associate-Professor in Bio-Chemistry. The lectures extend
through the six terms of the Second and Third Years of
medical study. The aim of the lectures is to present t h e
subject objectively by means'of experiments and demonstrations, and the student is expected to keep pace with
the lectures by reading the appropriate chapters in t h o
prescribed text-book.
Practical Classes in Biochemistry, some thirty-five in.
number, are conducted by the Professor and oy the Associate
Professor in Biochemistry. Each student is expected to
provide himself with a set of apparatus, a description
of which is posted in the laboratory a t the beginning of
t h e course.
Practical Classes, ten in number, iu Experimental Physiology (including some exercises in Practical Pharmacology)
are conducted during the Second and Third Term of the
Second Y'ear. Por this course dissecting instruments are
necessary.
A course of practical exercises in Clinical Biochemist r y is given in the latter p a r t of t h e First Term and
1000
during the Second and Third Terms of the Third
Year by Dr. L. A. 1. Maxwell. In this course both chemical apparatus and microscope will bo required.
A course of lectures with experiments aud demonstrations,
ten in number, on Physiological Pharmacology, is given in
the Second Term of the Third Y'ear.
Practical exercises in the examination of the eye, ear,
nose and larynx are conducted in the Second Term of
the Third Year a t times chosen to suit students' convenience.
Honour Classes in Practical Biochemistry and Practical
Experimental Phv-siology are held during the three Terms
of the Third Year it suitable candidates present themselves.
Books recommended (latest editions) :—
Pass.
For Practical -work—
Osborne and Young—Elementary Practical Bloch emfetry.
Maxwell—Clinical Biochemistry.
For Systematic work—
Samson Wright—Applied Physiology.
Halliburton—Handbook of Physiology
Osborne—The Elements of Pharmacology.
Starling—Principles of Human Physiology.
FOURTH YEAR.
MATERIA MEDICA AND PHARMACY—
(a) The general nature and composition, together with
the outstanding physical aud chemical characters, of the more important Pharmaeopoeial
substances, and of selected unofficial drugs in
common use.
(h) The composition ot the official preparations of
these drugs, and the processes employed iu their
manufacture.
(c) The doses of these drugs and of their preparations,
(d) Weights and Measures of the Meti-ic System-'and
- •-•'
their equivalences in the Imperial System. :
MEDICINE.
1001
(e) Prescription writing.
(/•) Chemical aud Pharmaceutical incompatibilities.
(g) Recognition of a tew of the more important drugs
and galenicals.
(h) Practical dispensing of the various types ot prescription.
Text-book recommended:—
Bruce and Dilling—MateriaModica and Therapeutics
Examination:—
One 3-hour paper.
•OBSTETRICS AND GYNECOLOGY —
There will be a written paper in Obstetrics and a
written paper in Gynaecology, an Oral Examination in
Obstetrics, a.nd all candidates will be called upon to
undergo a practical clinical examination in Obstetrics
and Gynaecology.
In addition to the above, there will be a commentary
in Obstetrics and a commentary in Gynaecology.
Books recommended : —
On Obstetrics and Gynaecology—Lecture Notes issued by Melbourne University Press.
,-',-_For reference :—
Eden and Holland—Manual of Midwifery.
Williams—Obstetrics.
Tweedy—Practical Obstetrics.
Eden and Lockyer—Gynaecology.
Kerr, Ferguson, Young, Hendry—Combined Textbook, Obstetrics and Gynaecology.
Obstetrics:—Each student will attend the Women's
Hospital during the fifth year for a period of twelve
weeks, comprising a major course of ten weeks and a
refresher course of two weeks in the sixth year. The
major course will consist of residence for six weeks and
•non-residence for four weeks, while the refresher course
will be entirely residential.
Students must keep detailed records of all cases conducted by thom "and submit the same to the Professor at
'the conclusion of their refresher course.
-Gynaecology:—Each student will attend the Gynaecological; Department of the Women's Hospital for a
62a
1Q02
period of three weeks, such period; being included in
the non-residential portion of t h e major course in
Obstetrics. In addition each student will attend t h e
O-ynaeoological Department of a duly recognised General Hospital for a further period of three weeks.
Each student returned as not passed or absent a t a
final examination, or at the corresponding supplementary examination, will go into residence for fourteen days before re-examination.
Obstetrics—
Ono paper—3 hours.
Commentary: Ono paper.
Gynaecology—
Commentary : One paper.
The Commentaries in Obstetrics and Gynaecology
appear on one paper. Time allowed for both Commentaries, 3 hours.
PATHOLOGY—
The course in I'athology consists of :—
(a) About 70 lectures on General and Special Pathology in the first and second terms of the
fourth year.
(b) Practical courses designed t o bring the teachingof Pathology as far as possible into direct
relationship with the clinical study of disease.
These consist ot:—
1. Practical instruction in the conduct of
autopsies and demonstrations in morbid
anatomy by the Lecturers of the University
department and by the Pathologists at the
Melbourne, Alfred and St. Vincent's Hospitals. Students are required to assist
personally at autopsies and to act as clerks.
2. A Laboratory Class of Pathological Histology, beginning before the end of the
third year and continuing during the first
and second terms of the fourth year..
MEDICINK.
1003
Instruction in histological methods is
given during the week immediately preceding tho first term of the fourth year.
3. A Class of Practical Morbid Anatomy
and Applied Pathology. With the aid
ot clinical histories and autopsy notes,
the students study the morbid anatomy
aud histology of the organs and tissues
of eases coming under observation during
the course, aud submit tor criticism full
descriptions aud discussions of these cases.
In addition material obtained a t autopsy
is studied and demonstrated to the class
by students assisting.
Text-Books recommended :—
MacCallum—Text-book of Pathology.
or Muir—Text-book ot Pathology,
or Beattie and Dickson—General a n d Special Pathology.
Allen—Pathology, Lectures and Demonstrations.
Kettle—Pathology of Tumours.
•For General Purposes of Reference tho following works
are recommended :—
Allen—Pathology Lectures and Demonstrations.
Adami—Principles of Pathology.
Pembrey aud Ritchie—General Pathology.
Boyd—Surgical Pathology and Pathology of Internal diseases.
Hewlett—Pathological
Physiology of Internal
Diseases.
Kaufmann—Pathology.
Ewing—Neoplastic Diseases.
Kettle—Pathology of Tumours.
Wells—Chemical Pathology.
The Pathological Sections of the Text-books in Medicine, Surgery, and Obstetrics and Gynaecology.
Examination: —
1004
Practical: Macro, and Microscopic specimens—3
hours for honour candidates, 2 hours for pass,
candidates.
Oral:
BACTERIOLOGY Studente are advised to read Zinsser and Bayne-Jones'
Text-book of Bacteriology, pp. 1-140, in the Long
Vacation, prior t , commencing the Course.
The Course in Bacteriology, beginning in February
and continuing tlirough the first term of the 4th year,
consists of lectures, demonstrations, and laboratory
work dealing with:
Biology, morphology, isolation, cultivation and'
classification of bacteria, and filtrable viruses
of importance in medicine.
Tho principles of immunity, together with t h e i r
practical applications, including serological
tests and methods of vaccination.
Text-books:
Mackie and MacCartncy—An Introduction toPractical Bacteriology.
Zinsser and Bayne-Jones—Text-book of Bacteriology.
Muir and Ritchie—Manual of Bacteriology (9th
ed.).
For General Purposes of Reference the following works.
are recommended:—
Topley—Outline ot Immunity.
Topley and Wilson—Principles of Bacteriology
and Immunity. (2nd ed.).
Dible—Recent Advances in Bacteriology.
Fleming and Petrie—Recent Advances in Vaccineand Serum Therapy.
SURGICAL ANATOMY—
Text Book: —
Massie—Surgical Anatomy.
For reference: —
Text Books in Anatomy and Surgery.
Examination: —
Pass only—3 hours.
MEDICINE
THERAPEUTICS—
Text book recommended -.—
Clark—Applied Pharmacology, Sth edition.
For reference:—
Cushny—Pharmacology and Therapeutics,
edition.
1005
10th
F I F T H TEAR.
MKDICINE—
The examination includes tne whole subject.
Conybeare—Text-Book of Medicine.
Lewis—Diseases ot the Heart.
Hutchison and Hunter—Clinical Methods.
For reference :—
Price—Text-book of Medicine.
BURGERY—
The Examination includes the whole subject.
Text-books:—
R>ee and Carlees—Manual of Surgery or
Spencer and Gask—Surgery.
For reference >—
Beesly and Johnston—Manual of Surgical Anatomy.
Choyce—System ot Surgery,
Modern Operative Surgery (Ed. by G. Grey
Turner.
SIX.TH
YEAR.
KORENSIC MEDICINE—
Relation of medical men to Courts ot Law. Appearances in the dead body. Identity.
Sudden
death.
Wounds aud Injuries.
Asphyxia.
Sexual questions. Questions connected with
the new-born child. Life insurance. Toxicology. Examination ot stains.
1006
Text-books recommended:—
Glaister—Medical Jurisprudence and Toxicology.
Sydney Smith—Forensic Medicine.
Books of reference :—
Tidy—Legal Medicine.
Taylor—Principles aud Practice of Medical Jurisprudence.
Peterson and Haines—Legal Medicine and Toxicology.
•PUBLIC HEALTH—
Health and Disease.—Definitions. The average and
the optimal. Discussion of the state of health
of the community.
Hygiene.—Hygiene as applied physiology and biology.
Heredity and environment.
The essentials of health. Deficiency diseases. Negative and positive causes of ill-health.
Diet.—Nutrition.
Dietetics.
Observations upon
human beings. Animal experiments.
A i r and Light.—Air as the medium in which terrestrial animals are immersed. Chemical and
physicaj relation t o life.
Cooling power.
He
Teat regulation. The influence of " c o l d . "
The open-air.
Ventilation—methods
of—
natural and artificial. Sunlight—analysis of
—physiological
and
pathological
effects.
Artificial light.
Artificial heating—methods
of.
Clothing.—Purposes and effects. Fabrics. Fashions.
Colours.
Exercise and Rest.—Exercise as use—physiological
implications.
General exercise—its benefits.
The physiology of rest.
Mental Factors.—Livimr as doing. The influence
of " mind " on body. Psychology.
Poisons-—The nature of poisons—chemical accidents. The common domestic and industrial
poisons. Carbon-monoxide, quartz-dust, lead,
arsenic, etc. Use and abuse of alcohol and
tobacco. Poisons produced by micro-organisms.
MEDICINE
1007
Parasites-—The phenomenon of parasitism.
Relation to deficiency disease. Macroscopic parasites—internal
and
external.
Worms —
species—life history—prevention.
Ecto-parasites—mites, ticks, lice, fleas, -bugs, winged
insects.
Lite history.
Micro-organisms in
the symbioses.
Microscopic
Parasites.—Micro-organisms.
Saprophytic—commensal and pathogenic.
Virulences and resistances. Infections and infectious diseases.
Epidemics and epidemiology.
Carriers. Immunity. Classification of infectious diseases.
Enteric
Infections-—The
organisms
concerned.
Source. Life history. How infection ia acred and transmitted.
Lessons regarding
poeal of excreta, contamination of food—
water supplies—refuse—fly breeding, etc.
Respiratory Infections—The organisms concerned
including infections of the central nervous
system. Transmission by oro-nasal secretions.
Lessons regard'ng personal hygiene, ventilation, domestic and restaurant hygiene.
Infections conveyed bg Arthropod Vectors-—The
diseases and their mode of spread. Control.
Contact Infections-—Skin diseases.
Venereal diseases. Prevalence and control.
r
Text-book.—
Hope and
Health.
Stallybrass—Text-book
of
Public
For reference.—
Leonard Hill—Tho Science of Ventilation and
Open Air Treatment, P a r t I I .
Hill and Campbell—Health and Environment.
Haslam—Recent Advances in Preventive Medicine.
R. H. A. Plimmer—Food, Health, Vitamins.
McCollum and Simmonds—The Newer Knowledge
of Nutrition.
1008
SPECIAL SUBJECT'S—
. Ophthalmology—
Parsons—Diseases bf the Eye.
Diseases uf Children—
Patterson—Sick Children, 1937.
Fraser—Surgery ot Childhood, 1936.
Edwards—Surgical Emergencies in Children, 1936.
. Hutchison—Lectures on Diseases of Children 7th
od., 1936.
, Public Health Department—A Guide to Infant
Feeding (2nd cd.).
Public
Health
Department — Infant
Feeding
Tables.
And for reference:
Garrod, Batten, Thursfield and Patterson —
Diseases of Children, 1937.
Parsons and Barling—Diseases of Infancy and
Childhood, 1933.
Thomson and Findlay—Clinical Study and Treat.
ment ot Sick Children, 1933.
Anaesthetics—
For reference only:—
British Journal of Anaesthesia.
Practical Anaesthesia—Monographs ot the Baker
Institute of Medical Research, No. 1.
Diseases of the Skin—
Roxburgh—Common Skin Diseases (1934).
Walker—An Introduction to Dermatology (1932).
E. H. Moltieworth—An Introduction to Dermatology.
And for reference :—
Goldsmith — Recent Advances in Dermatology
(1930).
Ornisby—Diseases ot the Skin (1934).
MacKee—X-Rays and Radium in the Treatment
of Diseases of the Skin (1927).
Maclood—Diseases of the Skin (1933).
MEDICINE.
1009'
For reference:
Semon and Moritz—An Atlas of the Commoner
Skin Diseases.
Venereal Diseases—
David
Lees—Diagnosis and
Treatment
of
Venereal Disease.
For referenoe: —
Stokes—Modern Clinical Syphilology.
Frank Kidd—Common Infections
of FemaloUrethra and Cervix.
Davies—Primary Syphilis in the Female.
ANNOUNCEMENTS.
These Announcements are liable to variation as the
circumstniices may demand.
CLINICAL MEDICINE AND CLINICAL SURGERY
Students must keep records ot the cases in the beds,
allotted to them, iu a prescribed note-book; and as part of
the final examination these note-books may be required
to be submitted to the Clinical Examiners by both Pass
and Honour Candidates.
-MELBOURNE HOSPITAL.
Scheme of Clinical Instruction submitted by the Medical
Staff and approved by the Faculty of Medicine, subject to any modifications rendered necessary if.
regulations are amended as proposed.
FOURTH YEAR.
February and Halt ot March—
Medical, Surgical, and Pathology Tutorial Classes.
March, April, May—
Out-Patient Medical Clerkship.
Out-Patient Surgical Instruction.
J u n e , J u l y , August—
Out-Patient Medical Clerkship.
Out-Patient Surgical Instruction
5010
September. October. November and December—
In-Patient Surgical Dressership.
Out-Patient Medical Instruction.
F I F T H YEAR.
February—
In-Patient Medicine.
In-Patient Surgery.
March, April, May—
In-Pa.tient Medical Clerkship.
June, J u l y , August—
In-Patient Medical Clerkship.
September, October, November, December (to 15th
December)—
In-Patient Medical Clerkship.
Out-Patient Surgical Instruction.
Notes.—(1) The vacation at end of first term corresponds with University vacation, and at end of second
term to first fortnight of University vacation.
(2) Examination vacation commences two weeks before
the examination in Pathology.
Clinical work re-commences immediately on cessation of this examination.
J a n u a r y is a vacation month.
(3) Vacations in Fifth Year are at end ot first and
•second term, as in Fourth Year.
(4) Special classes will be held from J a n u a r y 15th
to February 16th, for those students about to sit for
final examinations. No instruction will be given from
December 15th to January 15th.
(5) Throughout 4th and Sth Year special instruction
is given to small groups of students at a time in all
the phases of Casualty work (including Dressing, Bandaging, Splinting, Minor Surgery, etc.). Classes are
also arranged for special clinical instruction in Septic
cases. Neurology, Psychiatry, Urology, Orthopaedics,
etc. These classes do not interfere with the continuous
ward work which each student must perform.
(6) During 4th and Sth Years students are required
to remain on duty a t the hospital on certain days on
MEDICINE.
1011
which their wards are receiving cases, according to a
roster which is posted.
(7) Work is so arranged t h a t the student has p a r t
e t least of each morning free for his clerkship or
dressership; lectures, etc., are given before aud after
luncheon, and clinical instruction by members of t h e
Teaching Staff, both in the wards and in the OutPatient Departments in the afternoons.
(8) During 4th and 5th Years students are required
t o do Resident Casualty Duty according to a roster
which is posted.
There are to be no students unallotted except in interval
between Final and Supplementary Examinations.
(9) While tho student is at the Royal Melbourne
Hospital one ot his duties is to give anaesthetics.
ALFRED HOSPITAL.
Scheme of Instruction submitted by the Medical Staff
and approved by Faculty of Medicine.
Tho working year of the Alfred Hospital commences
on 31st J a n u a r y , 1938.
T H I R D YEAR.
Commencing on the forty-fifth Monday of the Third
Year (14/11/38), Third Year students will receive a
series of Tutorial Lectures in Medicine and Surgery
with appropriate practical demonstrations. This course
will continue for a period of five weeks.
FOURTH YEAR.
The students are divided into small groups which
are attached to the various clinics according to the
rosters posted at the Hospital from time to time.
During the first six weeks. Fourth Year students continue to receive instruction in Medical and Surgical
Tutorials with appropriate practical demonstrations.
In addition Tutorial Classes are held in Pathology and
Bacteriology.
From the Commencement of the First Term, all
students of the Fourth Year attend Out-Patient Instruction on four afternoons per week for approximately six
:]012
r
"mbnths, the time being divided equally between
medicine and surgery. During this period each student
.serves for a period as a junior casualty dresser, during
which time he attends the Casualty -Department, and
.performs such duties as arc allocated to him by the
•Casualty Medical Officer.
The student attends post mortems and demonstrations by the Hospital Pathologist each day at 12.15
p.m. In addition tutorial classes in Pathology and Bacteriology are held a t intervals during the year.
From the time of completion of the examination in
Pathology until Ihe end of the Hospital Year. (16/12/38)
Fourth Y'ear studente commence a period of In-patient
Medical Clerkship. During this time they receive instruction in Dermatology.
Scholarships in Medicine and Surgery will be open
for competition a t the end of the Fourth YToar upon a
consideration of the student's work throughout the year,
.-and upon the results of an examination conducted within
the Hospital.
F I F T H YEAOR.
During the Fifth Year students will be occupied with
In-Patient work throughout the year, with the exception
of the time occupied in residence at the Women's Hospital.
Students will serve for approximately five months as
clerk to In-Paitient Physicians and for a, further period
of five months as dresser t o In-Patient Surgeons.
During this period Out-Patient instruction will be
given on two or three occasions during each week, it
being arranged t h a t whilst acting as In-Patient Dresser
"he receives medical Out-Patient instruction and viceversa.
During the year all studente will attend lectures
in Therapeutics and Radiology and Post Mortem demonstrations. In addition studente will attend clinical
lectures delivered by the Hospital Staff. Instruction in
Specialist subjecte will be given during the year.
Dnring the Fifth Year, students in groups of three
will serve a period of two weeks in residence as senior
-casualty students. As opportunity offers a second period
•of residence may be arranged.
MEDICINE
101&
At the end ot the Fifth Y'ear, the Harry Hindlip
Green Scholarship in Medicine, annual value approximately ,£40, will be open for competition, and may be
awarded upon a consideration of the student's work
throughout the year, and upon results of an examination
conducted within the Hospital.
SIXTH YEAR.
During the Sixth Y'ear, the students will serve a
period of approximately three months each as In-Patient
Clerk and In-Patient Dresser, and will receive OutPatient Instruction in Medicine and Surgery. Clinical
lectures in Medicine and Surgery will be delivered by
members of the Stall.
For two mouths during this year students will be engaged in the study of Diseases of Children, which work
may be undertaken within the Alfred Hospital.
Students will receive instruction in various special
clinics, according to the regulations set out in the
Calendar.
In the later part of the Sixth Year a series of coaching lectures will be held in preparation for the Final
Examinations in November.
The Power Scholarships in Medicine and Surgery of
approximate annual value of .£100 each will be o]ien
for competition amongst the students of the Hospital.
The scholarships may be awarded to suitable candidates
upon a consideration of their work throughout the
Hospital course and upon the results of examinations
conducted within the Hospital.
Notes.—Lectures and Demonstrations are given during
the mornings. Clinical instruction by members of the
Teaching Staff of the Hospital is given in the mornings and afternoons both in Wards and iu the OutPatients' Department.
The Student's Hand-book, containing details and
time-tables of the Hospital Practice and of the
Scholarships may be obtained from the Sub-Dean of the
Alfred Hospital.
. " . . ' • ST. VINCENT'S HOSPITAL.,
' S c h e m e of Clinical Instruction proposed by the Staff
of St. Vincent's Hospital, and approved by the Faculty
1014
1938.
of Medicine, subject 1.0 any modifications rendered necessary
if regulations are amended as proposed.
FOURTH YEAR.
February, March (Fourth Year)—
Tutorial Medicine, Surgery and Pathology.
Casualty O.P. Practice with tuition.
April-August (Fourth Y'ear)—
O.P. Medical Practice.
O.P. Surgical Practice.
Clinical Pathology.
Post Mortem Examination.
August-December (Fourth Year)—
I.P. Surgical Practice.
F I F T H YEAR.
January-March (Fifth Year)—
I.P. Medical Practice.
April-June (Fifth Year)—
I . P . Surgical Practice.
I . P . Gynaecology.
July-December (Fifth Y'ear)—
I.P. Medical Practice.
O.P. Gynaecological Practice.
SIXTH YEAB.
Special demonstrations on selected subjects.
NOTES.
The mornings will be devoted to I . P . Teaching and
the afternoons to O.P. Teaching.
Special demonstrations will be given each afternoon
during t h e 4th and Sth Years from 3.46—1.15 by members of the O.P. H o n o r a r y Medical and Surgical
Staffs:
MEDICINE'
1015-
Clinical Lectures will be delivered each week from.
April to December in the 4th and Sth Years.
Special demonstrations in Radiology, Psychiatry and;
Dietetics will be given during the Sth Year.
Each student will serve ae Resident Student for 14days during both the 4th and Sth Years.
Ward Work will be under the supervision of a Registrar.
Attendance at Post Mortems is compulsory duringthe 4th and Sth Years.
The Michael and Margaret Ryan Scholarships, each
of a value of .£100, will be awarded annually to thestudents of St. Vincent's Hospital who are successful:
in a special clinical examination in Medicine and Surgery.
A booklet of th© Details and Time-table of Hospital
Practice may be obtained from the Sub-Dean of St..
Vincent's Hospital Clinical School.
HOSPITAL AND PHARMACY P E E S .
In addition to the University Fees, Medical Students pay
the following Fees, in advance, for Hospital and Pharmaceutical Instruction:—
Third Year - College of Pharmacy, .£6 16s. 6d.
Fourth Year - Melbourne, Alfred or St. Vincent's Hospital ; Eutrance Fee, £15 15s.
Melbourne, Alfred, or St. Vincent's Hospital ; Clinical Fee, .£14 14s.
Diseases ot Skin - £1 Is..
Fifth Year - Melbourne, Alfred or St. Vincent's
Hospital ; Clinical Fee,
- £ M 14s.
Sixth Year - Melbourne, Alfred or St. Vincent's
Hospital: Clinical Fee, - .£10 10s..
Fifth Year
- Women's Hospital, Obstetrics, .£13 13s.
„
,,
Caution Money £ 3 3s.
Gynaecology
- £ 2 2s..
Anaesthetics
- i!l Is.
Sixth Year
- Diseases ot Children - £ 5 5s.
Ophthalmology - £ 1 Is..
Mental Diseases - £ 1 Is.
Fever Hospital - £ 1 Is..
Diseases of Throat, Nose, E a r - J61 Is..
Venereal Diseases
. . .
.£1 i s _
63
10.16
..Supplementary Clinical Fee : Students who have failed
a t their principal and supplementary examinations must)
pay an additional Clinical Pee of J57/7/-.
The Pharmacy Fee must be paid to the Registrar of the
College of Pharmacy.
The Clinical Fee must be paid to t h e credit of the University at the National Bank ot Australasia Ltd.
Fourth year students sliould enter a t the Hospitals and
pay their entrance and clinical fees before the middle of
J a n u a r y in each year.
. The Fees for Obstetrics and Caution Money must be paid
to the Secretary of the Women's Hospital. I'he fee for
Gynaecology must bo paid to the credit of the University.
The Pees for Diseases ot Children and Fever Hospital
must be paid to the Secretaries or other officers specially
notified, of the corresponding Hospitals. The fee for instruction in Diseases of tha Skin must be paid to the credit
of the University with the lecture fees for the First Term
of the Fourth Year and t h a t for Anaesthetics with the
lecture fees for the First Term ot the Fifth Year.
The
other Fees for instruction in Special Departments, amount-,
ing to JS4 4 0, must be paid to the credit of the University
in tho same manner as the Clinical Fees, with the Lecture
Fees for the First Term of the Sixth Year.
SPECIAL
DEPARTMENTS.
GYNAECOLOGY.
. Clinical Instruction in Gynecology is given at the
Women's Hospital under the direction of tho Honorary
Medical Staff.
Monday to Friday, a t 2.30 p.m., Saturday, 9.30 a.m.
• Also at the Melbourne Hospital by Dr. R. W. Chambers.
Also at St. Vincent's Hospital by Mr. R. F. O'Sullivan
(In-patient), and by Dr. H. Jacobs and Mr. Eccles McKay
(Out-patient).
And a t t h e Alfred Hospital on Mondays, a t 9 a.m.,
and Thursdays, a t 2 p.m., by Dr. Robert Fowler.
.
OPHTHALMOLOGY.
.-.Clinical- instruction in Ophthalmology will be given at
t h e Eye and E a r Hospital by the. following Surgeons:
MEDICINE
1017"
Dr. Mark Gardner: Wednesdays and Fridays, a t
9 a.m., Mondays a t 2 p.m.
Dr. J . O'Brien: Thursdays a t 9 a.m., Tuesdays
a t 2 p.m.
Dr. A. S. Anderson: Mondays a t 9 a.m., Wednesdays and Fridays a t 2 p.m.
Clinical leotures will be given on all parts of tha
eubject to each section of students attending the Hospital.
Special classes for Refraction will be arranged if
desired.
Clinical instruction will also be given at the Melbourne
Hospital by Dr. L. J. C. Mitchell on Tuesdays and Fridays
•at 9.30 .-Lin.
And a t the Alfred Hospital on Mondays a t 9 a.m.
a n d Thursdays a t 2 p.m., by Mr. J . B . Anderson.
.And at. St. Vincent's Hospital by the following instructors :—Dr. J . P . Spring and Mr. A. H . Joyoe.
DISEASES OF CHILDREN.
Clinical instruction in Diseases of Children will be given
at the Children's Hospital by the members of the Medical
and Surgical Staff. Two days of the course will be
devoted to instruction in Mother Craft and Infant
Welfare a t a recognised Mothercraft and Infant Welfare Training Centre. Students attend full time daily
for a period of two months.
Instruction is also given at the Alfred Hospital on
similar conditions, and in addition further classes are
held as opportunity arises.
DISEASES O F THE SKIN.
Instruction in Diseases ot the Skin willl lm given bv Dr.
Jt. Wettenhn.ll, us follows :—
Lectures at the Walter and Eliza Hall Institute
a t times to be notified.
Clinical instruction at the Melbourne Hospital
will be given on Tuesdays aud Fridays a t
9.30 a.m., by Dr. R. R. Wottenhall, and on
Mo'ndavs and Thursdays a t 9.30 a.m. by Dr
J. H. 'Kelly.
<13a
10 IS
DETAILS OF SUBJECTS. 193$.
The relative number of Lectures and of Clinical
demonstrations will he subject to notification from time
to time.
Clinical Instruction in Diseases of the Skin will bo given
at St. Vincent's Hospital by Dr. K. G. Colquhoun on
Tuesdays and Fridays at 2.30 p.m., and by Mr. H. J.
Williams on Wednesdays and Saturdays at 9.30 a.m.
Clinical Instruction in Diseases of the Skin will be given
at the Alfred Hospital by Mr. Stanley Shields on Tuesdays a t 2 p.m. and Fridays a t 9 a.m.
MENTAL DISEASES.
The course as arranged by the Inspector-General of
Insane provides for a minimum of 12 Lectures or Demonstrations; the majority of- which will be given at the
Mental Hospital. and Receiving House, Royal Park, by
Dr. J. K. Adey, Medical Superintendent. This portion of tho course will include Lectures on Classification
and Certification, aud Demonstrations will be given on
cases of recent origin.
Dr. C. Farrau-Ridgc will give one Lecture at Mont
Park on General Paralysis, and one Lecture Demonstration on the Pathology of Mental Diseases.
Text Books: —
Psychological Medicine—Maurice Craig.
Aide to Psychiatry—Dawson.
The Psychology of Insanity—Bernard H a r t .
FKVKRS.
Clinical instruction in Fevers will he given at the Queen'*
Memorial Infect ions Diseases Hospital by the Medical Superintendent on Tuesdays and Fridays, a t 2 p.m. The class
is divided as found necessary.
DISEASES OF THE THROAT, NOSE AND EAR.
Instruction iu Diseases of tho Throat, Nose and Ear will
be given at the Melbourne Hospital by Dr. G. C. Scan.
tlebury on Mondays and Thursdays a t 9 a.m. and ou
Tuesdays and Fridays at 9 a.m.
MEDICINE
1 01 9
Instruction will be given a t the Alfred Hospital by
Mr. A. Blaubaum, on Tuesdays a t 2 p.m. (operating),
and Fridays, a t 9 ;a.m.; and by Mr. B. Foster on
Fridays a t 2 p.m. (operating), and Tuesdays a t 9 a.m.
Instruction will be given at the Eye and Ear Hospital by
t h e following Surgeons: —
Dr. D. McArthur, Fridays, 2 p.m.
Dr. N. Puckle: Wednesdays, 2 p.m.
Dr. L. Johnston: Thursdays, 2 p.m.
Dr. Jean Littlcjohn, Mondays, 2 p.m.
Dr. Eric Gntteridge, Mondays, 9 a.m.
Dr. N. Box, Tuesdays, 2 p.m.
Clinical Lectures and Demonstrations will be given
as in Ophthalmology.
For any information apply to Dr, Mark Gardner,
Dean of the Clinical School, "l2 Collins Street.
The students may if thoy so desire arrange to attend
the hospital on other days than are set out above.
Instruction will be given a t St. Vincent's Hospital by
the following instructors :—
Dr. R.. Hennessy. on Tiiosdu.vs. a t 9.30 a.m.
Dr. H . S. Forrest, on Fridays, a t 9.30 a.m.
ANiESTHETICS.
Tho following Instructors in Anaesthetics have been
recognised by the Faculty of Medicine:—
Melbourne Hospital—(Mr. F . W. Green, Dr. H . C.
Disher, Dr. G. L. Lillies, Dr. E. Gandevia,
Dr. J. G. Bowen Allen, Dr. D. G. Rcnton,
Dr. R. W. D. Fisher, Dr. R. W. Howden.
St. Vincent's Hospital—Mr. F . L. Davies, Mr. V.
M. O'Grady, Mr. F . E. Keanc, Mr. T. Whitta-m.
Alfred Hospital—Dr. W. L. Colquhoun, Dr. G. A.
Kaye. Dr. G. L. Lillies, Dr. D. G. Renton,
Dr. Newport B. White, Dr. R. H. Orton, Dr.
L. F . Nicholson, Dr. W. H. Rennick.
Women's Hospital—Mr. P . W. Green, Mr. C. Cunningham, Dr. li. Friedman, Dr. W. A. Kemp, Dr. W.
L. Colquhoun, Dr. R. W. Hornabrook. and the
Medical Snpurin ten dent.
.1120
VENERRAL DISEASES.
The following instructors in Venereal Diseases have been
recognised by the Faculty :
Melbourne Hospital — Dr. West-more Stephens..
Mondays and Thursdays, 4 p.m.
Alfred Hospital—Mr. H . G. Furnell, Mr. C. A. M.
Renou, Mr. H . N. Mortensen, Mr. H. A.
Phillips.
Queen Victoria Hospital—Dr. E l l a MaoKnight.
NOTICE.
Medical Graduates are warned that, if they
are not registered by t h e Medical Board o f
V i c t o r i a , they w i l l be unable t o secure registrat i o n in t h e United K i n g d o m .
Further, they
m u s t procure someone in England w h o can
personally identify t h e m .
D E T A I L S O F SUBJECTS F O B EXAMINATION F O B
FINAL HONOURS AND SCHOLARSHIPS I N
FEBRUARY. 193s.
The relative weight of subjecte is:—Medicine, 3 ;
Surgery, 3 ; Obstetrics and Gynaecology, 2.
MEDICINE.
The examination in Medicine will include a written
paper, a commentary, essay or discussion, a clinical and
oral examination, and a practical examination in Clinical Pathology,
*
SURGERY'.
The examination in Surgery will include a written
paper, operative surgery, a commentary, essay or discussion and a clinical and oral examination.
MEDICINE
OBSTETRICS AND GYNECOLOGY.
The examination in Obstetrics will include a
paper, a commentary, essay or discussion and a
and oral examination.
The examination in Gynaecology will include
t e n paper, a commentary, essay or discussion,
cal and oral examination.
1021
written
clinical
a writa clini-
ANNOUNCEMENT.
APPOINTMENT OF RESIDENT MEDICAL OFFICERS.
The Committee of Management. ot the Royal Melbourne Hospital will appoint for 1938 twelve first year
resident officers for one year and ten second year resident
medical officers for one year. First year resident medical
officers do six months house physicianship and six
months house surgeonship.
The Managers of St. Vincent's Hospital will appoint fo r
1938 eight resident medical officers for ono year from
amongst the students who have received their clinical trainng a t that Hospital.
The Committee ot the Alfred Hospital will appoint for
193S fourteen resident medical officers for one year.
-j
In all these appointments the Hospital Managers will
take into consideration—
Training in their own hospital;
The position of graduates in tho honour list;
Their general character and disposition as shown
during their course.
The Committees of the Colac, Kyneton, Wangaratta, and
Warrnambool Hospitals and ot the Children's Hospital,
Perth, W.A., also appoint resident medical officers from
time to time.
10^2
O E T A I L S O F SUBJECTS FOR EXAMINATIONS FOE
D E G R E E S OK DOCTOR OF MEDICINE AND
MASTER OF SURGERY TO BE HELD IN
1938.
DOCTOR OF MEDICINE.
FOR CANDIDATES PROCEEDING BY
EXAMINATION.
PHYSIOLOGY—
Systematic Physiology of the standard indicated by the
.following books—
Lovatt Evans—Recent Advances in Physiology.
Pryde—Recent • Advances in Bio-chemistry.
Maxwell—Clinical Biochemistry.
The candidate is also expected to have read the more
important articles in the various journals of physiology
published in the preceding twelve months in the English
Language.
PATHOLOGY, INCLUDING IMMUNOLOGY—
The scope of the subject is Pathology (general and
special), in relation to general medicine. It will include
Immunology, relevant microbiology and a practical examination ot macroscopic and microscopic specimens.
It is recommended that in addition to standard text
books of Pathology the pathological sections of some
standard work on medicine be studied. A knowledge
ot appropriate matter in current periodicals in th»
English language will be expected.
Book recommended: —
Boyd—The Pathology ot Internal Diseases.
MEDICINE, including the History of Medicine—
Tho examination includes the whole subject. Knowledge is expected of neurology,
psychiatry, and
medical diseases of childhood.
Candidates will be required, as part of the examination, to show practical acquaintance with the
methods of Medical Ophthalmoscopy and Laryngoscopy.
I
MEDICINE
1023
and to be familiar with the microscopical, chemical
and bacteriological methods tor the investigation of
the blood, exudates cerebro-spinal fluid, saliva, gastric
contents and the excretions : together with the clinical
significance of the results of these investigations.
Price—Text-book ot Medicine.
Lewis—Diseases of the Heart
Foster Moore—Medical Ophthalmology.
Recent Advances Series (relevant volumes).
Craig and Beaton—Psychological Medicine.
Ross—The Common Neuroses.
Still—Common Disorders of Childhood.
Singer—Short History of Medicine.
For reference: —
Garrison—History of Medicine.
Candidates are also expected to acquaint themselves
with the more important articles of medical interest in
the current British periodicals.
FOR CANDIDATES PROCEEDING BY THESIS.
RESOLUTION OP THE FACULTY OF MEDICINE, 22ND J U L Y ,
1914—
" That in the opinion of the Faculty a Thesis
(1) Should not he auy ordinary compilation from
books
(2) Nor a mere compendium of cases
(3) Nor merely observational.
(4) Hut should be a substantial contribution to
knowledge and
(5) Should he in fit form tor publication or be
already published in approved form and
(6) Should show work at least equal to t h a t involved in preparation for the examination
in Medicine for the Degree of M.D. by written questions."
Examination in Clinical Medicine for Ciindidates proceeding
by Thesis.
The Examination in Clinical Medicine for such candidates includes examination of patients, and oral exam-
1024
DETAILS OF SUBJECI'S, 19'8.
ination. I t includes a test of practical acquaintance
with methods of medical ophthalmoscopy and laryngoscopy, and may include test ot practical acquaintance
with methods of examining secretions, including gastric
and intestinal contents.
MASTER OF SURGERY.
PART I.
ANATOMY—
Frazer —Anatomy of the Human Skeleton.
Any one of the "following: —
Cunningham—Text-book ot Anatomy.
Gray—Anatomy.
Morris—Human Anatomy.
PHYSIOLOGY—
Recent Advances in Physiology (last edition).
PART n .
6UEGICAL ANATOMY—
An oral examination in Anatomy with special refer,
enoc to Surgical Procedure on t h e body.
SURGICAL PATHOLOGY—
The scope of the examination ia Pathology and
Bacteriology in special relation to Surgery.
Boyd—Surgical Pathology.
Illingworth and Dick—A Text-book of Surgical
Pathology.
MacFarland—Surgical Pathology.
In addition, the Surgical text-books and current
surgical journals.
" The examination will include eiamination of macroscopic and microscopic specimens.
SURGERY (including General and Operative Surgery
and the History of these subjeots).
Choyce—System of Surgery.
Rowlands and Turner—The Operations of Surgery
Modern Operative Snrgery, ed, by G. Grey
Turner.
MEDICINE
1026-
Candidates for the M.S.degree are also recommended,
to read—
The British Journal of Surgery.
Collected Papers of t h e Mayo Clinio.
DETAILS
OF SUBJECTS FOR
POST-GRADUATE
MEDICAL DIPLOMAS FOR 1938.
DIPLOMA OF
PUBLIC
HEALTH.
PART -I..
BACTERIOLOGY, ENTOMOLOGY AND PARASITOLOGY—
'
Laboratory Practice -will include :—
1. The Bacteriology of Air, Water, Sewage, Soil and Food
(1) Methods for determining numbers and characters
of micro-organisms present in air, Water, sewage,,
soil, food (fresh aud preserved), with special
•reference to milk and milk products.
(2) Detection of pathogenic organisms, tubercle,
diphtheria, streptococci, typhoid, para-typhoid,,
dysentery, cholera, etc.
(3) Micro-organisms associated with food poisoning.
(4) Indications of excremental contamination. Determination ot the presence of B. coli; CI.
wclchii; Streptococcus foecalis.
(5) Germ carriers.
(6) Bacteriological standardisation of disinfectants.
'2. Microbiology in relation to Infection and InfectiousDiseases, including Diseases of Animals transmissible to
Man.
Tubercle, leprosy, syphilis, actinomycosis, anthrax,
enteric fever, dysentery, cholera, diphtheria,
plague, pneumonia, cerebrospinal meningitis,,
poliomyelitis, hydrophobia, influenza, gonococcal infections, septicaemia and pyaemia.
1026
3. Parasitology.
(1) Protozoa-, amoebiasis, coccidiosis, malaria, trypanosomiasis, etc.
(2) Plaiyhelminthes : flukes, tapeworms.
(3) Nemathelminthes (Round worms): hook-worms,
trichinosis.
(4) Arthropoda.
4. Immunity, its principles and their application to the
.prevention uf Infeitious Diseases including :—
(1) Practical methods of immunisation.
(2) Serological tests:—complement fixation, agglutination, and precipitin tests, etc.
(3) Allergic teste: tuberculin, Schick test, eto.
(4) The action of toxins and antitoxins.
(5) Preparation and standardisation of vaccines;
antiscra, etc.
For Text-books and books for reference see M.B.B.S.
course.
CHEMISTRY AS A P P L I E D TO PUBLIC HEALTH—
Laboratory Practice will include :—
(1) Air analysis-. Humidity, carbonic acid, oxygen,
carbonic oxide, etc.
(2) Water analysis : Total solids and main ingredients
thereof, acidity or alkalinity, hardness, chlorides,
nitrates and nitrites, free and albuminoid
ammonia, reducing power.
(3) Food analysis: Such typical foods as milk, bread,
meat; alcoholic and non-alcoholic beverages.
(4) 1'nisons, preservatives nnd disinfectants : Detection
and determination.
PHYSIOLOGY, BIO-PHYSICS, AND UIO-CHEMISTRY
AS APPLIED TO PUHLIC HEALTH —
Laboratory Practice will include:—
Determination ot physical properties of physiological
fluids—specific gravity, viscosity, rotation of polarised light, osmotic pressure, retractive index,
extinction coefficient, etc.
MEDICINE
1027
Detection and estimation ot air impurities. Effects on
the animal body of oxygen starvation and of
carbon dioxide. Vitiation of air by breathing
and by combustion ot fuel.
Thermometry in physiology. Rate ot evaporation of
sweat. Estimation of the heat-retaining properties of clothing materials. Microscopy ot
clothing materials.
Calorimetry ot foods. Microscopy of foods. Preparation of food diagrams. Basal metabolism.
PART IT.
ADMINISTRATION, SANITARY LAW AND VITALSTATISTICS—
1. ADMINISTRATION—
(1) History of the evolution ot Public Health.
(2) State administration.
(3) Municipal administration.
(4) Enforcement of sanitary laws.
(5) Administrative
control
of
disease — State,.
Municipal and Commonwealth.
(6) Public Health education.
(7) Details of office administration and equipment.
2.
SANITARY LAW—
(1) General knowledge of English health laws.
(2) Victorian Acts and Regulations—
Health Acts, Venereal Diseases Act, 1928 r
Nurses Registration Act, 1928, MidwivesAct, 1928, Masseurs Act, 1928, Goods Act.
1928 (so far as it relates to public health),.
Dairy Supervision Act, 1928, Local Government Act, 1928 (so far as it relates to
public health), Cemeteries Acts.
(3) Commonwealth Acts and Regulations—
Quarantine Act, Navigation Act (so tar as itrelates to Food and Health).
(4), Powers, duties and responsibilities of Medical
Officers ot Health and Health Inspectors.
(5) Notices, forms, orders, etc.
8. VITAL STATISTICS—
(1) Statistical calculations.
1Q28
(2)
(3)
• (4)
Statistical graphics.
Enumeration and registration.
PopulationMethods of estimation—Classification ot population—Standard population.
(5) Birth rates, marriage rates, death rates.
(6) Morbidity rates.
(7) Occupational diseases.
(8) Life tables—use of and methods of computation.
.ETIOLOGY, DIAGNOSIS AND PREVENTION OF
DISEASE—
(1) Infectious parasitic and insect-borne diseases.
(2) Industrial diseases.
(3) Morbid conditions produced by environment.
(4) Venereal diseases.
(5) Tuberculosis services.
(6) Infant and maternity welfare.
(7) School medical inspection.
(8) International and interstate control of disease.
(9) Epidemiology.
• (10) Preparation, storage, distribntion and use of sera,
vaccines and other biological products.
(11) Methods of disinfection and vermin destruction.
GENERAL H Y G I E N E
Climatology)—
(including
Meteorology
and
(1). GENERAL H Y G I E N E —
(a) Influence ot meteorological and
geological
conditions on health.
(b)- Food supplies—Sources, manufacture, preparation,
preservation, adulteration, storage, distribution
and inspection. Effects of bad, innutritions,
or insufficient food. '
(e) Disposal ot tho dead—Cemeteries—principles in
;
- - - - selecting sites—Burial customs ot various races
•' —Disposal of bodies during war and pestilence.
Mortuaries.
••••,-•.'
(d) Insanitary environment—Effects of overcrowd-,.
J
ing, vitiated air, impure water.
' "'"
(e) Industrial hygiene.
• ' '• •
MEDICINE
1029..
( / ) Personal hygiene.
(g) Offensive and dangerous trades, sanitation of.
(h) Sanitation of dwellings, factories, public buildings, hospitals, schools and public baths.
(t) Sanitation ot ships.
(j) Nuisances—detection ot and remedying same.
(li) School aud swimming baths hygiene.
(I) Military aud naval hygiene.
(m) Tropical hygiene.
(2). METEOROLOGY AND CLIMATOLOGY—
The course ot instruction will include
(a) Instruments.
(b) Recording and reduction of observations.
(c) Climatology—climatic elements.
(d) Synoptic Weather—special application to Australian conditions.
(e) Australian Climatology.
(f) Climate and health.
SANITARY ENGINEERING AND BUILDING CONSTRUCTION—
(1) Water supply and conservancy—Quantity per
head ; relative eligibility of available sources of
supply; estimation ot yield ; method of utilising
and protecting various sources of supply; storage,
subsidence and filtration and other methods of
purification ; conveyance and distribution;
method of tapping a main under pressure;
causes, detection, and treatment of contaminated
supply.
(2) Excreta, domestic and trade refuse—Nature and
quantity; storage, collection, removal and disposal.
(3) Drains, drainage, sewage aud scavenging—design
and construction of drains and sewers, aud of
" •
sewage treatment works. Conveyance of drainage and sewage. Purification and disposal of
sewage — mechanical, chemical and biological
methods. Scavenging.
• ••
{4)- Sanitary planning and' construction of buildings
—Hospitals, schools, theatres and other public
1Q30
buildings, public baths and wash-houses, factories (inclusive of noxious c- offensive or
dangerous trade premises),
establishments
connected with food supplies, dwelling-houses,
barracks, camps, ships. Causes and prevention ot dampness in buildings.
(5) Lighting, warming, cooling and ventilation—
Characteristics and fitness of various means
and methods iu use.
(6) Materials used for buildings and sanitary work—
Character, qualities, and fitness of materials:
Brick, stone, sand, lime, cement, concrete,
earthenware, stoneware, metals, wood, paintsand other coatings.
SANITARY INVESTIGATION AND REPORTING—
Each candidate will be required to investigate some
specified set of sanitary circumstances prescribed by the
Board of Examiners and report thereon.
EXAMINATIONS.
Examinations, which will include written, oral and
practical tests, will be held in tho following subjects—
For P a r t I.—
(n) Bacteriology, entomology aud parasitology.
(h) Chemistry as applied to public health,
(c) Physiology, bio-physics and bio-chemistry as
applied to public health.
For Part II.—
(n) Aetiology diagnosis and prevention of disease.
(b) General hygiene including meteorology and
climatology.
(i) Sanitary Engineering and building construction,
(rf) Administration, sanitary law and vital statistics.
(e) Sanitary investigation and reporting.
The details.of subjects.shall be as prescribed herein but
such details shall not be construed as limiting the power of
examiners to tost the knowledge ot the candidates iu any
branch of Public Health.
MEDICINE
1031
RECOMMENDATIONS AND ANNOUNCEMENTS.
BOOKS RECOMMENDED.
Latest editions ot
Kenwood—Public Health Laboratory Work (H..
K. Lewis, 136 Gower Street, London, W.C.).
Mackie and McCartney—An Introduction to Practical Bacteriology.
and Immunity.
Rosenau—Preventive Medicine and Hygiene (Appleton).
Johnston—Australian Meat Inspection. (W. R a m say).
Francis Wood—Practical Sanitary Engineering.
Nicholson—Smoke Abatement, 2nd edition. (C.
Griffin and Co. Ltd., Strand, London).
Reference may be made also to :—
Zinsser and Bayne-Jones—Text-Book of Bacteriology.
Blake—Drainage and Sanitation. (Hatsford, 94 High>
Holborn, London).
Turncauro and Russell—Public Water Supplies.
Metcalfe and Eddy—Modern Sewerage Practice.
Victorian Y'ear Book.
Wiley—Foods and their Adulteration.
Thresh and Porter—Preservation of Food and Food'
Examination. (J. & A. Churchill, 7 Great Marlborough Street, London).
Australian Meteorological Observer's Handbook.
H u n t Taylor and Quayle—Climate and Weather
ot Australia.
Brooks—Climate.
Brunt—Meteorology (Oxford World Manuals).
Barkley—Zones of Relative Physical Comfort inAustralia (Met. Office Bulletin, No. 20).
Candidates are also advised to study the current periodical literature of the subjects in the monthly " Journal of the Boyal Sanitary I n s t i t u t e " (Offices: 90>
Buckingham Palace Road, London, S.W.), the quarterly
64
1.032
" J o u r n a l of Hygiene" (Cambridge University Press Warehouse, Fetter Lane, London), the Bulletin of Hygiene,
t h e publications issued by the Ministry of Health,
England, the Medical Research Council, The Health
Department of the Commonwealth of Australia, and
the Commis3:on of Public Health, Victoria.
HOSPITALS,
INSTITUTIONS
AND
TEACHERS
RECOGNISED BY THE UNIVERSITY COUNCIL
FOR T H E PURPOSES OF T H E REGULATION.
{1) INFECTIOUS
DISEASES—Instruction in.
The prescribed course of instruction will be provided by
the Medical Superintendant of the Queen's Memorial
Infectious Diseases Hospital (Dr. F. V. Scholes). Times
of attendance or period of residence to be fixed by
arrangement..
<2) METEOROLOGY—Instruction in.
The prescribed course of instruction will be provided by
the Commonwealth Meteorologist (Mr. W. s. Watt), at
tho Bureau of Meteorology, at such times as may
be arranged by him.
(3) QUARANTINE, MARINE SANI'I'ATION, SERA
AND VACCINES.
• Tho courses ot instruction in relation to Quarantine
Services (International and Interstate control of disease),
marine sanitation, and in the preparation of sera and
vaccines will be provided under the direction of the
Commonwealth Director-General of Health (Dr. J. H. L.
Cumpston).
(4) MEDICAL OFFICER of HEALTH'S DUTIES.
Instruction iu the duties pertaining to the office ot
Medical Officer of Health will be provided by the Medical
Officer of Health of the City of Melbourne (Dr. John
Dale), or by such other Medical Officer of Health as
may be approved.
MEDICINE.
1033
<5) ADMINISTRATION, PUBLIC MEDICAL
SERVICES AND SANITARY ENGINEERING, ETC.
Instruction in Sanitary Administration, Public Medical
Services, Control of Intra-state Diseases, Food Inspection,
Building Construction, and Sanitary Engineering will
bo provided or arranged tor by the Chief Health Officer,
Victoria (Dr. 11. N. Featonby).
<6) VITAL STATISTICS.
The prescribed course ot instruction in Vital Statistics
will be given by Professor L. F. Giblin.
FEES.
(1) For Instruction:
(a) Laboratory Practice in Bacteriology,
Parasitology
and
Entomology;
Chemistry and Physiology, BioPhysics and Bio Chemistry, at tho
University Laboratories ...
... .£15 15 0
(b) Infectious Diseases at the Queen's
Memorial Infectious Diseases Hospital
...
...
...
...As arranged
(c) Meteorology at the Commonwealth
Bureau of Meteorology ...
...
2 2 0
(d) Quarantine Services, etc, the duties
of a Medical Officer of Health, Administration, Public Medical Services, Sanitary Planning, etc.
...
15 15 0
t(2)
For Examination:
(a) For each part (1. and If.)
...
... 5 5 0
(b) For a Supplementary Examination :
1. For one subject
...
.... 2 2 0
2. For two subjects
...
... 3 3 0
Pees for (I) (a) and (d) and for (2) to be paid to the
University; other fees to be paid to the Institution concerned.
DIPLOMA OF OPTUALMOLOGY.
Anatomy including Histology.
The examination will include the general anatomy of the
orbit and the oyoball as well as of the nerves aud cerebral
1034
centres connected with vision and the histology of theseparts.
In addition to the text-book accounts it is expected t h a t
current English periodical literature will be read.
Physiology including Physiological Optics.
The physiology ot vision and such physiological optics as
are necessary to understand the testing ot optical defects
and the prescribing of glasses.
Ophthalmology.
The medicine and surgery of vision in all its aspects.
Percival—Refraction of the Eye.
Thorington—Methods of Refraction.
Duke Elder—Refraction.
Fuchs (Duane)—Text-book of Ophthalmology.
Duke Elder—Text-book of Ophthalmology.
Parsons—Diseases of the Eye.
Whitnall—Anatomy of Orbit.
Collins aud Mayou—Bacteriology and Pathology;
Volume in Pyle—System of Ophthalmic Practice.
Moller—Ophthalmic Surgery.
Beaid—Ophthalmic Surgery.
Ida Mann—Development of Human Eye.
Duke rider—Recent Advances in Ophthalmology.
Brain and Strauss—Recent Advances in Neurology.
Polhijloiii/.
The examination will include general pathology, and
require a special knowledge of pathological conditions
affecting the apparatus of vision.
I t is recommended t h a t iu addition to standard text
books of Pathology the pathological sections of standard works on the specialty be studied.
A knowledge
of appropriate matter in current periodicals in the
English language will be expected.
Bacteriology.
Candidates will be expected to have a general knowledge
of the more common micro-organisms, both pathogenic and
saprophytic, and their recognition by microscopic a n d
MEDICINE.
1035
cultural methods. Serological methods as applied to the
identification of specific organisms, and to the diagnosis of
specific infections. Vaccines and sera as used in treatment.
In addition a more specialised knowledge of certain groups
of bacteria which are of particular importance in relation
to Ophthalmology.
Books recommended ;—
Maekie and McCartney —Introduction to Practical
Bacteriology (4th ed.),
Zinsser and Bayne-Jonss—Text-book ot Bacteriology.
Topley and Wilson—Principles of Bacteriology and
Immunity (2nd ed.).
DIPLOMA O F LARYNGOLOGY AND OTOLOGY.
Anatomy, Embryology and Physiology.
The examination will include the general anatomy and
physiology of the ear, nose, throat, pharynx, larynx,
trachea, bronchi and oesophagus, together with the
development of these parts.
In addition t o the text-book accounts it is expected t h a t
current English periodical literature will be read.
Medicine, Surgery (including Operative Surgery).
The medicine and surgery of the ear, nose, throat,
pharynx, larynx, trachea, bronchi and oesophagus.
Pathology.
The examination will include general pathology, and
require a special knowledge of pathological conditions
affecting the ear, nose, throat, pharynx, larynx,
trachea, bronchi and oesophagus.
I t is recommended that in addition to standard text
books of Pathology, the pathological sections of standard works on the specialty be studied. A knowledge
of appropriate matter in current periodicals in the English language will be expected.
Bacteriology.
-of the more common micro-organisms, both pathogenic and
.saprophytic, aud their recognition by microscopic and
1036
specific infections. Vaccines and sera as used in treatment.
In addition a more specialised knowledge ot certain groups
of bacteria which are of particular importance in relation
to Laryngology and .Otology.
Mackie and McCartney—Introduction to Practical
Bacteriology (4th ed.).
Zinsser and Hayne-.Tones—Text-book of Bacteriology.
Topley and Wilson—Principles ot Bacteriology and
Immunity (2nd ed.).
DIPLOMA OF GYNAECOLOGY AND OBSTETRICS—
PAKT
I.
Anatomy, including Histology and Embryology.
Candidates will be expected to have a sound knowledgeot the anatomy of the female pelvis and abdomen ; the
general cmbryologica-l development of the foetus and
placenta, the development of the female genitalia, and
the histology of these parts.
Ciinninghii.ni or Gray's Anatomy.
Physiology.
Candidates must have a knowledge ot the physiology
of tho pelvic organs ; the involuntary nervous system ;
tho endocrine system ; metabolism ; the secretion of urine y
lactation.
The appropriate chapters in the following -.—
Ivan Maxwell—Clinical Biochemistry.
Recent Advances in Physiology (latest edition).
PAKT
II.
Obstetrics, including Infant Welfare, and Gynaecology.
A thorough knowledge will be expected of both subjectsas discussed in the standard textbooks.
MEDICINE.
1037
Books recommended for referenoe:—
Obstetrics.
Williams—Obstetrics.
Do Lee—Obstetrics.
University Lecture Notes.
Tweedy—Practical Obstetrics.
Gynaecology.
Eden and Lockyer.
Berkeley and Bonney—Gynaecological Surgery.
Crossen—Operative Gynaecology.
Blair Bell—Principlee of Gynaecology.
Pathology.
The examination will include general pathology and a
special knowledge of the pathology of diseases peculiar to
women. In addition to the standard text-books the
pathological sections of standard works should be
studied. A knowledge of appropriate matter in current
periodicals in the English language will be expected.
Pathology.
Teacher—Manual of Obstetrical and Gynaecological
Pathology.
Frank—Obstetrical and Gynaecological Pathology.
Bacteriology.
ot the more common micro-organisms, both pathogenic and
saprophytic, and their recognition by microscopic and
specific infections. Vaccines and seraas used in treatment.
In addition a more specialised knowledge of certain groups
of bacteria which are ot particular importance in relation
to Obstetrics and Gynaecology.
Bacteriology.
Maclde and McCartney—Introduction to Practical
Bacteriology (4th ed.).
11038
Zinsser and Bayne-Jones—Text-book ot Bacteriology
and Immunity (2nd ed.).
In all subjects candidates will be expected to have a
knowledge of appropriate matter in current literature in
•the English language.
ANNOUNCEMENTS
The recognized special hospital is the Women's Hospital.
The recognized gynaecological departments of a general
hospital are those of the Melbourne, Alfred and St. Vincent's
Hospitals.
The approved instructors are as follows—
Operative Obstetrics—Drs. Wilson and Green (W.H.)
Pathology and Bacteriology—Professor MacCallum
and Professor Woodruff.
Badhim Therapy—Drs. Cuscaden (W.H.); Chambers
(M.U.); Fowler (A.H.) ; O'Sullivan (St. V.)
Venereal Diseases—Drs. Cook, (W.H.); Chambers
(M.H.); Fowler (A.H.); O'Sullivan (St. V.)
Infant Welfare—Dr. Kate Campbell (Carlton B.H.
Training Centre.)
TYPES OF APPROVED
STUDY.
I.
.Resident Medical Officers—
(a) One year as resident medical officer a t the
Women's Hospital;
or
(b) A period not exceeding six months as gynaecolog
ical resident medical officer at oue of t h e
approved general hospitals and the balance ot
the year as a resident medical oflicer at the
Women's Hospital or other recognized special
hospital. Six months of this period must be
spent as an obstetric resident medical officer;
II.
Members of the Honorary Staff of an approved Hospital—
(a) For those who have held a position as clinical
assistant in the gynaecological department o t t h e
Women's Hospital or of a recognized general
MEDICINE.
| (j.Jg
hospital for one year, a period ot six months as
a temporary clinical assistant in the obstetric
department of the Women's Hospital;
(b)
ITT,
Por those who have held the position of an obste"
trie clinical assistant a t the Women's Hospital
for one year, a period of six months as clinical
assistant in gynaecology at the Women's Hospital or at a recognized general hospital.
These appointments should entail ono morning or
afternoon attendance per week in each subject.
Graduates who have held no hospital appointments—
One j'ear as temporary clinical assistant iu both Obstetrics and Gynaecology at the Women's Hospital.
Graduates may submit a statement of previous experience in both subjects to the Faculty, who may
grant exemption for a portion ot the year's study.
The remainder of the period must be served at
the Women's Hospital.
SPECIAL COURSES OF INSTRUCTION
Operative Obstetrics—
A course of six demonstrations at theWouien's Hospital
held in January and February of each year.
Pathology and Bacteriology—
Courses in each subject held in the appropriate departments of the University during the Third Term.
Radium Therapy and Venereal Diseases—
A series of six demonstrations in each subject given by
the approved instructors at the various recognized hospitals.
These may be taken at any period of the year.
Infant Welfare —
A course of four demonstrations at tho Carlton Baby
Health Training Centre in December of each
year.
1Q40
DETAILS OF SUBJEOTS, 19U8.
Qeneral Clinical Instruction—
Apart from the routine clinical work at the various
hospitals a special course is held at the Women's
Hospital twice weekly during December, January
"••
and February. This is conducted by the Professor of Obstetrics and the senior members of
the Honorary-Staff.
DIPLOMAS OF THERAPEUTIC' RADIOLOGY AND
•;
ELECTRICITY AND DIAGNOSTIC RADIOLOGY.
ANATOMY—
The examination will include the general anatomy
pertinent to t h e subject, and the candidate will be expected to be familiar with current literature as well
.as standard text-book teaching.
•PHYSIOLOGY—
The detailed Physiology of the Alimentary, Circulatory, Renal, Reproductive and Respiratory systems. Localisation of function in the
Central Nervous System.
The Cerebrospinal Fluid. The Pituitary gland.
PHYSICS—
The Course in Physics for candidates for the Diploma of Diagnostic Radiology is P a r t I .
The Course for candidates for the Diploma of
'Therapeutic Radiology and Electri«ity is P a r t I and
Part II.
Physics and
its applications to Radio-diagnosis and
Radio-therapy.
P a r t I.—A course of about fifteen lectures with
practical work in the first and second terms.
P a r t II.— A course of about fifteen lectures in tho
second and third terms with practical work in those
terms and in the long vacation.
P a r t IAlternating currents.
The transformer.
High
voltage measurement by spark gap and
MEDICINE.
104].
electrostatic voltmeter.
Thermionic currents. The two electrode thermionic valve.
Mechanical and valve rectified high tension
generators.
The Electromagnetic spectrum from gamma rays
t o long x-rays.
The production of x-raye.
Their properties.
Ionization and photographic action. General
and characteristic x-rays. The distribution
of the energy in the x-ray spectrum.
Absorption and scattering of x-rays. The elimination of scattering in radiology.
.' ;
The physical principles underlying special 'diagnostic apparatus
Einstein's law Ve =
hi'. The x-ray tube for
diagnosis.
Protection against injury by x-rays.
Design of radio-diagnostic laboratories.
Part I I .
The wave form of high tension generators. I t e
effect ou the quality and quantity of x-rays.
More detailed study of valve rectified high
tension generators.
The therapeutic x-ray
tube.
Further consideration of absorption and scattering.
The Compton effect. The Dessauer diagram
for contact, radium, and deep therapy. X ray filters.
X-ray spectra. Measurennent of wave-length. X-ray
spectrometers.
The measurement of the intensity of x-rays.
Mechanism ot tho ionising action ot x-rays.
The expression of dosage in ronlgens. Photographic
measurement, of intensity.
Discussion of the physical basis of some of the
theories ot the biological action of x-rays.
The design of a radio-therapy clinic.
Radioactivity.—
The alpha, beta, gamma rays. Their ionization,
heating and photographic effects.
The absorption of gamma rays. The Compton effect..
,1042
The
uranium-radium scries of elements, with
special reference to radium, radon and its
active deposit.
The chermical properties of radium.
The measurement of radium and radon.
The preparation of radon for therapeutic use.
PRACTICAL COURSE.
JPractical work in x-rays.—
Part I.
1. Simple tests of a transformer.
2. Current-voltage characteristic of a thermionic
tube.
3. Description
of the construction
(including
schematic wiring diagram) and operation of
a generator used by the candidate in taking
a radiograph, or one used in therapy.
4. Determination ot photographic density.
6.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Part I I .
Determination of the absorption coefficient of
x- or gamma rays.
Calibration of the milliammeter and voltmeter
and phasing of the rectifier of a therapeutic
plant.
Photographing of an x-ray spectrum.
Measurement of dosage by ionization of air.
Determination of the degree of protection in an
x-ray or radium laboratory.
Fractical work i n radioactivity-—
10. Construction of electroscopes and the measurement of gamma ray intensity. The application of the inverse square law in the
measurement of radium or radon.
11. Measurement of the absorption coefficient of,
say, lead and copper for gamma rays.
12. Measurement of the growth ot gamma ray
activity from a freshly prepared radon
source.
.13. A demonstration of the preparation of radon
for therapeutic use, including t h e manufacture of needles, etc.
MEDICINE.
14.
1U43-
Measurement of gamma radiation by the photographic method.
RADIOTHERAPY AND ELECTROTHERAPY.—
High frequency currents: methods of production;,
measurement and general properties.
The application of high frequency currents i n
medicine and surgery.
RADIODIAGNOSIS.—
X-ray machines, tubes and accessories; their choice,.
use and maintenance.
The various exposure factors; their use in controlling exposure. Determination of relative
speeds and other qualities of films and intensifying screens. Construction and use of
exposure charts.
Radiographic technique iu the examination of all
parts of the body. Technique of fluoroscopic
examinations. Use of contrast media. Location of foreign bodies.
Methods of marking films for identification. Dark
room equipment and technique. Subsequent
photographic
processes;
prints,
lantern
slides, etc.
Interpretation of films; differential diagnosis; correlation with clinical findings. Methods of
reporting.
Organisation of an x-ray department, the keeping:
of records, eto.
PATHOLOGY.—
Diploma of Therapeutic Radiology and
Electricity.—
The course will consist of from fifteen to twenty
lectures and demonstrations on the appropriate sections
of general and regional Pathology, including special
consideration of the action of radiotherapeutic agent*
on normal aiid pathological tissues.
1Q44
DETAILS OF -SUBJECTS, 1938.
Diploma of Diagnostic Radiology.—
The course will consist of from fifteen to twenty
lectures and demonstrations on general and regional
Pathology, with special reference to structural and
functional variations which may be brought into evidence by radiodiagnostic methods.
DIPLOMA OF PSYCHOLOGICAL MEDICINE.
1.
Anatomy.
Candidates will be expected to be familiar with accounts
of the structure of the nervous system as given in the
standard text books ot Anatomy. In addition thoy should
read the more recent work of Ariens Kappers, Herriok and
others published in book foim. The literature contained
in such journals as the Journal of Anatomy and Brain
should be read by candidates during their course. I t will
also be expected of candidates that they are acquainted with
the microscopic structure of the nervous system as
set out in standard text books on Histology and with the
development of the nervous system as comprised in text
books of Embryology, more especially as this ontogenetic
development throws light on the phylogenetic attainment
of human conditions.
2.
Physiology;
The systematic physiology of the central and peripheral nervous systems and endocrine glands as given
in tEe last edition of Samson Wright's Applied
Physiology. In addition, the candidate should have
read. Sherrington's Lrtegrative Action of the Nervous
System, the articles on the central nervous system iu
Schafer's Physiology (Vol. I I , 1900), Aphasia by Henry
Head, Aphasia by Weisenburg and McBride, the
Matrix of the Mind by Wood Jones and Portcus, the
article on tho cerebellum by John Isaac Haywood in the
Medical Journal of Australia, articles on the physiology
of the central nervous system published in the last ten
years in Brain, Journal of Physiology, American Journal' of Physiology, Johns Hopkins Hospital Bulletin,
with special reference to the work of Graham Brown,
Dandy, Sherrington and his school, : Kinnier Wilson.
I t is also expected t h a t candidates will be familiar with
MEDICINE
1045
articles on the central and peripheral nervous systems
available in the preceding twelve months ot the British
Medical Journal and the Lancet.
3.
Psychology:
Methods of studying the Mind. Introspection. Observation Experiment. Consultation.
The Contemporary Schools of Psychology.
Introspectioniste. Behaviourists, Gestalt, Psychoanalysts, Hormic School.
Body and Mind. Conflicting Theories of the Relationship.
Intelligence at Work. Sensation and Perception.
Association ot Ideas. The Learning Process.
Knowledge. Belief and Imagination. Importance of
each.
Memory and Personality.
Instincts and Emotions—and Sentiments.
Will and Habit in relation to Temperament and
Character.
A Study of Fear. Fear and the Body. Fear in
Childhood. Fear in Dreams. " Shell-shock "
Fear.
The Inferiority Complex.
The New Psychology and the " Unconscious."
Work of J a n e t and Ribot and of Freud.
Fundamental Principles of Freud examined. The
Importance of Dreams.
Work of J u n g and Adler. The Importance of ChildPsychology.
Mental Conflict. Work of Rivers.
Normal and Abnormal Psychology.
The Sick Mind. Fear, Anxiety, Obsession, Hysteria,
Tic, Somnambulism. Fugue.
Hallucination
and Delusion.
Case Work in Psycho-analysis. Freud's views of
mental trouble.
Adk'r on the Neurotic.
Theories of J u n g .
Multiple Personality.
Alternating Personality. Hypnosis. The Trance Conditions.
The Psycho-neuroses and the Psychoses.
The Sex Instinct. Its Importance. Ite Perversion!
1046
Psychological Types. The Introvert. The Schizophrenic.
The Border-line. " F u n c t i o n a l " and " o r g a n i c "
disorders.
Mental Hygiene and Psycho-therapy.
Edgell- -Mental Life (or Woodworth—Psychology).
Hadfield—Psychology and Morals.
Rees—Health ot the Mind.
McDougall—Outline of Abnormal Psychology.
Freud—introductory Lectures on Psycho-analysis.
Van Teslaiir (ed.)-—Outline of
Psycho-analysis
(a valuable symposium containing papers by
Freud, Jones, Ferenzi, Pfister, Stekel, Rivers,
J u n g , Bjerrc, etc.).
Morgan—Psychology of Abnormal People.
McDougall—Energies ot Men.
Further suggestions:
Janet—Psychological Healing (2 vols.).
Freud—Autobiography.
Adler—Understanding Human Nature.
Adlcr—Analytic Psychology.
Craig—Psychological Medicine.
Periodicals:
British Journal of Psychology (Cambridge Univ.
Press).
, Mental Hygiene (U.S.A.).
The Psychological Clinic (Pennsylvania), nine
issues per annum.
4.
Clinical 'Neurology : .
A course of about 20 meetings at which clinical lecture-demonstrations will be conducted in the wards of a
General Hospital.
5.
Neuro-Pathohfiy:
The course will
deal
with the
reactions
of
t h e neurones and neuralgia to injury; the pathology
ot the cerebro-spiual fluid; vascular disease, intoxica.
tions and deficiency diseases, acute and chronic bacterial infections, syphilis, and virus diseases iu relation to their effects on the central nervous system;
MEDICINE
\OiT
diseases of unknown etiology characterised by foci
or domyeliuation in the brain and spinal
cord;
the pathological anatomy of senile dementia; Alzheimer's disease and Pick's disease; the pathology of
epilepsy a.nd dementia praecox; the pathological
anatomy of idiocy and imbecility; certain extra-pyramidal ditscases, such as Huntington's chorea ; injuries
of the brain, and brain tumours.
The lectures will be supplemented ' by a few demonstrations on histologioal methods; and candidates will be
allowed to attend certain autopsies a t the mental hospitals.
Books recommended:
J. Henry Biggart—Pathology of the Nervous
System.
Greenfield and Carmiehael—The Cerebro-spinal
Fluid in Clinical Diagnosis.
J. Anderson—How to Stain the Nervous System.
6.
Psychiatry;
The causes, signs and symptoms, prognosis and
treatment ot all Psychoses, Psycho-neuroses
and allied conditions.
Congenital Mental Deficcncy, its causes, symptoms
and treatment, including testing mentally deficient children.
Social and economic conditions in relation to insanity.
Insanity in relation to the Law.
B6
MUSIC.
DETAILS OF SUB.IECTS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
FOR T H E ANNUAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY
EXAMINATIONS TO BE HELD I N T H E FOURTH
TERM, 1938.
ACCOMPANYINO,
Candidates will
torily a
ot fairly
P A R T I.—
be expected to accompany satisfacvocal or instrumental composition
difficult standard,
ACCOMPANYING, PART EL—
Tne sanv. as P e r t I., b u t a t a more advanced standard.
AESTHETICS AND CRITICISM, PART I.—
Critical Essays on the Evolution of the Art of Music;
Psychological Studies ou the work and personalities ot.
the Great Masters from Palestrina t o Beethoven, with
a detailed analysis ot vocal and instrumental works
within the Period.
Books recommended for referenoe—In addition to
the Second Year List, Bach ( P a r r y ) ; Conducting (Wagner) ; Style in Art ( P a r r y ) ; Criticism (Calvocoressi);
Plotinus on the Beautiful.
AESTHETICS AND CRITICISM, P A B T I I
Essays on Philosophic Theories of Fine Art; further
studies in the Romantic and Modern Periods;
knowledge of the Literature of Criticism, Beviews of Books, Analytical
Programmes,
Actual Criticisms of Public Performances, as
directed by the Ormond Professor.
Books recommended for referenoe—Aesthetic (Bosanquet); Aesthetic (Croce); Reason in Art (Santayana); Essays Speculative and Suggestive
(Symonds); The Fine Arts (Symonds); Programme Music (Niecks): Studies in Modern
Musio (Hadow); Philosophies of
Beauty
(Carritt). Literature on present day composers and works.
MUSIO.
1049
'CHIEF AND SECOND PRACTICAL STUDIES PARTS
I, I I AND III.—
Studies and works as prescribed during the year
•CHIEF AND SECOND PRACTICAL STUDIES, PABT
TV.. A AND B.—
Candidates must submit a full concert programme,
including one work at least of the following
composers: —
Pianoforte—Bach, Beethoven, Chopin, Schumann, Brahms, Debussy or Ravel.
Violin—Bach, Beethoven, Vieuxtemps, Spohr,
Brahms.
For other instrumental subjecte details will be provided when required.
Candidates iu Part IV. A must reach a standard
equivalent to 1st Class Honours in this test and,
in addition, must satisfy the Director as to their
platform deportment, whereas candidates in
P a r t IV. B are required to reach tho pass
standard only.
•CHIEF AND SECOND PRACTICAL STUDIES, PABT
IV. C —
Candidates must submit a full concert programme,
selected from the main representative schools,
including Oratorio, must secure
first-class
honours iu this test, and must satisfy the
Ormond Professor as to their platform deportment.
-CHIEF AND SECOND PRACTICAL STUDIES, P A R T
IV. D.—
Oandidates must submit a repertoire of ten roles
of grand opera, such operas to be sung in t h e
language tor which they are written, if required. They must show a thorough knowledge in the portrayal on the stage and the
" making-up " and correct dressing tor those
ten parts, and must secure first-class honours
aud satisfy the Ormond Professor as to their
knowledge ot the Art ot Acting generally.
1050
C H I E F AND SECOND PRACTICAL STUDIES, P A R T
IV. B.—
Studies and works as prescribed during the year
C H I E F AND SECOND PRACTICAL STUDIES, I'ART
V.—
Studies and works as prescribed during the year at a
standard, in both Chief and Second Studies, at
least equal to that ot the Chief Study of the
First Year of tho Diploma Course.
C H I E F PRACTICAL STUDIES, A AND B.—
Studies and works as prescribed during the year,.
Candidates must secure first-class honours
in this test, must further satisfy
the
Ormond Professor
as to their
platform
deportment, and, in the case of School B
Division (b), as to their knowledge of t h e Art
ot Acting.
C H I E F AND SECOND PRACTICAL STUDIES P A R T S
I, IT, I I I , IV (A-E) AND C H I E F PRACTICAL
STUDIES A AND B.—
. In all of the above a work will be set by the Ormond
Professor one mouth before the date of the
Practical Examinations iu the subject ot the
Chief Study which must be prepared unaided
and presented at the Examination.
CLASS SINGING—
A knowledge of choral singing iu its rolatiouahip to
children. Candidates must demonstrate their
ability to conduct a class iu unison, two-part
• and three-part works and must satisfy t h e
, Director of their familiarity with school part
songs.
COMPOSITION, PABT I.—
Examples in. simple forms—song,
song, and dance forms.
solo and
part
MUSIC
1051
COMPOSITION. PABT I I . —
As for P a r t I., but more advanced; older rondo;
development sections in preparation for symphonic form.
COMPOSITION, PART 111.—
Studies embracing the forms up to and including
fugal and sonata forms.
COMPOSITION, PART TV.—
Free—(a) Specimens of Double Counterpoint.
(b) Specimens of various forms of Canon, including examples in augmentation and
diminution.
(c) General knowledge of the principles governing Triple and Quadruple Counterpoint.
(d) Complete Fugue, either Choral or Orchestral.
(e) Exercises in variation form and string
quartette style.
COMPOSITION. PART V —
Candidates must present an original composition
which may be one ot the following: —
1. A symphonic movement in Sonata form with
slow movement or finale.
2. An overture.
3. A choral and orcnestral work on lyric,
sacred or dramatic lines.
COUNTERPOINT, PART I.—
A - general understanding
ot
the
first
principles of counterpoint will be required,
with examples in two parts in strict and free
styles, and also three part strict counterpoint with one moving part.
COUNTERPOINT, PART II.—
Strict—Combined Counterpoint in three parts (all
species); four part Counterpoint with one
moving part.
1Q52
Free—Specimens of choral writing, illustrating i n
a simple form the main features of t h e
Schools of Falestrina and Byrd, and instrumental work in Choral Prelude form.
COUNTERPOINT AND FUGUE—
Strict—Four-part writing (a) with one moving part
(b) three-part writing with two florid parts.
Free—Simple specimens of double counterpoint—
contrapuntal writing on a choral or an instrumental prelude, showing the use of figure
work.
Fugue—The general laws and devices employed in
fugal writing.
COUNTERPOINT, CANON. AND F U G U E —
Free—(a) Specimens ot double counterpoint.
(b) Contrapuntal writing in four parts on a
choral or instrumental subject, showing
the use ot designed figure work.
(o) Short canon in four parts in the octave.
(d) Complete fugue, either vocal or instrn
mental up to four parts.
EAR TRAINING—
Pitch.—All Intervals, Chords major and minor,
Dominant Sevenths, Diminished Seventh, in
root position and in inversion.
• Rhythm.—Any combination of species of note up to
semiquavers, including dotted notes.
ELEMENTARY ACOUSTICS—
A course of leotures with experimental illustrations
on Acoustics for Music Students.
Text Book recommended: —
Harris—Handbook of Acoustics.
Recommended for consultation: —
Helmholtz—Sensations ot Tone (translated by Ellis)E. H . Barton—Text Book of Sound.
MUSIC.
1053
FORM AND ANALYSIS, PABT I.—
Thorough knowledge of the classic musical forms
Analysis of such works as may be prescribed
during the year
POBM AND ANALYSIS, PART I I . —
All musical forms as found in the great masters. Candidates must show a detailed knowledge ot such
works aa may be prescribed durilig the year.
HARMONY, PART I.—
Common Chords and Triads in the Diatonic Scales with
their inversions. Chords of the Dominant Seventh
and its inversions. The simplest forms of Cadences—
perfect, imperfect and interrupted—including those
called Authentic and Flagal.
Figuring the Bass of a given passage and correcting
errors in simple four-part writing.
Adding three parts about a figured bass, using the Chords
referred to above.
Harmonisation of a simple melody.
HARMONY, PART II.—
General Knowledge ot Chords, up to and
including the Chord of the Ninth, Suspensions, etc., laws governing P a r t Writing,
Figured and Unfigured Basses.
Harmonisation of Melodies in two, three and four parts,
chiefly diatonic; Harmonic Analyses of Passages, writing short passages in which modulations to near related keys are made. Practical
harmony a t the pianoforte will be required.
The candidate must also bo able to play the
chief forms ot cadences.
HARMONY, PART TU.—
General knowledge of all chords.
Writing passages modulating to related and unrelated keys and harmonic analysis of an
instrumental work.
Writing short passages
of original harmony in either vocal or instrumental style.
Practical harmony a t th»
pianoforte will also be required.
1054
HARMONY, PART IV.—
Harmonic analysis of. modern works.
Harmonisation of melodies. Ground Bass. Writing passages of original harmony in either vocal or
instrumental style. Writing simple instrumental accompaniment to a' given melody.
Practical harmony a t the pianoforte, i.e.,
formation of phrases with varied cadences and
simple figured bass, including sevenths and
inversions.
HARMONY, PART IV, W I T H COUNTERPOINT—
Harmony as prescribed for Harmony IV, and in
addition four-part Counterpoint, plain, with
moving species in ono voice; also Free Counterpoint.
HARMONY, PART V.—
1. Harmonisation of melody in five vocal parts.
2. Harmonisation in tour instrumental parts (such
as a string quartette), the given part net
necessarily being confined to either the upper
or lower p a r t .
3. Expansion or development ot a given harmonic
phrase, or
The addition to a given melody of a free accompaniment, or.
The setting to musio of given words in the
style of a p a r t song or a madrigal.
N.B If the Candidate choose the latter alternative.
interesting treatment of the vocal parts, together with
resourceful handling of the harmony, will be expected.
4. Some acquaintance with modern harmonic tendencies.
HISTORY, L I T E R A T U R E AND AESTHETICS OF
MUSIC, PART I.—
History of the progress of the art from tho beginning
of the Christian era to the early Beethoven
period.
MUSIC.
1055
HISTORV, LITERATURE AND AESTHETICS OF
MUSIC, PART I I . —
History of the art from the transition period to
outlines ot modern musical history.
HISTORV, LITERATURE AND AESTHETICS OP
MUSIC, PART i n . —
Candidates must show familiarity with the vocal
and instrumental works prescribed by the
Director during the year, and with musical
history from the period following Beethoven
to the present day.
INSTRUMENTAL ENSEMBLE, PART I . Candidates must show a general knowledge of
chamber musio literature, to the Bomantio
period, and give evidence of practical experience in ensemble in their particular subject,
by the performance ot a work to be submitted
to and approved by the Director.
INSTRUMENTAL ENSEMBLE. PABT I I . —
The same ae for P a r t I., in addition to which candidates will be required to show a knowledge
of the history and development of chamber
music to the present day.
LITERATURE AND AESTHETICS—
1. Essays Historical and Aesthetic dealing with the
composers' works and events of the main periods of
music, such as Pre-Christian, Mediaeval, Symphonic,
the Romantic Period and Modern Tendencies.
2. Essays on the General Principles of Fine Art.
Books recommended
for reference:—Oxford
Histories; Grove's Dictionary; Beethoven (Grove); Beethoven (Wagner); Philosophy ot the Beautiful (Knight);
Three Lectures on Aesthetics (Boeanquet); Renaissance
(Pater) Modern Harmony ( H u l l ) ; Art of Music (Parry).
MODERN LANGUAGES, P A R T I.—
ENGLISH DICTION, PAKT
I.
Thorough knowledge of the different classes of
vowels and their pronunciation. Exercises for
perfecting distinct enunciation, illustration
and treatment ot faults in articulation.
1056
ITALIAN (Music Course), PAKT I.
Tho first part ot Panagulli's Italian Conveisation
Grammar.
Reading and simple translation.
•Study of Italian Aria.
MODERN LANGUAGES, P A R T II.—
ENGLISH DICTION. PAKT TT.
Thorough knowledge of all consonant and vowel
sounds and their classification, pronunciation, awent and emphasis. Reading of English
prose »nd poetry of moderate difficulty -••
sight.
ITALIAN (Music Course), PART I I .
The second part of Panagulli's Italian Conversation
Grammar. Reading and Dictation. Translation.
Study of Italian Opera.
and either
FRENCH (Music Course), PART 1.
or
GERMAN (Music Course), PART I.
MODERN LANGUAGES, PART I I I . —
ENGLISH DICTION, P A R T ITT.
To read a t sight difficult passages of prose and
verse (selected by t h e examiner).
To write a short essay on t h e necessity and advantage of clear, distinct diction and how to
attain i t .
To memorise and to be able to repeat prepared
poetry and prose and to convey its meaning
to others.
A thorough knowledge of all vowela and consonants
and their difficulties in enunciation.
ITALIAN (Music Course), PART I I I .
Saucr's Conversation Grammar. Literature and Coniposition. Study of Italian Opera,
and either
MUSIO.
105T
FRENCH (Music Course), PART I I .
who have completed PART I.)
(For Candidates
GERMAN (Music Course), PART I I .
who have completed PART I.)
(For Candidates
MODERN LANGUAGES, PABT IV.—
ITALIAN (Music Course), PART IV.
FRENCH (Music Course), PART I I I .
dates who have completed PARTS
and
For Candi.
I. and II.),
GERMAN (Music Course), PART I.
or
GERMAN (Music Course), PART I I I .
(For Candidates who have completed PARTS T. and I I . ) ,
and
FRENCH (Music Course), PART I.
MODERN LANGUAGES, PART V.—
FRENCH (Music Course), PART TV. (For Candidates
who have completed Parts I., 11., and III.),
and
GERMAN (Music Course), Part TI.
or
GERMAN (Music Course), PART IV. (For Candidates
who have completed Parts I., I I . , and I U . ) ,
and
FRENCH (Music Course), P a r t I I .
MUSICAL PERCEPTION AND TERMINOLOGY—
Pitch and Time Perception.
(a) Intervals, Cadences, Modulations to nearly
related keys, etc.
(b) A recognition by ear ot various times and thewriting of melodies from dictation.
1058
(c) Creative imagination.
The completion of
sentences by the addition of balancing
phrases and the setting of a melody to a
verse of poetry.
Form, etc.
(a) Recognition by ear of harmonic and contrapuntal style, two and three part writing,
binary and ternary forms, etc.
(b) A knowledge of the meaning of various musical forms.
History and General Knowledge.
(a) A knowledge ot the various instruments of t h e
orchestra and the meaning of familia r
musical terms, e.g. stretto, episode, etc.
(b) An outline of musical history.
MUSICAL TERMINOLOGY, FORM, HISTOBY AND
L1TERATUBE—
A general musical knowledge as dealt with in the
Director's Class, including outlines of history
up to the sixteenth century.
•ORCHESTRA L TRAINING—
A knowledge of the different families of orchestral
instruments and their possible combinationsCandidates will be required to demonstrate their
ability to conduct an orchestral class and to
arrange a score to suit any combination of instruments which may be available.
ORCHESTRATION, P A R T I.—
(a) Tho nature and compass of the various instruments and their treatment as found in the
scores ot tho chief composers up to the
Romantic Period.
(b) Reduction of instrumental scores to pianoforte
scores.
(c) Scoring for orchestra a given work in accordance with the work studied during the year.
MUSIO.
1050,
ORCHESTRATION, PART II.—
(a) The history ot orchestration up to the present
time.
(b) Scoring for orchestra set works; for example, ft
.song accompaniment and a movement of a
pianoforte sonata.
PEDAGOGICS AND PSYCHOLOGY—
Candidates for the teaching division of tho Diploma or
Degree are required to attend classes as arranged by the
Ormond Professor.
P B A C n C A L STUDIES, PABTS I . AND IX—
Candidates must make a study of a Practical subject approved by the Director similar to that of
the Second Study in the Instrumental and
Vocal Schools.
PRACTICAL TEACHING, PART I.—
Candidates iu School A must show sound knowledge
of the muscular system as used in the playing
of their instrument, and thorough knowledge
ot the literature of their instrument and how
it should be applied. Demonstrations must
be given of methods ot teaching various
branches of technique and interpretation.
Candidates in School B must show sound
knowledge of the anatomy of the human
vocal organs and the breathing apparatus,
how to control the breath; sound knowledge
and experience of the variations in the class
of a soprano, mezzo-soprano, alto, tenor,
baritone and bass. Demonstrations must be
given on t h e , methods a of teaching.
A
thorough knowledge of the vocal literature,,
including classical songs and arias from.
Oratorio and Opera, must be shown.
PRACTICAL TEACHING, PART II.—
As for P a r t I., and, in addition, a more extensive
,knowledge..of the Art ot Teaching, includ.ing the modern school of technique aud interpretation.
1060
PSYCHOLOGY OF M U S I C RHYTHMICS—
Exercises for poise, relaxation, vigour and energy; expression of emotions by means of dramatic
movement.
SIGHT READING. PARTS I . AND IX—
A test will be set within the limits ot the technical
standard of the work of the Chief Study for
the year.
-SIGHT READING, PABT I H . (Including Score Beading and Transposition—
(a) Reading Pianoforte, Violin or Vocal Score, etc.,
according t o the Chief Study.
(b) Playing on the Pianoforte from Full Vocal,
String
Quartette and Symphony Score,
examples to be takeu from works not later
than the Classical period,
(o) Principles of Transposition. Candidates will be
required to transpose the accompaniment t o a
moderately difficult vocal or instrumental
work.
SIGHT READING. PART IV. (Including Score Beading
aud Transposition).
(a) Reading of advanced Pianoforte, Violin or Vocal
Score, etc., according to the Chief Study.
Vocalists will be required to read an inner
part of a Trio or Quartette.
(b) Playing on the Pianoforte
from
advanced
String Quartette and Full Orchestral Score,
touching on the Romantic and early Modern
periods.
(c) Transposition of moderately difficult works of
the Chief Study.
SPECIAL PRACTICAL STUDY, PARTS I., I I . AND
HX—
Candidates' will be expected to make a general practical study of 'the technique and character-
MUSIC.
1061
istics of the various orchestral instruments,
and also the voice, as follows: —
P a r t I.—String Instruments.
P a r t LT.—Wood-wind.
P a r t III.—Voice and Brass
THEORY TEACHING, PART I.—
A knowledge of all tho usual harmonic combina
tions. including part-writing in three and
four parts. Harmonization of melodies and
unfigured basses in chorale and also in free
instrumental style. Strict and free counterpoint up to and including four parte. A
knowledge of the methods of teaching, and
also of literature dealing with the above.
THEORY TEACHING. PART IX—
A thorough knowledge of all the -laws governing harmonic and contrapuntal writing, including
movements in sonata and fugal forms.
Sound knowledge of the chief harmonic and
contrapuntal writings.
Demonstrations of
teaching the various branches.
BOOKS RECOMMENDED FOR REFERENCE—
First Year Diploma.
Ear Training—Shinn, Sawyer.
Harmony—Bridge and Sawyer; Macpherson (with
appendix).
(a) Handbook ou Form
> Franklin
(b) Handbook of Musical Knowledge j Peterson
History of Music—Naumann, Riemann, Pratt.
Summary of Musical History—Hubert Parry.
Dictionary—Grove.
Second Year Diploma.
Harmony—Macpherson (with appendix), Bridge and
Sawyer, Buck.
1062
Counterpoint -Cherubini, Prout, Kitson, Gladstone,
Pearce, Bridge. Contrapuntal Technique in tho
Sixteenth Century by R. 0. Morris.
Fugue—Prout, Higgs.
Musical Form—Prout, Macpherson.
History ot Music—Parry's ' Summary,' Parry's " The
Art of Music," " T h e Oxford," Riemann, Collis,
Naumann, Pratt, Stanford and Forsyth.
Aesthetics—Pauer, MacDowell, Spencer's " Origin
and Function of Music," Knight, Santayana
Bosanquet
FACULTY
OF
SCIENCE.
DETAILS O F SUBJECTS AND
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR THE ANNUAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY EXAMINATIONS TO BE HELD IN
THE FOURTH TERM, 1938, AND POR THE.
EXAMINATIONS
FOR
THE
DEGREE
OF
MASTER OP SCIENCE TO BE HELD IN F I R S T
TEEM, 1939.
HONOUR WORK.
Except in the cases of subjects where special details are
published, the Examination for Honours will be on t h e lines
indicated for Pass, but candidates will require to have
read more advanced work than for- Pass, and to attain a
higher standard and show more detailed knowledge.
COURSES IN FRENCH AND GERMAN FOR
SCIENCE STUDENTS.
The aim of these courses is to give students a reading
knowledge of the foreign language, and also to give them a
first-hand acquaintance with a few selected works of high
literary value.
Dnring the first year the elements of grammar will b e
taught, and only simple texts will be read.
First Year.
FRENCH, PART
A—
F . C. Roe—A Junior Commercial French Course(Harrap).
G. C- Harper—Le Grand Voyage d-Alain Gerbault.
Renault—Petite Graimmaire francaise.
GERMAN, P A B T
A—
Lnbovius—German Reader and--Writer-,- -Pact I.—
H . G. Fiedler and, Pi E - Sandbaoh-~A F i r s t Q#tmaW' Course' for Science Students. (Oxford
Univ. Press.)
1064
DETAILS OP SUBJECTS,
1938.
Second Tear.
FRENCH, PAKT B—
Williams—A Technical
and Scientific
French
Reader (Heath).
Renault—Petite Grammaire francaise.
Cornell—Cinq Maitres du Conte francais (Selections).
GERMAN', PART
H—
Sciolz—German Science Reader (Macmillan).
Moffatt—Science German Course.
Examinaton Papers: —
One in each part—2 hours.
BACTERIOLOGY.
Long Vacation reading iu preparation for Bacteriology I :
Zinsser and Bayne-Jones—Text-book of Bacteriol
° g y , PP- i" 1 4 0 •BACTERIOLOGY—PART I.—
The course will consist of lectures, demonstrations and
practical work for 4 hours a week during 3 terms, extending over not less than 100 hours, aud dealing with—
Morphology, isolation, cultivation and classification
of bacteria. Filtrable viruses.
Bacteria in relation t o disease.
Bacteriology of milk and other foods.
Soil bacteriology.
Some common pathogenic protozoan parasites.
The principles of immunity.
Practical work will include the study ot the morphology,
staining, cultivation and identification ot common saprophytic organisms, as well as pathogenic bacteria representative of the different groups of organisms.
Practical applications of immunity, including serological
tests.
? Parasitology, Tarts A. or B., and Agricultural Entomology, Part 1., may
be taken along with Bacteriology Part I., the three subjects counting as a
-Group II. subject.
SCIENCE.
1065
'Text Books:—
Maokie and McCartney—An Introduction to Practical Bacteriology, 4th ed.
Zinsser and Bayne-Jones—Text-book of Bacteriology.
Por reference :—
Muir and Ritchie—Manual of Bacteriology (9th
edition).
and Immunity, 2nd ed.
Russell—Micro-organisms of the Soil.
Orla-Jensen—Dairy Bacteriology, 2nd ed.
Long Vacation reading in preparation tor Bacteriology I I will be announced during 3rd term.
BACTERIOLOGY—PART It.—
In the second year more advanced work will be
undertaken along the following lines:—Medical bacteri.
ology, and immunology; soil bacteriology; dairy bacteriology, and t h a t of other foods.
Text-books: —
Zinsser and Bayne-Jones—Text-book of Bacteriology
For reference; —
Marjorie Stephenson—Bacterial Metabolism.
Topley—Outline of Immunity.
Topley and Wilson—Principles of Bacteriology and
Immunity, 2nd cd.
Bcrgey—Determinative Bacteriology.
Exaiminaton P a p e r s : —
Practical: (!3 papers)—each 3 hours.
BIOCHEMISTRY. .
Lectures and practical work as set out under Faculty
of Agriculture.
66a
1066
DETAILS OP SUBJECTS, 1938
BOTANY.
BOTANY—PART I.—
The structure of a young and adult Plant Cell:
Modifications of Cell Wall. Chemical a n d
Physical properties of Protoplasm. Osmosis.
Cell Inclusions. Nuclear division. Tissues.
Seed and Germination. Enzymes. Growth. Tropic
movements.
Structure, function and modifications of the Root.
Structure and function of the Stem. Typesot branching. Healing of Wounds.
Budding and Grafting.
Structure and function of the Leaf and ite appendages. Transpiration and Ascent of Sap.
Nutrition.
Special modes of nutrition.
Respiration, aerobic
and intra-moleoular.
Structure, Reproduction and Life-History of the
following types: —
A. Bacteria.
B. Protococcus, Vaucheria, Spirogyra, Hormosira
Pulysiphonia, Nemaliun.
C. Mucor
or Rhizopus, hymenium of Peziza,.
Saccharomyces,
Aspergillus,
Penicillium,
Psalliota, Ooprinus.
D. Marchantia or L u n u l a r i a , F u n a r i a .
E. Pteridium.
P . Selaginella.
G. P i n u s .
Morphology and Histology of t h e Flower. Pollination.
Fertilization and development' of theSeed.
Fruits, their classification and dipersal.
A brief account of the commoner families of Flowering plants.
Special reading: Heredity, evolution and distribution
of plants, as in
Bower—Botany of the Living Plant, chap. 31, pp.
461-478
and Lowson—Text Book of Botanv, chaps. 17 and 18 s
pp. 402-439.
SCIENCE.
1037
Text-books: —
Tansley—Elemente of P l a n t Biology.
Brimblc—Intermediate Botany.
Books recommended for reference: —
Strasburgcr—Text-book of Botany.
McGregor Skene—Plant Biology.
Scott—Structural
Botany
of
Flowering
and
Flowerless Plants.
Bower—Botany of the Living Plant.
Lowson—Text Book of Botany.
Fritsch and Salisbury—Introduction to the Structure and Reproduction of Plants.
Students must complete not less than four (4) hours
practical work per week, exclusive of field excursions.
Thirty (30) named and dried specimens must be collected and presented for examination as part of the
field work. This collection and the practical notebooks form p a r t ot the practical examination.
Students must provide themselves with an approved
microscope (which can be hired), a razor, a set of
needles, slides and cover-slips, and the printed practical
note book.
Mixed: (Written and Practical), Honours only—3
hours.
Long Vacation Heading iu preparation for Botany, P a r t
II:(1) Buller—Researches on Fungi, Vols. I-V.
Each student must read at least one volume of this
series.
(2) Stanford, E. E.—Economic Plants.
(Copies of these books can be obtained on loan.)
BOTANY-PART' IT,—
(1) P l a n t Physiology—The colloidal system involved in
the living cell ; absorption, conduction and
transpiration
ot
water;
significance of
1068
mineral substances in metabolism; synthesis'
of carbohydrates, fats, and other organic
compounds; enzymes and enzyme action;
translocation; respiration.
(2) P l a n t Pathology a n d Mycology- (All students will
require a micrometer eye-piece scale for t h i s
course).
(a) Principles involved in t h e nutrition, metabolism
and growth of fungi, an introduction to cultural
methods.
(6) A general treatment ot Myxomycetes, Phycomycetes, Ascomycetes, Basidiomycetes, and Fungi
Imperfect! with special reference to pathogenic
forms and methods of suppression,
(c) Bacterial and virus diseases.
All Students are asked to present before the end of
the year a collection of not less than 20 pressed specimens to the satisfaction of the Lecturer.
Text-books:—
Brooks—Plant Diseases.
Gwynne-Vaughan and Barnes—The Fungi.
Grainger—Virus Diseases of Plants.
For Reference :—
Stevens—The Fungi which cause plant disease.
McAlpine—Systematic arrangement of AustralianFungi.
Heald—Manual of Plant Diseases.
Gaumann-Dodge — Comparative Morphology of
Pungi.
(3) Systematic Botany (Angiospermae).
Comprises the general classification and systematicaccount- of native, economic and cultivated
plants.
Text-book:
Ewart—Flora ot Victoria.
Bailey—Manual of Cultivated Plants.
All students are expected to collect and present before
the end of the year a ITerbariuiii of not less than 100 dried
specimens, which should include both flower and fruit.
SCIENCE.
1069-
Studente are requested to enclose with each mounted
specimen brief notes regarding the plant.
I t is advised t h a t the collection be begun during
the previous year.
Examination Papers—One paper (3 hours) in each of
the following sections:
P l a n t Physiology: Written.
Practical.
P l a n t Pathology: Written.
Practical.
Systematic Botany: Written
Practical.
Long Vacation reading in preparation for Botany, Fart
HI: —
Harvey-Gibson—Outlines of the History
of
Botany.
Bower—The Origin of a Land Flora (pp. 1-254).
(Copies can be obtained on loan.)
BOTANY—PART I I I . —
(1) Plant Physiology—Growth, reproduction and regeneration, the mechanics ot tissues, resistance to extremes, the various forms of nastic, tropio
and tactic irritability, heredity, variation and
evolution.
(2) P l a n t Geograpliy (2 terms 1 1. per week), with
field excursions.
(3) Cryptogams (3 terms 1 1. 8 h. pr.).
(a) Schizophyta—Myxophyceae (Bacteria dealt with
under P l a n t Pathology, Pare 11).
(b) Thallophyta—(i.) Algae—Chlorophyceae, Diatomaceae, Characeae, Phaeophyceae, Rhodophyecae; (ii.) Fungi (see Plant Pathology).
(c) Lichens.
(a) Bryophyta—Hepaticae, Musci.
(e) Pteridophyia— Lycopodiales, Equisetales, Sphenophyllales, Opbioglossali-s, Filicales.
(4) Oymnospermae-^-{l term, 1 1. 2 h. pr.).
Cyoadales, Coniferales, Gnetales. Their structure
and life histories, distribution and characters of
important species, particularly ot the Coniferae
1070
Practical Work—In addition to t h e practical work
illustrative of the above, the course will include
the identification of Trees and Timbers, microscopic study of commercial woods.
.Field excursions will be held at times arranged throughout the course.
T e x t Books: —
West and Fritsch—British Fresh-water Algae.
Campbell—Mosses and Ferns.
Bower—The Ferns, Vol. 1.-111.
Coulter and Chamberlain—Morphology of Gymnos perms.
For Reference: —
Goebel—Outlines of Classification
and
Special
Morphology.
Pfcffer or Jost—Physiology of Plante.
Goebel—Organography of Plants.
Haberlandt—Physiological Plant Anatomy.
Engler a n d Prantl — Die natnrlichen
Pflanzenfa-milien.
Oltmanns—Morphologic und Biologie der Algen.
West—Algae.
Smith—Fresh Water Algae of the United States.
Examination Papers .Cryptogramic—.Written : 1 paper. }
3
Botany
Practical: 2 papers ) hours each
P l a n t Physiology—Written : 1 paper
3 hours
Practical: 1 paper
6 hours
P l a n t Geogra-phyand Gy-mnospernis—Written 3 hours
SCHOOL OF BOTANY
Final Honours and Degree ot Master of Science.
Palacohoiany—
The course includes the study of the morphology,
anatomy, and distribution ot fossil
representatives
of the following groups of Plante: —
"Thallophyta.
Bryophyta.
SCIENCE.
1 07 1
Pteridophyta, including the Psilophytales, Lycopodiales, Sphenophyllales, Eguisctales, FilicalesSpermaphyta, including the Pteridospermeae, Cordaitales, Meso~oic Gymnosperms and the
Angiospermiac.
Text-books: —
Scott—Studies iu Fossil Botany 3rd edition.
Seward—Fossil Plants, Vols. I.-IV.
Hirmer—Ffandbuoh der Palaobotanik I.
Seward—Plant Life Through the Ages.
This Course will form approximately one-eighth of the
work of the 4th year of science. The other sections will
be specially set.
Palaeobotany—Written : 1 paper |
3
Practical: 1 paper > hours each
CHEMISTRY
Long Vacation reading in preparation for Chemistry
P a r t I.
Piudlay—The Spirit of Chemistry.
CHEMISTRY.—PART I. .
The development of the main generalisations of chemical science, starting from a consideration of elementary
chemical physics, proceeding through a systematic study
of inorganic (and a tew common organic) substances,
and including a simple physico-chemical study of matter in the dissolved and colloidal states.
Laboratory Work.—The Laboratory work will include the studv of the properties of the
more common inorganic radicles and the
application ot this to simple qualitative
analysis. I t will also include exercises in
volumetric analysis.
Text-books: —
Alex. Smith (Kendall)—Inorganic Chemistry.
Clowes and Coleman—Elementary Analytical Chem.
istry (revised by Lyons and Appleyard).
Baueor—Chemical Calculations.
1072
Certain portions of Findlay's Introduction t o
Physical Chemistry.
Roscoe and Schorlemmer—Treatise on Chemistry,
Vols.. I . and TI.
For practical woi-k students are required to provide themselves with
apparatus in accordance with the list posted in the Laboratory.
Examination Papers—3 hours each:
W r i t t e n : Pass.
Honour.
Practical: Pass.
Honour.
Long Vacation reading in preparation for Chemistry, P a r t
II:
Findlay—Introduction to Physical Chemistry.
Tilden—Famous Chemists.
CHEMISTRY.—PAKT I I . —
The course will include the following topics; —
The Conservation of Energy. — Energy; heat cont e n t ; heats of reaction at constant Volume
and at constant pressure; Hess's Law; heats
of formation; temperature variation of heat
of reaction; experimental methods.
The Gaseous State of Aggregation-—The gas laws;
elementary t r e a t m e n t of kinetic theory ot
gases; relation bet-ween mean free path, rate
of collision and molecular diameter; Avogadro's number and its experimental determination, (Perrin's work); deviations from the
gas laws and the van der Waals equation;
determination of critical constauts; theory of
corresponding states.
The Liquid State of Aggregation. — Density and
molecular volume; additive and constitutive
properties; vapour pressure and its measurement ; heat of vaporisation; Trouton's R u l e ;
associated liquids; surface tension.
Solutions-—Vapour pressure ot solutions; Raoult's
Law; the ideal solution; boiling point
curves; fractional distillation.
80TEN0E.
The
1073'
colligative properties of dilute solutions:
lowering of vapour pressure and freezing
point, elevation ot boiling point, osmotic
pressure, and their experimental measurem.snt.
Aqueous solutions of electrolytes; their colligative
properties; specific and molecular conductivity and their measurement; the ionic theory
of Arrhenius; ionic migration;
transport
number and ionic mobility and their measurement by the Hittorf and moving boundary methods; applications of conductance
measurements to titration, solubility determination, etc.
The Speed of Chemical Reactions-—Law of Masa
Action; the rate constant; homogeneous reactions of low order in gases and solutions;
kinetic interpretation; activated molecules;
introduction to mechanism of reactions.
Homogeneous Chemical Equilibrium-—The equilibrium constant and its variation with temperature (van't Hoff's Law); examples of
gaseous equilibria; chemical equilibrium in
solution; ionic equilibria and the Dilution
Law of Ostwald; the anomaly of strong e l e c
ti-olyl.cs: introduction to the Debye-Huckel
theory of strong electrolytes; weak electrolytes ; ionic product of water; hydrolysis;
titration curves; theory of indicators; buffer solutions.
Heterogeneous Equilibrium (Special Oases).—Solubility product; the distribution law; partition coefficient and applications of partition
measurements.
Second Law of Thermodynamics (Elementary Treatment).—Work clone by spontaneous natural
processes; the free energy; application t o
theory of simple cell; E.M.F. and its measurement; concentration cells; simple thermodynamic treatment of equilibrium cons t a n t ; equilibrium constant and E.M.F.;
definition of single electrode potentials; applications of reversible electrodes (hydrogen,
calomel, silver, quinhydrone and glass elec-
^074
trodcs) to chemical problems, e,g. titration,
p H measurement, solubility products, equilibrium constants, heats of reaction.
Heterogeneous Equilibrium- (General Treatment)-—
Phase, component, degree of freedom; the
Phase Rule; the general features of one-,
two- and three-component systems; experimental methods; applications to chemical
problems.
Valency and Molecular
Structure
(Elementary
Treatment).—The Bohr-Rutherford
nuclear
atom; atomic number; Kossel-Lewis-Langmuir theory of valency; ionic bonds, electron
pair bonds and associated physical properties;
the co-ordinate bond and co-ordination compounds: valency theorv and the Periodic
Table.
Organic Chemistry.
This will include the following: —
Purification and tests for the purity ot organic
compounds.
Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis of Organic
Compounds.
Aliphatic Organic Chemistry.
Typical members of the following Groups: —
Paraffins. Alcohols and thioalcohols. Ethers and
sulphides. Aldehydes and ketones.
Monocarboxylic acids, acid amides, nitriles, and
other derivatives, with especial reference to
acetyl chloride and acetic anhydride. Esters
of organic and inorganic acids. Fats. Ethylcnic compounds.
Acetylcnic
compounds.
Amines, amino acids and proteins. Urea and
related compounds. Carbohydrates.
Isomerism in General.
Mirror image isomerism.
Tautomerism .
Geometrical
isomerism.
Aromatic Chemistry.
Benzene: Its occurrence and properties. Isomerism
in di- and trisubstituted benzene derivatives.
SCEENCB.
1075-
Orientation of benzene compounds. A brief
study _ot aromatic hydrocarbons and their
carboxyl, halogen, hydroxy, uitro, oxy and sulphonic acid derivatives. Aniline: Its reactions
and chief derivatives.
Students will be expected to read certain original
papers according to a list to be posted in the Department.
Laboratory Work- Qualitative
and
quantitative
(botli volumetric aud gravimetric) analysis,
including examination of alloys and ot mixtures containing compounds of the more
common metals and radicles.
Text-books: Findlay—Introduction to Physical Chemistry.
Rivett—The Phase Rule and the Study of heterogeneous Equilibria.
Pcrkin and Kipping—Organic Chemistry, P a r t s I
and I I .
or, Holleman—Text-book of Organic Chemistry.
Treadwcll and Hall—Vol. I. Qualitative Analysis
(Recent edition.)
Hall—Text-book of Quantitative Analysis.
Students are also advised to read; —
Pen-in—Atoms. Preferably in the original French—
!
Les A tomes.
Tilden (revised by Glasstonc)—Chemical Discovery
and Invention in the 20th Century.
Tilden -Famous Chemists.
Cohen— Physikalisch—chemische
Metamorphose.
(Chapters 1-5 for German Practice).
Books tor reference : —'
Britton—Hydrogen Ions.
Butler—The Fundamentals of Chemical Thermodynamics.
Smith—Analytical Processes.
Dole- .Electrochemistry.
Meyer (trans, by Baynes)—Kinetic Theory.of Gases.
Roscoe and Schorlemmcr—Treatise' Mi Chemistry.
Taylor-:—Treatise on Physical Chemistry (2 vols.).
Friend—Physical Chemistry. (2 vols.):
The TdTnm,es"in<the' Physiifdf'Chein'fstTy series edited
by the late Sir William Eamsay.
For practical work students are required to provide themselves with,
apparatus in accordance with a list posted in the Laboratory.
1076
W r i t t e n : 1st Pass and Honour—3 hours
2nd Pass and Honour—1$ hours.
3rd Honour—3 hours.
Practical: Pass—1 day.
Honour—2 days.
Long Vacation Reading in preparation for Chemistry,
Part III:
Ephraim—Inorganic Chemistry.
Chemical Society Memorial Lectures.
•CHEMISTRY.—PART I I I . —
Advanced Organic and General Chemistry.
Laboratory Work-—Qualitative and quantative analysis, inorganic and organic. Preparations of
pure substances.
Physico-chemical measurements.
Text-books: —
Those recommended for P a r t I I . and also the
following :—
Clarke—Handbook of Organic Analysis.
Cohen—Practical Organic Chemistry (Recent edition).
Perkin and Kipping—Organic Chemistry, P a r t I I I .
•Students are also advised to r e a d : —
Adam—The Physics and Chemistry of Surfaces
Freundlich—Elements ot Colloidal Chemistry.
Svedberg—Colloid Chemistry.
Sidgwick—The Electronic Theory of Valency.
F. Ephraim—Inorganic Chemistry.
Cohen—Organic Chemistry tor advanced Students.
Julius Schmidt—Text Book of Organic Chemistry.
W. Ostwald — Die Welt der vernachlassigten
Dimciisioncn (Selected portions for German
Practice).
Travers—The discovery of the rare gases.
Chemical Society. Faraday Lectures.
Chemical Society Memorial Lectures (3 vols.),
selected portions.
SCIENCE.
1077
Abegg—Handbuch der anorganlscheu Chemie.
Nemst—Theoretical Chemistry.
Friend (aud others)—Text-book
on
Inorganic
Chemistry.
Mellor — Comprehensive Treatise on Inorganic and
Theoretical Chemistry.
Werner—New Ideas on Inorganic Chemistry.
V a n ' t Hoff—The Arrangement of Atoms in Space.
Riohter—Chemistry ot the Carbon Compounds.
Meyer and Jacobsen—Organische Chemie.
Gattermann—Practical
Methods
ot
Organic
Chemistry.
Mellor—Treatise
on
Quantitative
Inorganic
Analysis.
Thorpe—Dictionary of Applied Chemistry.
For practical work students are required to provide themselves with
apparatus in accordance with a list posted in the Laboratory,
Written: Pass and Honour (General).
Pass and Honour—(Organic).
3 hours each
Practical: Pass and Honour (Inorganic)—2 days.
Pass (Organic)—1 day.
Honour (Organic)—li days.
• SCHOOL OP CHEMISTRY.
Final Honours and Degree ot Master ot Science.
The laboratory work of the fourth year will consist of a
short intensive course of practical physical chemistry after
which the candidate will undertake an orginal investigation in an approved field, the choice being to some extent
left to the student.
Candidates will be advised as to their reading in all
sections of the subject.
Weekly Colloquia will be held at which students will
present summaries of original memoirs allotted to them
for study.
A course of lectures will be. given on the Principles
of Applied .Chemistry, and this will be supplemented
by visits to. suitable Chemical Works.
]078
i'he examination will be by thesis, embodying the results
of the research accomplished by the candidate, as well as a
summary and review of associated work in the same or
related fields. In addition, written and oral, examinations will be given, to test the candidates general knowledge
ot chemistry, with special reference to its modern developments.
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING,
Faculty of Engineering).
PART I . - ( S e e under
GEOLOGY.
GEOLOGY—PART I
This course has been arranged to suit the requirements
of students of Science, Arts, Architecture and of Civil,
Mining and Metallurgical Engineering.
Cosmical Geology-—The earth as a mass—its origin,
shape, relation to the heavenly bodies, etc.
Tectonic Geology-—The study of rock masses in the
field. Folds and faults. Mountain structure,
Isost-asy.
Dynamical Geology-—The forces operating upon
and below the earth's surface.
Wind,
water, and ice as geological agents; chemical
and mechanical
agents
ot
denudation.
E a r t h movements, volcanoes.
Physiographic Geology.—Including the origin of land
forms, etc
The Geology of W a t e r SupplyThe Elements of Mineralogy, Petrology and Paleeontology.—Including the study of common minerals,
rocks and fossils.
The Elements of Stratigraphy.—Illustrated mainly by
tht! geology of Victoria.
Laboratory Work—The work in the laboratory includes
the study ot geological maps and the construction of
geological sections ; the examination and- determination
of hand specimens of crystal models, minerals, rooks, and
fossils.
. ' Field Work-—There will bo six field excursions. These
will be held on Saturdays during the session.
SCIENCE.
1079"
Apparatus-—Students must supply themselves with a
geological hammer, pocket lens and specimen bag, to be
approved by the Professor.
Text-Books -.—
Scott, W. B.—An Introduction to Geology (3rd!
Edition, Vol. I.).
Rutley, P.—Elemente of Mineralogy (Revised b y
H. H. Read).
Skeats, E . W. (ed.).—Outlines of t h e Physiography and Geology of Victoria.
For Reference: —
Lahee, P . H.—Field Geology.
Geikie, J.—Structural and Field Geology.
Chamberlin and Salisbury—Geology, Vol. I. P r o Examination Papers: —
Practcal: Pass and 1st Honour—4 hours.
Long Vacntion Reading in preparation for Geology
P a r t II, will bo prescribed during the year.
GEOLOGY, PART IX —
The lectures and laboratory work will deal with :—
Crystallography-—The characters of crystals, t h e i r
geometrical and optical properties, their symmetry and classification.
Mineralogy.—The physical,
chemical, crystallographic and optical characters of mineralstheir classification and the description of the
more important species.
Petrology.—The megascopic and microscopic characters
of rocks. The classification and distribution of
rocks. The principles t h a t control the solidification of rocks from a molten state.
Stratigraphy.—The principles of atratigraphieal
geology. The interpretation of the evidence
of fossils. The Archaean and Palaeozoic rock*
67
.1080
DETAILS OF SUB.irXn'£, 1938.
and their general distribution throughout the
world.
The Interpretation of Geological
Maps.
Physiography, Palaeontology, etc.—More advanced
work than that dealt with in P a r t I .
Field Work.—There will be nine field excursions.
Not more than two week-ends will be spent in the field, and
•the remaining excursions will be held on Saturdays during
the session.
Apparatus-—In addition to the apparatus required
for Geology, P a r t I., students must supply themselvef
with a blowpipe, platinum wire and a petrological microscope, to be approved by the Professor. The Geological
Department has a limited number of microscopes available
for hire. •
Text Books: —
David, T. W. K.— Explanatory notes to a new
Geological map of Australia.
Skeats, E . W. (ed.).—Outlines of t h e Physiography and Geology of Victoria.
Hatch and Wells—Text-book of Petrology. P a r t
I : The Igneous Rocks.
Dana, E. S.—Text-book ot Mineralogy.
Woods—Palaeontology.
Por Reference: —
Hatch and Rastall—Petrology of the Sedimentary
Rocks.
Chamberlin and Salisbury—Geology, 3 vols.
Lake and Rastall—Text-book of Geology.
Chapman, F.—Australasian Fossils.
British Museum (Nat. Hist.)—Guide to the Fossil
Plants.
Davies—Introduction to Palaeontology.
Hawkins—Invertebrate Palaeontology.
W r i t t e n : Pass and Honour (2 papers), each 3
hours.
Practical: Pass and Honour (3 papers)—each 3
hours.
Long Vacation reading ih preparation for Geology, P a r t
111, will be prescribed during the year.
SCIENCE.
1081
•GEOLOGY. PAKT H I . —
The leotures and laboratory work will deal with: —
Advanced Crystallography.
Advanced Optical MineralogyAdvanced Petrology, including the origin and differentiation of rock magmas.
Advanced Palaeontology including Vertebrate Palaeontology.
Stratigraphy.—The Mesozoic and Kainozoic rocfa
and their general distribution throughout the
world.
M i n i n g Geology.—The character, formation and distribution of mineral, coal and oil deposits.
The chief features of the principal mining
fields of the world. The mining fields of
Australia in more detail.
Field Work.—Twelve days will be spent in the field including five consecutive days during the second vacation
and not more than two week-ends.
Reading.—Reading matter ou a prescribed topic will
be announced during the First Term.
Text Books: —
Tyrrell—The Principles ot Petrology.
Larsen and Herman—The Microscopic Determina.
tion of t h e Non-opaque Minerals.
Thomas nnd McAlister—Geology of Ore Deposits.
For Reference: —
Chapman, F.—Australasian Fossils.
Eastman-Zittel—Text-book of Palaeontology.
Seward—Plant Lite Through the Ages.
Neaverson—Stratigraphical Palaeontology.
Swiunerton—Outlines of Palaeontology.
Mi era—Mi neralogy.
Rastall, H. R.—Physico-Chemical Geology.
Daly, R. A.—Igneous Rocks and the Depths of
the E a r t h .
Bowen, N. L.—Evolution of Igneous Rocks.
Lindgren—-Mineral Deposits.
Emmons—General Economic Geology.
Rastall—Geology of the Metalliferous Deposits.
Gregory—The Elements of Economic Geology.
«7a
1082
W r i t t e n : Pass and Honour (3 papers)—each 3hours.
Practical: Pass and Honour (4 papers)—each 3hours.
SCHOOL OF GEOLOGY.
Final Honours and Degree of Master ot Science.
The candidate will be allotted a special course ot reading of geological papeis. He will also be expected topass in Surveying, Part I. In addition a special research
will be allotted to him involving as a rule both field and.
laboratory work in a branch of Geology.
GRAPHICS.—(See under Faculty of Engineering).
HISTOLOGY.
The course consists ot thirty lectures delivered once a
week during first, second and third terms in the Anatomy
Department; and of a laboratory class of l i hours durationonce a week during the first term and once a week during,
second and third terms.
The specimens dealt with include the following :—
Blood, bone marrow, epithelial tissues, connective
tissues, bone development, muscle, nervous
tissues, and all the organs ot the mammalian
body, including tho central nervous system.
One Written and Practical examination
—3 hours.
combined
MATHEMATICS.
MIXED MATHEMATICS, PARTS I., II., III.—(Seeunder Faculty of Arts).
P U R E MATHEMATICS PARTS T, II, III—(See under
Faculty of Arts).
SCIENCE.
1082
SCHOOL OP MATHEMATICS AND THEORETICAL
PHYSICS.
Degree et Master ot Science.
Candidates will prepare a Thesis on some topic su«h as
Quantum Mechanics
Theory of Relativity
Electomagnetism
Statistical Mechanics
Partial Differential Equations of Mathematical
Physics,
;and will be advised as to a suitable course of reading.
Regular collociuia will be held to assist candidates in their
^studies.
In addition, candidates must either submit a report of
their original work or take a written examination on t h e
topic of their thesis and on ono or more additional topics
which will be announced by May 1st of the year preceding
•the Examination.
METALLURGY.
METALLURGY PART I. (Science Course)—
The object of this course is to apply the principles o t
chemistry and physics to industrial processes, and the
details are similar to those for Metallurgy P a r t I . (See
Paculty of Engineering.)
VACATION WORK.
Students are recommended to spend five weeks during
the long vacation in obtaining practical experience in
some metallurgical establishment.
METALLURGY PART I I . (Science GOUTS-)—
The subject matter ot Metallurgy P a r t I I , together
with Metallography (see Faculty of Engineering).
SCHOOL OF METALLURGY.
Degree of Master of Science.
The candidate will be required to attend such lectures
and practical work as shall be specified for each individual. He will bo expected to make a critical review of
the literature of one or more general metallurgical or
metallographic subject,, and to carry out a. definite piece
ot research work, and submit a report on this.
1084
1938.
NATURAL PHILOSOPHY,
NATURAL PHILOSOPHY, PAKT I.
Methods of Physical Science. Physical Quantities.
Kinematics.—Applications of Geomutry : length, angle,
area, volume. Standard and unit of length.
Principles of leugth measurement. The specification of position: frame of reference. Cartesian and Polar co-ordinates. Time, tho
sidereal day and
the second.
Vectors,
addition, subtraction; components, resolution.
Motion. Specifications of velocity,
variable velocity. Acceleration; constant acceleration. Freely falling bodies. Motion in
circular path with uniform speed.
Statics-—Force: addition and resolution of forces.
A particle is in equilibrium when resultant of
all forces acting on it is zero. Parallel forces,
principle of lever, couple. Centre of mass.
Ooplanar forces equivalent lo a, siugle force anda couple. Balance.
Dynamics-—Newton's Law, I. Mass, standard, unit.
Weight. Conservation of mass. Density. Momentum. Impulse. Newton's Laws II. and i l l .
Law of gravitation. Kepler's Laws. Laws of
motion and gravitation account for Kepler'sLaws. Work, energy, power; units. Principle of
conservation ot energy. Elements of dynamics
of rotation. The gyrostat. Simple harmonic
motion. Unite and dimensions.
Outline of the history of mechanics.
Gravitation.—Cavendish experiment, determination of
the gravitation constant. Pendulum determination of the acceleration of terrestrial gravity.
Hydromechanics.—Pressure a t a point. Pressure dueto a column of liquid. Archimedes' Principle.
Manometers.
Barometer, McLeod Gauge,
Bernoulli's theorem and applications of it.
Low pressure pumps.
Properties of Matter.— Density. Boyle's Law. Hooke'sLaw.
Young's
modulus,
compressibility,
rigidity. Flexure ot beam. Torsion. Viscosity,.
Surface tension. Diffusion.
Constitution of
matter. Elements of Kinetic Theory. Colloids.
SCIENCE.
1085
Heat.—Thermometry. Expansion! Calorimetry, specific
and latent heats. Mechanical equivalent of
heat. Change ot state, fusion and vaporisation.
Liquefaction of gases. Conduction.
Heat
radiation. Reflection and refraction. Stefan'sand Wien's Laws.
Wave Motion and Sound.—Nature aud propagation
of waves. Velocity of sound. Pitch, loudness,
quality. Reflection. Refraction. Resonance.
Stationary waves. Vibration ot strings and air
columns.
Light.—Sources. Photometry, photometric unite.
Reflection, mirrors.
Refraction,
prisms,
lenses. Velocity of light. Dispersion. Spectrum analysis.
Camera, microscope, telescope.
Nature of light.
Polarisation.
Simple interference phenomena.
Electrostatics—Fundamental Phenomena. Inverse
square law, quantity. E.S. Units. Electric field,
lines of force. Potential, E.M.F. Electroscope
and electrometer. Distribution of electricity.
Condensers.
Capacity of conductors and
condensers. Energy of a charged conductor.
Specific inductive capacity.
Current.—Electromotive force. Resistance.
Ohm's
Law, ampere, volt, and ohm. Wheatetone's
Bridge. Joule's Law. Electrolysis. Primary and storage batteries. Hydrogen ion
concentration.
Thermo-electric phenomena.
Magnetism.—Inverse square law. Moment, of magnet.
The magnetic field. Lines of force. Induction,
magnetisation.
Properties of iron.
Diamagnetism. Terrestrial magnetism.
Magnetic field due to a current.—Magnetic field due to
current in (a) straight conductor, (b) circular
coil, (c) solenoid. Electro-magnets.
Electrodynamics.—Action of a magnetic field on a
oondiuotor. Galvanometers, ammeters, voltmeters.
Electromagnetic induction.—Lenz's and Faraday's laws.
Self and mutual induction, henry. The transformer aud induction coil. Direct current generator and motor. Alternating currents (elementary treatment).
1086
DEI AILS 01 SUBJEOTS, 1938.
Applications.—Telegraph.
Telephone,
High fre.
quency
currents.
Wireless
telegraphy.
Electrical Unite.
Electricity and matter-—Electric discharge, oathode rays. Rontgen rays.
Radiography.
Radioactivity.
Isotopes. Atomic Structure.
Laboratory Work.—Experiments relating to the above
course.
Text-books recommended :—
For P a s s .
Natural Philosophy, P t . I. Lecture Notes.
Wateon—Text-Book of Physics.
Practical Physics I.—By the Staff of the Department.
Books of reference :-rGrimsehl—Textliook of Physics.
Lodge—Pioneers of Science.
Maoh—Mechanics (Historical portion).
W r i t t e n : Pass aud 1st Honour—3 hours.
2nd Honour—3 hours
Long Vacation reading in preparation tor Natural
Philosophy P t . I I : the descriptive and experimental
p a r t s of
Roberts—Heat.
Grimsehl—Electricity.
Bloch—Kinetic Theory ot Gases.
NATURAL PHILOSOPHY— PABT IL—
.Mechanics.
Properties of .Mutter.
Heat.
Light.
Sound.
Electricity and Magnetism
Atomic Physics.
For Honours.
A fuller treatment of the subjects specified above
for the Pass Examination.
SCIENCE.
1087
Practical Work.—The experiments aud measurements
relating to the above course.
For Pass and Honours.
Worthington—Dynamics of Rotation.
Poynting and Thomson—Properties of Matter.
Roberts—-Heat and Thermodynamics.
Wood—Sound.
Houston—Light.
Starling—Magnetism and Electricity, or
Thomson—Elemente of Theory of Electricity and
Magnetism, or
Page and Adams—Principles of Electricity.
Practical Physics II—Staff of the Department.
For reference:
Tuttle and Satterly—Theory of Measurements.
Griffiths—Measurement of Temperature.
Loeb—Kinetic Theory of Gases.
Crowther—Ions, Electrons and Ionizing Radiations.
Saha and Srivastava—-Text-book of Heat.
Glazebrook—Dictionary of Applied Physios.
Millikan—Electrons.
Castelfranchi—Recent Advances in Atomic Physics.
W r i t t e n : 1st Pass and Honour—3 hours.
2nd Pass and Honour—3 hours.
Xonp Vacation reading in preparation for Natural
Philosophy P t . I l l :
Roberts—Heat.
Fabry—Elements de Thcrmodynamique.
Richtmyer—Introduction to Modern Physics, or
Born—Atomic Physics.
Pupin—From Immigrant to Inventor.
NATURAL PHILOSOPHY—PART III.—
General Physics.
Heat.
1088
DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, l')33.
Thermodynamics.
Light.
Elementary Electron and Quantum Theory.
X-Eays. Radioactivity.
Propagation of Telephone and Telegraph currents.
For Honours.
A fuller treatment of the subjects specified above for
the Pass Examination.
Practical Work.—Experiments and measurements relating to the above course.
Candidates will be expected to read certain original
papers. A list of these will be posted in t h e
Department.
For Pass.
As for Natural Philosophy, P a r t I I . , together with—
Birtwistle—Thermodynamics,
Sotiiuioi-feld—Atomic Structure or
Ruark and Uroy—Atoms, Molecules and Quanta, or
Saha and Saha—Treatise on Modern Physics.
Fleming—Propagation ot Currents in Telephone
and Telegraph Conductors.
Hague—A. C. Bridge Methods.
Hevesy aud Paneth—Radioactivity.
van der Bijl—Thermionic Vacuum Tube.
Watson—Practical Physics.
Schuster and Nicholson—Theory of Optics.
Jeans—Relativity. Article Encyl. Brit., 13 Hd.
Aston—Isotopes.
Sackur—Thermochemistry and Thermodynamics.
Siegbahn—The Spectroscopy ot X-Rays."
Compton and Allison—X-Rays in Theory and
Experiment.
Whittaker and Robertson—The Calculus of Observations.
Bairstow—Applied Aerodynamics.
SCIENCE.
1089'
Loeb—Kinetic Theory of Gases.
Oallendar—Properties ot Steam.
Wood—Physical Optics.
Drudo—Theory of Optics.
Maxwell—Electricity and Magnetism.
Everitt—Communication Engineering.
J. J . a n d G . P. 'Thomson—Conduction of Electricitythrough Gases.
Whittaker—History of the Theories of Ether
and Electricity.
H. E. White—Introduction to Atomic Spectra.
Hartwell and Livingood — Experimental Atomic
Physics.
Rutherford, Chiadwick and Ellis — Radiations
from Radioactive Substances.
Mott—Outline of Wave Mechanics.
Allmaud—Applied Electro-chemistry.
Kohlrausch—Lehrhuch der practischen Phyeik.
Kaye and Laby—Physical and Chemical Constants.
Glazebrook—Dictionary of Applied Physios.
Wien und Harms—Handhuch der Experimentalphysdk.
Geiger und Scheel—Handbuch der Physik.
2nd Pass and Honour—3 hours
SCHOOL OF NATURAL PHILOSOPHY.
Final Honours and Degree of Master of S'ciencc.
The Report referred to in the Regulations for this
degree will consist of a thesis on some branch of
physics, usually ot modern physics, and must embody
a critical review of the, literature (including t h a t in
French and German). The candidate must also submit a Record of an experimental research carried out
by him. Copies of the Report and Record must b«
deposited in the University Library.
To assist candidates in their studies a Physios Conference is held periodically in the Natural PhilosophySchool.
1090
PARASITOLOGY.
PARASITOLOGY, PART A.—(To be taken in 1938).
The first part will consist of lectures, demonstrations
and practical work extending over not less than 90
i o u r s , and will deal with the following subject
matter: —
Parasitism iu general: definitions, types and degrees
of parasitism, propagation of parasites, predisposing conditions, influence of parasitism
on the host and on the parasite, prophylaxis,
treatment, interrelation of man and domesticated animals as regards their parasites.
Directions for collection, preservation and examination of parasites.
Systematic study of the parasites of domestic animals and man. General account of the chief
distinguishing features of each of t h e following groups, with brief descriptions of the
more important points in the structure, lifehistory, relation to disease and methods of
control of tho more common and important
genera of each:—Trematoda, Cestoda, Nematoda, Acanthocephala.
Books for Reference—
Ncveu-Lennaire—Traite d'Helminthologie medicale
et vetcriuaire.
Baylis—A Manual of Helminthology.
Monnig—Veterinary Helminthology and Entomology.
PARASITOLOGY, PART B.—(To be taken in 1939.)
The second part of this course will consist of lectures,
•demonstrations and practical work extending over not
less than 90 hours.
Parasitism in General: definitions, types and degrees
of parasitism, propagation of parasites, predisposing conditions, influence of parasitism
on the host and on the parasite, prophylaxis,
treatment, interrelation ot man and domesticated animals as regards their parasites, if considered necessary.
SCIENCE.
1091'
Systematic study of the parasites of ddriiestic animals (continued), dealing more especially with the
Arthropoda inimical to domesticated animals and man.
General account of the chief distinguishing features of
each of the following groups, with brief descriptions o f
the more important points in the structure, life-history,
relation to disease and methods of control of the morecommon and important genera of each: —
Arachnida, Pentastomida and Hexapoda (Diptera,
Siphhonaptera, Hemiptera, Anoplura, Mallophaga, Orthoptera).
Books for reference (additional)—
Herms—Medical and Veterinary
Entomology
(Last edition).
Patten and Evans—Insects, Ticks, Mites and'
Venomous Animals of Medical and Veterinary
Importance.
Monnig—Veterinary Helminthology and E n t o m ology.
Examination Papers (for each part): —
NUTRITION AND FOOD ECONOMICS.
NUTRITION AND FOOD ECONOMICS, PART I.—
This course will include
(a) two lectures a week on Economics and Marketing, as taken by students in Agriculture Part-
n.
(b) Organic Chemistry (as for Chemistry Part I I ) .
(o) sixteen lectures on Nutrition, with practical
work,
(d) candidates must also produce evidence t h a t
they have had a satisfactory t r a i n i n g in.
Domestic Economy a t a school recognised for
this purpose by the Faculty.*
•The following schools have been recognised—The Emily McPherson•College o( Domestic Economy, The Homecraft Hostel.
3092
N U T R I T I O N AND POOD ECONOMICS, PABT H . —
This course will include—
(a) Dairy Technology (see under Agriculture).
(b) Group Nutrition (adults).
(c) Food Production.
(d) Elementary Dental Anatomy aud Physiology and
Oral Hygiene.
(e) Public Health.
Together with excursions and lecture demonstrations on Technology ot F'ood Manufactures.
(f) Elementary Dental Anatomy and Physiology and
Oral Hygiene.
PHYSIOLOGY.
Long Vacation Reading in preparation for Physiology
P a r t I, will be prescribed during the year.
PHYSIOLOGY—PART I.—
Practical Bio-chemistry—The, reactions ot carbohydrates
fats, lipins, enzymes and proteins.
Experiments on colloids.
The composition of tho chief tissues, organs and body
fluids and t h e reactions ot their more important
constituents.
The composition of foods.
Simple experiments on digestion and respiration.
Practical Biophysics—The response ot muscle and
nerve to stimulus j alterations in the response
produced by physical and chemical agents.
The nature of the heart-beat; the influence on the
heart, arteries and capillaries ol physical and
chemical agents.
•' : Reflexaction.
Systematic Physiology-—The standard is that given by
the lectures. Students are advised to read—
Halliburton—Handbook of Physiology and
Osborne and Young—Elementary
Prao' tical Bio-Chemistry.
For practical work students are requireii to provide themselves with
apparatus in accordance with u list which will be posted in the Laboratory,
SCIENCE
1093
Examination Papers (3 hours each): —
Written (1 paper).
Practical: Bio-physics.
Bio-chemistry.
Long Vacation Heading in preparation 'for Physiology,
P a r t TI, will be prescribed during the year.
PHYSIOLOGY—PART II.—
Practical Biochemistry—.Quantitative estimation of the
chief components of the body and ot the chief
ingredients of food and excreta.
Practical Biophysics—The subjects of Part I.,
b u t more advanced.
Experiments on respiration with analyses of air.
Experiments on special senses.
Tiie electric reactions of living tissues.
Determination of the calorie values ot foods.
Basal metabolism.
Systematic Physiology—Mammalian physiology, including the central nervous system, of the standard
indicated by Starling's Principles of Human
Physiology.
Biochemistry—A course of lectures as set out in the
details of subjects of the Faculty of Agriculture,
Text Books :—
Starling—Principles of Human Physiology.
Examination Papers (3 hours each): —
W r i t t e n : Bio-physics
Bio-chemistry.
Practical: Bio-physics.
Bio-chemistry.
SURVEYING, PARTS I. and II.—(See under Faculty of
Engineering).
ZOOLOGY.
Long Facaiton Beading in preparation for Zoology,
' Part I :—
Students who have not taken Animal Hiology to the
School Leaving Pass Standard are recommend to read:—
Haldane and Huxley—Animal Biology.
1094
ZOOLOGY—PART I.—
(//) Lectures.
The elements of vertebrate and invertebrate morphology.
General account ot the following phyla with
descriptions ot the structure and life history
of
typical
examples; Protozoa,
Porifera,
Coelenterata, Platyhelminthes, Nematoda, Annelida, Arthropoda, Mollusca, Ecliiuodermata,
Chordata.
The outlines of development of the frog and bird,
and of the foetal membranes iu Mammalia.
The formation of the germ-cells, meiosis and syn.
gamy. Outline of the Theory of Evolution.
Elementary Genetics. Animal behaviour and
psychology.
(b) Laboratory -work a n d D e m o n s t r a t i o n s —
The examination by means ot dissections and preparations ot examples of the chief types of
animals and ot the structures dealt with in
the lectures.
Text-books—
Borradaile—Manual
of Zoology (7th
or
Sth
Edition).
Buchanan—Elements .of Animal
Morphology
(2nd edition.)
Dunn—Heredity and Variation.
Marshall and Hurst—Practical Zoology.
Students must be provided with the following ;—
Microscope, with low and high powers, magnifying at
least 60-450 diameters; to be approved by t h e
Professor.
Box ot approved dissecting instruments.
Note books.
Box of coloured crayons.
A limited number of Microscopes are available for hire
2nd Honour—3 hours
Practical: Pass^-3 hours.
Honour—3 hours.
SCIENCE,
ZOOLOGY
109f>
PABT II.—
Long Vacation reading in preparation for Zoology
Part I I .
Newman—Evolution, Genetics and Eugenics.
One oi the two following courses (Sections A and1
B i section A includes: —
1. Invertebrata.
3. Cytology and certain general problems of Zoology.
Section A .
1. The morphology and life histories of typical
examples of the chief divisions of the Invertebrata will be treated. I n the Laboratory
a series of forms illustrating the lectures will.
be studied.
Text-book: —
Borradaile, Eastham, Potts and Saunders—TheInvertebrata, 2nd Edition.
Parker and Haswell—Text-book of Zoology (Vol.
I.), 2nd, or later. Edition.
Sedgwick—Text-book of Zoology, Vols. I a n d
in.
Treatise ou Zoology—Ed. by E. Ray Lankester.
MacBride—Text-book of Embryology, Invertebrata.
Minchin—Introduction
to the Study of theProtozoa.
Hegner - H u m a n Protozoology.
2. The structure of the cell and the function of its
various parts, with special referenoe to Genetics, together with the principles of cell differentiation in the embryo and other oetf
problems.
Text-book: —
Agar—Cytology.
1096
Books of referenoe; —
Darlington—Recent Advances in Cytology
Wilson—The Cell (3rd Edition).
Huxley and de Boer—The Elemente of Experimental Embryology.
Section B includes: —
1. Comparative Anatomy and Embryology of Chordata, and the distribution of animals.
2. Genetics and certain general problems of Zoology.
Section B .
1. The Chordata,. and especially the Vertebrata, from
the morphological, embryological aud systematic standpoints. The embryology ot the
frog and chick will be studied in more
detail. A few lectures will deal with t h e
distribution of recent and fossil animals, with
special reference to Australia.
Books for reference; —
Sedgwick—Text-book of Zoology, Vol. I I .
Graham Kerr—Text-book of Embryology, Vertebrata.
Parker and Haawell—Text-book of Zoology (Vol.
II.), 2nd, or later, edition.
liillie—Embryology of the Chick.
Kingsley—Comparative Anatomy of Vertebrates.
Goodrich—Structure and Development ot Vertebrates.
Heilprin—Distribution of Animals.
Newbigin—Animal Geography.
2.
These lectures will deal with Heredity, Variation,
Evolution and cognate problems.
Text-book: —
Crew—Animal Genetics.
Babcock aud Clausen—Genetics.
Morgan—Physical Basis of Heredity.
Thorndike—Mental and Social Measurements.
SCIENCE
1097
I n both Sections A and B, Sub-section 1 will consist
of about SO lectures, and Sub-section 2 of the remainins;
lectures. The greater part of the laboratory work will
-deal with the subject matter of Sub-section 1.
Practical; (2 papers)—each 3 hours
Long Vacation reading in preparation tor Zoology,
Part I I I will be announoed during 3rd term.
Students taking Honours in Part 111, are required to
undertake some field work approved by the Professor.
'This work should be started in the long Vacation.
ZOOLOGY—PART I I I . One of the two courses outlined in Sectious A and B
for Zoology, P a r t I I . , but taken at a higher standard.
Candidates take one section only in each year.
Candidates who have taken Section A for P a r t EC
.must take Section B for P a r t III, and vice versa.
It is to be understood that the second year's work
will depend upon a knowledge of tho first, and the
third year's work upon a knowledge of t h a t of both the
first and second years, and t h a t the examination papers set
•will include questions requiring such knowledge.
Where desirable. Laboratory Demonstrations will t.iko
t h e place of Lectures.
Books of reference (in addition to those tor P a r t I I ) : —
Original Papers, and other works, as indicated in
the course.
Practical (3 papers)—each 3 hours
«8a
1098
SCHOOL OF ZOOLOGY.
Final honours and degree of Master of Science.
Candidates will be required to carry out some original
research and to prepare »• thesis embodying a review ot t h e
literature of some wider branch of Zoology.
DIPLOMA OF ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY.—
Chemistry, P a r t s I., II., and III., and Natural Philosophy,
P a r t 1. (See under Science)
Fourth Year.
The Candidate will be required iu the final examination of the fourth year
to
show
a general
acquaintance with the problems
and
methods
ot technical analysis. If his fourth year training
has been gained outside the
Uuiversity, be may
be granted, on application to the Registrar n o t
less than three months before the time of entry for the
examination and subject to approval by t h e Faculty
of Science, the right to be examined mainly, though
not solely, upon some special branch selected by himself. If his training has been gained within the University, the examination will be wider in scope but
not so stringent in any one particular branch.
Candidates may, when entering for this examination,
submit any original chemical work which they have
published or propose to publish; and such work shall
be taken into account by the examiners, b u t shall uot
be accepted iu lieu of the Examination.
The work of the fourth year will include reading in
all sections of the subject and, when the work is done
in the University laboratory, oandidates will be given
instruotion and demonstrations in technical methods
applied to the following:'—
1. Water Analysis: (a) for technical uses, (b) fox
domestic uses.
2. Gas Analysis (elementary): including
demonstration in the use. of the gas calorimeter.
8. Coal Analysis: proximate and ultimate, including demonstration in the use of t h e bomb
calorimeter.
SCIENCE
1099
•*. Soap Analysis: determmation of moisture, alkalinity, total fatty (and rosin) acids, separation of rosin from fatty acids (TwicheU's
method).
f>. Oils, F a t s and W a x e s : determination of the
typical chemical "constants."
Conversion
of higher alcohols into corresponding acids.
o. Foodstuffs: (a) milk, complete examination by
official methods, (b) butter (partial), (c) cream
of t a r t a r , including search for traces of lead,
(d) cereals for crude fibre.
7. Leather: estimation of tans and non-tans in the
valuation of "degree ot tannage."
8. Steel Analysis: for carbon, silicon, phosphorus,
sulphur, manganese, nickel; including
demonstrations of the so-called ''rapid methods
at the furnace."
9. Arsenic: traces.
10. Rubber Analysis: for mineral matter,
reeins,
substitutes, and "co-efficient of Tuloarui*tion."
11. P a i n t s (ready mixed): separation of pigment
from vehicle, and examination of the latter.
12. Systematic Analysis of Rocks.
13. Hydrogen
Ion
Concentration:
electrometris
methods.
DIPLOMA O F DIETETICS—
See Specimen Course for B.Sc. in Dietetics.
F o u r t h Tear.
(a) General Administration and Institutional (Food)
Management Equipment, large quantity buying,
storage; budgetting and hospital food costs j
staff management; food service in wards, e t c . ;
office routine; records.
(b) Out-patient Dietary Work—
Organisation ot O.P. Department; Clinical testing
(Basal metabolism, Barium meals); special
diets and calculation ot diets; instruction of
patients.
•(c) Diet-Kitchen Work—
Principles ot special diets, calculation, weighing,
preparation and cooking; general food propara.
1100
tion and food service ; keeping records ; instruction of patients iu the wards and on discharge ; instruction ot student-nurses.
McLester—Nutrition and Diet
in Health and'.
Disease.
Joslin—Treatment of Diabetes Mellitus.
Periodical literature on Nutrition in relation to
disease.
FEES.
For instruction in an approved Dietary
Department ot a Teaching Hospital,*
t o be paid to the institution
£16 16 Q
For examination for tho Diploma of Dietetics
5 5 0
For supplementary Examination
3 3 0
•The Dietary Department of St. Vincent's Hospital
has been approved.
1101
SCIENCE
Approved Courses for the B.Sc. Degree.
F r e n c h a n d G e r m a n A a n d B aro c o m p u l s o r y in all c o u r s e s .
F i r s t Year.
Second Y e a r .
BACTERIOLOGY
AND
T h i r d Year.
BIOOHKMISTRY.
I.—
B o t a n y I . or Zoology I. Chemistry I I .
Chemistry I .
f Physiology I .
Nat. Phil. I .
i Bacteriology I .
P u r e Maths. I .
II.—
Chemistry I I .
B o t a n y I.
f Physiology I.
Chemistry I .
(.Bacteriology I .
N a t rhll. I .
Zoology I .
BOTANY
f Bacteriology I I .
I Biochemistry
Chemistry I I I .
C Bacteriology I I .
I Biochemistry
a n d either
Botany II.
or
Zoology I I .
I.—MORPHOLOGICAL
Botany I.
Chemistry I .
Geology I .
N a t . Phil. I .
Botany I I .
Geology I I .
Botany I I I . .
Chemistry I I . •
II.—ECONOMIC, LEADING TO F O R E S T R Y —
Botany I.
Chemistry I .
Geology I .
N a t . Phil. I.
Agrlo. Chem.
Botany I I I .
Agrlo. Entomology. JSurveylng I ,
Botany I I .
Zoology I.
I I I . — S Y S T E M A T I C AND P L A N T G B O O R A P H Y —
Botany I.
Chemistry I.
Geology I .
N a t . PhU. I.
Botany I I .
{Surveying I.
Botany I I I .
Geology I I .
IV.—PHYSIOLOGICAL—
Botany I.
Chemistry I.
N a t . Phil. I .
P u r e Maths. I .
or Graphics.
Botany II,
f Physiology I .
I Bacteriology I .
Botany I I I .
Chemistry I I .
V.—PATHOLOGICAL—
B o t a n y I.
Chemistry I.
Nat. PhU. l.
Zoology I .
Botany II.
Zoology I I .
§Sul)ject to exemption from prerequisites.
B o t a n y III.
Bacteriology IAgr. Entomology I.
Horticultural
Science and
Practice-
DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1D38
1102
F i r s t Year
Second Year
Third
Year
BOTANY AND PHYSIOLOGY.
I . Botany I.
Chemistry I .
Graphics.
Nat. Phil. I.
I I . Botany I.
Chemistry I .
N a t . PhU. I.
Zoology I.
Botany I I .
Physiology I .
Chemistry I I ,
Botany I I I .
Physiology I I .
Botany I I .
Physiology I.
Chemistry I I .
Botany III.
Physiology I I .
I . Chemistry I.
Graphics.
N a t . PhU. I .
P u r e Maths. I .
I I . Chemistry I.
Graphics.
N a t . PhU. I .
P u r e Maths. I .
I I I . Chemistry I.
Mixed Maths. I .
N a t . PhU. I.
P u r e Maths. I .
I V . Chemistry I .
Mixed Maths. I.
N a t . Phil. I .
P u r e Maths. I.
Chemistry I I .
Nat. Phil. I I .
Chemistry I I I .
Pure Maths. I I .
Chemistry I I .
Nat. Phil. I I .
Electrical Eng. I.
Chemistry I I I .
Chemistry I I .
Nat. PhU. I I .
Eleotrical Eng. I
Chemistry I I I .
Chemistry I I .
Pure Maths. I I .
Chemistry I I I .
Pure Maths. I I I .
CHEMISTRY.
CHEMISTRY AND GEOLOGY.
I . Chemistry I .
Geology I.
Nat. Phil. I .
Pure Maths. I.
Chemistry I I .
Geology I I .
Chemistry I I I .
Geology I I I .
CHEMISTRY AND PHYSIOLOGY.
Chemistry I.
N a t . PhU. I .
P u r e Maths. I .
Zoology I
or Botany I.
Chemistry I I .
Nat. Phil. I I .
Physiology ] .
Chemistry I I I .
Physiology II-
CHEMISTRY AND ZOOLOGY
Chemistry I.
N a t . Phil. I .
Pur* Maths. I .
Zoology I.
Chemistry I I .
Zoology I I .
• S t u d e n t s will tie required in iiddir.in
Saturditv Mnrnin^ din-in.' First ']>nn.
Chemistry I U
Zoology I I I ,
to atteiul the lectures i,'iven on
1103
SCIENCE.
F i r s t Year.
N a t . P h i l . I.
C h e m i s t r y I.
Zoology I.
B o t a n y I.
Second Y e a r .
DIETETICS'.
B a c t e r i o l o g y I.
P h y s i o l o g y I.
Elem. Organ. Chem.
( a s for C h e m - ,
istry II.)
Nutrition and
Food Economics I ,
T h i r d Year,
Bacteriology II.
Biochemistry
Nutrition and
Economics I I .
ECONOMIC GEOLOGY.
Chemistry I.
Geolotry I.
Graphics
Nat. PhU. I.
Chemistry I I .
Geology I I .
I . Chemistry I.
Geology I.
Nat. PhU. I.
P u r e Maths. I
I I . Botany I.
Chemistry I.
Geology I .
Nat. Phil. I.
I I I . Chemistry I .
Geology I .
N a t . PhU. I.
Zoology I .
IV. Botany I.
Chemistry I.
Geology I .
Zoology I.
Chemistry I I .
Geology I I .
Geology I I I .
Nat. PhU. I I .
Chemistry I I .
Geology I I .
Botany I I ,
Geology I I I .
Chemistry I I .
Geology I I .
Geolocy I I I .
Zoolotry I I .
Botany I I .
Geology I I .
Geology I I I .
Zoology I I .
Geology I I I .
Surveying I .
GEOLOGY.
GEOLOGY AND SURVEYING.
Chemistry I .
Geology I.
Graphics
Nat. Phil. I .
Geology I I .
Surveying I .
Geology I I I .
Surveying I I .
GEOLOGY AND ZOOLOGY
Chemistry I .
Geology I.
Nat. PhU. I
Zoology I.
Geology I I .
Zoology I I .
Geology I I I .
Zoology I I I .
•Students who have completed the first year of the Medical Course may
be admitted to status in this course, but must do such addiUonal work
as the Faculty may prescribe.
DETAILS OB' SUBJECTS, 1838.
1104
First Year.
Second Year.
Third Year.
MEDICINE AND SCIENCE.
I. B o t a n y I.
C h e m i s t r y 1.
N a t . Phlf. I .
Zoology I .
•Botany II.
Chemistry II.
Zoology n .
Division I I .
C o u r s e for
M.B.. B.S.,
Degree.
METALLURGY.
I . Chemistry I.
Graphics
N a t . I'hll. I.
P u r e Maths. I.
I I . Chemistry I.
Geology I.
Nat.. PhU. I.
III. Chemistry I.
Geology I.
Nat- I'hll. T.
P u r e Maths. I .
Chemistry I I .
Metallurgy I.
(Science Course)
Chemistry I I I .
Metallurgy I I .
(Science Course)
Chemistry I I .
Geology I I .
Metallurgy I.
(Science Course)
Chemistry I I .
Metallurgy I.
(Science Course)
Geology I I I .
Metallurgy I I .
(Science Course)
Chemistry HI.
Metallurgy II
(Science Course
NATURAL P H I L O S O P H Y .
I. Chemistry I.
Mixed Maths. I.
N a t . Phil. I .
P u r e Maths. I .
I I . Chemistry I.
Mixed Maths. I.
N a t . Phil. I .
P u r e Maths. I.
I I I . Chemistry I .
Mixed Maths. I.
N a t . PhU. I .
P u r e Maths. I.
IV. Chemistry I.
Mixed Maths. I.
N a t . Phil. I.
P u r e Maths. I .
Nat. Phil. I I .
P u r e Maths. I I .
Nat. PhlL H I .
P u r e Maths H i
Nat. Phil. I I .
Pure Maths. I I .
N a t . Phil. I I I .
Mixed Maths. I I .
Nut. Phil. I I .
Pure Maths. I I .
Chemistry I I .
N a t . PhU. I I I .
Nat. Phil. I I .
Pure Maths. I I .
Eleotrical Engineering I.
N a t . PhU. I I I .
NATURAL P H I L O S O P H Y AND CHEMISTRY.
Chemistry I .
N a t . Phil. I.
P u r e Maths. I .
Chemistry I I .
Nat. Phil. I I .
P u r e Maths. I I
NATUKAL PHILOSOPHY
AND MET A LLOGKAPHY.
First Year.
Chemistry I
Mixed Maths. I
Second Year.
Metallography
Nat. Phil. I I '
Nat. Phil. I
Pure Maths. I
Pure Maths. II
* Any two of the following.
Chemistry I I I .
Nat. Phil. I I I .
Third Year.
Nat. Phil. HI
Properties of Metals
I and II
1105-
SCIENCE.
Firal Year.
T h i r d Year.
. Sec: n d Y e a r .
ZOOLOGY.
I. B o t a n y 1.
Chemistry I .
Nat. Phil. I .
Zoology I .
I I . Botany I .
Chemistry I .
Nat. Phil. I .
Zoology I .
I I I . Botany I .
Chemistry I .
Nat. PhU. I .
Zoology I .
IV. Chemistry
Geology I .
Nat. Phil. I .
Zoology I.
Botany I.
Chemistry I .
Nat. Phil. I .
Zoology I .
j Bacteriology I
I Physiology I.
Zoology I I I .
Botany I I .
Zoology I I .
Chemistry I I .
Zoology I I .
Chemistry I I .
Zoology I I .
Chemistry I I .
Zoology I I .
ZOOLOGY AND
Botany I I .
Zoology I I .
Botany I I .
Zoology H I .
j Bacteriology I.
(. Physiology I.
Zoology I I I .
Geology I I .
Zoology I I I .
BOTANY.
Botany I I I .
Zoology i n .
ZOOLOGY AND PHYSIOLOGY.
Botany I.
Chemistry I .
Nat. Phil. I .
Zoology I .
Chemistry I I .
Physiology I .
Zoology I I .
Physiology 11.
Zoology 111.
ZOOLOGY W I T H ECONOMIC APPLICATIONS.
Botany I.
Chemistry I
Nat. PhU. I .
Zoology I .
(Bacteriology I.
I Physiology I .
Parasitology
A or B.
Zoology I I .
Agri. Entomology 1.
Bacteriology I I .
Parasitology
A or B.
Zoology I I I
1106
ADDITIONAL
OANDIDATES
YEAR'S WORK APPROVED
WHO HAVE
COMPLETED
FOLLOWING COURSES.
FOR
THE
B.AGR.SC.—
(a; A group II subject distinct from the Agriculture course
Plant Physiology (as prescribed tor Botany III) with
Paleobotany
or
Physiology II (less Biochemistry).
(b) Botany III
Chemistry HI (with extra practical work),
(o) French A and B, German A and B.
B.MET.E.—
(a) The completion of any two ot the subjects. Chemistry
II. Nat. PhU. II, Geology II.
(b) Chemistry HI or Nat. PhU. Ill or Geology HI, provided
that Part II ot the subject ohosen has been
completed under (a).
The Faoulty will not grant permission to take the Part HI
Science subject In a year overloaded with other Subjeots.
FOUR TEAR COURSE LEADING TO THE TWO DBORKBS OF
B.A. WITH HONS. AND B.SC.
Mixed Maths. II.(Hon
-Chemistry I.
Mixed Maths. I. (Hon.) Nat. Phil. II.
Pure Maths. II. (Hon.)
Nat. Phil. I,
Pure Maths. I. (Hon.)
Third or Fourth Year.
Advanced Logic
Theory of Statistics
Nat. Phil. III.
Fourth or I'hird Year
Mixed Maths. HI .(Hon
Pure Maths III. (Hon.
(Both subjects io be taken
at the FintU Kxam. in
Arts Degree with Hone.)
PHYSICAL EDUCATION.
Unless otherwise notified, classes will be held a t the
University.
FIRST
YEAR.
ANATOMICAL A,ND PHYSIOLOGICAL BASIS OF
PHYSICAL EDUCATION—
I, Life and development of tho cell; the tissues;
the organs ; the systems.
The human body generally; canons; differeuca
of age and sex.
I I , (1) The skeleton, ite structure and function.
(a) The bones: Construction aud growing,
(b) The joints; Construction and fuuetion.
Special Sections:
The spine (posture).
The skeleton of the chest.
The skeleton of the limbs.
(2) The muscular system, especially the skeletal
muscles, their naanes, their function.
Special section: How the muscle works—
(i) Contraction of muscle.
(ii) Chemistry of muscle,
(iii) Fatigue of muscle.
(3) The circulatory system, its structure and
function. Heart and vessels.
Special section: Circulation and distribution
of blood during muscle work.
The lympathic apparatus and its function.
(4) The respiratory system, its structure and function.
Special sections:
The regulation of respiration.
The breathing muscle apparatus and the
different types of breathing.
Physical exercises and respiration.
(5) The nervous system, its structure and function.
The brain; the spinal cord; the peripheral
nerves; the autonomic nervous system.
Special section: Physical exercises and nervereaction.
1108
DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, IMS.
I I I . Tlio other systems more generally, with special
care of the needs of the teacher of Physical
Education.
Digestive system; excretory system; reproductive system; endocrine system.
(Fuller explanation of these systems will be given in
the second year.)
Textbook of Anatomy and Physiology, by Jesse P.
Williams.
BODY MECHANICS (with Demonstrations)—
(The demonstrations will be given at the Alfred
Hospital.)
1. A study of Body Mechanics in relation to Correct Posture.
2. Definition of Correct Carriage.
3. The Importance of Good Posture.
4. The specifications of correct Sitting, Standing
and Lying.
5. Common Postural Errors and their Causes.
6. Principles underlying the Teaching of Good
Posture.
7. Suggestions for Teaching.
Text-book:
Body Mechanics and Health—Leah C. Thomas.
H I S T O R Y , P R I N C I P L E S AND METHODS OP
PHYSICAL EDUCATION—
(a) History of Physical Education ;
(i) Activities and fundamental ideas underlying
Greek, Roman, Mediaeval
and
Modem
periods. Their influence on, and relationship to, our present problems. Comparison
of German, Swedish, Danish, English and
American systems of Physical Education.
Australia's background of Physical work.
<ii.) Historical survey especially of the German
physical exercises from the Nineteenth century
to the Great War, 1914.
PHYSICAL EDUCATION
1109
Tiie development of physical exercises after the
War.
Tho different systems of Physical Exercises aud
their value for .modern Physical Education.
<b) Principles and Methods of Physical E d u c a t i o n ; —
(i) What is Physical Education—Diiference between
Physical Culture, Physical Training, and
Physical Education. The Biological, Psychological and Sociological basis of modem
Physical Education.
Aims and objects of
Physical Education.
Basis for selecting the
programme of activities. Methods of teaching. Progression. Essentials for successful
teaching,
(ii.) The place of Physical Education in individual
and social life. The special need of Physical
Education during school-life.
Principles of Physical Education:
1. The unity of body and mind.
2. " Physical Exercises are work done with
joy."
3. The Principles of Physical Exercises:
a. operative,, inoperative and unwholesome stimulants.
b. the effect of different stimulants on
the different individuals.
c. the need for exercises during different
d. the need for exercises for the two
sexes,
(iii) The application of the principles mentioned
above.
Different methods for different ages:
1. During the Play-age.
2. During the first half of puberty.
'A. During the second half of puberty.
4. During the age after puberty to the end of
adolescence.
5. Methods of Physical Education for adults,
(iv.) Special tasks of Physical Education:
1. Preventive.
2. Developmental.
3. Occupational.
1110
DETAINS OF SUBJECTS, H.'3S
Books:
Text-booke:
English Board of Education, Syllabus ot Physical
Training.
Nixon and Cozens—Introduction to Physical Education.
Ecfercnce-books:
Jesse F. Williams—Principles of Physical Education .
Jesse F . William?—The Organisation aud Admin,
istration of Physical Education.
T. D. Wood and E . F . Cassidy—The New Physical Education.
A. F . Mayors and 0 . C. Bird—Health and Physical Education.
L. P . Jacks—Education through Recreation.
H Y G I E N E , D I E T AND F I R S T AID—
(a) Hygiene and Dietetics:
(i) Personal Hygiene—Structure and function of the
skin; Heat Regulation of the body ; Clothing
aud beat regulation.
Cold and hardening; Air-bathing; sun-bathi n g ; cold and warm water baths.
Training and over-training;' Physical and
psychical condition during training and
over-training.
How to prevent over-training,
(ii) School Hygiene—Air and ventilation in classrooms; light in class-rooms; good posture
during the sitting position (short-time exercises in the class-room and how to do them).
Mental Hygiene—Exercise, rest and sleep.
The usage of recreation time.
Environment and mind (open-air living).
Physical Education as one means of hygienic
Education, and of Education towards hygiene,
(iii) N u t r i t i o n and Digestion—The task ot n u t r i .
tion; Classification of food (Caloric value);
The Vitamins and their function; The mineral salte.
PHYSICAL EDUCATION
111.1
(iv) Hygienic Life RulesReference-books:
Jesse P . Williams—Personal Hygiene Applied.
H. Gamlin—Modern School Hygiene.
A. F . Mayers and O. C. Bird—Health and Physical Education,
(b) F i r s t A i d ;
(i) General rules and principles,
(ii) Treatment of the seemingly dead and of all other
cases of unconsciousness.
Special section (with demonstrations): Artificial Respiration; the different methods;
how t o apply,
(iii) Internal diseases which need first aid.
Special section: Poisoning,
(iv) Treatment of wounds,
(v) Fractures and Dislocations,
(vi) Special Sport-injuries.
PRACTICAL EXERCISES, PART I.—
(These wij) be held at a place to be notified a t t h e
beginning of tho year.)
(a) F o r M e n :
1. Calisthenics—Marching,
free-arm
exercises,
medicine-ball, methods of teaching. Types of
exercises and their uses. Control and organisation of class.
2. Games—Organisation and coacliing of Men's
Games.
3. Apparatus—Mats, low and high horizontal
bar, parallel bars, long and side horse, rings,
horizontal ladder.
4. Gymnastic
Dancing — Fundamental
steps.
Simple combinations of Jumps. Hops and
Travels. Dances.
5. Swimming—Crawl, Breast, Back and side
strokes, with first emphasis on form, then
on speed. Organisation of Swimming class
and methods of teaching.
1112
DETAILS OF-SUBJECTS,
1938
6. Track and Field Athletics—Running, jumping, hurdling, throwing.
Technique and
methods of training.
(b) F o r W o m e n :
1. Calisthenics—General activity work; Free-arm
exercises; Marching and running; Forms of
springs and jumps; medicine-ball; Types of
exercises and their uses; Control and organisation of class.
2. Games—
Major: Organisation, theory and practice of
girls' Basketball, Baseball, Hockey.
Minor: Indoor games.
3. Apparatus—Rib stalls, horse, box, bar and
mats, and forms.
4. Dancing—Fundamental steps—Greek dancing,
folk dancing of different nations.
5. Swimming—Crawl, breast, back
and
side
strokes, with emphasis on form.
6. Track and Field Athletics—Running, j u m p .
ing, throwing. Methods of training.
TEACHING PRACTICE AND OBSERVATION,
PART I.—
(1) (a) Attendance a t Demonstration lessons, with
subsequent discussions.
(b) Such observation of teaching in selected
schools as may be directed.
(c) Such teaching ; practice in selected schools as
may be directed.
The amount is determined according to previous experience and
aptitude of the student; minimum, 20
hours; maximum, as prescribed.
(d) The preparing of plans of work, and of notes
of lessons.
(e) The keeping of an Observation Book.
2. Arrangements will be made for students to do
some of their practice in approved schools
under the following conditions:
(a) T h a t each student be placed under an experienced teacher.
PHYSICAL EDUCATION.
Details of Subjects for Second Year.
I.—Anthropometry and Kineseology. Selected sections
of Anatomy and Physiology.
1. Anthropometry:
,
i. General aspects of measurement and introduction!
to the special methods of anthropometry.
ii. Tests and measurements in Physical Education. .
iii. Uses of measurement of physical progress.
Average standards of physical achievement
in skill, team-work and knowledge.*
iv. Problems concerning the value of statistics and
graphs. The value of measurements and
statistics for scientific research work.
v. Exact recognition of the child's physical development and skill by means of anthropomctrical
methods.
Co-operation . between
school
physician and teacher of Physical Education.
vi. Anthropometry in relation to eugenics.
2. Kineseology:
Applied anatomy and physiology of movements with
' regard to the special movements of physical
exercises.
Kineseology of track and field
games: Running, jumping, throwing, etc.
3. Selected sections of Anatomy and Physiology:
i. Tho digestive system, its structure and function,
ii. The excretory system, its structure and function,
iii. The reproductive system, its structure and
function,
iv. The endocrine system.
The influence of the
ductless glands on growth and development
of body and mind,
v. Metabolism with regard t o physical exercises.
II.
Preventive Work with Demonstrations:
1. The idea and principles of preventive work.
2. Recognition and knowledge of predisposition
to skeletal, muscular and other delects. Prevention.
3. Infection and Immunity. Cormmunicable diseases
and their prevention.
4. Signs of common ailments. Minor ailments.
5. The duty
of co-operation
between schoolphysician and tnachcr of physical education.
II J
Organisation and Administration • of
Physical
Activities:
1. Guiding Principles of Administration and Organisation.
,
2. Essentials in planning Physical Education:
a. Staff (Directors and teachers of Physical
Education; Playground leaders, Club
leaders, etc.).
b. Structures (Gymnasia, swimming pools,
atlik'tic liolils. playgrounds, temporary
and pcrmani'iit camps, youth hostels).
c. Apparatus (Apparatus of the structures
mentioned above).
d. Financial Aspects.
3. Administration of tho Gymnasia, Swimming
Pooh, Playgrounds, etc.
4. Organisation of Athletic*. Conduct of Athletic
Meetings, Ball (.ia,;no Tournaments, Swimming Competitions, etc.
5. Organisation and Conduct of walking tours,
trail rides, nature study walks, bush craft,
etc.
TV.
Practical Exorcises P a r t I I .
A.— For Men.
1. Calisthenics.
Teaching of all first year subjecte with
emphasis on their suitability for different
classes and ago groupings. Physical practice: Long and short rods. Club swinging.
Exorcises with the iron ball, hammer, etc.
2. Games.
Theory and Practice of coaching and officiating Football. Cricket, Basketball, Volleyball,
' etc.
3. Apparatus.
Advanced work iu tea.ms apparatus (Horse,
• , . Horizontal, bar. Parallel bar,. Rings, etc.).
Graded work for class aud ago groups.
4l. Partner—and fighting exercises (Antagoniatics).
Fundamentals of and teaching methods for;
Wrestling, Boxing, .Tu-Jitsu
(Judo) and
Fencing.
5. Swimming.
Advanced swimming. Methods of
teaching.
Life-saving. Conduct of Swimming Meeting.
6. Track and Field Athletics.
Revision of first year's work. Methods of
Coaching. Conduct of Track Meetings.
7. Camping and Open-air Activities.
Organisation and Direction of Camps, Hiking
parties, etc.
B.—For Women :
1. Calisthenics.
Teaching of all first year subjects, with
/
emphasis ou their suitability for different
classes and age grouping.
Medicine Ball,
Partner Exercises, Rhythmical Gymnastics,
etc.
2. Games.
Theory and practice of coaching and officiating Cricket, Basketball, Volleyball, Tennis,
Lacrosse, Badminton, Baseball, Hockey, etc.
3. Apparatus.
,
Advanced work in apparatus. Graded work
for class and age groups. Window ladders,
Wrall bars. Ropes, Boom, Horse, Box.
4. Dancing.
Combinations of dance steps; Greek danci n g ; Folk dancing of different nations.
5. Foil Fencing.
6. Swimming.
Advanced swimming. • Methods of teaching.
Life-saving. Conduct of Swimming Meetings.
7. Track and Field Athletics.
Revision of first year's work. Methods of
coaching. Conduct of Track Meetings.
8. Camping and Open-air Activities.
Organisation and direction of Camps, Hiking
parties, etc.
PHYSICAL EDUCATION
3.
4.
5.
6.
1113
(b) T h a t this teacher write in the student's " logbook " a criticism of each day's work, and
give oral criticism in addition.
(c) T h a t terminal reports on each student's progress be sent to the Director of Physical
Education by the Principal of the school.
(d) That each student be under the supervision of
the Director of Physical Education.
Partial exemption from Teaching Practice may be
granted to teachers who have had approved
experience, and who are in regular practice
of their profession as teachers of Physical
Education.
Students exempted under section 3 must be supervised regularly by the Director of Physical
Education and must undergo satisfactorily
such teats as he may direct.
Applications for partial exemption under Section
3 must be addressed directly to the Registrar, be accompanied by certificate of employment, and be sent in before March 31st.
Students may be exempted' from a final practical
test if the quality of their teaching under
supervision has been satisfactory.
EXAMINATIONS
Anatomical and Physiological Basis of Physical Education—one 3-hour paper.
Body Mechanics—one 2-hour paper and a practical
examination.
History Principles and Methods of Physical Education—one 3-hour paper.
Hygiene Diet and First Aid—one 2-hour paper and a
practical examination.
Practical Exercises, Part I—a practical examination.
Teaching Practice and Observation, P a r t I — a practical
examination.
Students attending Classes in any subject may be excused
from the annual examination on the basis of tests and
•satisfactory work carried out during the year.
U9a
'Ml 4
PRIZES AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
BOWEN
PRIZE.
(English Essay).
SUBJECT POB MAHCH,
1938.
The extent to which Australia has availed herself in.
iNew Guinea of t h e distinctive powers conferred by a
" C " mandate.
SUBJECT FOB MARCH,
1939.
" In the Nineteenth Century men embraced democracy
with enthusiasm; iu the Twentieth men submit to it
because, with all its faults, there would appear to be notolerable alternative."
THE COBDEN CLUB MEDAL.
The Examination shall be open to all Students who are
eligible to compete for the Wyselaskie Scholarship inEconomics.
The Examination shall be the Examination for the
Wyselaskie Scholarship in Economics.
If the Scholarship bo awarded, the Medal shall be given
to the Candidate who is placed second iu order ot m e r i t ; . .
but if the Scholarship he not awarded, the Medal shall be
given to the Candidate who is placed first iu order of merit.
Provided that it in any year there be no Examination for
the Wyselaskie Scholarship in Economics, the Cobden ClubMedal shall be awarded to tho Candidate who is placed
first at the Final Examination in the School of Economics..
T H E H . B . HIGGINS SCHOLARSHIPS.
(Study of Poetry).
Group A.
The examination will be in two of the following—Greek,.
Latin and English Poetry.
SCHOLARSHIPS, ETO.
1115
<1) Greek Poetry.
I n 1938: —
Homer—Iliad XXIII aud X X I V .
Aeschylus—Agamemnon.
Sophocles—Oedipus Tyrannus and Ajax.
_. ,
( Olympians I-VLT.
Pindar— ; P j ; t . h i a n s j . i y
I n 1939: —
Euripides, Hippolytus.
Aeschylus, Agamemnon.
Sophocles, Oedipus Tyrannus.
Homer, Iliad XXIII-XXIV.
Pindar, 0 1 . i - V n , P . I-IV.
Recommended for reference :—
H. Browne—Homeric Study.
G. Murray—Rise of the Greek Epic.
J. VV. Mackail—Lectures on Greek Poetry.
Norwood—Greek Tragedy.
J. A. Symonds— Studies in the Greek Poets.
S. H. Butcher—Aristotle's Theory of Poetry and
Fine Art.
W. R. Roberts—Longinus on the Sublime.
Vaughan—Types ot Tragic Drama.
Sbeppard—The Pattern of the Iliad.
(2) Latin Poetry.
In 1938: —
Catullus.
Lucretius V.
Juvenal—I, I I I , V I I I , X.
Plautus—Trinnmmus.
Vergil—Aeneid VT.
In 1939: —
Vergil, Eclogues, and Georgios.
Catullus. Selections (Simpson).
Lucretius V.
Horace, Satires I .
Recommended for reference: —
Tyrrell—Latin Poetry.
Sellar—Roman Poets.
Gordon—The Classics and English Literature.
Duff—Literary History of Rome.
1116
DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 10?8.
(3) English Poetry.
In 1938 :—
The books of English Poetry and Criticism prescribed for English Literature Part I I I , in
1937.
I n 1939: —
The books of English Poetry and Criticism prescribed for English Literature Part III, in
1938.
Group B .
The examination will be in two of the following: —
French, German, and English Poetry.
(1) and (2) French Poetry and German Poetry.
I n 1938: —
The books of French and German Poetry set for
Pass and Honours for Part I in 1935, for Part II
in 1936, and for Part I I I in 1937.
Also, in the case of Frenoh, a study of t h e
main developments of poetry during t h e 19ih
century.
I n 1939: —
The books of Frenoh and German Poetry set for Pass
and Honours for Paxt I in 1936, for Part I I iu
1937, and for P a r t I I I in 1938.
(3) ' English Poetry.
In 1938: —
The books of English Poetry and Criticism prescribed for English Literature Part I I I , in
1937.
In 1939: —
The books of English Poetry and Criticism prescribed for English Literature P a r t TH, in
1938.
The Examination in any part ot each Group will consist
of two 3-hour papers, and will include—
(a) Translation and interpretation of passages.
(b) Critical comment and illustration.
(o) Quotation.
SCHOLARSHIPS, ETO.
1117
(d)
Questions on the history and principles of
poetry and ot literary style.
(e) Questions concerniug the lives and works ot tha
prescribed authors.
In addition there may be an Oral Examination it t h e
examiners think fit.
JOHN MASEFIELD PRIZE.
(Original Poem)..
SUBJECT FOK J U N E ,
1939.
"Exploration."
THE W . . T. MOLLISON
SCHOLARSHIPS.
1. * F R E N C H —
The
2.
papers set for the Final Examination ia
the School of French Language and Literature, along with the oral test.
GERMAN—
The papers set for the Final Examination in the
School of Germanic Languages, along with
the oral test.
3. * ITALIAN—
(a) A three hours' written examination in Ad:
vanced Unseen Translation from and into
Italian.
(b) A three, hours' written examination in translation from the following: —
Silvio Pellico—Le mie prigioui.
Massimo d'Azeglio—La distida di Barletta.
Vincenzo Gioberti—11 primato civile degli
Italian).
(o) A three hours' written ' examination on- the
life and work of Pietro Metastatic (one
question at least to be answered in Italian),
(d) A three hours' written examination on the
outline of
Italian
literature from
the
Binascimento to the end of the' 19th cen•Candidates in these languages must previously nav»
passed in Latin P a r t I .
i'11'8
DETAILS OP SUBJECTS, 11)38.
tury, taking as landmarks the works of
Dante, Petrarca, Boccaccio, Sacchetti, Poliziano, Pulci, Albcrti, Ariosto,
Folengo,
Machiavelli, Aretino, Taaso, Marino, Giordano
Bruno, Galileo, Vico,
Metastesio,
Goldoni, Parini, Alfieri, Monti, Foeoolo,
Manzoni, Leopardi, Carducoi, De Amicis,
Pascoli.
!
(e) An oral teat ou the work prescribed for (o)
and (d).
4.
JAPANESE—
An examination similar to t h a t set tor advanced
students of Japanese a t the University of
Sydney, which includes Classical Texts,
Modern Literature and Newspapers, and
Composition.
(See Text-books under Instructorship in Japanese.)
PROFESSOR MORRIS PRIZE.
SUBJECT FOR DECEMBER,
1938.
Coleridge as a Literary Critic; or, any subject approved ae the dissertation of a candidate for t h e
Final Examination in the School of English Language
and Literature.
SHAKESPEARE SCHOLARSHIP.
Open for Competition in 1940.
(a) Examination: Shakespeare's Life, Times
Work,
(b) Essay: Shakespeare in Australia.
THE
WYSEIASh'IE
and
SCHOLARSHIPS.
1. MATHEMATICS—
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Quantum Mechanics.
Theory of Relativity.
Electroiiiagnotism.
Statistical Mechanics.
Partial Differential Equations of Mathematical
Physics.
-• ' '
.
SCHOLARSHIPS, ETC.
1119
2. NATURAL SCIENCE—
(1) Geology, Paheontology and Mineralogy.
(2) Chemistry, with Laboratory work.
(3) Zoology, with Laboratory work.
(4) Botany, with Laboratory work.
The Examination in the foregoing groups will cover the
ground ot the following University Courses :—
(1) Geology, P a r t s I., II., and III., with Laboratory
and Field work.
(2) Chemistry, Parts I., II., and III., with Laboratory work.
(3) Zoology, Parts I., I I . , and III., with Laboratory
work.
(4) Botany, P a r t I., II., and TIL, with Laboratory
work.
The Examination for the next Wyselaskie Scholarship
in Natural Science after the date mentioned below will be
in Group (2) of the subjects above set out; the next following, in Group (3); and so on, in rotation, at subsequent
Examinations. Jlore exact particulars may be obtained
from the Registrar.
3.
ENGLISH
CONSTITUTIONAL
HISTORY—
The University Course in British History B, in
British History D, in Constitutional and Legal
History, and in Modern Political Institutions.
'The papers set in the Examination will be t h e
same papers as those set in the Final Examination for School B—the two papers in British
History and the papers in Constitutional and
Legal History and in Modern Political Institutions.
4
POLITICAL ECONOHT—
The University Course in Economic History,
Economics Part T, Economics Part I I , Economics
P a r t TIT, and History of Economic Theory as prescribed for the Final Examination, with special
reference to the Economic History ot Australia,
and contemporary economic conditions in Australia.
1120
DETAILS OF'SUBJECTS,^ 1938.
6. MODERN LANGUAGES—
(1) English.
(2) French.
(3) German.
The Examination for the next Wyselaskie Scholarship
in Modern Languages after the date mentioned below will
be in French, t h e next following in German, the next following in English, and so on in rotation. More exact
particulars may be obtained from the Registrar.
The papeis set in the Examination will be, for English
the same papers as those set in the-Final Examination for
School E.; for French, the papers set in the Final Examination in the School of French Language and Literature,
along with the Oral Test and an Essay on a prescribed
subject; for German, the papers set in the Final Exaini
nation in the Scliool of Germanic Languages. •
Candidates in German will also present an Essay ou some
subject connected with the examination; the subject will
be prescribed before the end of the first term in the year
of the examination.
Subject for Essay when next open iu French :—
L'ideo do 1'infini dans la povsie moderno.
6! CLASSICAL AND COMPARATIVE PHILOLOGY AND L O G I C —
(1) Passages for translation from any Greek or
Latin authors.
(2) Passages of English for translation into Greek
and Latin prose and verse.
(3) Questions on the Phonology, Morphology and
Grammar of Greek and Latin iu particular.
(4) General questions on the outlines of Greek and
Roman history, antiquities, and geography.
(5) History of Greek Philosophy, with special
reference to logical problems.
(61 Study of Greek texts relevant to (5).
The papers set in the Examination for subjects (11
arj'l (4) above will be the same paners as those set
in the Final Examination in the School of Classical
SCHOLARSHIPS, ETC.
U21
Philology in the same term, and entitled respectively
Greek Unseen Translation, Latin Unseen Translation.
General P a p e r ; the papers set for subjects (2) and
(3) will correspond to those entitled Translation into
Greek Prose and Verse, Translation into Iiatin Prose
•nnd Verse, Comparative Philology.
By order of the Professorial Board,
31st July, 1937.
D. B. COPLAND,
Chairman.
1122
ANNOUNCEMENTS FOR
193S
A NNOUNCEMENTS.
TERM EXAMINATIONS, 1938.
In accordance with the provisions of Chapter II., Regulation II., Division I., Section 3, 'Term Examinations in
substitution for the Annual Examinations will be held in
1938 in the following subjects :—
(1) All subjeots for Degrees in Engineering with
the exception of Pure and Mixed Mathematics, Natural Philosophy, Chemistry, Geology
Metallurgy,
Architecture
(Engineering
Course), and t h e subjects confined to the
Final Years of courses for Engineering degrees, excepting Electrical Engineering, P a r t
I. and Mechanical Engineering, P a r t II.
(2) Free Drawing, Graphics, Strength and Elasticity
of Materials and Surveying, Part I., in the
course for the Degree of
Bachelor of
Architecture.
(3) Graphics, Surveying, Electrical Engineering,
Part ]., and Parasitology, in the course for the
Degree of Bachelor of Science.
ANNOUNCEMENTS FOR 1933.
1123
E V E N I N G LECTUEES, 1938.
. It is proposed to hold Evening Lectures at the University
in 1938, in the following subjects :—
•
Accountancy, Part I.
Industrial and Financial
•Accountancy, Pt. IIA (1939)
Organisation.
•Accountancy, Pt. I I B (1938) Italian.
Ancient History, Part I.
Japanese.
Botany P a r t I., with LabLatin, Part I.
oratory Work.
Latin, Part I I .
British History B. and D. Latin, Part I I I .
.. Commercial Law, f a r t I.
*Logic (1938).
•Commercial Law Part I I
*Marketing (1938)
(1938)
Mixed Mathematics, Part I.
•-. Dutch
Modern History, A and B.
Economic Geography.
Modern Political
Economic History.
Institutions
Economics, P a r f l .
Natural Philosophy, Part I.,
English, A.
with Laboratory Work.
English, B and C.
Philosophy, Part I.
•Ethics (1939).
"Public Administration (1938)
French, P a r t 1.
*Public Finance (1939)
French, Part TI.
Pure Mathematics, Part I.
French, Part I I I
Pure Mathematics, Part I I .
German, P a r t I.
Russian.
Scandinavian
[Spanish
Certain of these are held between 4 p.m. and 6 p.m., and
are the ordinary lectures in the subject. Those held after
6 o'clock are tor the most part for Pass only.
The fees will be the same as for day lectures.
Entry for evening lectures must be made on or before
Saturday, 19th February, 1938. Fees must be paid into
the Uuiversity account a t the National Bank not later
than Saturday, 19th February: they may be paid b y t h e
term or by the year.
Lectures begin on Monday, 7th March.
No lectures will be given iu any subject unless t h e
number ot entries is satisfactory.
:
Students desiring Evening Lectures in any other
subjeots are requested to communicate with the Registrar,
•The course in these subjects, if required, will be given in alternate yea«p
1124
.ANNOUNCEMENTS FOB U38.
MASSAGE .STUDENTS.
Lectures and Demonstrations in Anatomy and Physiology
specially adapted for Massage Students are provided as
follows:—
• First "Tear—Junior Anatomy, Physiology.
Second Year—Senior Anatomy.
The Fees are as follows:—
First Year.— Leotures : Junior Anatomy • B
Dissections: Practical Anatomy 4
Leotures: fhysiology - 4
Examination (each subject) 2
Second Year—Lectures : Senior Anatomy - £ 8
' Dissections: Practical Anatomy 4
Examination
2
PUBLIC
8
4
;4
2
8
4
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
EXAMINATIONS.
EXHIBITIONS AND PRIZES.
The- following Exhibitions will be open for competition
a t the School Leaving Examination to be held in
December, 193S, viz:—
Twenty-eight Exhibitions of .£20 each, one in each of
t h e twenty-eight subjects of the School Leaving Examination.
Two Liet Memorial Prizes in French, one of ,£11 8s. Od.
and the other ot £7 12s. Od;, open to those who have not
learnt French as their native language.
For the best essay in French submitted at the Leaving
•Honour Examination the French Government offers
annually-a medal inscribed with t h e winning candidate's
name.
One Prize of .£2 10s., in books, for Commercial Principles
and another for Commercial Practice to the candidate next
to the Exhibitioner.
Candidates must be under 19 years of age, and must .be classed in
two subjects, and must pass or have passed.the examination as a whole.
List of Scholarships, Exhibitions', a n d Prizes on
Foundations;
Special
Showing Date at which next open for Competition.
o
a
o
(Note:—The values of Scholarships arc being revised and in many cases the
undermentioned amounts must, be reduced).
1.
Aitchison (.£70) (£70) - 2.
(£350)
3.
Alcock (£100) Argus (.670)
(£30)
(£20)
Armytage (£25) Bage Memorial (£45)
Baird Bursary (£25 p.;i . )
Bartlett (£100 each) Beaney (£70) i.
2
(£100) Boweu (£5)
Catto (£90)
Undergraduate
Undergraduate
Travelling Medical Research
Engineering
Civil Engineering
Geology, Part I.
Medical Research
Engineering
Medical Course
Research
Surgery
Pathology
English Essay
Zoology
- Irregular - First Term,
193S
1938
1939
Annual - Decombor 1st. 1938
- First Tumi, 1938
1938
1938
- Fourth „
1938
- March 1st,
- First Term, 1938
Trrogula r - February 1st,1942
A nnual February; 14th,1938
- Fourth Term, 1938
1938
- Fourth „
1938
- March 1st,
- First Term, 1938
>
o
"3
V,
>
'A
>
o
z
Scholarships, Exhibitions and -Prizes on Special Foundations—(continued).
to
C h a m b e r ot C o m m e r c e
( £ 1 5 ) 1.
( £ 1 5 ) 2.
( £ 1 5 ) 3.
(£15)4.
( £ 1 5 ) 5.
OS
Commercial Law, P a r t I
A n n u a l - F o u r t h T e r m,1938
E c o n o m i c s , P a r t 1.
„
,,
,, 1938
Indust. and Fin'cial Organisation
„
„ 1938
„
Statistical Method
,,
>,
„ 1938
P u b l i c A d m i n i s t r a t i o n or P u b l i c
Finance
.
.
.
. Annual
- F o u r t h T e r m , 1938
„
,, 1938
( £ 1 5 ) 0. A c c o u n t a n c y , P a r t IT. ,,
H u g h Childers (£6) Education
- F o u r t h T e r m , 1938
,,
J . G . C h r i s p B u r s a r y (£35) Law course
I r r e g u l a r - F e b r u a r y 1st , 1 9 3 8
- F i r s t T e r m , 1938
Cobden Club Medal Political Economy
Annual
- F o u r t h T e r m ,, 1938
J a m e s C u m i n g ( £ 2 2 ) - 1. A g r i c u l t u r a l C h e m i s t r y
„
(£22)
2. A g r i c u l t u r a l B i o - C h e m i s t r y
1938
„
,,
,,
- F o u r t h 'Term,, 1 9 3 8
J . C u m i n g M e m o r i a l ( £ 5 1 ) C h e m i s t r y , P a r t 11 f. „
„
„
1938
(i!34)
„
„
„
„
Dick B u r s a r y ( £ 4 0 )
.
.
.
. I r r e g u l a r - F e b r u a r y 1st,, 1938
1942
„
(^40)
„
(£40)
,,
» 1942
,,
Annual
- F o u r t h T e r m, 1 9 3 8
Dixson ( £ 6 0 )
- 1. C h e m i s t r y , P a r t I I I .
(£60)
- 2. N a t u r a l P h i l o s o p h y , P a r t I I I .
„
„
,, 1938
(£20)
- 3. P u r e M a t h e m a t i c s , P a r t I I . „
„ 1938
„
re
a
o
re
a•5
I>.
tT
K
o
53
X
g
2?
i-3
O
Scholarships, Exhibitions and Prizes on Special Foundations- —(continued).
Dixson (£20)
- 4. Mixed Mathematics, Part I I .
- Annual
(£20)
- . - 5. Moch. Engineering, Part IT.
(£20). - 6. Engineering Design, P a r t IT.
„
(£20)
- 7. Chemistry, Part I I .
'(£20)
- 8. Natural Philosophy, Part I I .
(£20)
- 9. Metallurgy, Part I. (So.) „
(£20)
-10. Agricultural Engineering ,,
Dixson (Research) (£100) 1. Chemistry
„
(£100) 2. Natural Philosophy
. . .
,.
(£100) 3. Mathematics
.
.
.
.
(£30) 4. Electrical Engineering
„
(£30) 5. Mechanical Engineering
„
(£30) 6. Metallurgical Engineering - . . ...
(£150) 7. Engineering
.
.
.
.
..
Original Contribution to Literature
Dublin (£10)
or Science or Art
Dwight (£25)
- 1. Education (£25)
- 2'. Natural Philosophy, Part T. (£25)
- 3. Chemistry, Part I.
'(£60)
- 4. History (Final Examination)
(£50)
- 5. Frenoh (Final Examination)
- Fourth Term, 1938
1938
1938
,,
1938
,,
lf
„ 1938
,,
,,
,, 1938
„
,, 1938
- First To rni. 1938
1938
Fourth )} 1938
- First
„ 1938
1938
>r
1938
"
1938
y'j
'
• January 31st,
Fourth Term
„
„
„
,,..
1938
1938
1938
1938
1938
1938
a
ta
o
c
>r
w
c
hi
•O
TI
>
>
H
o
as
Scholarships, Exhibitions and Prizes on Special Foundations—(continued).
Dwight (£25)
- 6. Parasitology and Pathology and
Bacteriology - Annual
(£60) - 7. English (Final Examination)
Jurisprudence Part I and ConHarry Emmerton (£25)
stitutional and Legal History
R. J. Fletcher Cancer or Anaesthetics Research
Fulton (£45)
Obstetrics and Gynaecology John Grice (£10/10/-).Architecture Research Prizo
Animal
Chemical Research
G rim wade (£80)
Harbison-Higinbotham
. . .
„
(£100) Economic Research
„
Maude Harrington (30/-) Accompanying on Pianoforte
„
H. B. Higgins
(£30) ' Greek, Latin, and Knglish Poetry
(£30) English, French, and German Poetry ,,
,,
F. W. Homewood (£33/12/ -) Pianoforte
„
Howitt (£50)
- 1. Geology
(£60)
- 2. Zoology
„
(£50)
- 3. Botany
Clinical Medicine
. . .
„
Jamieson (£5) Biennial
Caroline Kay (£150 p.a.) 1. Botany
(£150p.a.) 2. Veterinary
- Annual
Kernot Memorial Medal Engineering achievement
OO
-
- Fourth Term, 1938
- Fourth Term, 1938
-
Fourth Term,
February,
Fourth Term,
Fob. 38th
March 1st,
1938
1938
1938
1938
1938
• March 1st.
1938
Fourth Term, 1938
July,
1938
1938
First Term, 1938
1938
„ 1938
„ 1938
Fourth Term, 1938
First Term, 1939
1939
1938
«
o
>
•
OP
o
TI
>
%
o
as
Kernot (Research) (£70) 1. Chemistry • (£70)2. Natural Philosophy
(£70) 3. Geology
Kilmany.(£200) Economics Walter Kirby (£40) Singing
Kuight
Research
Mining Engineering
George Lansell (£30) (£20) Mining, Part I
Logic and Philosophy Laurie (£10)
Jessie Loggatt (£15) Roman Law
(£20) Law of Contract (£25) Law of Property Levi Memorial (£60) Medicine
J. C. Lloyd (£25)
- 1. Architecture Part I. etc.
(£25)
- 2.
,,
„
II. etc.
John Madden (£15) Law ot Wrongs (£15) Constitutional Law Part. 1 John Masefield (£6) Poetry
MacBain (Research) (£45) Zoology
MacBain (Research) (£45) Botany
Melvin Memorial (£45)
Engineering •
- Annual
„
,,
.,
- Irregular
Annual
,,
„
„
-
Annual
,,
.,
- Annual
- Annual
• „
Annual
,,
- Biennial
,,
,,
- Annual
1938
1938
1938
- First Term, 1938
1938
- February,
- February
1938
- First Term 1938
- Fourth Termi ,1938
,,
„ 1938
- Fourth Term , 1938
„
,,
1938
1938
,,
,,
1938
>,
„
- Fourth Term,, 1938
1938
„
1938
,,
3,
„
„ 1938
• June 3Uth, 1939
- Fourth Termi 1939
,,
,, 1938
- First Term, 1938
- First Term,
..,
„
„
„
Co
o
o
>
In
X
,a
'•c
T0
•••i
If.
o
TI
>
.g
5
2
o
- **e\
~»~u
'to
to
S c h o l a r s h i p s , Exhj bitlons and Prizes on Special F oundations — ( c o n t i n u e d ) .
Mollison—
each £180 on pro- "J
ceeding
abroad ( 1and £50
nine I 2.
months later
J
Moran Bursary
(£90)
. (£90)
(£90)
(£90)
(£90)
Professor Morris (£4)
Professor Nanson (£12)
John Novill (£26)
No. 1 Rest Home
Bursary (£18)
Arthur Nyulasy (£100)
Ormond (£25) - 1.
(£25) - 2.
(£25) - 3.
(£25) - 4.
Payne (£14)
o
French, German or Italian Japanese
-
Biennial • F o u r t h T e r m 1938
„
1941
- Irregular -
a
U.
o
c •
>..
to •
Law
.
Irregular - F e b r u a r y 1st,
Medicine
Engineering
Wesley College pupil Methodist Ladies' College pupilLiterary Criticism
. . . Annual
Fourth Term
Mathematics
Biennial - J a n u a r y 31st,
Veterinary Irregular Gynaecology
• Irregular •
Music, Entrance Diploma (3)
Annual
Music, Entrance Mus. Bac. (3)
Music, First Year Mus. Bac. (3) Music, Second Year Mus. Iliac. (1)
4th year B.V.Sc. Course
Annual -
194°
1939
1938
1940
.1! l-l-l
1938
1038
E
re •
1
>
H
re
o
1939
F e b r u a r y 1st, 1941
>•
>
February,
Fourth Term,
„
„
1938
1938
1938
1938
F o u r t h T e r m , 1938
o
CO
Shakespeare (£50 p.a.)
W. G. Sharp Bursary(£38)Medicine
Baldwin Spencer (£7)
Zoology Part I. (Science)
(£7)
Zoology (Medical)
Stawell (Research) (£75) Engineering
Alwyn Stewart
Medicine
.
.
.
.
.
Memorial (£48)
1. Anatomy
- ,Stewart (£20 p.a.)
(£20 p.a.) - 2. Medicine
.
.
.
.
.
(£20 p.a.) - 3. Surgery
Alexander Sutherland(£1) English Language and Literature
William Sutherland ( £ 3 3/-) Natural Philosophy, P a r t I I . David Syme (£125) Sciontific Research
Engineering Bursary David Thompson (£24)
Law
.
.
.
.
Sir Geo. Turner (£20)
Australasian History Gyles Turner (£8/10/-)
Agriculture
Hy. Gyles Turner
Music, First Year Dip. Mus.
Lady Turner (two) (£3 10/-)
Fred Walker (£48) Chemistry Part I I I
Mathematics
Professor Wilson (£16)
General History, Part 1
E. G. Wilson (£15) -
Triennial Fourth Term, 1940
irregular -February 1st, 1938
Annual • Fourth Term, 1938
„
„
1938
First Term, 1938
December 1st, 1938
Annual
Triennial - Fourth Term, 1939
„ 1939
„ 1940
Annual - Fourth Term, 1938
„ 1938
- March 1st,
1939
Irregular - February 1st, 1941
Annual
Fourth Term, 1938
Biennial
„
1939
Irregular —
—
—
Annual - Fourth Term, 1938
Annual
Biennial
Annual
„
„
1938
January 31st, 1939
Fourth Term, 1938
o
a
o
f
.>
X
o
TJ
• >•
S
S c h o l a r s h i p s , Exhibitions and Frizes on Special Foundationss—(continued).
R. G. Wilson (£15)
(£60)
(£50)
Wright (£20) (£20) (£20) (£15) -
1.
2.
3.
- 4.
P. J. Wright (£15) (£15) Wrixon (£30) Wyselaskie (£100 p.a.)
(£90 p.a.)
(£90 p.a.)
(£60 p.a.)
(£80 p.a.)
(£85 p.a.)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
to
CO
General History, Part I I
- Annual
Classical Philology
. . .
„
Germanic Languages „
Mechanical Engineering, Part I. „
Engineering Design, P a r t I
„
Instrumental Music „
Constitutional and Legal History
„
- Fourth Term ,1938
1938
„
„ 1938
- Fourth Term,,1938
„
,, 1938
„
„ 1938
1938
o
K
o
Economic Geography - Annual
Economios, Part I I . „
Agriculture
.
.
.
.
()
Mathematics
Irregular
Natural Science „
English Constitutional History „
Political Economy
. . .
ti
Modern Languages
„
Classical and Comparative Philology and Logic
,,
- Fourth Term 1938
1938
,*
,, 1938
- Fourth Term., 1937
- First
„ 1939
- Fourth „ 1938
1937
1938
>*
>t
B
re
>1
>t
1937
>
re
a
re
|
>
O
TI
*'
>.
S
5
>
ANNOUNCKMKNTS FOR 1938
1133
WAR BURSARIES.
Six War Bursaries may be awarded by the University each
year. They may be granted to sons or daughters of persons
•previously domiciled in Victoria, who have died on service
with the Australian Expeditionary Forces, in cases-where
there is evidence t h a t without such assistance a University
course could not be undertaken or continued. A bursary
will carry remission of lecture and examination fees for a
University course. Applications by candidates should be
lodged by 1st February.
WALTER AND ELIZA HALL FELLOWSHIP.
The Walter and Eliza Hall Trustees provide a Veterinary Science Research Fellowship bearing their name
and tenable at the Veterinary Institute. -The value is
£250 per annum with an allowance of £100 per annum for
expenses. The Fellow must devote his whole time to research.
RESEARCH SCHOLARSHIPS.
RULES.
1.
Grades of A ward ;
It is proposed to make awards in the following grades :
.Minor Research Scholarships (standard value £50).
Major Research Scholarships (initial value £120,
maximum value £300).
Research Fellowships (value £500, less current
percentage reduction).
2. Standing in each grade:
Minor Research Scholars should normally be of Bachelor
standing, and be proceeding to a Master's degree mainly
by research; Major Research Scholars should normally be
of Waster standing (the formal requirement of Master
standing being, of course, interpreted broadly in the
special cases of Medical, Dental and Veterinary graduates)
trained in research ; and Research Fellows should be
proved research workers of the highest merit.
"11 : 34
3.
KHSEARCH SCHOLARSHIPS.
Emoluments : other University Income :
In fixing the amounts to be awarded, emoluments from
. any other University sources (scholarships, demonstratorships, tutorships, etc.) will be taken into consideration and
the standard rates reduced accordingly by such amount as
may seem reasonable, regard being paid to the extent to
-which tho applicant will bo able to devote himself to
research.
4.
Qualifications for awards :
In each grade awards will be made only to applicants of
first-rate calibre.
In the case of a Minor Research Scholarship, as a rulo an
applicant should have obtained first-class honours in his
final examination.
'I'he qualification required is the
the promise of high capacity for research work, attested by
the Head of the Department concerned.
Por a Major Research Scholarship the applicant must bo
recommended by the Head of his Department as having
proved his capacity for first-rate research work.
5.
Tenure:
A Minor Research Scholarship will normally be awarded
for one year only ; a Major Research Scholarship initially
for one year at the minimum rate (£120), but it may
thereafter be renewed for further periods of two years, up
to a total of five years, with annual increments, normally
of £ 3 0 ; a Research Fellowship will be awarded initially
for two years, renewable thereafter up to a total of five
years.
6.
Further awards :
After five years' tenure the holder of a Major Research
Scholarship or a Research Fellowship is eligible for a
further award of such Scholarship or Fellowship; b u t
such further award will not be regarded as a renewal but
as exceptional, to be made only upon special application
and upon a special recommendation from the Head of the
Department concerned.
ANNOUNCEMENTS FOR 193S
MINING
1136
AND METALLURGICAL BURSARIES
AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
The principal Australian Base Metal Mining Companies
have established a trust for the award of Bursaries on
the following terms :—
Students who aro British subjects and have completed or
received credit for the second year of the B.M.E. or
B.Met.E. course may apply before 1st December for a
Bursary, submitting evidence as to personality and
Scholarship. Two bursaries will be open to competition in
each year, one in Mining and one in Metallurgy, and
under the heading ot Scholarship, special consideration will
be given to Engineering subjects iu the case of the
Bursary in Mining and to Metallurgical subjects in the
case of the Bursary in Metallurgy. Each will be worth
£30 per annum for the remaining two years ot the course,
the payment for the fourth year ot the course being contingent on the bursar's having sufficiently distinguished
himself in his third year. In general, the attainment of
first-class honours in one subject or second-class honours
in two subjects will be accepted as evidence of sufficient
distinction. Should a Bursary lapse it may be awarded
to another candidate who has proved his worth. No
award will be made it no candidate is sufficiently qualified.
R.V.I.A. WAR MEMORIAL
SCHOLARSHIP.
Value £50 per annum. Open in the first instance to
students who can show t h a t their architectural education
has suffered through the loss of a relative at the War ; or,
secondly, to those who are returned soldiers or sons of
returned soldiers ; or, thirdly, to students of architecture
generally.
Candidates must be students in the course for the
Degree of Bachelor of Architecture or t h a t for the Diploma
of Architectural Design.
'The scholarship money may be utilised, first, for the
payment ot University fees; second, for expenses of
travelling to other States for extending knowledge of
architecture or attending courses ot instruction ; third, for
travelling abroad for extending knowledge.
•11 36
RHODES SCHOLARSHIP.
Applications must be lodged'with the Registrar not later
than 14th December.
An Annual Scholarship also presented by the R.V.I.A.
may be awarded at the end of the first year; and the Grice
Bronze Medal at the end of the third year. For further
information candidates are referred to the Director of the
Atelier.
RHODES
SCHOLARSHIP.
REGULATIONS iron THE ELECTION OF THE RHODES SCHOLAR
POE 1937.
1.—General Regulations.
A Rhodes Scholarship is tenable at Oxford normally
for two years, subject to the continued approval of
the Scholars' College and of the Rhodes Trustees. As
tha majority of Rhodes Scholars can take a degree in
two years, appointments are made for two years, and a
Scholar who may wish to continue for a third year
must present a definite plan of study satisfactory to his
College and to the Trustees.
If a third year is granted Scholars may be allowed either
to postpone it or to spend t h a t year forthwith in postgraduate work at another University,
The value of a Rhodes Scholarship" ia £400 per year.
At most colleges, and for most men, this sum is not
sufficient to meet a Rhodes Scholar's necessary expenses
for Terra-timo and Vacations, and Scholars who can
afford to supplement it by say £50 per year from their
own resources will find it advantageous to do so. The
cost of the voyage to and from England must be borne
by the Scholar.
Ono Scholarship a year is allocated'to each State in
the Commonwealth.
2.—Conditions of •Eligibility.
The following are the conditions under which candidates are eligible:
(1) Candidates must be British subjects, with at
least five years' domicile in Australia or New
Zealand, and unmarried.
ANNOUNCEMENTS POR 1933.
1137
(2) Candidates must be of such an age that they
will have passed their nineteenth and not
have passed thedr twenty-fifth birthday by
October 1st ot the year for which they are
elected.
(3) Candidates must have reached such a stage in
their course t h a t they will have completed a t
least two years at the University by October 1st
of the year tor which they are elected.
(4) Candida tea may compete either in the State in
which they have their ordinary domicile, or
in t h a t in which they may have received any
considerable part of their education.
For each State there will be a Committee of Selection,
in whose hands, subject to ratification by the Trustees,
tho nominations will rest. The Committees will be responsible for deciding whether candidates oomply with
the foregoing conditions.
3.—Jiasis of Selection.
In that section ot the Will in which he defined the
general type of scholar he desired, Mr. Rhodes mentioned four groups ot qualities, the first two of which
he considered most important:
(1) Literary and scholastic attainments;
(2) Qualities of manhood, t r u t h , courage, devotion
to duty, sympathy for and protection ot the
weak, kindliness, unselfishness, and fellowship;
(3) Exhibition of moral force ot character and of
instincts to lead and to take an interest in
his schoolmates;
(4) Physical vigour, as shown by fondness of and
success in manly outdoor sports.
Distinction both in character and personality and in
intellect is the moat important requirement for a Rhodes
Scholarship, and it is upon this t h a t Committees will
insist. Success in being elected to office in student
organisations may or may not be evidence ot leadership in the true sense of the word. Mr. Rhodes evidently regarded leadership as consisting in moral
•courage and in interest in one's fellow-men quite as
1138
ANNOUNCEMENTS
FOR iJ33.
much as iu the . more - aggressive qualities.
Physical
vigour is ar essential qualification for a Rhodes Scholarship, but athletic skill is of less importance than the
moral qualities developed iu playing outdoor games.
Poverty does not give a special claim to a Scholarship.
The strongest candidate should be appointed regardless of his financial circumstances. In general, oandidates will be preferred who will be under the age of
23 when they go into residence at Oxford. In the
absence of a strong candidate the Committees will make
no appointment.
4.—Method of Application.
Each candidate tor a Scholarship is required to make
application to the Secretary of the Committee of Selection of the State in which he wishes to compete not
later than October 20th, using a prescribed application
form. Copies may be obtained at the Registrar s Office.
5.—Material to be submitted by Candidates.
(1) A birth certificate.
(2) Evidence as to Courses taken and Degrees,
Honours, and other academic distinctions
obtained. This evidence should be formally
certified by the Registrar or other responsible officer of the University.
*(3) A statement by himself as to his general
interests and activities (including athletics),
his proposed line of study at Oxford, and the
character of the work at which ho aims in
after-life.
t(4) A medical certificate.
(5) Two photographs (preferably unmounted and not
larger than 4 in. by 7 in.).
(6) References to not less than six persons well
acquainted with him, under at least three ot •
whom he must have studied.
With the application must be lodged eight copies of
the documents prescribed by Clauses (2) and (3).
•The Victorian Committee asks that the statement which each
candidate is required to submit as to his interests and activities should be
submitted in the form of a letter, and that any summary of interests and
activities should be -riven in an appendix to the letter.
tThe medical certificate should be obtained from Dr. F. R. Kerr, G.P.O,
Building, Spencer Street. Telephone, Cent. 13'2.
RHODES SCHOLARSHIP.
1.130
6.—Standing- at Oxford.
Holders of an "approved" degree from an "approved"
University who have pursued a course of study a t t h a t
University for three years at least can obtain " Senior
Standing " at Oxford, which carries with i t exemption
from all examinations prior to the Pinal Honour
Schools leading to the B.A. degree, and makes it possible to complete the course for t h a t degree in two
years. Studente who hold a degree in Arts or Science
from any Australian University can normally obtain
" Senior Standing."
A student who has pursued a course ot study for two
years or more, but who has not yet taken his degree, is
not eligible for " Senior Standing."
He can, however,
obtain " Junior Standing," which. gives one year's
academic standing, and carries with it exemption from
Responsions (though not from the Intermediate Examination), provided t h a t (1) his course of study and the
standard attained by him in any examinations proper
to such course have been approved by the Hebdomadal
Council of Oxford University, and (2) t h a t his course
has included the study ot two of the languages, Latin,
Greek, French, German, Italian, Spanish—of which
either Latin or Greek must be one.
A candidate who does not satisfy the above conditions cannot matriculate at Oxford without first passing
Responsions, or a n examination exempting from Responsions, unless specially exempted therefrom on the
ground of being qualified to read for an Advanced
Degree.* In Responsions, or any examination which
exempts from Responsions, every candidate must offer
two of t h e above-named languages—ot which Latin or
Greek must he one.
A student from Australia who is not qualified for
" Senior " or " Junior Standing," can obtain exemption from Responsions if he has gained a Certificate or
Certificates of having passed one of the Examinations
ennmerated below, provided t h a t in such Examination
he has satisfied the Examiners in two languages as
stated above.
•See paragraph 9.
1140
ANNOUNCEMENTS. FOK 193S.
(1) The (Public) Leaving Examination of the University of Adelaide.
(2) The School-Leaving Examination of the University of Melbourne, provided t h a t t h e holder
of the Certificate, has passed the Examination
as a candidate in- Class B . as denned: in the
Regulations of the said University;
(3) The Examination for Leaving Certificates of tho
Department of Education, New South Wales.
(4) The Matriculation Examination of the University of Sydney, provided that the- candidate
has passed in four subjects, including the
two languages specified- above, a t the Higher
Standard.
(5) The Examination for School-Leaving Certificates
of the University of- Western Australia.
(6) The Senior Public Examination of the University
of Queensland.
(7) The (Public) Leaving Examination of the University of Tasmania.
(8) The Matriculation Examination or the Entrance
Scholarship Examination of the University
ot New Zealand.
7. —Method of Selection.
Committees ot Selection will summon all candidates to
a personal interview. Should they be unable to interview the candidate selected, a statement of the reasons
must be sent to the Trustees before his nomination can
be confirmed.
Ordinarily a candidate should be selected in tho
year in which he is proceeding to his first degree a t
his home University, and within a period of not more,
than four years from his matriculation.
Candidates,
not complying with these requirements may be recommended for election to the Trustees, provided t h a t the
Committee is satisfied t h a t the circumstances justify a
departure from the ordinary rule.
The selection for any year must be completed at the
latest by December loth, of-the preceding year.
RHODES SCHOLARSHIP
1141'
8.—Procedure after Selection.
The selection onoe completed, the successful, candidates's dossier must be forwarded forthwith, entire,
by the Secretary of the Selection Committee, to the
General Secretary for Rhodes Scholarships in Australia, Dr. J . C. V. Behan, Warden's Lodge, Trinity
College, Carlton, N . 3, Victoria.
Immediately after receiving notice of his selection,
the Scholar-elect should write to the Oxford Secretary
to the Rhodes Trustees, Rhodes House, Oxford, indicating, in the order of his preference, the Colleges to which
ho would most wish to obtain admission. This list
should contain eight names, and a copy of it accompanied by a definite intimation t h a t the original has
been dispatched to Oxford should a t the same time be
forwarded to Dr. Behan.
The Scholar-elect will come into residence in October
of the year for which he is elected. In special cases,
however, it may be possible for the Scholar to obtain
permission from the Rhodes Trustees to come up in
J a n u a r y instead of October, either postponing the date
of his entry by one Term or advancing it by two,
according to circumstances.
Should a Scholarship be vacated, owing to marriage,
resignation, or any other cause, i t will not be filled up
until the year in which it would normally expire.
Tho first instalment ot the Scholarship will be paid
at the beginning ot the Scholar's first Term at Oxford.
No request for earlier payment can be considered.
9.^-Courses open to Rhodes Scholars.
No restriction is placed, upon a Rhodes Scholar's
choice of studies. Subject to the approval of his College,
he may read for the Oxford B.A. in any of the Final
Honour Schools, may enter for one of the so-called
Diploma Courses in special subjeots, or, if qualified by
previous training, may be admitted to read for. advanced degrees such as the B.C.L., B.Sc., B.Litt., or
D.Phil.
1142
ANNOUNCEMENTS FOR 1DSS.
10.—Information about Oxford,
Information as to Oxford Colleges and Courses wili
be found in " Oxford of To-Day," edited by L. A.
Crosby, F . Aydelotte, and C. A. Valentine, which can
be obtained at the Oxford University Press, Diocesan
Book Depot, St. Paul's Cathedral, Melbourne. Failing
this
book, the Oxford University " Eiamination
S t a t u t e s " are recommended, as giving full information
as to examinations and degrees. Three small pamphlets about Oxford can also be obtained from the same
publishers: (1) " General Information concerning Admission, Residence, e t c . " ; (2) " F a c i l i t i e s tor Advanced
Study and E e s e a r c h " ; (3) Information
concerning
the School of Medicine, Medical Degrees and Diplomas,
and Post-graduate Medical Study and Research."
1851 EXHIBITION SCHOLARSHIP.
The Royal Commissioners of the 1851 Exhibition
grant certain Science Research Scholarships each year to
candidates selected from those nominated by the Australian Universities. The Scholarships are post graduate, and are intended to enable selected students, under
26 years of age, who have already completed a full
University course and given evidence of capacity for
scientific investigation, to devote themselves for two
years to research work under conditions most likely to
equip them for practical service in the scientific life of
the Empire. The value is £250 per annum, with additional allowances.
ALEXANDER VON HUMBOLDT-STIFTUNG.
The Alexander von Humboldt-Stiftung makes available
scholarships ot a maximum value of 1500 marks a year to
those who, having completed a University course in Australia with distinction, and being highly recommended, wish
to continue their studies a t a German University. The
scholarships are generally granted tor one year, but may
be renewed.
Applications should reach t h e Berlin address ot the
Alexander von Humboldt-Stiftung (NW40, Kronprinzen
Uter 18) before the 1st April with a view to beginning a
FREE PASSAGES.
1143
course at a German University in the following October.
Further particulars are obtainable from the German consul
in Melbourne.
BRITISH PASSENGER LINES F R E E PASSAGE
SCHEME FOE UNIVERSITY GRADUATES.
Four first class return passages are granted annually to
graduates of the University nominated by the Council.
Applications should bo lodged before the end of March,and
should deal with the following points:—(1) the course
done in Melbourne, (2) the course of study proposed in
Europe, (3) the applicant's means.
The passages are available during the months from June
to November.
SUPREME
COURT
PRIZES.
1. A prize of Twenty-five pounds open for competition
to students at the University ot Melbourne not pursuing
the course for any degree in law, to be awarded to the candidate who shall be recommended by the Examiners and
placed first at the Honour Examination in November in the
subjects of the Law of Property in Land and Conveyancing
and who has at that November Examination passed for
the first time in such subject.
2. A prize of Fifty pounds open for competition
amongst students who have not pursued the course for any
Degree iu Law to be awarded to the candidate who shall be
recommended by tho Examiners and placed first at the
Final Honour Kxamination in Law of the University of
Melbourne in such of the subjeots mentioned in Rule 12 of
the Rules of the Council ot Legal Education of the year
1921 as are for the time being included in such Pinal
Honour Examination. Candidates may compete only a t
the Examination at which thoy complete the passing ot the
subjects as prescribed and set out in the said Rule 12.
For the purposes ot this Rule the Final Honour Examinations ot the University held in December and in March
shall be deemed to be a single Examination.
71
1144
3. A prize of £25 in the first year and £100 in the
second year to be given to the student to whom the Scholarship is awarded at -the Pinal Honour Examination for t h e
Degree ot Bachelor of Laws in the University of Melbourne.
ADMISSION
OP
BARRISTERS AND
SOLICITORS
The admission of barristers and solicitors in Victoria is
governed by the Rules of the Council of Legal Education,
and is controlled by the Board of Examiners appointed by
the Supreme Court. In the case ot persons not already
admitted to practise in some other State of the Commonwealth or in the United Kingdom or in New Zealand, t h e
main qualification is either (1) graduation as a Bachelor of
Laws in the University of Melbourne, and thereafter
passing in Law ot Procedure and Evidence followed by one
year's service under articles ; or (2) the following course :—
(a) Tho candidate must before presenting himself for
any of the examinations mentioned in (b), have
obtained a certificate from the Registrar of the
University of Melbourne either that he has
matriculated or t h a t ho is qualified to matriculate, and in either case that he has passed a t a
Public Examination in Latin.
(b) He must have passed at the University in the
manner hereinafter prescribed in the following
subjects namely:—
(1) Jurisprudence Part I.
(2) Constitutional and Legal History.
(3) Law of Wrongs (Civil and Criminal).
(4) Law of Contract and Personal Property.
(5) Law of Property in Laud and Conveyancing
(6) Constitutional Law Part I.
(7) Law of Procedure and Evidence.
(8) Equity.
(9) Constitutional Law P a r t I I .
(10) Private International Law.
( i l ) Jurisprudence P a r t II.
Subject to the provisions of the next succeeding Rule a
person may present himself tor- examination in any year
DENTISTRY.
11 45
{whether before, during or after- service under articles) in
one or more than one of the subjects prescribed by the last
preceding Rule in the sequence indicated therein :
Provided that a person who fails in any subject or
subjects may with the permission of the Faculty present
himself tor examination therein concurrently with any
other subject or subjects.
Two of the subjects presci'ibed may be passed singly,
but save as is otherwise expressly provided credit shall
not be given to any person for any other subject unless he
has at the annual examination of the University (including
the supplementary examination) at which he passed in the
-subject, passed in two subjects at the least.
Credit shall not be given to any person for any subject
passed a t a supplementary examination unless he shall
have been recommended by the examiners at the preceding
annual examination for examination in t h a t subject in the
-supplementary examination or unless he shall have been
admitted to the supplementary examination by the Faculty
•on account of illness or other serious cause.
(c) He must serve for five years as a pupil under
articles to a person practising as a barrister
or solicitor, or as a barrister and solicitor.
In all cases where service under Articles is required the
student must before entering into Articles satisfy the Board
of Examiners in.manner specified iu the rules that, he has
passed all examinations required to be passed before entering into Articles, and must file with the Secretary of the
Board copies ot tho certificates and evidence produced
before the Board.
For further information regarding this and auy other
matter the student is referred to the rules, and to the
Secretary of the Board of Examiners, Supreme Court
Melbourne.
DENTISTRY.
A Scholarship covering the tuition charges for one
year together with the loan of the necessary instruments is available at the Northwestern University Dental
School, Chicago. The Scholarship is for one year, and
1146
is open to any dental graduate of the Melbourne U n i versity. The Scholarship will be awarded upon recommendation by the Dental Faculty of the Melbourne Uni.
versity.
Applications should bo sent to the Dean ou or before31st March.
There is also the F. A. Kernot bequest for Dental
Research under the control ot the Dental College.
SURGEONS TO THE
NAVY.
The Commonwealth Naval Board will invite the Universities of Sydney, Melbourne, and Adelaide, from time to
time as positions become vacant to nominate candidates for
appointment as Surgeons in the Royal Australian Navy.
Candidates should be not more than 28 years of ago and
must he graduates iu Medicine and Surgery with at least
ono year's experience in a recognised General Hospital.

View/Open - Digitised Collections

Transcription

Similar documents

EE 3444-005 Electronics II Lab - The University of Texas at Arlington

May 5, 1952 r. loj.Jaaln Bt /eronoi Javiah - JDC

Evaluation of pelvic asymmetry and lower limb

VINAYAKA MISSIONS UNIVERSITY

June 15, 1954 1*. Clifton `Jeooll 19, avotrto flober r - JDC

23, 1953 Or, Joaoph J. Sohuorto ttadtad Javiah Appaol 165 voa* 46

VINAYAKA MISSION`S RESEARCH FOUNDATION VINAYAKA

Brochure